Home

MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 v7.0 (7/17/2014) Copyright © 2014

Contents

1. 00202 e cece cece cece cece ce ccc cee eee cece cece cece ee teteeeeeeeeeees 295 Point Database 2 00 c cece cece cece cece cece cee ccececceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 296 Map Data Layers Manager 00 2022 c cece cece cece cece cece cece cece ee nn cnn 298 DUMACES fa Actes Sak SAAN ao tl AEB A e ON tate 304 Surface Settings 220 ccc c cece cece ccc ccc cece cece cece ceccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 307 Volume Calculation 00 0000 e cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 309 Realtime DTM Surface 000000000 occ e cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 311 Creating a Realtime DTM in FieldGenius 1 000 220 2222 eee eee cece cece cece eee eee 311 Adding Breaklines to a Surface 0 000000 c occ e cece eee eeeeeceeeeeeeeees 313 CoOntouning 14000000 he hhh a dd he Be a a te ds i ooeeden amp 315 18 Table of Contents Import DTM Surface File QSB 000000 c ccc ec eee cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 316 Parcels Manager XML 0 2 eee eee cece cece cece cece cc ceccecceccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 316 Import Export Men s csv s c5esece2 fear ia woe Sees BE ees 318 Import Export Menu 2 2 0 2 22 2c cc cece cece cece cece cece eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeteeeeees 318 Import Export Menu ices ei Viet hee a oi ob dt dll rsd haere edo 320 Import Export MENU 92 2 0 Fs tances eleven nel eect n da aiole Bee Wa dan ae Rae aa atada 320 ASCII Coordinate File Import 2 0 002222 c cece e
2. You do not need to press ENTER before pressing a math button it will automatically move whatever data is in the Command Line into Level 1 of the Stack Example determine the sum of 2 3 1112 ENTER 3 ee jl 5 I Advanced Mathematical Operations You do not need to press ENTER before pressing a math button it will automatically move whatever data is in the Command Line into Level 1 of the Stack P gt R R gt P Convert data between Polar and Rectangular notation an Y c AJO c E 19 polar angle 14 03624347 Example Convert 206 feet at 14 to Rectangular components 2 0 6 ENTER 1 4 P gt R i 271 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Lor 199 8809196 re 49 83591049 Example Convert x 200 y 50 to Polar components raoga ENTER 5 0 SHIFT R gt P 2 20621552813 gs 14 03624347 DMS gt gt DMS Converts data between Degrees Minutes Seconds and Decimal Degrees Example Convert from 12 34 56 to decimal degrees 1 2 3 4 5 6 DMS gt jl 12 58222222 Example Convert from 12 3456 to degrees minutes seconds 1 2 3 4 5 6 SHIFT gt DMS des 12 204416 I DMS DMS Add or subtract DMS angles Example 12 34 56 1 2 3 j 21 210 1 3 4 5 6 ENTER 1 0 2 0 3 DMS l1 13 3659 SIN COS TAN ASIN ACOS ATAN
3. Offset shots will always contain the original measurement plus the offset information You will also see a SS record accompany the OF records and it will contain the reduced measurement Following is an example of a distance offset where an offset of 10 was entered OF AR180 00000 ZE90 00000 SD50 0000 OF HD 10 0000 Horizontal Distance Offset oF LRO 0000 Left Right Offset OF vDo 0000 Elevation Offset lts HI1 500 HR1 500 Ss OPL FP5 AR180 00000 ZE90 00000 SD40 0000 lt No Desc gt RB Repeat Backsight When using the multiset function a RB record will be recorded to the raw file for each backsight shot you measure Please refer to the Muti Set topic for more information Field headers OP Occupied point BP Backsight point AR Angle right ZE Zenith angle SD Slope distance HR Height of rod RB OP333 BP100 AR79 48560 ZE93 42500 SD1 9700 HR1 500 l RF Repeat Foresight When you use the multiset function a RF record will be recorded to the raw file for each foresight shot you measure Please refer to the Muti Set topic for more information OP Occupied point FP Foresight point AR Angle right ZE Zenith angle SD Slope distance 528 RAW File Reference HR Height of rod at the foresight Description RF OP333 FP888 AR20 45530 ZE89 56080 SD1 9800 HR1 500 lt No Desc gt RE Remote Elevation When you use the Benchma
4. Some predefined coordinate systems are read only and can t be deleted They can however be removed from the favourites list by using the Remove From List button Remove From List If you select either a user defined or predefined coordinate system and press this button the selected coordinate system will be removed from the coordinate system list It isn t deleted or removed from the mapping database OK Button This will save the coordinate system favourites list to the msurvey ini file Cancel Button This will exit the dialog and will save nothing You will be automatically returned to the Coordinate System Settings dialog Add Predefined System When the Add Predefined button is selected you will be able to select an existing coordinate system from the mapping database 139 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Add Predefined System Ss Group UTM Zones NAD83 System UTM83 11 Projection NAD83 UTM Zone 11 North Meter Datum North American Datum of 1983 Ellipsoid Geodetic Reference System of 1980 G B o Group and System Options Coordinate systems are grouped into countries or mapping systems Select the country or system that you are surveying in and then choose the coordinate system in the System drop down list Information Section This section below the System field displays the projection datum and ellipsoid information related to this coordinate system Ok Button This will add the select
5. Triangle Calculator 100 000m 45 000m 80 000m 102739808 26502 49 S Ep EI E 1756 4057 m Coordinate Geodetic Calculator Main Menu Calculations Coordinate Calculator The coordinate calculator is used to convert Geodetic coordinates to Cartesian coordinates and vice versa You can also use it to convert ellipsoid heights to orthometric heights if you have defined a geoid Define Coordinate Systems Press the Select Coordinate Systems button to select the coordinate system and geoid you want to use 265 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 In the following example the user chose to convert between UTM Nad 83 Zone 11 to Lat and Long WGS 84 Also as the same time the elevation is being converted from an ellipsoid height to a ortho metric height using the Canadian HT2 0 geoid Coordinate Systems z Coordinate System 1 Coordinate System 2 Horizontal Horizontal UTM Zones NAD83 Latitude Longitude UTM83 11 LL84 NAD83 UTM Zone 11 North WGS84 Lat Long s Degrees North American Datum of 11 World Geodetic System of 1 Geodetic Reference System World Geodetic System of 1 Vertical Vertical HT2_0 byn RES G B o Convert Coordinate Once you ve defined the coordinate systems you want to convert between you can then enter some numbers Press the Convert button to make the computation Geodetic Calculator so Coordinate System 1 Coordinate System 2 Information
6. Current Project Settings Units METER Project Scale Factor 1 000000 Direction Format North Azimuth Coordinate System UTM83 11 Vertical System Ellipsoidal AutoMap Template survey csv mw Project Y OK 4 ies X Cancel Project Setting screen allows you to refine the various aspects of the project and save them as default for future projects if desired Project Settings a zi Units and Scale Coordinate System ro Project Files gh Project Information CA OK X Cancel In the Units and Scales screen you can specify the units for your project Set them as desired then press the Save As Default Settings button to remember these settings for all subsequent new projects 36 Getting Started 80 Distance Unit Angle Unit MESS Degrees Format Format DDD MM SS s Precision 3 Precision 0 hs Direction Format North Azimuth Scale Factor 1 000000 r Curvature and Refraction Correction V OK Save As Default Cancel The Coordinate System screen allows you to select Horizontal and Vertical coordinate systems This will be used for Transformations and GPS Localizations Coordinate System Settings T7 Horizontal System UTM83 11 E Edie Let Info NAD83 UTM Zone 11 North Meter North American Datum of 1983 Geodetic Reference System of 1980 Details Vertical System _ Ellipsoidal CA OK Save As Default X Cancel For the Projec
7. PN16 DM4 RH5 243 RV0 000 PN16 N 30 0000 E 30 0000 EL0 0000 PN17 DM4 RH6 708 RVO 000 PN17 N 30 0000 E 11 0000 EL0 0000 A N 23 6667 E 23 6667 TH6 6667 TE6 6667 RT0 000000000 SC1 0000000000 PV3 N 23 6667 E 23 6667 L2Z0 0000 S00 00000 SA0 00000 GN 3 3 FU 3 3 3 U FU sf w7QH7QAR70 gt 231 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 An important thing to remember is that if any of the original measured points you used in the cal ibration change you need to go back into the transformation command and edit the corresponding con trol point You need to re define the measured coordinates for the control point then press the Calc Parameters button to update the transformation parameters Transform Points Helmerts Transformation Main Menu Settings GPS Local Transformation The Transform Points command provides a many point Helmerts Transformation that can be used for many different purposes We use this for the GPS localization but you can also use it to rotate and translate measured points to fit known coordinates Before using the Transform command you need to setup the Transformation Settings The 3D Transformation included in FieldGenius is a powerful tool that can be used for a variety of coordinate transformations With the Transformation you are able to rotate shift and scale unlimited points The best way to describe this command for basic fitting of coordinate pairs is
8. 0 02 00 C 0 000 5016 5012 391 100 062 100 0622 0 02 00 R 1 000 5017 5010 306 99 957 99 9643 0403 00 L 1 000 5018 5010 978 99 957 99 9715 0403 00 0 000 5019 5011 651 99 957 99 9619 0 03 00 R 1 000 Stake Elevation Main Menu Staking Stake Elevation This routine allows you to stake to a specific elevation called the Design elevation The routine will report the cut and fill values from the selected Design elevation to your current rod elevation The horizontal position is not the focus of this routine Why would want to use this Maybe you may want to use this function if you have to stake a build ing pad before concrete is poured and you know what the height of the pad should be You enter this value in the Elevation field and walk around your pad This routine will inform you of how far your rod is above or below the design elevation The first step is to define your constant elevation You can either type in a design elevation manually into the Elevation field or you can use the Get elevation from point button to select a point from your points database and use its elevation Elevation Continue Get elevation from point Cancel 293 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Continue Press this button to continue to the Map view You will now see the map screen displaying the Stak ing to
9. 433 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 GNSS Raw Data Logging a Logging Name Logging Rate 110 Sec Memory Total 1000544 kB Memory Free 947840 kB Start Logging View Files Note FieldGenius can not control the data logging on all models of GPS receivers Currently we sup port data logging on the Altus APS 3 Altus APS 3 Rev 2 Ashtech ProMark 500 800 GeoMax 10 20 Javad Triumph 1 Leica 1200 Leica GS15 Leica GS10 Leica SmartRover Leica GPS900 Magellan PM500 NavCom SF 3040 NavCom SF 3050 NovAtel DL4 Pentax G3100 R1 Pentax SMT888 3G Pentax SMT888 3G Rev 2 Prexiso G4 G5 Sokkia GRX1 Sokkia GSR2600 Sokkia Radian IS Topcon HiPer Topcon GR 3 Topcon Legacy Topcon Odyssey Trimble 4700 4800 Trimble 5700 R7 Trimble 5800 R8 Command Console GPS Toolbar Settings Command Console The Command Console screen is accessed from the GPS Settings screen It allows you to send com mands to your receiver to configure settings or other related tasks You must determine the exact syntax to enter in the console and you can usually gather this inform ation from your GPS manufacturer 434 Send This will send the parameters that you ve entered to your receiver Run Script This allows you to import and read a text file that has a sequence of commands that you would like to upload to your receiver Clear Console This will clear console of all parameters sent and received from your receiver
10. MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Out This is the distance you need to move away from your user reference point Right Facing your user reference point move right by this amount Left Facing your user reference point move left by this amount Cut This is the amount you have to go down from the current rod position to the stake point s elevation Fill This is the amount you have to go up from the current rod position to the stake point s elev ation Orientation Reference Line With the staking reference set to Line the map view will be twisted so the line is drawn vertically with the start of the line at the bottom of the screen and the end of the line at the top of the screen The move by distances are with respect to the line In You will not be given an In distance Out You will not be given an Out distance Right Looking down the line or parallel to it move right by this amount perpendicularly towards the line Left Looking down the line or parallel to it move left by this amount perpendicularly towards the line Cut This is the amount you have to go down from the current rod position to the stake line s interpolated elevation Fill This is the amount you have to go up from the current rod position to the stake line s inter polated elevation User Point If you are using the User Point Orientation Reference see above then use this to specify which point ID you want to use for the reference point If you a
11. MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 a tpl extension Import Template You can then import the template into any project by using the Template Import command Fieldbook File Export Main Menu Import Export Fieldbook File Export Use this option to export FieldGenius database points and figure information from the current project in a Fieldbook FBK format for import into non MicroSurvey desktop software such as AutoCAD s Land Development Desktop FieldGenius users who have MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD Desktop software will not need to use this function as our products import standard FieldGenius raw data This function is designed for post processing so is best used after all fieldwork is complete The raw file observations are not included in the FBK file you can read the FieldGenius raw file into Survey Link included with LDD You can then make your edits to the raw file and import it to LDD Function Complete your survey project with FieldGenius 2 Select Fieldbook File Export from the Import Export menu 3 Browse to the folder where you want to save the file enter a filename then press Save File FieldGenius will add a fok extension to the filename if you did not include it Importing into LDD To import the FBK file into LDD you will need to use the Import Field Book from the Data Collection Input menu If you haven t already done so you will want to edit your Description Key list and Figure Prefix Library in LDD
12. gt Df DE Survey Tools EO Import Export TE Calculations 4 About 4 Map View Exit You may an option to reconnect the instruments on the instrument toolbar If you are using the same equipment press Reconnect The Map screen will then be displayed You should now see your project here is what the FG Sample project should look like go bile 34 Getting Started Quick Start New Project Start FieldGenius by running the icon contained either in your Start Menu or on the Desktop of your data collector When you start FieldGenius in demo mode the first screen is the About screen where you can enter a registration code to license your copy of FieldGenius Press the Run Demo Mode button if you see this screen FieldGenius 80 MicroSurvey Software Inc Copyright 2001 2012 MicroSurvey Software Version 6 0 0 2 2012 03 07 Device ID F008 5B1F ECAD 4DF6 Key ERE foc alos sir ESE IA Licensed Modules e AP Sear S C Users Yifan Xia Documents MicroSurvey FieldGenius FG Projects FG Sample 5 26 2014 5 16 2014 Z 6 mM Delete 4 pon Paa Project J 35 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 You will then have to enter a name for your new project Review Current Project Settings displayed below You can press OK to accept the settings and continue If you need to change any of the set tings press Project Settings button Name
13. 222 Survey Tools Menu Traverse Definition Foresight Method Occupy point doses traverse Foresight point doses traverse Foresight doses to direction Last traverse foresight at 7 Foresight Bearing 315 00 00 Last traverse occupy at 6 oO Occupy Compare Pnt 1 Xm FieldGenius will automatically scan the raw file looking for the last TR foresight and the OC record that was used to measure the last foresight It will then search for any point within a 3 meter radius and use it as the match or point that defines the original coordinates If more than one point is found in the 3 meter radius it will use the one that is closest In the Foresight Bearing field enter ina known Bearing When you press the View Report button you will see the traverse closure results Raw File Several comments will be written to the raw file with the traverse report results for both Traverse Definition types __Traverse Report Total Length 600 10 Segments 3 la Foresight control point 1 Occupy control point 2 Horizontal Distance Error 0 10 286 13 38 l les __ l Horizontal Angular Error 0 00 30 Horizontal Precision 1 5762 Vertical Distance Error 0 00 Vertical Precision No Error Closing the Traverse No Backsight Prism For closing the traverse sometimes you may want to measure a closing angle and compare it to your previous backsight point or to a user entered bearing
14. Exported files will automatically be saved with a CSMAP extension such as myco ordinatesystem csmap All user defined coordinate systems in FieldGenius will be exported to the file Import You can import coordinate systems from a previously saved file 338 Import Export Menu When you import a file you will be asked to browse to and select the file you want to import Once selected FieldGenius will check to make sure a user defined system doesn t already exist and if one does you will be asked if you want to skip importing it or overwrite the existing coordinate system Backups FieldGenius automatically creates a backup when you add or edit user defined coordinate systems If you forgot to save your user defined coordinate systems you may be able to restore them using a backup Please see the Coordinate System topic for more details 339 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 ABOUT FIELDGENIUS About FieldGenius Main Menu About Use this to display information about the FieldGenius version you have installed or view what mod ules you have registered MicroSurvey Software Inc Copyright 2001 2012 MicroSurvey Software Version 6 0 0 2 2012 03 07 Device ID F008 5B1F ECAD 4DF6 Key EME Foc A103 518F 35ED E4EA 9EDF 936 ce Licensed Modules 5 Standard Advanced Total Station Robotic GNSS Continue X Cancel You will also see your Device ID and a series of fields where yo
15. Importing data into FieldGenius is just as easy as exporting You can import ASCII XML and DXF files directly into FieldGenius Our instrument control is easy to use and very powerful Access to your instrument controls is avail able on the main interface at all times so there is no need to swap to other screens or menus As always MicroSurvey welcomes your comments and suggestions for our products Hardware Requirements FieldGenius 7 may be installed on the following Windows CE PocketPC and Windows Mobile devices We recommend that you purchase a compact flash sleeve for some of the devices and store your program and data files on the compact flash card Some devices will lose data if you forget to charge the device for a few days It is well worth the investment to have secure data FieldGenius 7 may also be installed on any Desktop Laptop or Tablet PC running Windows XP SP3 Windows Vista SP2 or Windows 7 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 26 Juniper Systems Allegro CX FieldGenius installs to C_Drive by default which is secure Juniper Systems Allegro MX FieldGenius installs to secure RAM by default Juniper Systems Archer FieldGenius installs to secure RAM by default Juniper Systems Mesa FieldGenius installs to secure RAM by default MicroSurvey Tracker Tracker Xtreme FieldGenius installs to SystemCF by default which is secure Nautiz X7 FieldGenius installs to secure RAM by default Algiz 7 FieldGenius insta
16. Te STOTT Local Statistics Map View Transform 236 Survey Tools Menu To complete the transformation press the Local Transformation button and then you will see a screen asking you to confirm that you want to apply the transformation press Yes to apply You will then see the local transformation screen just so you can confirm that the correct values were used When you return to the map screen you will see that the points were transformed successfully Sideshot Auto HT 1 524m Te lt No Line gt amor No Desc 237 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 CALCULATIONS MENU Calculations Menu Main Menu Calculations The calculation menu contains calculation based functions that can be used to compute points lines and other data Calculations 80 at Inverse Ey Curve Calculator oa Traverse Intersection ey a Area Calculator o Offset Intersection ya Triangle Calculator SAF station Offset HD Coordinate Calculator e Rotate Translate Scale gen Scientific Calculator ao Na Inverse Use this to inverse between points Please see the Inverse topic for more information Traverse Intersection This will open the Traverse Intersect toolbar You can enter in directions and distances and perform common intersections such as bearing bearing distance distance and many more Please see the Traverse Intersection topic for more information Offset Intersection Use
17. The instrument icon indicates your current occupied point The target icon indicates your current backsight point The stake icon indicates points that are to be staked out The hub icon indicates control points they can not be edited under any circumstances The user icon indicates user entered points the coordinate can be edited The ruler icon indicates measured points the coordinate can not be edited 1 The 123 icon indicates calculated points the coordinate can not be 3 edited a The checked stake icon indicates points that have been staked out amp 296 Data Manager Menu The stake and square icon indicates a Staked and Stored point The ES Staked and Stored survey role is unique and not associated with LandXML schema NGte aa a a ae A e gaa To edit the coordinate of a measured or calculated point you must first change its sur vey role to user entered Next Previous Use the green arrow button to display the next button sets for more options Edit Use this to edit the coordinates of a point that is highlighted in the list using the Store Edit Points tool Remember you must change the Survey Role to User Entered Delete Use this to delete the current point or selection in the list Note There is no undelete point option in FieldGenius If you delete points from the coordinate database they can not be restored without edit ing and reprocessing your raw file Add Use this to open the Store Poi
18. Vert Angle Move Move absolute Relative Turn 90 Turn 90 Flip Scope Read Angles Xx Close Horizontal and Vertical Angles Use these two fields to enter in angles that will be used by the Set Angle buttons Move Absolute Use this to turn the instrument to a plate reading that you ve entered in the HA or VA fields For example if you enter 45 30 30 for the HA and 90 10 00 for the VA pressing the Absolute button will turn your instrument so the plate reading equals these values Move Relative Use this to turn an angle to the right or left of the current instrument plate reading Positive values will be added to the current plate reading negative values will be subtracted Enter your values in the HA 396 Survey Methods Menu and VA fields Turn 90 Pressing this will force your instrument to turn 90 degrees to the right Turn 90 Pressing this will force your instrument to turn 90 degrees to the left Flip Scope This will plunge the scope and reverse the direction for you Read Angles This will display the current horizontal and vertical angles as displayed on your instrument This but ton acts as a toggle and if left on will display the angle in real time Check Level Instrument Settings Level Instrument If your instrument supports it you can check to see how level your instrument is Level Instrument E Cross Inclination 0 00 53 5 L
19. When you do so you will see a message Zero the plate circle to the design point and update the backsight setup Press Yes to continue or No to Cancel After you press Yes a new backsight read ing is set on the instrument and a BK record is written to the raw file You will also note that the turn to angle will now display zero which is the angle you now need to turn to on the instrument 277 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 You can continue using this for any other points you want to stake Since the plate reading is chan ging a lot you will want to check the backsight frequently to make certain any error meets your tol erances Continue Press this button to continue You will now see the map screen and the point staking toolbar Step 2b Robotic Total Station Layout If you re using a robotic instrument and have the Robotic Staking option enabled the layout routine will bypass the screen and steps explained in the Step 2a section Instead FieldGenius will take you directly to the map screen where you will see our point staking toolbar By default FieldGenius will have the robotic staking option enabled for all robotic total stations Some users may need their robotic instrument to automatically turn to the layout point instead If this is desired just disable robotic staking Step 2c GNSS Rover Layout When connected to a GNSS rover the layout routine will bypass the screen and steps explained in Step 2a Instead Field
20. y OK Target Height Current This is the current target height Target Height IR EDM Enter the target height that you will be using for measurement to a prism When you select an IR edm mode FieldGenius will automatically switch to this target height during the measurement Target Height RL EDM Enter the target height that you will be using for your reflectorless measurements When you select any RL edm mode FieldGenius will automatically switch to this target height during the meas urement Since most reflectorless shots require a zero target height FieldGenius defaults this field to zero and can be altered by the user if needed Target Height Temporary Use this to specify a one time only target height In other words after you take your measurement it will revert back to the the previous target height automatically 62 Main Interface Robotic Instrument Toolbar Tk SL HT 2 000m IR Std S Sideshot A Trk When you use FieldGenius in robotic total station mode you will see the Robotic Instrument toolbar in the map area Like the Instrument Toolbar this toolbar allows you to control your instru ment settings access the Target Manager change measure modes and make a measurement It also lets you search and lock onto the prism Lock Button FieldGenius uses a button to trigger the instrument to search for the prism and lock onto it You can also use this button to turn the lock off
21. 532 RAW File Reference CS Coordinate System Identity CO Coordinate system option ENUM ZG Zone group system name ZN Zone name DN Datum name CT Calibration Point PN Point Name DM Dimensions used ENUM RH Horizontal residual RV Vertical residual CV RMS Covariance of GPR Position DC Derivation ENUM SV Minimum number of SV during observation SC Error Scale XX Variance X XY Covariance X Y XZ Covariance X Z YY Variance Y YZ Covariance Y Z ZZ Variance Z EP Geodetic Position When you save the location of a point its geodetic position is also recorded TM Time LA Latitude LN Longitude HT Ellipsoid Height RH Horizontal RMS returned from receiver 533 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 RV Vertical RMS returned from receiver DH HDOP if receiver returns this info DV VDOP if receiver returns this info GM GPS Method ENUM CL Classification ENUM HA Horizontal Calibration Adjust N Origin north E Origin east TH Translation north TE Translation east RT Rotation about origin SF Scale factor at origin GS GPS Store Point This is similar to a regular SP store point record but the GS indicates that it is create by GPS PN Point Name N Local Northing E Local Easting EL Local Elevation Description RP Local coordinates of calibration point N Northing E Easting EL Elevation Description VA
22. AD Azimuth direction 0 North 1 South 526 RAW File Reference UN Distance unit 0 Feet 1 Meter 2 US Survey Feet SF Scale factor EC Earth curvature 0 off 1 On EO EDM offset inch Default string 0 0 Not used by FieldGenius AU Angle unit 0 Degree 1 Grads MO ADO UN1 SF1 000000 EC0 EO0 0 AUO OC Occupy Point Record When you complete the occupy point command an OC record will be written to the raw file Please review the Setup Occupy Point topic for more information Field headers OP Point number N Northing the header is N space E Easting the header is E space EL Elevation Description l0C OP101 N 1000 0000 E 1000 0000 EL10 0000 l OF Off Center Shot Record When you use any of the offset shot commands an OF record will be written to the raw file Two types of measurements will create offset records and they are the Angle Offset and Distance Offset meas urement modes Please see the Measurement Modes topic for more information Field headers AR Angle right ZE Zenith SD Slope distance OL Offset length HD Horizontal distance VD Vertical distance LR Left Right Offset OF AR90 00000 ZE90 00000 SD50 0000 i 527 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 ZE60 00000 Vert Angle Offset l OL45 00000 Right Angle Offset HD 10 0000 Horizontal Distance Offset LRO 0000 Left Right Offset OF VD0 0000 Elevation Offset
23. Base Receiver 410 413 Base Receiver Setup 411 Base Setup 410 Base Tolerances 405 Benchmark 198 BK Backsight Record 525 BL GPS Base Line 532 537 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Bluetooth 375 403 BP Set Base Receiver Position 532 Breaklines 312 Buttons 40 By Distance 81 C Calculations Menu 238 Calculator 42 254 255 264 265 267 Calibrate Instrument 398 Cartesian Coordinate 265 Caster 432 Centerline Alignment 476 CF Cut Sheet 525 CgPoints 330 Chains 332 Check Backsight 175 Check instrument level 398 Check Level 397 Check Point 174 420 Close Traverse 218 Closing Figures 102 Code Free Linework 86 Codes 73 COGO 239 243 COGO History Viewer 217 COGO Results 217 CogoCalcs txt 217 Command Console 434 Command Line 434 Comment 85 538 Common Buttons 40 Communication Link 423 Compass Balance 224 Complete Figure 103 Complex Figure 102 Configure Reference 405 Connect Points 110 212 Connect Points Mode 110 212 Connect Disconnect 387 Contact Information 11 Contour Interval 308 Contours 315 Conventional Total Station 368 Convert Line Spine 101 Coordinate Calculator 265 Coordinate Conversion 265 Coordinate Database 296 Coordinate System 338 447 Coordinate System Settings 136 435 Coordinate Systems Geoids 443 448 Coordinate Systems Grid Shift Files 449 Copy 360 Correction Information 429 Correction Link 423 Corrections 410 423 Cross Section 488 Cross Sections 331
24. Command Console 3 R test Invalid command test Send Run Script Clear Console X Close Coordinate System Settings Main Menu Settings Coordinate System The datum settings are used to transform GPS derived curvilinear coordinates latitude longitude and ellipsoidal height into Cartesian coordinates northing y easting x and ellipsoid or orthometric height for presentation on the drawing window and data storage 435 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Coordinate System Settings amp Horizontal System UTM83 11 Edit List Info NAD83 UTM Zone 11 North Meter North American Datum of 1983 Geodetic Reference System of 1980 Details Vertical System _ Ellipsoidal CA OK Save As Default X Cancel Horizontal Grou This is where you define the coordinate system for your project Edit List The Edit List button is used to create predefined or user defined coordinate systems create new coordinate systems copy predefined systems and edit or delete existing systems When pressed the Coordinate System List dialog will appear A predefined coordinate system is one that already exists and comes installed in FieldGeniusby default a user defined system is one that you have created Details This accesses a summary of all the parameters being used by the selected coordinate system The following information is displayed 1 What projection and parameters are being used 2 What datum transformation meth
25. Lines Descriptions ALIEN 2088 a A Line on DXF Layer LOT Y _ 90m _ Ei 8 OG e Coordinate DXF Data You can add coordinates to the DXF entity by pressing the Coordinate DXF Data but ton O Information You will see the inverse information based on the DXF entity you picked by pressing the Information button Line Toolbar ADA AR e GUF OE When you tap on an existing line or arc you will see the line toolbar appear near the bottom of your screen The line toolbar contains functions that are frequently used on line or arcs in your project Fol lowing is an explanation of what each button will do DA Set Figure Current gt Use this to make the current line or arc current in the Active Line List Fa End Figure Use this to mark a line as complete or finished FA Reverse Figure Direction Use this to switch the direction of a figure so you can append to the oppos 89 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 ite end Partition Line Arc You can partition split a figure or DXF line into smaller segments using this command Delete Figure Segment Use this to delete a segment from a figure Delete Entire Figure Use the delete an entire figure Close Figure Use this to close a figure so it finishes at the same point it started at Open Figure List Use this to display the Active Line List Draw Tool Use this to draw lines points and connect line work between existing points This will open the Dra
26. X System Name and Description Enter a name for your coordinate system and optionally enter a meaningful name that helps describe it The system name must have colon in the name Ellipsoid Parameters To define the ellipsoid for the coordinate system you must enter the known equatorial and polar radi uses for the ellipsoid The Inverse Flattening is not editable and will be computed automatically and can be used a check o Equatorial Radius a o Polar Radius b o Inverse Flattening 1 f Always a read only value automatically computed from the two ellips oid radiuses Datum Parameters There are 7 datum types to select from o Three Parameter o Four Parameter o Six Parameter o Seven Parameter o Bursa Wolf 440 o o DMA Molodensky None If none is selected then no transformation parameters will be applied to the coordinate system trans formation If a datum other than none is selected then the user will be able to enter the following parameters o o o o o o Delta X m Delta Y m Delta Z m X Rotation Y Rotation Z Rotation Scale PPM YS _ SS Projection Parameters The user can select one of nineteen projections o o Lambert Conformal Conic One Standard Parallels Lambert Conformal Conic Two Standard Parallels Transverse Mercator or Gauss Kruger Universal Transverse Mercator Albers Equal Area Conic Rectified Skew Orthomorphic A
27. ton to access the Total Station Configuration screen to configure your profile From there choose the Model and Communication button to configure FieldGenius You can also access this screen by going to the Main Menu Settings Instrument Selection and choose total station Select Make and Model FieldGenius uses a smart driver that will poll the instrument to see what commands it supports Because of this you will see that in the Model section we don t list every instrument built by the man ufacturer If you re unsure of what model and make to choose visit our website and use the online help desk support center to do a search for your instrument Communication Settings Confirm the settings so they match the settings from your instrument If you don t know what the set tings on the instrument are you can always try the Default Comm Settings button Other Settings On the Total Station Configuration screen you can review the other options to set some additional parameters for your instrument Connect to Instrument If you re not connected to the instrument you will see a status of Not Connected displayed above the Connect to Instrument button When you re ready to connect make sure you have done the fol lowing Powered on the instrument and radios Leveled the instrument Compensated the instrument Pon gt Connected the data cable from the instrument to one radio and your data collector to the other radio Once you hav
28. 213 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 its parameters Undo Press the Undo button to Undo the last segment you computed removing both the point and or the line segment as appropriate from your project You can undo multiple steps Note there is no Redo function Close Press the Close button to exit from the Draw Plan command and you will be returned to the map screen Delete Last Saved Point Main Menu Survey Tools Delete Last Saved Point Use this to delete the last point that was saved When you delete a point a record is written the raw file indicating which point was deleted You can only delete up to the last ten points that have been stored When you select the undo command you will be asked to confirm that you would like to delete the last saved point Press Yes to undo Press No to cancel The point is now removed from the project s map and database but the original measurement data remains in the raw file Raw File Using the example from above this is what you will see in the raw file SS OP34 FP36 AR270 00000 ZE121 16010 SD2 5060 TABLE DP PN36 l The first line is the shot to point 36 The last line is a delete point record which is used to remove the point from the database Raw File Viewer Main Menu Survey Tools Raw File Viewer 214 Survey Tools Menu Use this button to open the raw file viewer The raw file editor displays your scene s raw file and allows yo
29. 3000000 Search Window Center Horizontal p vertical Jo JO Ol V Auto search for prism y OK Search Modes Some of FieldGenius s search modes are common to all robotic instruments but there are a few model specific ones The modes available are 382 Total Station Reference Relative Window This allows you to specify a window defined by measuring a point at the top right and bottom left corners If you press the search button the search limits will be relative to the direction the instrument is currently pointing In other words if your search window ranges are 30 horizontal and 30 vertical it will apply this to your current direction So the search will be limited to an area 15 left right up and down from your current direction Absolute Window This allows you to specify an absolute search center for your search window This forces FieldGenius to search in an absolute area defined by the angles set in the search window center fields Furthermore the search window range parameters apply to the search window center For example let s assume you defined 180 as the horizontal search window center and the horizontal search window range is 30 Your instrument will be forced to search in an area 15 left and right of the 180 plate reading So if your prism is situated at a circle reading of 210 it would never find you as the instrument would never go past a circle reading of 195 180 15 when sea
30. 356 358 TDS 525 Technical Support 10 Template 488 Template Export 334 Template Import 333 Templates 492 498 Temporary No Store 151 temporary height 348 354 Temporary Height 343 363 366 391 Text Notes 82 TGRID 311 TIF TIFF 298 TIN 311 Tolerance Level Bubble 398 Tolerance Modes 406 Tolerances 405 Topcon 368 369 Topo Toolbar 57 Total Station 368 Total Station Configuration 373 Total Station Demo 135 372 Total Station Make and Model 372 Total Station Profile 135 371 TR Traverse Shot 531 Transfer 521 Transform 297 Transform Points 232 Transformation 228 418 449 453 Translate 249 Transmit Corrections 410 Traverse 162 Traverse Intersection 239 Traverse Adjustment 224 Traverse Report 218 Triangle Calculator 264 Trilateration 196 Trimble 368 369 Turn 396 Turn Instrument 387 Turn to Point 67 Two Line Intersection 184 U Unit Settings 132 Units 44 48 Upload 517 521 User Defined 136 351 435 User Defined Coordinate Systems 338 447 Using Active Figures 93 V VA Vertical Calibration Adjust 534 Version 340 Vertical Angle Offset 179 Vertical Balance 224 Vertical Plane Projection 200 Vertical Profile 483 Index Volume 309 WwW Windows Mobile Device Center 517 521 Xx XML 116 298 316 329 332 473 498 Z Zeiss 368 369 Zoom 55 547 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 548
31. 492 498 CS Coordinate System Identity 533 CT Calibration Point 533 Cursor Tracking 63 386 Curvature and Refraction 134 Curve Calculator 254 Cut Sheet Reports 291 CV RMS Covariance of GPR Position 533 D Data Collector Models 25 Data Entry 42 Data Manager Menu 295 Datum 136 435 Datum Grid Editor 443 DBF File 83 DE Design Point Location 526 Default Keyboard Shortcuts 144 Default Prism 344 Default Reflectorless 344 Default Settings 342 343 348 354 362 390 392 default target height 348 354 Delete Last Saved Point 214 Delete Point 214 Deleting Figures 104 Demo Mode 28 Descriptions 73 Direction Entry 48 Direction Format 134 Direction Units 48 Disclaimer and Limited Warranty 3 Disconnect GPS 432 Display Settings 120 Display Toolbar 55 Distance Entry 44 Distance Offset 181 Index Distance Unit 133 Distance Units 44 DOP 65 422 Down Out 246 Download 517 521 DP Record 214 Draw Figures Manually 110 212 Draw Option Defaults 105 DTM 304 316 499 DXF 88 90 298 327 328 DXF Files 88 E Edit GeoMax Instrument Targets 357 Edit GeoMax Targets 357 Edit Leica Targets 353 Edit Points 206 Edit Road 475 Edit Target 346 353 EDM 341 360 389 EDM mode 342 361 363 365 366 390 EDM Mode 387 EDM Settings 378 Elevations GNSS GPS 448 Ellipsoid 136 265 435 Ellipsoid Height 448 embeddedCAD 522 End User License Agreement 3 End Figure 103 EP Geodetic Positio
32. A49 83098906 119 6210377 104 5523099 336 311521 81 399 552 CONTROL 105 49 83043923 J6 5523046 282 311521 379 398 049 CONTROL 49 83019451 119 620853 205 6523172776 311493 661 401 686 CONTROL 49 83132233 119 6212995 Importing Cartesian and Geodetic Coordinates Above is an example of an Extended ASCII file For the format to work correctly each point should include Cartesian and Geodetic coordinates for each point The standard deviations are not needed unless the point is going to be used to seed a position for use with the OmniStarVBS system The Latitude and Longitude values are required to be stored in decimal degrees So if this type of file is imported into FieldGenius the following will occur e A point is stored in the project database using the Cartesian Coordinates e AGS record is written in the raw file using the Cartesian Coordinates as a reference e An EP record is written to the raw file using the Geodetic Coordinates as a reference Importing Geodetic Coordinates Onl You can create an Extended ASCII Point file that only contains a point number description note and Geodetic coordinates Upon import FieldGenius will use the Geodetic coordinates and your defined coordinate system in your coordinate system settings to compute Cartesian coordinates to be stored in the database So if this type of file is imported into FieldGenius the following will occur e Using the horizontal and Vertical
33. Choose the file format See below for more information regarding file format If you are uncer tain use the Standard format 4 Use the assigned role field to select the survey role of the points being imported If these points are to go into the staking list then select To Stake Out as the survey role 5 Write SP Store Point record to raw file will store the imported coordinates to the raw file This is very useful if you wish to reprocess coordinates later so we recommend that you select this when importing points 6 Overwrite Existing Coordinates allows you to control whether points will be overwritten dur ing the import 7 Set as Control Points will set a flag in the database that will prevent these points from being edited or changed in FieldGenius under any circumstances 8 Choose OK to import the coordinates Cancel to abort the import 9 You will be shown a confirmation of how many points were imported to the current project File Formats Both space and comma delimited files are supported 322 Import Export Menu For all formats the order of the Northing and Easting fields are determined by setting the Coordinate Order in the Options screen Standard l ID Northing Y or Easting X Easting X or Northing Y Elevation Descrip ltion Note This format expects the file to be in a standard ASCII format If your descriptions have a colon in them then FieldGenius will store everything befo
34. Correction Information 00000000 0c cece ccc ccc adoa cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 424 GPS Satellite Plot 22 c s224 ces E A EA 425 GPS Satellite LISt 124 sree te GO th putters Id Ck LO a er ts 426 GPS Settings 2 2228 EE a AS Es A I Se Bt ie pi dt Ste 427 Sensor Information 2 22 2 00 ee eee cece cece ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneceecececeuceccecccscceceeeeeuees 432 Position Information 2 00 00 02 22 cece cece cece cece cece cece cece cece cece aaraa daonarn nren 432 Raw Data Ogg EE AA IEEE A AE dl 433 Command CONS Oleh ooo c cece cece cece cece cece cee aad ae Te aAA 434 Coordinate System Settings 0 02 c cece eee ccc ccc ccc ccc cece cece cece cece eeeeeeeeeees 435 Select Horizontal Coordinate System 000000 o ccc ccc cece eee e cee eeeeeeees 437 21 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Add Predefined System 00 0 0020 c ccc c ccc ccc ccc cece ce ee cee cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 438 New Edit user defined System 2 00 0 eee eee cece cece eeeeeccceececeececcceeeeeeees 439 Automatic Backup zn era adai ita eeu eens beck odode dnd Seles weed Be aden 442 Localization Site Calibration 0 00000 e eee oair nannan 442 Additional Grid Shift Files and Geoids 200 00 e cece ce eeeeeeeeeees 442 Older FieldGenius Mapping Files 20 0020 0 02022 cece cece e cece eee eceeceeceeeeeeees 443 Datum Gnd Editor os A A A E ES 443 Import Export User Defined Coordinate Systems
35. Descriptions Press the Average button when finished This takes you to the Point Averaging dialog In the Point Averaging dialog we see the results of the averaging computation You can uncheck the box in the Use column to disable re enable a selected point The Store Point button takes you to the Store Point dialog The Cancel button returns you to Point Database dialog AutoMap Library The AutoMap Library editor allows the user complete control over the visibility of points and lines based on the descriptions used to code the points It also allows you to set attributes for the descrip tions such as point and line colour Automap Library default csv Enter Description Description Summary Layer X Bc Bottom of Curb CURB BOTTOM X BLDG Building BUILDING X c Catch Basin UTILITY CB xa Curb Inlet UTILITY CI x cL Center Line ROAD CENTER Show descriptions in use only CA Add Edit Delete X Enter Description Use this field to auto scroll to description in your list For example typing the letters AS will scroll down to the ASPHCURB description If you type a unique description and press enter you will be prompted for whether you want to add it into the AutoMap Library or not Show descriptions in use onl Use this to display only the descriptions found in your AutoMap Library that are used in the current pro ject Adding Descriptions to the Library in FieldGenius While you re working you can add descri
36. HT This is where you would enter your height of target Note this value will be used to compute the new instrument elevation Set Elevation Pressing this button will update your current setup elevation with the one calculated by the Bench mark Shot routine You will be asked to confirm that you want to update the elevation Two records will be written to the raw file a remote elevation RE and a store point SP record l RE OP1 FE0 000 Z2E90 00000 SD10 0000 Remote elev SP PN1 N 5001 0000 E 4978 0000 EL0 0240 i Cancel This will exit the routine and not save any changes Add Invert Main Menu Survey Methods Add Invert If you ve manually measured a distance to an invert you can have FieldGenius compute a point with a computed invert elevation When you start the command you will see the Invert Toolbar appear towards the bottom of your main screen o Pick Invert 0 000m X Pnt First you need to specify the point that will be referenced to compute the invert elevation You can do this by using the point chooser button Now enter the measured distance to the inverse For example if your measurement was 5 5 FieldGenius will subtract this from the reference point s elevation Entering a negative value will cause it to be added 199 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Press Store Point to create and save a point with the calculated invert distance This point will have the same northing and easting
37. Licensee shall not copy any part of the Software except that Licensee may make one copy of the Software for backup purposes only Licensee agrees not to remove or destroy any copyright logo trademark trade name proprietary markings or confidentiality legends placed upon or contained within the Software or Documentation Licensee shall not and agree not to assist others to circumvent or disable the license provisioning technology for the Software Licensee s license to the Software under this Agreement continues until it is ter minated by Licensee or MICROSURVEY Licensee may terminate the license by discontinuing use of all or any of the Software and by destroying all Licensee copies of the Software and Documentation This Agreement will terminate automatically if x Licensee violate any of the terms or conditions of this Agreement y MICROSURVEY publicly posts a writ ten notice of termination on its website www microsurvey com that or any suc cessor site the Site or z MICROSURVEY revokes this Agreement or issues anew agreement in writing or electronic form and conditions Licensee continued use of the Software upon acceptance of the new agreement 3 Ownership All rights title and interest in and to the Software and Documentation including without limitation all copyright patent trade secret and other intellectual property rights shall at all times remain the property of MICROSURVEY it licensors or its suppliers as
38. Measurement Mode Local Transformation Point Use For Local Transformation To help you localize quickly you can use this option What will happen is after the measurement has been stored we will automatically add this point to the GPS Local Transformation calibration point list The point will be considered a measured point and so you will be asked to define the control point that this point is to be constrained to GPS Local Transformation amp Edit Control Calculate Scale GPS Adjust Points Origin North 0 00 Origin East 0 00 Trans North 0 00 Trans East 0 00 Rotation 0 00 00 Scale 1 0000000000 Trans Height 0 00 X Close Example You ve localized to a local system using a one point transformation so you can visually see in the map where your other points should be You then decide to stake one of them so you can nav igate to it When you find the second point you want to measure it s location and use it as one of the transformation points Simply turn on the Use for Local Transformation parameter and FieldGenius will automatically store the point s Cartesian position and automatically add it to your transformation points list When you use this option FieldGenius will automatically ignore any transformation parameter you have defined and will store the raw GPS derived measurement Please review the Local Transformation topic for more details Check Point Main Menu Survey Methods Check Poi
39. Once the point is located make sure to press the Lock button to stop the instrument from tracking the prism It is useful to do this as the instrument will still be pointed at the stake location and prevents the instrument from following the prism if you have to lay it down 3 Mark your point or pound in your stake 4 Set the prism on the point you just marked and press the No Lock button which will initiate a search Since you stopped the instrument from tracking in the previous step the instrument should lock onto the prism very quickly 5 Press the Measure button to record one final position for the stake point 6 Press the Store Point button on the staking toolbar to store the final location of the point you just staked GPS Tips To help with navigating set your map orientation to North in the settings screen This will force the map to orient itself so that North remains up on the screen Use cursor tracking to navigate to your point this provides real time positions to the Observation Tool bar then when you attain the final position to be staked press the Measure button The usual GPS Measurement procedure will apply and your current tolerance mode and masks will be in effect for the measurement Raw File When you store your point several records are written to the raw file Following is an example of a point that was staked out SP PN1400 N 715346 319 E 2381454 812 EL1 009 or EL1 0087 GD1 0000 DE PN342
40. Prior to accepting the position the user can look at the RMS values for the computed position and determine if they wish to accept or reject the measurement Pressing Cancel will exit the measure function without storing any data Pressing Store Position will accept the position and store it in the database You can change your true or measured Antenna Height on the Store Point screen By default if you have some transformation parameters defined they will be applied to the meas urement prior to storing it If your current tolerance settings are not met FieldGenius can switch from Real Time mode to Post Process mode to collect static data for that point for later post processing back in the office This switch from Real Time mode to Post Process mode can occur automatically or manually depending on your Post Process tolerance settings The duration of the Post Process measurement is specified in your tolerance settings and depends on the minimum number of satellites tracked during the entire Post Process session GNSS Measurement Mode Offset When this mode is enabled after you complete the measurement you will be prompted to enter a dir ection horizontal distance and vertical distance These three entries will be used to compute a new position for the offset point GNSS Measurement SO Direction 0 00 00 Horizontal Distance 0 000m Vertical Distance 0 000m 4 Store Position X Cancel 419 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7
41. Specify the length of the line segment you wish to draw Direction Specify the direction Azimuth or Bearing of the line segment you wish to draw The easiest way to do this is to use the right left arrow buttons which will increment decrement the direction value by the amount shown in the pulldown list below the arrows You can select a common angle from the choices in the list 90 45 or 30 degrees or you can type any value if you need to increment it by some other amount 210 Survey Tools Menu Store After you have defined the segment to add press this to store the new point and line segment into your project Store This does the same as the Store button but you will see the Store Edit Point screen Use this to con firm or view the coordinates or to specify a description Point by Line Mode This is the same as the Line mode except that when you press Store or Store it will only store the point without drawing the line segment Arc Mode Use the Arc draw mode to add arc segments to your figure Or t E C ARRAS A oe 8 0 Start Pnt 1 Direction 0 00 00 Draw Arc Angle 90 00 00 Store Store Radius 10 0 ES Close Start Point Specify the start point forthe new segment For starting a new plan this should be set to an existing point in your project typically a corner that you will begin drawing the plan from As you continue adding subsequent points segments to your plan
42. TS Station 109 86 371 TS Northing 4579 248 TS Easting 5650 000 TS Tangent 180 00 00 SC Station 109 86 371 v y x Define Known Data To solve for this type of element you need to know e Spiral Direction e Spiral In Length e Spiral Out Length e Curve Radius e Curve Length In the editor gray fields indicate fields that can not be edited All other non gray fields can be edited by the user Press OK to save your inputted values Cancel to exit without saving Chain Use this option if you want to select points or figures in your drawing to define the centerline and the profile optional When you select the Add Figure option you will be taken to the map screen where you can select a figure You can also add points individually by using the Add Points s button Press OK to save the chain press Cancel to exit without saving 481 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 You should only select Tangent sections for a Chain If you Add a Figure which con tains arcs or splines the chain will straight line any curved segments so the resulting Chain length and stationing will not be the same as the original Figure Chain Element When you return to the road editor you will see that a chain element has been created Chain ele ments differ from regular elements in that even though a chain can be made up of line and curve ele ments it will appear in the list as a chain nment Road 1 Element D
43. The button when not locked on a prism will display a No Lock status with a un locked icon To search for the prism simply press the No Lock button After you have pressed the No Lock button you will see a Search icon on the button while the instrument searches for your prism When FieldGenius finds a prism and locks onto it the button will display a Lock icon To stop the instrument from tracking you can press the Lock button again to set it to a No Lock status If you re using multiple prisms and you want to force FieldGenius to look for another one when you re locked onto a prism double tapping the Lock button will force it to search for the next avail able prism Also during a search you can cancel the current search by press ing the Stop Search button on the search progress toolbar Cursor Tracking This turns the cursor tracking feature on or off If turned on the current position of the target will be displayed on the screen in 63 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 HT 2 000m IR Std Q Sideshot RY real time You can only use this feature once you have specified an instrument setup using the Setup Occupy Point command Note The cursor tracking position will use a coarse meas urement to plot your position When you are stationary the cursor is a hollow triangle pointing towards the instrument When you are moving the cursor is a solid triangle pointing in the direction of travel Instrument Settings This opens the
44. Use this feature with care as it can cause distortions in your elevations if it is used incorrectly You can force FieldGenius to not compute these values by turning on the Do no calculate vertical slopes toggle Impact on new measurements Once the transformation parameters have been adequately determined all future GPS measured coordinates will automatically be transformed All constrained point pairs will be saved along with the transformation parameters for the current project upon exiting the utility and will be saved to the raw file 5 Only use a local transformation if necessary GPS heights should be applied with a suitable geoid model If possible only use ver tical bias Trans Height because solving for slope North and slope East with inad equate control can severely distort the parameters Use redundancy for confirming parameters 452 Raw File Information Whenever you compute transformation parameters they re automatically written to the raw file when you exit the command Once the parameters are saved they will automatically be read in again if you use the Transformation Command FieldGenius will always start at the top of your raw file and will process the calibration records as they re found The control points you define are saved as a CT record and will always have an associated RP record RP records store the measured coordinate that you defined for the control point Following the calibration
45. Use this to enter your current instrument height Backsight Direction Use this to specify the direction that will be used by FieldGenius You can enter an azimuth or a quad rant bearing Target Height Use this to enter your current target height Backsight Method Point Use this method to specify the points that will be used for the current instrument location and back sight 152 Survey Methods Menu Orientation Setup BO Instrument Occupy Point 1 Instrument Height 0 000m Backsight Backsight Point e 2 Backsight Direction G Backsight Distance Target Manager 0 000m V OK Cancel Occupy Point Type in an existing point number or double tap in this field to open the keypad or to select a point from the map You will be able to create a new point pick one from a list or pick one from your drawing Instrument Height Use this to enter your current instrument height Backsight Point Type in an existing point number or double tap in this field to open the keypad or to select a point from the map You will be able to create a new point pick one from a list or pick one from your drawing Backsight Direction amp Distance When you enter in your points FieldGenius will display the inversed horizontal distance and direction between the points you entered Target Height Use this to enter your current target height Measuring to the Backsight Once you ve established the b
46. Vertical Calibration Adjust PV Type of vertical adjustment ENUM 534 N Origin north may be blank E Origin east may be blank LZ Constant adjustment translation Z may be blank SO Slope north may be blank SA Slope east may be blank GN Geoid Model Name RAW File Reference 535 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 536 NDEX Note or Comment Record 525 3 3 Point Arcs 99 3D View Toolbar 59 A About Menu 340 Absolute constant 352 354 Absolute Constant 352 354 Acres 255 Activation 28 Active Figure 93 98 Active Linework 86 Active Tolerance Mode 430 ActiveSync 517 521 Add Invert 199 additive constant 352 354 357 Adjust Traverse 224 Advanced Template Editing 492 AH GPS Antenna Height 532 Alignment DTM Surface 499 Alignment Slope Staking 510 Alignment Staking 499 505 Alignments 116 331 473 Angle Balance 224 Angle Offset 177 179 Angle Unit 133 Antenna Height 409 430 Index Arc Mode 109 211 Arcs 99 Area Calculator 255 Area Volume 310 ASCII Coordinate File 321 325 346 353 ATR 387 Attributes 83 Audio Notes 82 Auto Center 61 384 387 Auto Recording 410 Auto Store 163 AutoMap Library 73 105 Automatic Save 42 Autonomous 414 average 72 Averaged Geodetic Position 413 Averaging 72 B Backsight 151 175 341 361 364 389 Backsight Measure Mode 154 Backsight Summary 155 158 161 Backup Coordinate System 338 447 Balance Traverse 224
47. a implement such updates or error cor rections b cease using the earlier versions without such updates or error corrections and c make such updates or error corrections available to the users of the earlier ver sions Licensee shall be solely responsible for procuring all hardware and third party software necessary to operate the Software Website Support MICROSURVEY will use reasonable commercial efforts to host and maintain a web site the Support Site for the Software during its commercial life as reasonably determined by MICROSURVEY that will include some or all of the fol lowing features e A Frequently Asked Questions section with answers to common questions about the Software e Asearchable Helpdesk section with general user instructions and information about the Software e A link to allow end users of the Software to download any bug fixes error cor rections or other updates to the Software that MICROSURVEY may make avail able through the Site e Contact MICROSURVEY electronic response capability MICROSURVEY will use reasonable commercial efforts to respond within two 2 business days to a customer inquiry received via this system Answers to such inquires will be added to the FAQ s as appropriate Contract Support Upon mutual agreement in writing between Licensee and MICROSURVEY or between Licensee and one of MICROSURVEY S authorized reseller s MICROSURVEY will provide contracted support services to
48. and possibly the easiest way is to assign the survey role of To Stake Out to points being imported via the ASCII Coordinate File Import button in thelmport Export Menu When points are imported using 289 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 the ASCII Coordinate File Import button and are assigned the survey role of To Stake Out these points will automatically be added to the staking list Working From the List To work from the list simply highlight the point you wish to stake and press the Stake Pnt button which will begin the process Please see the Point Staking Toolbar topic for more information Since you started from the staking list it will automatically turn on the Use Staking List checkbox in the Stake Points screen When you store your stake point the stake point command will automatically go to the next point in the list Survey Role Setting The status of a point is controlled by the Survey Role type in the project database You can view the role by using the Coordinate Database viewer If the point is pending it will have a survey role type of to stake out point 2 in the image below If it has been staked it will have a survey role of staked out point 1 in the image below 1 Z 5523958 62 m 312330 376m 393 413m 2 A 5523853 287m 312321 092m 392 877m Stake Alignment Main Menu Staking Stake Alignment When this is selected the Alignment Staking screen will be displayed Note you first ne
49. the map screen will always re center on the measured point Instrument Settings This opens the instrument settings screen where you can control specific settings for your total station such as EDM settings Tolerance setting and Instrument Connection Disconnection Measurement Mode This opens the Measurement Modes screen where you can select what type of measurement you want to take The current measurement mode is always dis played on this button for example if you re using the distance offset mode it will dis play Dist Off Target Height This opens the Target Heights screen where you can change the current target height The current target height is always displayed on this button Measure Button This triggers your total station to take a measurement If you are using a robotic total station please see the Robotic Instrument Toolbar topic If you are using GPS please see the GPS Toolbar topic Robotic Instrument Toolbar y Tk HT 2 000m IR Std O Sideshot KY When you use FieldGenius in robotic total station mode you will see the Robotic Instrument toolbar in the map area Like the Instrument Toolbar this toolbar allows you to control your instru ment settings access the Target Manager change measure modes and make a measurement It also lets you search and lock onto the prism 385 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 as ES Trk HT 2 000m IR Std 386 Lock Button FieldGenius uses
50. you This is commonly referred to as leap frogging your traverse Cancel Press this to cancel the shot and not store anything Note For more information on the other buttons found on this screen please read the Store Edit Points topic Sideshot Auto Store Main Menu Survey Methods Sideshot Auto Store Use this when you have production in mind and you don t need to review your shots before they re recorded in the database and raw file The measure mode allows you to press the measure button and it will store the point in the database and plot it in the drawing without asking you for any further inform ation When in this mode you will see the words Sideshot Auto on the measure mode button It will use the following settings from the main interface when storing the point Next Point Number ID The current point ID on the topo toolbar will be assigned to the point Description The current description on the topo toolbar will be assigned to the point Height of Target The current HT on the instrument toolbar will be used to compute the elevation of the point Main Menu Survey Methods MultiSet The Multiset routine in FieldGenius allows you to record angular sets in any order you want You can also review your measurement s computed average and standard deviation 163 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Starting the MultiSet Routine If you ve previously measured to your backsight and are confident that it hasn
51. you re on by looking at the direction field You will also note in the template preview the x visually marks the design offset ake Alignment Road 1 1234 ee template E E a com Offset 1200 Dir Rigt Le Right Stake Offset 12 00 setback 0 00 Elevation 99 76 VertOffset 0 00 219 x o lO Z Bort 9G ae Define an Offset You can define your own offset to stake by entering the value in the Offset field To enter a Left offset use a negative value 501 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 ake Alignment Road 1 m12 et Station 4400 00 int 100 00 Prev nee Offset 6 00 Dir Richt Let Right Stake Offset 6 00 Setbak 0 00 Elevation 99 88 Vertoffset 0 00 2 2 x a mis e A Road SE cose Stake Offset and Setback Stake Offset By default the Stake Offset will equal the Offset value The stake offset is designed to help you enter the offset that you want to stake your point at Sometimes the contractor asks you to stake a point at a certain distance from the centerline this will help you do that Setback The setback and stake offset fields work in conjunction with one another You will note that as you enter a stake offset a value is computed in the setback field This value is computed by subtracting the Stake Offset from the Design Offset If you know that the offset or setback for a template point is to be a specific value enter the value in the setback field
52. 0 0 0000s 447 A Nate pip ie dil ol he oe ach ed bs bh td 448 Geod Models ad da Se hele ts Sas aad od A 448 Grid ShM FIES serra dol teose saad 449 GPS Local Transformation 0 00 000202 c cece cece eee cc ccc ccc cee cece cece cee eeeeeteeeeeeees 449 Local Transformation nc sates rs A ds odes decd tea ve Ses 453 Local Transformation Example A 222 2 2222 e cece cece ee cccccccccceeeeeccececeees 457 Local Transformation Example B 222 2222cccccccceeeeccccccccceeeeecceeeceees 461 Local Transformation Example 2 2 02 2 cece cee cece cccce cece cc cccccceeeecceceeeees 465 Roads ot aes a a eh eee o aerate oe a as 473 Roads Manager ed 473 Manage Road cuicos ato liada 475 Manual Entry Alignment C L 2 2 20 e cece eee eeeeceeeeeeeeee 476 Adding an Element Sebenar nac aeo0ah de isa nes acatiicase ceed wnieseoseuuesdedeebec eke 477 Manual Entry Vertical Profile 2 20 0 0 222022 c cece eee ccc cece cece cece cece ccc eeeeeeeeees 483 Manual Entry Template 200000022222 c cece cece cece cece cece eee ecceceeeeeeeeees 488 Advanced Template Editing 2 220000 202 c cece cece cece coco cc ececeeceeeeeeeeeee 492 Advanced Zone Edit Widening Example 00 00 020 e cece cece ee eeeeeeeee 492 Advanced Zone Editing Superelevation oooocccccccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 495 LandXML Cross Sections 00 00000 e cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 498 Ali
53. 122 Settings Menu Important note The imported format only affects display of the coordinates and the ASCII file itself The internally stored point database or raw file stored will always be stored as N E Z Alpha Numeric IDs When this is enabled you will be allowed to enter alpha numeric point IDs such as 21a AB3 EV2 If this isn t turned on then FieldGenius will not accept anything but integer numbers Alpha numeric input of point IDs can contain up to 31 characters Note Alpha Numeric ID s are only supported in the MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD 2008 or newer desktop software Previous versions of MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD do not support it Point ID Range Minimum Use this to force FieldGenius to limit the point numbers that are used to a specific range here you would specify the minimum range value If you try to use a point number that is less than this value you will see a message that will ask you to select a different point number Note If you have the Alpha Numeric IDs toggle turned on then any values specified here are ignored Point ID Range Maximum Use this to force FieldGenius to limit the point numbers that are used to a specific range here you would specify the maximum range value If you try to use a point number that is greater than this value you will see a message that will ask you to select a different point number Note If you have the Alpha Numeric IDs toggle turned on then any values specified here are ign
54. 14 Pa ka A Description List Review Northing 5523882 638m nc Easting 312304 181m Elevation 393 678m Advanced Note Tap to enter note Prism Hgt 0 000m Y Store SS V Store TR X Cancel Point ID Enter in the point number you would like to assign to the point Note that by default it will display the next available point number If you re editing an existing point this field will not be editable Line Spline Arc Buttons Es This is used to toggle on and off the draw lines function When turned on as you shoot your points in the drawing they will be connected with a line This button can only be used if you re storing a point after a measurement S This is used to toggle on and off the draw curvy lines button This function will draw a best fit curve through your points as you shoot them This button can only be used if you re storing a point after a measurement 3 Point arcs can be started using the same method as for a Line or Curvy Line This but ton can only be used if you re storing a point after a measurement ras Description This is where you can enter a description for your point This field is associated with your Automap lib rary SO as soon as you start typing in descriptions alist appears displaying descriptions that match what you ve entered Simply press your Enter Key to accept your entry You can also have FieldGenius notify you when the description you ve entered isn t in your Automap library To do this
55. 1mm 11 3mm Leica Mini O Prism Mini 0 0mm 34 4mm Leica Mini Prism Prism Mini 17 5mm 16 9mm Leica Mini 360 Prism 360 Mini 30 0mm 4 4mm New Copy Y Close You are not permitted to delete or edit a default target but you certainly can copy one and edit the copy New Tapon this button to access the New Target dialog Here you can create a new target Edit Tepa a target to select it Then press the Edit button to access the Edit Target dialog Default tar gets can not be edited Delete Tap on a target to select it Then press the Delete button to delete the selected target You will receive a warning message that you must acknowledge before deletion is complete Default targets can not be deleted Copy Tap on a target to select it Then press the Copy button This will open the Edit Target dialog and you can then edit the copied parameters 350 Close Pressing this button returns you to the Target Manager screen New Leica Instrument Targets MapView Target Manager Target List New Use this option to create a new target for your Leica Geosystems instrument Provide the new target with a unique name define the target type and enter the Leica constant Leica uses a different prism offset method than other manufacturers and you should familiarized yourself with how they are com puted See the Leica Constant section below for more information New Target 5o Target Name Johns Round Target Type Prism Pris
56. 3 5 Page y 17 236m 7 ZOOMBOX 4 ics A 13 Standard Measure _101 _102 gt 200m Pa Ey A lt No Line gt raga _ NetID RTK Fixed aa 204 lt No Desc gt applied transformation parameters v Figure 12 FieldGenius Transformation in Effect The GPS measured observations at this point are still stored in the project database as a cartesian coordinate It is sometimes beneficial to have FieldGenius re compute the coordinates for these points by using the Adjust button in the Transformation Settings screen This will force FieldGenius to scan your raw file and convert all the GPS derived points into your local system Local Transformation Example B This example will investigate the process of transforming a set of existing terrestrially derived pos itions so that they are constrained to a set of GPS derived positions The process of transforming points is reversed from previous discussions and will therefore imply that the GPS derived coordin ates are in the plan system and the terrestrially derived positions are in the local system Another con sideration for this example is that the project area is relatively large and more than one point pair will require to be constrained to determine all four parameters and for redundancy Determination of the transformation parameters will account for the geodetic implications of the earth s curvature and meridian convergence The existing FieldGenius project is illustrated in Figure 13 with the 100 s se
57. 361 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Help for an explanation of how to compute a GeoMax prism constant This will be especially import ant if you are using a non GeoMax target OK This records the settings you have just made closes the Target Manager and returns you to the MapView Target List Press this button to access the Target List The Target List consists of user defined and default GeoMax instrument targets Here you can create copy edit and delete targets Default Settings Press this button to access the Default Settings screen This is where you define the default target heights Cancel Press this button to discard any changed made to the Backsight dialog and returns you to the MapView Target Manager Foresight Use the Foresight screen to select the foresight target choose a measure mode and enter a target height You also have the option of using a temporary target height Tap on the Foresight tab at the top of the screen to access the Foresight section Target Manager 8 Backsight Target 360 Prism Target Height 2 000m lt Eeten 304m lt EDM Mode IR Standard GeoMax Constant 23 1mm 4 OK Target List Default Settings X Cancel 362 Target Use this field to select a foresight target from the Target List Target Height Enter the height of your foresight target here Press the Set Default Height button Se to assign the default height to the Target Height field
58. 428 Index Sensor Information 428 Set Angle 396 Set Default Height 341 343 361 363 365 366 390 391 Sets 163 Settings 120 Settings Menu 119 Settings xml 350 359 Setup 151 Sewer 116 473 Shapefile 337 Shift 249 341 364 389 Shift Files 449 Shortcuts 144 Sideshot 162 Sideshot Auto Store 163 SIP 43 SK Stake Out Record 530 Skymap 425 SL Slope Staking Record 530 Slope Staking 510 Smart Tags 112 Sokkia 336 368 SP Store Point 531 Splines 101 Split Lines Arcs 80 SS Sideshot 531 Stake Alignment 290 505 Stake Arc 283 Stake Elevation 293 Stake Line 283 545 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Stake Offset 505 Stake Point 275 Stake Surface 286 Staking 278 499 505 510 Staking List 288 Staking Menu 274 Staking Reports 291 Standard Deviation 171 Start Button 113 Starting 27 Station Offset 246 StdDev 171 Store Point 67 Store Points 206 Supported Devices 25 Surface 316 Surface Manager 305 Surface Settings 307 Surface Volume 310 Surfaces 304 330 Survey Methods Menu 148 393 Survey Tools Menu 205 Switching Active Figures 98 Synchronize 522 SyncWizard 522 Syntax 434 T Target 347 363 366 Target Height 61 341 360 364 385 389 Target Height 61 62 363 366 384 546 Target List 341 342 344 345 350 351 356 359 360 362 364 389 390 Target Manager 63 64 341 345 351 356 360 364 385 386 389 Target Name 351 356 358 target type 346 351 353
59. 47 country specific grid shift files GPS Local Transformation Main Menu Survey Tools GPS Local Transformation FieldGenius includes a flexible localization utility The first thing you need to do is specify the points that will be constrained You can do this by using the Edit Control button Once you ve specified your constrain points you can press the Calculate Parameters button to compute transformation para meters The parameters will then be saved to the raw file when the OK button is pressed 449 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 GPS Local Transformation 7 Edit Control Calculate Scale GPS Adjust Points Origin North 0 00 Origin East 0 00 Trans North 0 00 Trans East 0 00 Rotation 0 00 00 Scale 10000000000 Trans Height 0 00 X Close Control Points You can think of the control points as a fixed coordinate system that you are wanting to transform your measurement to For example if you are using a GPS receiver and you want to localize to a local system your local points would be considered control points for the constraining The points you derive with GPS need to be transformed so these are the measured points All you need to do is press the Edit Control button to display the constrain point screen Using the Add and Edit Control buttons you can define what points you want to use for control You can then specify what point you want to constrain the control to and you can also select what
60. 76 VertOffset 200 22 x el IC MESETA IA In the template preview screen you will see an orange circle This circle indicates the location of the vertical offset point that will be staked Note If you want to make sure that you re staking nothing but design points along the template then make sure the Setback field is equal to 0 0 Template Preview You can zoom into your template using the zoom controls You can also pan the template by tapping on it and dragging it on the screen Use the Map button to display the location of the template along you alignment This will be displayed in the map view window Stake Offset Once you ve defined that point you want to stake you can select the Stake Offset button to start the staking process When you press this button you will see the staking toolbar For an explanation of the staking toolbar and alignment staking please refer to the next section Alignment Staking Part 2 Stake Slope This is the Stake Slope toggle Normally you will slope stake from the hinge point on the template but it is totally up to you The slope staking feature can be used from any point on the template Road Settings Press this button to return to the road settings screen 504 Roads Stake from LandXML Cross Sections To stake cross sections from a LandXML file you first need to import it using the LandXML importer found in the Import Menu You can then select the alignment form
61. About Menu topic for more information Project Manager Main Menu Project Manager The Project Manager is used to create open or delete projects currently residing in your data col lector When you start FieldGenius this is always the first screen you will see 114 Main Menu as Y C Users Yifan Xia Documents MicroSurvey FieldGenius FG Projects FG Sample 5 26 2014 5 16 2014 is New Delete 3 open poet My ea GS ei By default the project manager will display the contents of the FG Projects directory which is the default location for all projects that you create You can sort the list by project name or date by tapping on the column s header FG Projects Folder Press this button to specify a different project folder than the default The default isFG Projects Once you set the directory it is written to the msurvey ini file so it is used for all subsequent projects Open Project To open an existing project simply select it in the list and press the Open button New Project To create a new project simply press the New button You will then see the new project screen which will allow you to enter a name choose your automap library and set the units for the project Delete Project To delete a project you first need to select it in the list and then press the Delete button You will be asked to confirm that you really want to delete the project You can not delete a project that
62. FieldGenius e Line Tangent e Curve e Spiral e Spiral Curve Spiral e Chain Tip When you re prompted for a distance or direction you can always use the distance and direction recall features just like you would for COGO calculations Line Tangent Element In the Line Element editor gray fields indicate fields that can not be edited All other non gray fields can be edited by the user When you enter your known values and have confirmed their correctness press OK to save these values or press Cancel to exit without saving 477 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 A tangent is defined by a direction and length There are four ways you can define the tangent and they are explained in further detail below Line Tangent Editor Start Station 100 00 000 Start Pt ID Start Northing 4980 000 Start Easting 5000 000 Direction 90 00 00 E Length 500 500 End Northing 4980 000 End Easting 5500 500 End Station 105 00 500 Mi xX Cancel Direction and Length If you Know these two values you can enter them in their respective fields You will see that the end coordinates and end station will be computed automatically End Nothing and End Easting If you know the coordinates for the end of the tangent you can enter them in the End Northing and End Easting fields Once you ve done this the direction length and end station fields will be updated automatically Direction and End Stat
63. GENERALITY OF THE FOREGOING MICROSURVEY MAKES NO WARRANTY THAT A OPERATION OF THE PRODUCT AND OR SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE B THE PRODUCT AND OR SOFTWARE WILL MEET LICENSEE SPECIFIC NEEDS C SPECIFIC RESULTS WILL BE ACHIEVED WITH THE PRODUCT AND OR SOFTWARE OR D ALL ERRORS OR FAILURES WILL BE CORRECTED IN NO EVENT SHALL MICROSURVEY S ITS LICENSORS OR ITS SUPPLIERS LIABILITY TO LICENSEE FOR THE PRODUCT AND OR SOFTWARE WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT WARRANTY OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT AND ANY RELATED LICENSE OR MAINTENANCE FEES PAID BY LICENSEE Exclusion of Damages TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW INNO EVENT SHALL MICROSURVEY ITS LICENSORS OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS OR OTHER DATA OR INFORMATION OR FOR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT AND OR SOFTWARE EVEN IN THE EVENT OF THE FAULT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY BREACH OF CONTRACT OR BREACH OF WARRANTY OF MICROSURVEY ITS LICENSORS OR ANY SUPPLIERS AND EVEN IF MICROSURVEY OR ANY of ITS LICENSORS OR SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES BECAUSE SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 9
64. If this has a check mark in the box a prism constant of zero will be uploaded to your instrument The offsets specified in the foresight and backsight targets will be applied to the measurements when received by FieldGenius Remove the check mark if you don t want FieldGenius to modify your instru ment s prism offset Not all instruments support this feature When you connect your instrument to FieldGenius special notes are recorded in the raw file regarding prism offsets If you have the Set Instrument toggle turned on and your instrument supports this feature FieldGenius will set your instrument s prism offset to zero so no correction will be applied to the meas urement Then once FieldGenius receives this uncorrected measurement it will use the values you specified in the prism offset fields and adjust the distance accordingly For example if you specified an offset of 30mm FieldGenius will upload an offset of zero to your instrument and apply the 30 mm offset to the measurement after it is received In your raw file you will see the following note FieldGenius Prism 30mm Instrument Prism Omm Most prism offset are specified in millimeters FieldGenius will make the necessary conversions so the proper adjustment is applied If FieldGenius can t set the prism offset on your instrument it usually can t read it either Since a prism offset wasn t uploaded we don t know what prism offset is set on the instrument So we indic ate
65. Irregular Network TGRID and Contours 307 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Surface Settings gs Contour Interval 2 000m Minimum Elevation 100 000m M Limit TIN Side Maximum TIN r Gridded TIN Grid Size 0 000m F Preserve LandXML TIN r Colour TIN BC Bom Contour Interval This will force the contours to be drawn at an interval equal to the value set here The interval is equal to the drawing units Minimum Elevation This controls the minimum elevation This is useful if you have some data that is displayed at a zero elevation example alignment point data that is horizontal and you want to exclude these points from the surface Limit TIN Side This will determine the max length that will be allowed for a TIN triangle Gridded TIN If this is on when you draw the surface it will be represented using a TGRID model instead of a TIN model TGRID surfaces will apply smoothing in areas that have no breaklines This may create bet ter quality contours The Grid Size is a ground unit value that will determine the spacing of the grid lines If the Grid Size is 0 then a grid size will be automatically calculated Preserve LandXML TIN This will force the surface to be loaded using information stored in the LandXML file A LandXML sur face will be defined in such a way that each triangle corner is defined by a point id These points are stored in the file as CgPoints so FieldGenius will honor these fa
66. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO LICENSEE Limitation of Liability NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT LICENSEE MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED ABOVE AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF MICROSURVEY AND ANY OF ITS LICENSORS OR SUPPLIERS UNDER ANY PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT AND LICENSEE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ALL OF THE FOREGOING SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY LICENSEE FOR THE PRODUCT AND ANY RELATED LICENSE OR MAINTENANCE FEES PAID BY LICENSEE THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS EXCLUSIONS AND DISCLAIMERS INCLUDING SECTIONS 5 AND 6 ABOVE SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT A THE PROVISION OF THE PRODUCT AND SOFTWARE IS CONDITIONAL UPON MICROSURVEY EXCLUDING AND OR LIMITING ITS AND ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS LIABILITY TO LICENSEE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THIS AGREEMENT AND B THE EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATION CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE FAIR AND REASONABLE IN ALL THE CIRCUMSTANCES KNOWN AT THE DATE OF THIS AGREEMENT Indemnification Licensee agrees to defend indemnify and hold MICROSURVEY its affil iates distributors licensors and suppliers harmless from and against any and all losses dam ages costs or expenses including reasonable attorney s fees a suffered by Licensee relate
67. Library as shown on your topo toolbar If you choose a different description from the library then it will be retained for all consecutive stakeout points Furthermore when this feature is tumed on it will use the value in the Add Id field to determine the point number for the recorded staked position For example if you staked point 19 and you have an Attached User Id 1000 then FieldGenius will automatically use 1019 as a point number This can be changed by the user Show Staked Stored Points Place a check mark in this box if you would like to see the stakedout point displayed on map We provide you with the choice so that you can quickly see which points you have already staked out Use Stake List Place a check mark in this box if you would to use the Staking list instead of staking out from the Points database If you use a staking list you will never have a measured point presented as a new point to stake out Find Next Nearest Place a check mark in this box if you would like FieldGenius to search in the Points database i e not in the staking list for the nearest point from the current position and present it as the next point to be staked out 130 Settings Menu Roading Options Stationing Format You can specify the format for your stations Stationing Format 0 000 000 0 00 00 0 000 10 0 010 000 0 10 00 10 000 100 0 100 000 1 00 00 100 000 1000 1 000 000 10 00 00 1000 000 10000 10 000 000 100 00 00 10
68. Licensee as may be agreed upon and related to the Software MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 10 Term and Termination 11 a This Agreement is effective until terminated Licensee may terminate this Agreement at any time with or without cause upon notice to MICROSURVEY MICROSURVEY may terminate this Agreement for Licensee s breach of this Agreement Upon termination of this Agreement Licensee shall immediately cease all use of the Software and Documentation and return to MICROSURVEY all copies of thereof within five 5 days after such termination Upon MICROSURVEY S request Licensee will certify in writing to MICROSURVEY that all such copies have been returned to MICROSURVEY The following provisions of this Agreement shall survive termination or expiration of this Agreement Sections 2 b Restrictions 3 Ownership 5 War ranty Disclaimer 6 Exclusion of Damages 7 Limitation of Liability 10 Term and Termination and 11 General General a Assignment MICROSURVEY may assign this Agreement without notice to Licensee Licensee shall not assign this Agreement or transfer any of the rights duties or obligations arising under this Agreement without the prior written consent of MICROSURVEY This Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the permitted successors and assigns of the parties thereto Amendments Modifications Notices of changes to this Agreement or other matters may be made to Licen
69. Manager The surface called Point Database represents the Realtime DTM Surface made up from points and lines that are in your project If you have imported any other surfaces from a QSB or LandXML file they will also appear in this list 305 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 To use a Surface you first need to load it into memory by checking inside the box before the name of the surface in the list A surface is loaded if there is a checkmark shown before it If you expand the surface you can control whether it is drawn as Contour Lines a wireframe TIN a solid TIN or any combination of these Surface Manager ss 3 User Surfaces J Point Database Y Contour Lines TIN Wireframe TIN Solid face Settings Volumes Load Save Close Settings Surface settings allow you to specify settings that affect the surfaces or contours that are drawn Please see the Surface Settings topic for more information Volumes Use this button to calculate a volume Please see the Volume Calculation topic for more information Load Use this button to load a QSB surface file into your project Please see the Import DTM Surface File topic for more information Save Use this button to save the selected surface as a QSB file which can be imported into your MicroSur vey CAD orinCAD desktop software or into another FieldGenius project Close If you close the surfaces screen and return back to the map screen you will see the loaded surfac
70. N 715346 319 E 2381454 770 EL1 000 sp ND 0 000 ED 0 042 LD 0 009 sk 0P251 FP1400 AR180 00000 ZE89 05000 SD63 0500 Design Point 342 The SP record is the point that was recorded when you pressed the Store Point button The CF record displays the measured elevation versus design The DE record displays the design coordinates for the point to be staked The SD record displays the delta values of the staked point This is the DE record SP record 282 Staking Menu The SK record is the recorded raw observation used to compute the store point SP record Note If you turned off Store Staked Point in the staking settings then no SP or CF record will be stored in the raw file Stake Line Arc Main Menu Staking Stake Line Line Toolbar Stake Stake Line You can stake a line by selecting points in the drawing or by selecting an existing figure or a DXF line When you start the command from the Staking Menu you will see the Select Line Toolbar that will allow you to select the object you want to stake 14 Selection Mode Segment Information Source User Figure Segment _ Start Pnt 11 Switch Direction End Pnt 14 Length 50 303 Y ok x Cancel Press OK to continue on to the Station Offset screen 283 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Station Interval 100 000 Start 0 00 000 Stake 0 00 000 Prev Next Offset Interval 1 000 Stake 0 000 Left Ri
71. Out This is the distance you need to move away from the instrument Right Facing the instrument move right by this amount Left Facing the instrument move left by this amount Cut This is the amount you have to go down from the current rod position to the stake point s elevation Fill This is the amount you have to go up from the current rod position to the stake point s elev ation Orientation Reference Prism With the staking reference set to Prism the map view will be twisted so the prism is centered towards the top of your screen The move by distances are with respect to the instrument man looking at the prism This view is handy when using a non robotic instrument In This is the distance you need to move towards the instrument Out This is the distance you need to move away from the instrument Right Facing the prism move right by this amount Left Facing the prism move left by this amount Cut This is the amount you have to go down from the current rod position to the stake point s elevation Fill This is the amount you have to go up from the current rod position to the stake point s elev ation Orientation Reference User Point With the User Point orientation you can use an existing point in your project as the reference The view will be twisted so that the selected point is centered towards the top of your screen In This is the distance you need to move towards your user reference point 127
72. QSB file to your collector before proceeding Function N e w Open the Surface Manager then press the Load button Browse to where your DTM surface file QSB is located and press the Open button to con tinue You will now see the surface list screen From here you can turn on your layer and configure DTM settings Please see the Surface Sets topic for more information Parcels Manager XML Main Menu Data Manager Parcels XML When a LandXML file is imported into a FieldGenius project if there is parcel information it can be viewed in the Parcels Manager By default all Parcels will be visible in the map screen but you can turn them off by deselecting the green check mark next to the parcel group Data Manager Menu Parcels Manager a Ca Water 2 Electric Sites E A Sanitary Hook up Sites 2 Bent Sites 2 135 9 124 93 2 136 9125 2 103 9 4 E E E El J E E Store If you highlight a parcel in the list pressing the Store button will compute and store coordinates at the corners of your parcel Stake If you press this it will open the line staking toolbar Note you have to press close to exit the parcel manager 317 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 IMPORT EXPORT MENU Import Export Menu Main Menu Import Export Use this menu to display different options for importing data into or exporting data out of your project Export Y O 2 ASCII Coordinate File Export Templat
73. Requirements 25 Hectares 255 Helmerts Transformation 232 Horizontal Angle Offset 177 HT 62 icon 346 Images 298 Import 298 316 318 320 321 327 329 346 353 522 Import User Defined 338 447 Import Export Menu 318 320 inCAD 521 522 Installation 27 Instrument Settings 61 385 Instrument Configuration 373 Instrument Selection 134 371 Instrument Settings 64 386 Instrument Settings Toolbar 387 Instrument Toolbar 61 384 Intersection 184 Introduction 25 Inverse 243 Invert 199 JB Job Record 526 Job Information 146 Joystick Control 387 Index JPG JPEG 298 K Keyboard Shortcuts 144 Keypad 42 43 Kinematic 410 Known Geodetic Position 413 L Land Development Desktop 336 LandXML 116 298 316 329 332 473 LandXML Cross Sections 498 Laser Plummet 397 Laser Pointer 387 397 Layers Manager 298 Layout Elevation 293 LDD 336 Leica 350 368 369 Leica constant 352 354 365 367 Leica Constant 367 Leica Geosystems 351 364 Leica instruments 350 Leica Instruments 364 Leica offset 365 367 Leica Prism 351 364 Leica targets 350 Level Bubble 387 397 398 Level Bubble check with every shot 398 Level Bubble Tolerance 398 License Agreement 3 Licensing 340 Line Angle Offset 186 541 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Line Distance Offset 188 Line Perpendicular Point 193 Line Mode 108 210 Line Toolbar 89 Lines 88 92 Linework 86 Link Configure 429 Link Information 429 Local Tr
74. Settings 8 T Sener confowre T pana T Sensor Information he Link Configure Reset RTK Filters To Link Information w Select MountPoint is Raw Data Logging a Position Information ae Instrument Disconnect zl B 427 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Sensor Configure This will allow you to make changes to most of the settings in your reference or rover profile including configuring the three tolerance modes selecting the active tolerance mode configuring the antenna height and configuring the auto recording options The Model and Communication options cannot be configured while you are connected to your GPS receiver GPS Profile Model and Communication roca Tolerance Setting Autonomous Antenna Height Tolerance Setting RTK Float Auto Recording Tolerance Setting RTK Fixed x co 50 Sensor Information The Sensor Information screen displays detailed information about the hardware you are connected to Sensor Information amp Sensor Model GS15 Hardware GS15 Serial Number 1502868 System Version 4 03 Measure Version 6 110 Boot Version 4 00 Battery A 90 Battery B None Y a 428 Link Configure This turns on your GPS Receiver s radio or modem to begin receiving RTK corrections from either a base receiver or an NTRIP or GPRS server o Link Configure ae Link Device Link Communication GSM Module GPS Port Port 3 5 Baud Rate 2 Parity d C
75. Stake Alignment screen if you specify a stake offset or a setback distance after you store your catch point position you will be asked if you want Continue with staking the catch point setback If you press No then this will be cancelled When you press Yes you will then see the Turn To screen which will stake a position that is offset from the computed catch point This offset will be equal to the offset you specified in the alignment screen 513 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Rotate instrument to HA 20 08 24 VA 90 09 48 SD 435 65 HD 435 65 E a y continue Zero Plate 196 cancel Now on the staking toolbar you will see the word Stk Pnt CP Setback which indicates you re cur rently staking a slope stake setback point alo AEPA Stk Shot Stk 20 08 24 Page HA Waiting for data Page HT 0 00 P Se toed Stk Pnt CP Setback Desc None Staking Method Turn an Angle y JO 36 When you get to the offset position and store the point you will see the results screen once again This time the offsets to the hinge point and centerline will include the offset distance 514 Roads a oor Page ffin 0 03 Prism Stk Pnt CP Setback Desc None He Staking Method Directional y Y lola The vertical distances that are reported on the results screen are not computed using the cur rent rod position These values will be in relation to the act
76. This helps with the creation of accurate surface models and contours FieldGenius contains the exact same functions for surface modeling contouring and volumes as MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD Contouring Creating contours in FieldGenius is a simple as choosing the desired DTM surface from the dialog and checking the contour option The procedures for contouring a DTM surface are outlined below 1 Open the Surface Settings dialog 2 Type in the appropriate Contour Interval The default interval is every 2 units 315 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 wo A on N You can control the Minimum Elevation This is useful if you have some data that is dis played at a zero elevation example alignment point data that is horizontal and you want to exclude these points If you want to create a TGRID then turn on the Gridded TIN option or leave this off to create a TIN The Grid Size is a ground unit value that will determine the spacing of the grid lines Press OK to return to the Surface Manager screen Finally turn on the contours by expanding the Point Database surface and selecting the Con tour Lines option to display them Close the Surface Manager and return to the map screen to see your contours Import DTM Surface File QSB Main Menu Data Manager Surfaces Load If you have a DTM surface that was created by MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD desktop software you can import it into FieldGenius You need to copy the
77. Toolbar Measure Modes GNSS Measurement Modes Reference Base Receiver When you connect to a reference receiver you need to program a position into the receiver so accur ate positions can be transmitted to the rover 411 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 You can access three different measurement modes to program your receiver with a position by selecting the Measure Modes button in the main menu or the measure modes button on the GNSS instrument toolbar GNSS Toolbar Reference Measure Main Menu Measure Modes Modes This is my first project gt 50 a e PDOP of Project Ye Plan 2 2 z Te 7 eX Calculate Known Position To Disconnect Measure Modes i i Start o Stakeout a Linework Exit Reference Selecting the Measure Modes button will display three options Known Geodetic Position as Averaged Geodetic Position A Local Transformation to Point A 442 1 Known Geodetic Position 2 Averaged Geodetic Position 3 Local Transformation to Point Please refer to the Reference Position Modes topic for more information about what the different modes can do for you Overview Reference Position Modes There are three different modes available for programming a position into your reference receiver When you re ready to program your base receiver with a position you need to select the reference pos ition mode then to start the process press the Measure button on the GPS toolbar Please review the
78. Tools Menu Main Menu Survey Tools This menu contains functions pertaining to the data in your project Store Points COGO History Viewer Drawing Tool Traverse Report Delete Last Saved Point GPS Local Transformation Raw File Viewer f Store Points Use this to enter new coordinates into your scene s database Please see the Store Points topic for more information Drawing Tool This starts up the draw plan tool Delete Last Saved Point Use this to delete up to ten of the last points that were saved Please see the DeleteLast Saved Point topic for more information Raw File Viewer Use this to open a viewer that will display your current raw file Please see the Raw File Viewer topic for more information COGO History Viewer Use this to display the results that were computed using the COGO commands Please see the COGO History Viewer topic for more information 205 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Traverse Report Use this to generate a traverse closure report based on your traverse setups Please see the Tra verse Report topic for more information GPS Local Transformation Use this to specify transformation parameters that can be used to localize GPS data or to perform a transformation on your points collected with conventional survey methods Please see the Trans formation Setup topic for more information Point Pattern Use this to create and apply point patterns for example for bolt plat
79. Vert D y zane 2nnn VetN vl R 223 Y x Y x Commands section view Xx Cance Note Depending on what side you re displaying you will only see the zones listed for that side of the template To see the zones for the other side you need to change to the opposite side using the Left Zone and Right Zone buttons Move Zone Zones can be shifted around by moving them in or out form the centerline To do this use the Move In and Move Out commands View Zone Modifiers The template you define is a typical cross section for the entire alignment You can define changes to the template at specific stations and these changes are referred to as Zone Modifiers Zone mod ifiers modify the typical template to allow for deviations such as road widening and super elevations This tool is meant to be used when you ve defined zone modifiers Please see the advanced template editing for more information Advanced Zone Edit Advanced editing of your zones is available to give you even more power and flexibility Being able to modify the zones at specific stations allow you to create template transitions widenings and super elevation transitions You first need to highlight the zone you want to modify in the zone list Once you do that press the Advanced Zone Edit command This will then display the zone editor for the zone you ve selec ted in this example it is zone 3 491 MicroSurvey FieldGe
80. W and Cut Fill distances from the cur rent rod position to the design point in the Observation Toolbar near the top of the screen This method is useful while staking with a conventional or robotic total station but be sure to set the Orientation Reference option to Prism for a conventional total station Instrument for a robotic total station or North for GPS staking 280 Staking Menu Radial This method will display the Direction Bearing or Azimuth and Distance from the current rod position to the design point in the Observation Toolbar near the top of the screen This method is useful while staking with a robotic total station or GPS Conventional Total Station Tips If you re using a conventional total station you need to press the measure button on the instrument toolbar before the navigate distances are displayed To help with navigating set your map orientation to Prism in the staking settings screen This will force the map to orientate itself so the prism is at the top and the instrument is at the bottom You can use the Turn An Angle method to quickly get online with your point then switch to the Dir ectional method to navigate accurately to the point Robotic Total Station Tips If you re using a robotic instrument you need to turn on the cursor tracking button on the instrument toolbar before the navigate distances are displayed Note that with a robotic instrument there is no need to press the measure butto
81. a button to trigger the instrument to search for the prism and lock onto it You can also use this button to turn the lock off The button when not locked on a prism will display a No Lock status with a un locked icon To search for the prism simply press the No Lock button After you have pressed the No Lock button you will see a Search icon on the button while the instrument searches for your prism When FieldGenius finds a prism and locks onto it the button will display a Lock icon To stop the instrument from tracking you can press the Lock button again to set it toa No Lock status If you re using multiple prisms and you want to force FieldGenius to look for another one when you re locked onto a prism double tapping the Lock button will force it to search for the next avail able prism Also during a search you can cancel the current search by press ing the Stop Search button on the search progress toolbar Cursor Tracking This turns the cursor tracking feature on or off If turned on the current position of the target will be displayed on the screen in real time You can only use this feature once you have specified an instrument setup using the Setup Occupy Point command Note The cursor tracking position will use a coarse meas urement to plot your position When you are stationary the cursor is a hollow triangle pointing towards the instrument When you are moving the cursor is a solid triangle pointing in the direction
82. and 204 were paired with the measured local points 1000 1001 1102 1103 1105 1106 1202 1203 and 1204 respectively After all of the control station pairs have been entered you need to compute the transformation para meters To update the grid of the constraint pairs so it displays the transformation parameters and residuals press the Calc Parameters button You will see the transformation parameters update with new values Instantly we can tell that there is a mistake with one of the point pairs as the scale value should be closer to a value of 1 468 GPS Local Transformation 80 Edit Control Calculate Scale GPS Adjust Points Origin North 5523137 446m Origin East 1311525 631m Trans North 4971 201m g Trans East 14998 244m i Rotation 422629 Scale 109553438784 Trans Height 0 135m Upon returning to the control point list you will notice that the delta northing is large for the first point pair so let s exclude it from the solution by turning off the green checkmarks Highlight row 100 then press Edit Control and uncheck the Horizontal and Vertical options Once you do this you will have to use the Calc Params button again to compute a new solution In our example that helped tighten up the residuals amp o Calculate Parameters Edit Control Add Control T Do not calculate scale E Do not calculate vertical slopes i Pe CtrlPnt Horz Vert dN dE dH P A A 101 G M 22955 4947 0 1
83. and east is the shift amount that needs to be applied to your measured points to move them into the local system Rotation This is the rotation amount between your measured and local systems Scale This is the scale difference between your measured and local systems If you turn on Do not calculate scale these values will be equal to 1 0 Trans Height This is the vertical shift that will be applied to the transformation It is computed by averaging the elev ation differences between your point pairs Positive translation heights will be added while negative heights will be subtracted Slope North amp Slope East This is an indication of or much your measured system is inclined in the north and east directions The value that is displayed is the slope of each direction For example if the difference in elevation along the north axis of your measured system is 3 meters and the length of it is 19 meters the slope of the 230 Survey Tools Menu axis will be rise over run or 0 15789 Negative slopes indicate that it is inclined downward from the origin and positive slopes are inclined upwards You should only use vertical slopes if you do not have a geoid model to use for your point s elev ations Use this feature with care as it can cause distortions in your elevations if it is used incorrectly You can force FieldGenius to not compute these values by turning on the Do no calculate vertical slopes toggle Impact on new
84. are ignored during processing of the raw file and are used only for information purposes only You can add a comment to the raw file by using the Add Comment button in the Survey Tra verse Menu This is a comment BK Backsight Record A backsight record is written to the raw file when you complete an occupy point command Please review the Setup Occupy Point topic for more information Field headers OP Occupy point BP Back point BS Backsight BC Back circle BK OP101 BP100 BS0 00000 BC0 00000 CF Cut Sheet When you stake out a point a CF record will be recorded in the raw file ST Station MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 OD Offset direction ENUM OL Offset length EL Elevation GD Grade design DE Design Point Location During a stakeout the point you re staking will be recorded in the raw file with as DE record PN Point name design point may be blank N Northing E Easting EL Elevation Description design point description may be blank JB Job Record Every time a raw file is created or opened a JB record will be written to the file Field headers NM Job name DT Date TM Time JB NMTraversel DT03 05 2004 TM14 07 52 LS Line of Sight Instrument and Target Height HI Height of instrument HR Height of rod Ls HI1 500 HR1 500 MO Mode Setup Record Every time a raw file is created or opened a MO record will be written to the file Field headers
85. area you will need to copy it to the data collector s that will be used All geoid model files need to be copied to the installation directory in the mapping folder For example MicroSurvey FieldGenius Mapping Select Geoid Model Once the necessary geoid model is copied to the data collector you have to define in your project which geoid model to use You can define this by selecting the geoid model in the Vertical Systems section of the Coordinate Systems dialog In some countries or areas the use of grid shift files are required to accurately compute a horizontal position When projecting a dataset between two different datums a transformation is required Both equation based and grid based transformation methods are supported FieldGenius An equation based transformation can use either a 3 parameter dX dY dZ or a 7 parameter shift dX dY dZ rx rY rZ ds to translate between coordinates A grid based transformation uses binary files and inter polations that calculate the differences between the two geographic coordinate systems We have created country specific grid shift files and these additional grid shift files are not installed by default and need to be downloaded from the MicroSurvey website Download Files and Instructions Please review the following MicroSurvey Helpdesk article for instructions and country specific grid shift files http www microsurvey com helpdesk2 index php Knowledgebase Article View 499
86. azimuth if this is supported on your instrument For more information see the Back sight Summary topic Backsight Measure Modes Instrument Toolbar Measurement Modes Button 154 Survey Methods Menu Backsight Measure Mode 2 BB Angle 8 Distance Angle Only Cancel Backsight Cancel When shooting to your backsight you have two options available and they can be accessed from the instrument toolbar using the measure mode button The measure modes available are described as follows Angle amp Distance Specifying this will require you to measure a distance to the backsight either to a prism or reflect orlessly It will also record the current plate reading on the instrument Both the measure distance and plate reading will be used as the backsight reading in the raw file Angle Only Specifying this will not require you to measure a distance to the backsight All that will be recorded is the current plate reading on the instrument and this reading will be used as the backsight reading in the raw file Cancel Backsight Use this to cancel your current backsight and occupy point command Backsight Summary After you have taken your measurement you will see a summary of your shot From this screen you can choose to accept the shot or re shoot it You can also specify if you want the plate reading set to zero or a specific azimuth 155 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Orientation Result BO Backsi
87. back sight point not the original setup point When you press the View Report button you will see the traverse closure results 221 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Traverse Report Total Length 400 985m Segments 4 Horizontal Error Distance 3 245m 303 13 12 dN 1 778m dE 2 714m Angular 1 00 00 Precision 1 124 _ Vertical Error Distance 1 763m Precision 1 227 Argal vertsal comosa Xx Close Total length This is the total unknown legs that were measured in the field Segments This is the total length traversed Only unknown traverse legs will be added Horizontal Error This is the horizontal closure and precision for your traverse The closure direction is calculated from the known point to your measured point If there isn t enough data to compute the angular error you will see the word No Comparison It also displays the delta northing and easting differences Vertical Error This is the vertical error that is computed by comparing the elevations of the known point and meas ured closing point Traverse Definition Foresight Method Bearing If we use CASE 3 as an example the user first setup on point 1 and backsighted point 2 He then foresighted and setup on points 3 to 6 and closed the traverse by recording one more TR record to point 7 To compute the traverse report you go to the Main Menu Survey and choose the Traverse Report button When selected you will see the following screen
88. be automatically computed for you Save Press this button to store your target edits Targets are stored to the Settings xml file and you are returned to the Target List screen Cancel Press this buton to cancel creating a new target You will be returned to the Target List screen Default Settings The Default Settings screen is where you can define the default target heights for prism targets RL reflectorless targets and a temporary height The temporary height value is used for taking a one time measurement using the height value entered in this field After the measurement is completed the system will revert back to using the current target height 354 ES Default Settings Default Target Heights Prism Height 0 000rm RL Height 0 000m Temporary Height 0 000m CA OK X Cancel Prism Height Enter your most common prism height into this field When you press the Use Default Height button in the Target Manager screen this value will populate the Target Height field This is convenient for when you have a standard prism height and want to assign it quickly Important Note You must be in a prism measure mode to be able to use the Default Height button in the Target Manager screen and have it use a default prism height RL Height Enter your most common ReflectorLess RL height into this field When you press the Use Default Height button in the Target Manager screen this value will populate the Target Heigh
89. can do this by using the Edit Control button Once you ve specified your constrain points you can press the Calculate Parameters button to compute transformation para meters The parameters will then be saved to the raw file when the OK button is pressed GPS Local Transformation ss Edit Control Calculate Scale GPS Adjust Points Origin North 0 00 Origin East 0 00 Trans North 0 00 Trans East 0 00 Rotation 0 00 00 Scale 1 0000000000 Trans Height 0 00 X Close 228 Survey Tools Menu Control Points You can think of the control points as a fixed coordinate system that you are wanting to transform your measurement to For example if you are using a GPS receiver and you want to localize to a local system your local points would be considered control points for the constraining The points you derive with GPS need to be transformed so these are the measured points All you need to do is press the Edit Control button to display the constrain point screen Using the Add and Edit Control buttons you can define what points you want to use for control You can then specify what point you want to constrain the control to and you can also select what component of the measured point to use either it s horizontal position vertical position or both An X indicates that the particular component should not be used in the transformation calculation Delta values are shown to help you determine how well your points
90. close the project the layer status will be saved so that the next time the project is opened the layer visibility will automatically be set the same as you had left it so files that were turned off will remain turned off the next time the project is opened up 300 Data Manager Menu Add File Press the Add File button to select a DXF file that you want to load into your project You will be able to browse to and select any DXF file Please see the Import DXF File topic for more information Remove File Highlight the DXF file that you want to remove from your project then press the Remove File button If a file is not highlighted you will be reminded that a file must first be selected from the tree This will turn off all layers from the selected file in your FieldGenius project and disassociate the DXF file It does not delete the DXF file File Settings Highlight the DXF file that you wish to change the settings for then press the File Settings button You can enable or disable the display of text in the selected file If your DXF file contains text turning this off will improve performance of FieldGenius Pressing the OK or Cancel buttons will return you to the Layer Manager screen DXF Settings 123 File Westbank DXF V Show text 301 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 LandXML Files Layer Manager St User Data Database 32 DXF Files 8 subdivision xsect xml Points Chains Alignments
91. connected to and the mode that the current receiver will play in the RTK process Please see the GPS Model and Communication topic for more information Tolerance This is used to enter information about the location of the reference base station Please see the GPS Tolerance Reference topic for more information Antenna Height The antenna settings are used to calculate or enter the height of the antenna phase center above the ground Please see the GPS Antenna Configuration topic for more information GPS Rover Profile The GPS Configuration for your rover unit is accessed from the Instrument Selection screen by select ing GPS Rover as the Instrument Type then pressing the Edit button to configure your selected GPS Rover Profile GPS Profile 50 Model and Communication Active Tolerance Autonomous Tolerance Setting Autonomous Antenna Height Tolerance Setting RTK Float Auto Recording Tolerance Setting RTK Fixed x co Model and Communication This is used to select the Make and Model of receiver and the port settings that the data collector will connect with Please see the GPS Model and Communication topic for more information 401 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Tolerance Setting Description x3 The three configurable tolerance modes are used to enter information used in computing the position of the rover once a measurement has begun Please see the GPS Tolerance Modes Rover topic for more
92. corner will allows you to chose Map staking mode that relays on Observation Toobar or Compass staking method if you are using a GNSS receiver or robotic total station Note that Compass staking mode for GNSS will require movements to determine the orientation to the point you are trying to stake Once you are close to the point the screen will automatically switch to Grid mode for precise staking The threshold of this switch can be found inside Staking Settings menu Buttons Y Store Store Point When this is pressed the Store Edit Points screen will appear so you can store the position of the rod The default is to store a point in the project database as well as write raw records to the raw file You might not want to store a point for the staked position but want to have a record of it in the raw file This can be done by turning off Store Staked Point in Stake Settings This button not available for GPS staking use the Measure button to record the point Viewing Instrument Select Viewing Direction This opens up Viewing Direction dialogue where you can select options depending on the current instrument Current options include Viewing North Instrument Prism User Point Grid Select Staking Method Depending on the instrument selected this button allows you to choose from Map Grid Compass staking modes Es Staking Information 279 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 This displays information about the point you are st
93. curves and spirals e Vertical Element This can contain grade breaks parabolic curves and non symmetrical curves e Templates Template can contain horizontal and vertical offsets as well as widening and super elevation data 473 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 e XML Cross Sections XML cross sections define specific stations along an alignment These sections contain horizontal vertical and template data XML cross sections are created using desktop software which is then imported into FieldGenius Manage Road This option is only available once you ve created a road using the New Road button or imported an XML file To input or review alignment data press the Manage Road button to access the Road Set tings screen If you imported a LandXML file or manually inputted a road you can stake it by pressing this button As aminimum you need to have the following before the stake command will continue e XML Cross sections e Horizontal C L Vertical Profile and template e Horizontal C L and DTM Surface Add Road Use this button to create a new road You can create as many roads as needed and they will be stored in an XML file that will reside is the project directory Delete Road Use this to delete a road You first need to highlight the road you want to delete and then press the button to remove the road from the alignment This road will be permanently deleted and can not be undone Map View Use this button to display th
94. defining the slope for the zone The slope for the zone can be defined by entering a slope value or a vertical distance also referred to as a delta Z In the example shown below you will see that three zones have been defined for the left side of the template By default all new zones are attached to the zone found furthest from the centerline 489 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Template Surface 1 Zone View view Zone Modifiers Left rs C Right sation Sro0 000 Left Zones Width Vert Dist zonel 12 000 0 30 zone2 3 000 Vert D 83 333 2 50 zone3 5 000 Slope 0 000 0 00 lt gt y OK Commands section view Xx cance Delete Zones Any zone that is highlighted in the zone list can be deleted by using the Delete Zone command There is no undo so be careful when you use this command Clear All At any time you can clear the zone list so you can start over To do this use the Clear Zone com mand There is no undo so be careful when you use this command Mirror Zones There are two variations of this command You can mirror your zones from left to right or right to left In our example from above when the Mirror Left to Right command is used the zones are duplic ated on the right side of the template 490 Roads 123 Template Surface 1 Zone View view Zone Modifiers Left F C Right station 5400 000 OOS Left Zones Width zonel 12 000
95. dialogue with the coordinates entered for the selected point so you can store it into your project database 67 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 68 Points Lines Descriptions POINTS LINES DESCRIPTIONS FieldGenius projects typically are comprised of points that have been imported calculated or meas ured These points are always stored in a file made up of the project name and will have an extension of DBF DBF files can be viewed using a DBF reader or with Microsoft Excel Point Labels In the drawing area you will always see a node or dot that marks the coordinate location of the point For each point you can control what is displayed on the screen such as the points number elevation description and note To control the visibility of the labels use the Options button on the Display Tool bar 000 Point Toolbar At any time you can tap on an existing point to open the Point Toolbar This toolbar will contain com mon functions that are done with points Please refer to the point toolbar topic for more information BLA new w ee 7 PlBr Bx Editing Single Points To edit a point you can tap on it which will open the Point Toolbar Press the Edit button to open the Review Edit Points screen Working with Multiple Points If you need to search list rotate translate delete or edit multiple points at the same time you will use the Coordinate Database Editor Please see the Coordinate Database t
96. ds RL Fine Auto Center This toggles the auto center feature on or off If turned on whenever you take a measurement the map screen will always re center on the measured point xy Instrument Settings This opens the instrument settings screen where you can control specific settings for your total station such as EDM settings Tolerance setting and Instrument Connection Disconnection Measurement Mode S Sideshot This opens the Measurement Modes screen where you can select what type of measurement you want to take The current measurement mode is always dis played on this button for example if you re using the distance offset mode it will dis play Dist Off HT 0 000m Target Height This opens the Target Heights screen where you can change the current target height The current target height is always displayed on this button Measure Button E This triggers your total station to take a measurement If you are using a robotic total station please see the Robotic Instrument Toolbar topic If you are using GPS please see the GPS Toolbar topic 61 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Target Height Instrument Toolbar HT Button You can access this function by pressing the HT button on the instrument toolbar Target Heights Target Height Current y Target Height IR EDM 6 0001 Target Height RL EDM 0 000 Target Height Temporary 8 000 l Use Temporary Target Height for Next Observation Only
97. e Store Point When you are ready to store the stake point press the Store Point button You will then see the res ults for your stakeout If you are using GPS to stake the alignment then you will not see the Store Point button Instead press the Measure button to trigger a measurement and then store the resulting shot fset Staking Results 1 09 Station a Design 4 00 00 Observed 4 00 01 Offset Design 12 00 Observed a h E e f Direction Right Fill 0 15 Save Point and Raw Data Save Raw Data x Cancel Press Save Point and Raw Data to store a point for this shot and to write your stake and cut sheet records to the raw file By default the description for the stored stake point will equal the station and offset that was being staked 509 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Press Save Raw Data to write your stake and cut sheet records to the raw file without storing a point If you press Cancel nothing is stored or written to the raw file Records written to raw file Following are the records that are written to the raw file when you store a point If you do not store a point then the SP Store Point record is not recorded as no point was stored in the database SP PN4 N 20000 0068 E 5000 0099 EL100 1038 0 00 00 C 0 000 GF STO 000 OD1 OLO 010 EL100 1038 GD100 0000 OE STO 000 OE0 010 l DE PN WN 20000 000 E 5000 000 EL100 000 vado asada e ea al SK OP1 F
98. eee ce cece cece ene eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 98 SPONTA S doo Ur gh Rac cuccan emake eee s aan A nce 99 Splines Curvy Figures F erered geen i aaaea e cece cece i o eae E aT TTAR 101 CIOSINOFIQUIES anun do ta e A aaa e aa a Mei a et 102 End complete a Figure 20 0022 cece cece cece cece ccc ccc cece cece cece cee eeeteeeeeeeeeeeees 103 Re Activating Figures 2 00 00 2 2 c cece cece cece cece cece cece cece ccecceeeeeeeeeeees 103 Deleting Figures 2 00 eee ec ec cece cece cece cece ccc e cece cece cece ceeceeeeeeeeenes 104 Draw Option Defaults 220 eee cece cece cece cece cece ccc ccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeenees 105 DAWNO TOOM 2325 08 na hace teh eas Soiled eel lena oth a baler tates Pa at ee eats ad 107 Smart TAGS ess ciate A La elect e ht tok yl tl 112 Main Menotti Bessa eesti deo a TAAN RARAN 113 Main Menu 0 00000 c cece cece cee eee cee eee naierara eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 113 Project Manager 2 2 2 c cece cece cece cece cece cece cece ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeees 114 FROGS ht 8 00s a CY aad e O Ne Seder tak ok a ed S 116 Roads Manager 2 t2 2c00 e ai he eke 116 Settings Men its eos aa rd ll 119 Settings Meno posos ot Troe oe ns N O 119 ARA A NS SY itl GSN A OED Dt tes SSN EE REA 120 Whi SettingS inci eee ee Mure e dad eo 132 Instrument Selection uti ii ede E eA A eee ES 134 Coordinate System Settings 0 000022 o cece ccc ccc ccc ccc cece cece cece cece eeeeeeeeeees 136 15 MicroSurvey Fi
99. fields The horizontal differences in the northing and easting is computed and applied to the points being transformed The elevation of the points will remain unchanged Add Northing Easting Elevation Any one or combination of these shifts can be applied Simply input the value for each shift in the appropriate fields Both negative and positive values are valid Add Direction and Distance Define the shift by direction and distance The coordinate shift in Northing and Easting will be cal culated using the direction and distance you enter in the fields If desired you may apply two shift com ponents at the same time For example shift your selection of points by Direction and Distance but also add 100 00 to the elevation You can use angle and distance recall features to help you compute your answer Scale You can scale a group of points using the scale option 252 Calculations Menu Rotate Translate Scale Points 123 Rotate Translate scale Scale Parameters Scale Base Point Scale Factor 1 000000 y Adjust Points Restore Points x Close Scale Base Point This will be the base point for the scaling and all points selected will be scaled from this point You can enter the point number in the field or use the point chooser to select the scale point Scale Factor Use this to specify the scale to apply to your selection Adjust Points Once you ve specified your options and param
100. following The coordinates of the plan system are considered fixed and error free Equal weighting is applied to all measured coordinates in the local system that are used to calculate the solution Completion of the gps observations to the control stations will produce a list of point pairs with the ter restrial determined points 100 205 being termed control points and the GPS determined points 1000 1204 being termed local points The computed transformation parameters will provide the trans formation to go from measured local points to resulting plan points The transformation utility in FieldGenius is started by going to the Main Menu Survey Tools GPS Local Transformation but ton 467 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 GPS Local Transformation es Edit Control Calculate Scale GPS Adjust Points Origin North 0 00 Origin East 0 00 Trans North 0 00 Trans East 0 00 Rotation 0 00 00 4 Scale 1 0000000000 Trans Height 0 00 X Close To begin computing the transformation you need to define the point pairs You can do this by pressing the Edit Control button which will open the point pair s screen Use the Add Control button to add control points to the list and to define the measured coordinate the control point should be constrained to Note Control points are points that reside in the plan system and are considered to be fixed Inthis example control points 100 101 102 103 105 106 202 203
101. following sections for a detailed explanation of how each mode is used Please see the GNSS Measurement Modes topic for details on how to access these modes Known Geodetic Position Use this when you know the geodetic position of the point the base is setup on You have two options you can program it with a known Geodetic or known Cartesian Coordinate Reference Position Ss Geodetic Cartesian Latitude Northing N49 49 51 44182 18120471 61 Longitude Easting W119 37 14 86577 1022072 87 Ellipsoidal Hgt Orthometric Hgt 388 29 388 29 Select Position From Database Modify Antenna Height Y Set Position X Cancel 413 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Geodetic Coordinates Enter the know Latitude Longitude and Ellipsoidal Height for your base setup The coordinates you enter here will be programmed into the receiver Cartesian Coordinates Cartesian coordinates can be SPCS UTM coordinates or any other grid system as long as it matches the horizontal and vertical system you ve defined in your GPS profile You can not enter local coordinates as Cartesian coordinates Doing so will cause a warning message to be displayed indicating that the coordinates you entered do not fall inside the GPS grid files you have loaded on your data collector Select Position from Database This allows you to choose a point a number of different ways The point you select must be a grid coordinate such as a SPCS or UTM coordina
102. help creating a new GeoMax target New Target se Target Name Johns Target Target Type Prism Prism Icon User Defined Prism Constant mm 0 0mm Y Save X Cancel Target Name Use this field to either edit or enter a new name for the target you are editing 345 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Target Type There are two target types available to select Prism is to be used when you are selecting a target that has a known offset This can be a round prism 360 mini etc RL stands for reflectorless and you should select this target type if you are using an instrument that is reflectorless capable and you do not wish to use a designated reflector Prism Icon Use this field to select an icon for your new target Prism Constant This defines the relation of the distance measurement to the mechanical reference point of the reflector Your prism will have a published prism constant also called and offset Save Press this button to store your new changes to the Settings xml file and return you to the Target List screen Cancel Press this buton to cancel creating a new target You will be returned to the Target List screen Edit Target MapView Target Manager Target List Use this option to edit an existing target You will also see this display after you copy an existing tar get Click here for help on editing a Leica Geosystems target Click here for help on editing a GeoMax target 346 Edit Target
103. information Active Tolerance Description This displays the current tolerance mode which can be changed at any time during your survey by selecting the GPS Settings button in the GPS toolbar Please see the GPS Tolerance Modes Rover topic for more information Antenna Height The antenna settings are used to calculate or enter the height of the antenna phase center above the ground Please see the GPS Antenna Configuration topic for more information Auto Recording The Auto Recording settings are used for collecting data ina Kinematic mode The receiver can automatically log a point every X distance or Y seconds The user simply selects what option they prefer to use for logging Kinematic data and start the survey Keep in mind while collecting data at higher velocities that FieldGenius receives position updates from the GPS at a maximum rate of once per second GPS Model and Communication The Model and Communication settings are used to select the Make and Model of receiver the port that the data collector is connected to and other communication parameters 402 Cable Connection Model and Communication so Make Leica gt Model 6S15 Status Not Connected Port Bluetooth Bluetooth Search Device GS1502868 r Connect X Close Model Specify the make and model of receiver you are connecting to Sensor Port If your receiver has more than one data port specify the port on the receiver that the da
104. is currently open Projects that have been deleted can not be restored Exit To exit from the project manager press the Exit button 115 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 ROADS Main Menu Roads Manager To stake an alignment you first need to define the geometry that defines the horizontal and vertical ele ment You can also define a template that will be used to define cross sections at specific stations along the alignment FieldGenius can use the following three methods to define an alignment 1 Manual Entry You can manually enter the data to define the alignment 2 Import XML You can import a LandXML file that contains your alignment data Roads Manager Em 123 Ga muere Manage Road Road 1 Add Road Delete Road Map View Close 400 By default you will see an alignment in the list with the current project name A project can contain multiple roads and each road can contain the following elements e Horizontal Element This can contain straight tangents curves and spirals e Vertical Element This can contain grade breaks parabolic curves and non symmetrical curves e Templates Template can contain horizontal and vertical offsets as well as widening and super elevation data 116 Roads e XML Cross Sections XML cross sections define specific stations along an alignment These sections contain horizontal vertical and template data XML cross sections are created usin
105. is lower than the interpolated station elevation in the Observation Toolbar near the top of the screen When using this method be sure to set the Orientation Reference option to Prism for a conventional total station Instrument for a robotic total station North for GPS staking or use one of the other ref erence options if preferred You can force FieldGenius to display either In Out or Left Right distances by changing the Line Mode option in the Staking Settings Stationing Absolute This method will display the current Station Offset and Cut Fill distances relative to the line in the Observation Toolbar near the top of the screen The station point is marked by a blue circle on the line the Offset is the Left Right distance from the blue station point to the current rod position and the Cut Fill is the elevation difference from the current rod position to the interpolated elevation of the sta tion point where a cut represents that the rod is higher than the interpolated station elevation and a fill represent that the rod is lower than the interpolated station elevation Stationing Relative This method will display the current Station Offset and Cut Fill distances relative to the line in the Observation Toolbar near the top of the screen The station point is marked by a blue circle on the line the Offset is the Left Right distance from the blue station point to the current rod position and the Cut Fill is the elevation diff
106. is the third figure using the description E ASPH pee g 11 2 Om me EJASPH After the second point for this line has been recorded the first segment will be created From this point forward simply continue taking shots to add to the now current Active Line E ASPH 3 95 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Ms ol kol oe ID EJASPH Note the insertion of 3 this is the group number Re use of the Description E ASPH for a new line series in the current project will automatically increment the group number by one This allows you track and store multiple active lines of the same description without the need for multiple entries in your AutoMap Library For example E ASPH2 E ASPH3 E ASPH4 9 can now be replaced with a single E ASPH entry Stop adding to a Line If you wish to stop adding to the current line simply deselect the current draw option Line Curvy line before taking any more shots After turning off the draw option lt No line gt will display in the Active Lines list button Start a subsequent New Line Much like the first line in the project just select the desired description from the list and select the desired draw option before shooting the first point for the new line The key to note is the display of lt Start line gt in the Active Lines list Once the first point for the new line has been measured the Active Lines list will set and display the new line as current Change Description
107. layer status will be saved so that the next time the project is opened the layer visibility will automatically be set the same as you had left it so layers that were turned off will remain turned off the next time the project is opened up DXF Files Layer Manager Westbank DXF 0 Hw ROADS E Oliver Arch 2 dxF Do Blanks O Details Legal Block Line DO Legal Text Description ns mo area Add File Remove File File Settings You can load multiple DXF files into your FieldGenius project and control the visibility of each of their layers independently from the others You can control the visibility of the entire DXF file by checking or unchecking the box beside the name of the DXF file under the DXF Files section of the tree If the box is checked then the file is turned on and all of its layers will be visible if unchecked then the file and all of its layers is turned off and it will not be visible If the box has another smaller square inside it this means that some of its lay ers are turned on and other layers are turned off You can control the visibility of individual layers by expanding the name of the DXF file under the DXF Files section of the tree and checking or unchecking the box beside the name of the layer If the box is checked then the layer is turned on and entities on that layer will be visible if unchecked then the layer is turned off and entities on it will not be visible When you
108. manually enter in the point you would like to stake Point Desc This shows the description of the current design point 275 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Previous amp Next Use this to automatically advance to the next or previous point in your database Note that you need to have a value entered in the point number field If you have a staking list defined using these buttons will advance to the next or previous point sequence in the staking list Nearest Search This will automatically select the closet point to stake Use List Use this to force the staking routine to use the staking list you created If you haven t created a the staking list yet you can press the Edit List button which will take you to the staking list editor Edit Staking List Use this to open the staking list editor Please see the Staking List topic for more information Offset Direction amp Distance Use this to compute an offset from your design point If you leave the distance field set to zero an off set will not be computed You can use angle and distance recall features to help you compute your val ues Northing Easting amp Elevation This will display the design coordinates for the point listed in the point number field If you specify an offset then the northing and easting will be recalculated based on the offset you entered The elev ation is of the point listed in the point id field and is not affected by an offset Stake Point butt
109. match up with one another Once you specify your constrain points you can press the Calculate Parameters button which will compute the transformation parameters The deltas shown are the differences between the control points and the measured points if the transformation parameters were applied When you re satisfied with the transformation parameters the control point pairs and transformation parameters will be saved to the raw file upon exit Transformation Settings Calculate Parameters Use this to compute the transformation parameters You have to have constrain point pairs defined before you will see anything calculated Calculate Scale GPS When this is used it will compute the combined scale factor at your current position This can be used while you re connected to either a base or rover receiver The combined scale factor is computed by multiplying the map scale by the ellipsoid scale factor The combined factor can then be applied to grid distances to get ground distances While programming the base if you use the one point localization option to help you localize into a user defined local system FieldGenius will automatically compute a combined scale factor and a translation For the most part the scale factor will not change very much over the workable range of your RTK system But if you want to update the combined scale factor you can Adjust Points Use this to compute new coordinates for your GPS derived points Each
110. measurements Once the transformation parameters have been adequately determined all future GPS measured coordinates will automatically be transformed All constrained point pairs will be saved along with the transformation parameters for the current project upon exiting the utility and will be saved to the raw file l Only use a local transformation if necessary GPS heights should be applied with a suitable geoid model If possible only use ver tical bias Trans Height because solving for slope North and slope East with inad equate control can severely distort the parameters Use redundancy for confirming parameters Raw File Information Whenever you compute transformation parameters they re automatically written to the raw file when you exit the command Once the parameters are saved they will automatically be read in again if you use the Transformation Command FieldGenius will always start at the top of your raw file and will process the calibration records as they re found The control points you define are saved as a CT record and will always have an associated RP record RP records store the measured coordinate that you defined for the control point Following the calibration points are a HA and VA records which store the transformation parameters that were computed Following is an example of what you might see in your raw file Calibration Points PN15 DM4 RH6 708 RV0 000 PN15 N 11 0000 E 30 0000 EL0 0000
111. meters based on the control pair that has been added The following tabular columns denote residuals in northing easting and height and for this case are all zero due to the transformation being minimally constrained ss 8 O Add Control T Do not calculate scale T Do not calculate vertical slopes Ctrl Pnt Horz vert an dE dH 1103 0 000 0 000 0 000 Figure 10 FieldGenius Contrained Points for Transformation The calculated transformation parameters can be viewed by choosing Close and returning to the Para meters page Since only one point pair is being constrained the utility has only determined a trans lation in northing translation in easting and vertical bias The addition of more point pairs would allow for scale rotation and slopes in X and Y to be determined 8 9 Edit Control Calculate Scale GPS Adjust Points Origin North 5523295 939m Origin East 311585 808m Trans North 1200 000m Trans East 1200 000m Rotation 0 00 00 Scale 1 0000000000 Trans Height 401 103m 460 Figure 11 FieldGenius Calculated Transformation Parameters The map view of FieldGenius will now show the effect of the transformation by showing the new pos ition of the GPS position cursor and denoting new coordinate values Retuming to point 103 with the rover station will verify the transformation process New points measured with GPS will reflect the HAARAA Sx PORE na seas PDOP E 1183 225m
112. of the fact that the source data for both Canada and the United States extend beyond their political boundaries and therefore the choice of the source data is critical to avoid coordinate deviations The remainder of this section contains the boundary information for the user grid and its format will depend on the selected coordinate type and the selected grid area Linear Cartesian coordinates do not need to be appended with a unit designator Geodetic coordinates must be delimited with spaces to denote direction degrees minutes and seconds Listed below are possible entries for geodetic coordinates with all being equivalent in value N 49 12 9 0 direction degrees minutes decimal seconds N 49 12 15 direction degrees decimal minutes N 49 2025 direction decimal degrees Grid Creation Once all parameters have been carefully selected the sub grids can be produced by pressing the Create button The time period for building the grids will depend on the area of the chosen grids and completion will be indicated by the following dialog which reiterates the grid extents and the total size of the sub grids and supporting files If the source path or export path described above are invalid the appropriate message box will be presented to denote the error 445 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Extracted Grid Information NW Lat 49 009 MW Lon 119 002 SE Lat 47 00 SE Lon 116 009 Total Size 1529 KB Transferring Data The
113. of travel Instrument Settings This opens the Instrument Settings Toolbar On this toolbar you can control specific settings for your total station such as EDM modes Target Manager Press this button to access the Target Manager Here you can create edit copy and delete targets Sideshot Total Station Reference Measurement Mode This button will open the Select Measurement Mode screen From here you can select what type of measurement you will be using When you choose your mode this button will display the mode you re using For example if you re using the Distance Off set mode the button will display Dist Off Measure Button KY Use this to trigger your total station to take a measurement If you are using a conventional non robotic total station please see the Instrument Toolbar topic If you are using GPS please see the GPS Toolbar topic Instrument Settings Main Menu Settings Instrument Settings Instrument Toolbar Instrument Settings Instrument Settings GOD Set Guide Light On A Set Laser Pointer On H Map Auto Center On Set ATR On a Level Instrument AA E Joystick Es Instrument Information 6 8 A afn EDM Settings x Search Settings 7 9 Instrument Disconnect Cancel Use the vertical scroll bar along the side to access additional instrument settings if they cannot all fit on screen at the same time Please note that not every instrument supports ea
114. or Microsoft Windows Mobile Device Center might be already be installed on your computer you can confirm this by looking for it in your Windows Start Menu If you do not have Microsoft ActiveSync or the Windows Mobile Device Center installed and you don t have access to the internet it can be installed from your FieldGenius CD You can browse into the FieldGenius folder on your CD and run one of the following files MSASYNC EXE for Windows XP or earlier MSWMDC32 EXE for Windows Vista 32 bit MSWMDC64 EXE for Windows Vista 64 bit Note You may be asked to reboot your system once the installation is complete 517 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Connecting ActiveSync Windows Mobile Device Center Get Connected We now need to establish a connection between your data collector and desktop computer as promp ted by the ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center Connection Wizard The following screen shots are specific to ActiveSync but the Mobile Device Center is almost identical After the install is complete ActiveSync will display a Get Connected screen If ActiveSync was already installed you can start it by going to your Start menu All Programs Microsoft ActiveSync The Get Connected Wizard should appear If it does not go to the ActiveSync File menu and select Get Connected Get Connected Get Connected To connect your device to this PC 1 Connect the cable to the PC 2 Turn on the device 3 Connect
115. or not carefully sighting the prism Large errors can also happen if the geometry defined by the known points is not in the same place as it was when the points were previously measured Please note that while the Standard Deviation relates to the quality of your resection it is possible to have a low StdDev yet still have a high positional error As such it is important that you also look at the angle and distance errors shown in the Information screen when considering the overall accuracy of your resection Information Horizontal and Vertical Filters You can enter this screen by pressing the Information button on the top right corner of the ref erence point toolbar When you do you will see a detailed summary of the measurements Valid Solution StdDev N 0 014m E 0 053m y y n Point Backsight Use H Use V HA Error HD Error VD Error ica al lt A 2 0 010m 0 000m F a 3 0 00 07 0 010m 0 000m x Cue You can determine how each shot to the reference points should be used to compute the resection point By default each observation you make will be used to compute both the horizontal and vertical 171 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 position of the resection solution but you can override this by setting the Use H and Use V options for each measurement This shot will be used to compute both the horizontal and vertical position E X This shot will be used to compute only the horizontal pos
116. point selection mode and will only accept points picked from the map or point numbers that are typed in This button acts as a toggle and will toggle between Select Point and Select Line Line If you are defining a straight segment then you should leave the Line button turned on Simply select two points from the map or enter the point numbers manually Rad Arc Use this to define a curved segment where you know the start radius and end points You need to first pick the start of the arc then press the Rad Arc button to define the radius point After doing so the program will automatically switch back to the Line segment type which at that time you should select the end of the arc 3 Pnt Arc Use this to define a curved segment where you know three points on the arc You need to first pick the start of the arc then press the 3 Pnt Arc button which will allow you to define two more points on the arc for a total of three points The program will automatically switch back to the Line segment type after the third point is selected 255 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Remove Previous Use this to remove segments that were defined for the area boundary This will remove the segments one at a time starting with the last segment that was defined Define Area Toolbar Line Select E lee Remove x Switch Direction Previous Select Line The define area toolbar is used to help you define an area If the first button is set to
117. point should not be included in your pattern at 0 0 You can also rotate the pattern into any orientation on the Pattern Toolbar see 79 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 above so you do not need to create different variations of the same pattern to insert it in different ori entations Press the Delete Point button to remove the selected X Y offset from the pattem Load Pattern Press this button to load a previously saved pattern file Save Pattern Press this button to save the current pattern to disk This will always do a Save As type save so you can specify a new filename or select any existing pattern file to overwrite it with the changes You will always be prompted for confirmation before over writing an existing pattern file New Pattern To create a new pattern simply delete all of the existing points from the current pattern When you press the Save Pattern button you will always be prompted for a new filename so you will not lose the previous pattern Close Press this button to close the Pattern Editor and retum to the Pattern Toolbar If you have not saved the current pattern you will be prompted to confirm this before discarding your changes Partition Lines Arcs Line Toolbar Partition button The Partition command is started by selecting a valid line or arc in the map screen which will open the Line Toolbar where you can select the partition button After you select the partition button you will see t
118. points are a HA and VA records which store the transformation parameters that were computed Following is an example of what you might see in your raw file __calibration Points or PN15 DM4 RH6 708 RVO 000 ep PNLS N 11 0000 E 30 0000 EL0 0000 on PN16 DM4 RHS 243 RVO 000 RP PNIG N 30 0000 E 30 0000 EL0 0000 le lR T PN17 DM4 RH6 708 RVO 000 P PN17 N 30 0000 E 11 0000 EL0 0000 oe 23 6667 E 23 6667 TH6 6667 TE6 6667 RTO 000000000 SC1 0000000000 VA PV3 N 23 6667 E 23 6667 1L20 0000 S00 00000 SA0 00000 GN An important thing to remember is that if any of the original measured points you used in the cal ibration change you need to go back into the transformation command and edit the corresponding con trol point You need to re define the measured coordinates for the control point then press the Calc Parameters button to update the transformation parameters Local Transformation Dueto a variety of reasons it may be necessary to adjust position coordinates for distortions which can include scale rotation translation in northing and translation in easting The flexibility of FieldGenius s local transformation utility allows it to be used for a variety of applications and applied to positions derived from GPS or terrestrial observations For GPS applications there are two possible reasons for the need of a transformation 1 Translating from Local System to Plan Syst
119. project Delete Project To delete a project you first need to select it in the list and then press the Delete button You will be asked to confirm that you really want to delete the project You can not delete a project that is currently open Projects that have been deleted can not be restored Exit To exit from the project manager press the Exit button Project Review When you create a new or open an existing FieldGenius project you will always see the Project Review screen For most projects all you need to select is the Automap Library Template File that you want to use Open Project Files FG Sample 2 8B Generate New Name Active Raw File FG Sample raw F Encrypte Copy Existing Project Automap FG Sample_automap csv r Use Template survey csv Feature File Y Continue Cancel Select Automap Template File This indicates the Automap Library Template that will be loaded into the project You can change it by pressing the button and either choosing a different template library or creating a new blank library 31 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Automap files contain pre defined descriptions that can be used in FieldGenius The template library that you select will be copied into the project s folder with a name of yourprojectname_automap csv and any changes that you make to the Automap Library will affect only the project library not the tem plate library Select Feat
120. screen Smart Tags When you select an existing or create a figure in your drawing you will see smart tags appear on the points that make up the figure Smart Tag T The T smart tag define points connected to straight line segments ii 12 pH PIN PIN Smart Tag M The M smart tag defines the mid point of an arc 22 f PIN 21 e E Smart Tag C The C smart tag define points connected by a curvy line type 42 PIN 3 IN 13 IN 112 Main Menu Main Menu On the main interface of FieldGenius you will see the FieldGenius Start icon which will always activ ate the main menu or display the previously viewed sub menu When the button is pressed you will see the main menu screen Project FG Sample e Y Project Manager AN Staking 92 Settings O Roads Manager TA A Survey Modes T Data Manager Survey Tools E Import Export Calculations E3 About 008 4 Map View X Exit On the main menu pressing any of the buttons will take you to its sub menu From any sub menu pressing the Menu Home button will return you to this menu The Map View button will close the main menu and take you back to the map view The Exit button will close FieldGenius Project Manager Selecting this will allow you to create open or delete projects Please see the Project Manager topic for more information Settings Select this to check or change settings for FieldGenius Please see
121. selected for staking or viewing inform ation The Project Manager is used for visibility of these items and you can drill down into the com ponents right to the coordinate level Reading the basic alignment information is done when you import the LandXML file Alignments gen erally are not too large so we read the alignment profile and cross sections into memory for later use There may be several surfaces in an alignment so you can view each cross section surface sep arately Each may be staked In this sample file there are several alignments Each alignment can be turned on or off or just the cross sections for an alignment can be turned off Following is a tiny excerpt from the first few lines of this LandXML file Fortunately it is rarely neces sary to open a file however if you open one in Internet Explorer you will see the format They are eas ily explored because you can collapse sections of the file by picking on the negative signs at the beginning of the lines in Internet Explorer In this picture all of the file has been collapsed except for the header It is easy to see that the file was created by Autodesk Land Desktop version 3 with Ser vice Pack 1 installed 331 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 lt xml version 1 0 gt lt LandXML xmins http www landxml org schema LandXML 1 0 xmins xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance xsi schemaLocation http www landxml org schema LandXML 1 0 http
122. shoot your points When you press the description button you will see a screen listing all the descriptions read in from your AutoMap Library Select the description you want to use and press the OK button You can type in the letters of the description which will automatically scroll to the descrip tions matching your entry 3D View Toolbar The 3D View toolbar is used to help you view your project in a 3D perspective You can also define a virtual grid that will displayed in the drawing and can be turned on and off Hz Grid Fh B a PA To turn this feature on select the 3D View button on the Display toolbar When you do this the 3D View Toolbar will appear at the bottom of your screen The buttons on the toolbar are described below 3D View E When this is turned on you will be able to rotate your project in a 3D perspective This tool is handy when used in conjunction with surfaces road alignments or vertical pro jections To return to plan view close the 3D View toolbar and press the Zoom Extents button It can also help you find points that have incorrect elevations Center on Point za Use this to center the view on the selected point This will not change your current view rotation or zoom depth Hz Grid Use this to turn on a horizontal grid that will be displayed in your drawing You can set the grid spacing in the settings 59 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Vert Grid Use this when using the Vertical Pr
123. so the points and figures will be automatically layered for you SDR File Export Main Menu Import Export SDR File Export The SDR Export in FieldGenius will convert the existing raw file into a SDR 33 compatible format It is important to note that currently not all existing raw record types are exported through the SDR export Currently the following types are exported 336 Import Export Menu e Store Points e Job Info e Units e Notes Comments e Occupy Setups e Sideshots e Stakeout shots e Target Heights e Resection measurements are not exported but computed resection point exported as Store Point e The resulting SS or TR shot for multisets will be exported as a sideshot e The resulting SS or TR shot for angle or distance offsets will be exported as a sideshot e Calculated points will be stored as a Store Point e Adjusted Points are exported as Store Points The following record types are not currently exported e GPS Datum Settings e GPS Transformation Parameters e GPS Measurements Function 1 Select SDR File Export from the Import Export menu 2 Browse to the folder where you want to save the file enter a filename then press Save File FieldGenius will add a sdr extension to the filename if you did not include it Shapefile Export Main Menu Import Export Shapefile Export Use this to export your points and linework in a shape file format This can then be imported into products
124. t changed very much you can save some time by using the Apply the current orientation observation to the Multi Set data set option If you select Yes it will take the last backsight measurement you made and use it for the multiset session Multi Set Setup Y7 Apply the current orientation observation to the Multi Set data set G B You will then see the Setup Occupy Point screen If you ve already established a setup it will display the same information that you previously entered Press the Continue Multi Set button to proceed to the Multi Set Point List screen U nlike the regular setup routine you will not be required to immediately shoot your backsight 164 Survey Methods Menu Multi Set Point List Add T Auto Turn Obs Fi j lt This is the control center for recording your sets It will begin with a record for your backsight and your foresight measurements will be listed after it in order that they are measured Pnt This is the point number of the point you ve measured for your backsight and foresight points If you see the word Bearing this indicates that you assumed a backsight direction Type This is the type of measurement that was measured It will be either a BS backsight or FS foresight measurement Obs F1 This will list the total Face 1 Direct observations that were recorded for the point Obs F2 This will list the total Face 2 Reverse observations that were
125. that support shape files This export will create a DBF SHP and a SHX file for the linework and points in your project For example if your project name was FG Sample the following files will be created for the linework 337 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 FG Sample_POLYLINE shx FG Sample_POLYLINE shp FG Sample_POLYLINE dbf For the points in your project FieldGenius already stores points ina DBF file FG Sample dbf so only two other files will be created FG Sample shx FG Sample shp Function 1 Select Shapefile Export from the Import Export menu 2 You will see a message indicating Shapefile export complete Importing into ESRI or other application To open these files in a compatible product you need to ensure you have all six file saved in the same directory For more information on shape files visit www esri com Import Export User Defined Coordinate Systems User defined coordinate systems created by a user are saved in the binary mapping system files It is useful to be able to export these user created coordinate systems for the following reasons 1 A backup of your user defined coordinate systems 2 Allows you to share user defined coordinate systems with other crews 3 Allows you to load user defined coordinate systems after installing a FieldGenius update Export When you export the user defined coordinate systems you will be able to specify a directory to save the file to and a name for the file
126. the Settings Menu topic for more information 113 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 SurveyMethods Select this to select measurement modes such as occupying a point checking a point or measuring an offset Please see the SurveyMethods Menu topic for more information Survey Tools Select this to execute tools such as manually storing new points deleting undoing the previously measured point or viewing the raw file Please see the SurveyTools Menu topic for more information Calculations Select this to use our calculating functions such as COGO and inversing Please see the Cal culations Menu topic for more information Staking Select this to access our staking functions Please see the Staking Menu topic for more information Roads Manager Use this to access tools that will help you create or edit alignments templates and profiles Please see the Roads Manager Menu topic for more information Data Manager Use this to manage your points DXF files and surfaces Please see the Data Manager Menu topic for more information Import Export Select this to import or export ASCII files and to export DXF XML and other files Please see the Import Export Menu topic for more information Please note additional file types can be imported from the Surfaces and the Map Data Layers com mands both located in the Data Manager menu About Select this to see what build and which modules you have registered for FieldGenius Please see the
127. the Windows Mobile operating system that have a landscape display Map Color Use this to force the background color for the main drawing area to be white or black Map Orientation Using this will force the map screen to be oriented to the north or south This is needed for coordinate systems that are referenced south such as in South Africa This is different from South Azimuth dir ections as used in Hawaii Map Resolution This option determines the number of segments that will displayed in an arc on the screen Reducing this number increases program speed increasing this number slows down graphics display but improves the quality of arcs and curvy lines displayed on the screen Text Size Info Grid Use this to force the text shown in the Information screens such as the Observation toolbar and the COGO History screen and grid screens such as the Project Manager and Angle Offset shots to use asmall or large sized text Show Scale Bar Use this to turn the scale bar shown on the main map screen on or off 121 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 User Input Options Extended Edit Boxes Use this to control how you want to bring up the selected keypad when tapping in an edit box either with a single tap a double tap or off Users of devices with a keyboard should leave this set to Double Click and users of devices without a keyboard should set this to Single Click Setting this to Off disables both the keypad and any other co
128. the average In our example the HA and VA on the face 1 measurement was larger than the average direction by 11 seconds By default all measurements will be used to compute the averaged position However you can decide what measurements you want to use to compute the averaged position by pressing the green checkmark icon Doing so will switch it to a red X which will remove it from the computation Notes about measuring the Backsight When you first begin the multi set routine you are not required to shoot the backsight prior to meas uring a foresight You are not required to have both a Face 1 and Face 2 reading recorded for the backsight A meas urement on either face will work but it is common practice to record both measuring a Foresight To record a foresight measurement you first have to define a point number in the Point ID field towards the top of the multi set point list Press the Next button to display the next available point ID or type in the Point ID you want to use Then press the Add button to add the new Point ID into the 166 Survey Methods Menu Multi Set Point List After you add the new point number follow these steps to record the measurement Press the Measure button to start the measurement process On the map screen confirm that you have selected the correct target height 3 When you re ready to record the measurement press the Measure button on the instrument toolbar 4 You will automatical
129. the device to the cable ActiveSync should automatically detect your device If your device is not automatically detected click Next If you are using infrared IR or Bluetooth click Help lt Back Cancel Help Connect your handheld data collector to your desktop or laptop computer using the supplied cradle and or cables Power ON the data collector and click Next on the Get Connected Wizard Some devices require you to tap a PC Link icon on the device while the Get Connected function is in operation 518 Connecting to Computer When communication is established you will be prompted to set up a partnership between your data collector and the desktop computer Note If your device does not connect as shown turn the device off and then back on again to retry Establish a Guest Connection After you successfully connect to your computer you will be asked to setup a partnership Choose Guest Partnership then click Next to continue You can setup a Standard Partnership if desired but this is not necessary and adds complexity We recommend using a Guest Partnership New Partnership Set Up a Partnership This wizard helps you establish a partnership between your mobile device and this computer You can set up either a standard partnership to synchronize data between your device and this computer or a quest partnership to simply transfer data between your device and this computer What kind of partnersh
130. the map screen to open the Roads Manager or you can access it form the Roads Menu In this menu you can select the alignment that has the cross sec tions and then press the Road Settings button You then have to select the cross section that you want to use by selecting it in the cross sections field Road Road 1 23 Start Station 0 00 000 Northing 20000 00 Start Pnt Easting S000 000 WwW Alignment C L EEC W Vertical Profile ENC C Yv Template e W Cross Sections EMC DESIGN DESIGN1 CW DT Surface osan Desn me y OK Y Stake Road Xx Cancel When you press the Stake Road button you will see the Stake Alignment screen which is described in detail above Alignment Offset Staking Continued from Alignment Staking 505 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Alignment Road 1 m12 Tete tem E Station 4400 00 imt 100 00 Prev nee Offset 12 00 Dir Rit Let Right Stake Offset 12 00 Setback 0 00 Elevation 99 76 Vert Offset 0 00 2 2 x 0 E E Q slo Stl lR cor From the stake alignment screen when you press the Stake Offset button if you are staking witha robotic instrument or GPS you will immediately see the staking toolbar If you are staking with a con ventional instrument you will see the turn to information first directing you to the design point Rotate instrument to HA 19 36 37 VA 90 01 51 SD 446 94 HD 446 94 r WY Continue Zero Plate E Ca
131. the stake offset field will update automatically 502 Roads ake Alignment Road 1 312309 replies romea O NON Station 4400 00 int 100 00 Prev nea Offset 1200 Dir Right _Left Right Stake Offset 15 00 setbak 3o Elevation 99 765 Vertoffset 0 00 2 2 so gt p p AAA om You will note that when a setback or stake offset is defined you will see an orange circle in the pre view screen This circle indicates the location of the setback Note If you want to make sure that you re staking nothing but design points along the template then make sure the Setback field is equal to 0 0 Elevation and Vertical Offset Elevation The field will show you the computed elevation on the template at the design offset specified This value can be changed to allow you stake a different elevation Vertical Offset This field works in conjunction with the elevation field If the user enters a different elevation than the one that was computed on the template the difference between the elevations is shown in the ver tical offset field If you know what the vertical offset is for the point you re staking on the template you can enter it in this field You will see the elevation for the point update to reflect the offset you defined 503 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Stake Alignment Road 1 12 a Saa 2100 00 Jl nos ome Offset 1200 Dir Rigt teft Rioht Stake Offset 12 00 setback 0 00 Elevation 97
132. this is unchecked a surface volume calculation will be computed for the entire surface If this is checked an area volume calculation will be computed for a portion of the surface bounded by an area you define You can press the Define Area button to select a closed figure to assign as a boundary for the volume calculation After you have selected the figure press Close to return to the Volumes Calculation screen Select figure to define area For volume calculations Close Calculate Pressing this will calculate and display the positive negative and net volumes the average thick ness and the area of the surface from either the selected datum elevation or reference surface all constrained within the selected closed figure if selected 310 Data Manager Menu Volume Calculation Calculated Surface Point Database Datum 898 000m Positive Volume 56400 170 69 787 56330 383 Average Thickness 7 07lm Plan Area 7966 5279 m The results will also be written into the project s CogoCalcs txt history file which can be viewed by going to Main Menu Survey Tools COGO History Viewer Realtime DTM Surface FieldGenius creates and manipulates a 3D surface from data collected in the field or from data impor ted through LandXML QSB or ASCII point files A FieldGenius surface is a mathematical description of a surface that exactly honors all input 3D data points and lines A Surface represents the existing topography
133. to this Target Height field The default height is defined in the Default Settings screen EDM Mode Use this field to select the EDM mode you would like to use Typically you will want to select an EDM mode that corresponds to your target type Leica Constant This field will display the Leica constant associated with your target See the New or Edit Target Help for an explanation of how to compute a Leica constant This will be especially important if you are using a non Leica target OK This records the settings you have just made closes the Target Manager and returns you to the MapView Target List Press this button to access the Target List Here you can create copy edit and delete targets Cancel Press this button to discard any changed made to the Backsight dialog and returns you to the MapView Target Manager Foresight Use the Foresight screen to select the foresight target choose a measure mode and enter a target height You also have the option of using a temporary target height Tap on the Foresight tab at the top of the screen to access the Foresight section 365 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Target Manager S Backsight i k jl Target Leica Round Prism Target Height 2 000m Er emp HARARE 2000 lt EDM Mode IR Standard gt Leica Constant 0 0mm CA OK Target List Default Settings X Cancel Target Use this field to select a foresight target Target Height Enter the height of your f
134. value as the reference point While the invert toolbar is open you can continue entering invert measurements or choose different reference points Raw File When you save the point an offset and store point record will be created __0S5 0P7 FP8 NDO0 000 ED0 000 LD5 000 SP PN8 N 935 976 E 1232 356 EL5 000 lt No Desc gt i Vertical Plane Projection Main Menu Survey Methods Vertical Plane Projection This function is for locating multiple points on a vertical place defined by two previously measured points The program will calculate the distance for each shot taken to an un measurable position so that coordinates can be generated for the shot An example of how you could use this would be to shoot two corners of a wall to define a vertical plane Then you could sight four corners for window on the second floor and FieldGenius will use the HA and VA values and compute the intersection with the vertical plane Once the intersection is com puted the point will be stored Function When the command is started you will see a screen that will allow you to specify the points that will form the baseline for the vertical plane 200 Survey Methods Menu Vertical Plane Projection 123 Select two points on a line which will define the vertical plane First Pnt zi E7 Second pre 28 28 y OK Xx Cancel Note You need to measure and store the points that will be used to define t
135. within an Active Line You may change the description within one ongoing line Simply choose a different description and continue taking shots The ID of the Active Line will not change Figure Direction Marker The current line in the map is always defined by a bold outline and a blue X at the end of the line The blue X indicates the line direction so you know what end of the line the next measurement will be con nected to 96 Points Lines Descriptions You can see that the blue X is on point 29 After you take your next shot it will be automatically con nected to this point Line E ASPH 3 28 to 29 N rao 12 x a e i s 10 8 E 11 1 14 ARSE IFA HSA A X E Once you select the figure you will see the line toolbar On this toolbar select this but La ton to reverse the direction After you switch the direction you will see the blue X move to the opposite end of the figure Line E ASPH 3 28 to 29 N rao 12 a 9 Bro 13 10 xs gh 11 1 14 a A NGA Ad PISA Ole Pre selection of Line Descriptions A list of Active Lines Figures may be pre specified to aid in planning for a complicated project Use the New Figure button on the Active Line List screen to specify a Line Description before taking any shots 97 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 New Figure T New Figure will be E ASPH 4 Choose Line Description E ASPH Enter a comment for this line G a B o You
136. www landxml org schema LandXML 1 0 LandXML 1 0 xsd version 1 0 time 10 08 09 readOnly false language English gt lt Project name subdivision gt lt Units gt lt Application name Land Desktop manufacturer Autodesk version 3 Service Pac manufacturerURL Www autodesk com gt lt CgPoints gt lt Surfaces gt lt Parcels gt lt Alignments gt lt LandXML gt Parcels Lots Parcels are displayed in the graphics when you import a LandXML file You can select the lines to get basic information and you can drill down into the Project Manager to see more details The points that define a Parcel are stored in the CgPoints section of the LandXML file If you want to see the point numbers on the screen then you need to load the CgPoints If you want to stake the points then you need to load the CgPoints into the Points DB Chains Figures These LandXML items may or may not appear because a chain can cross from one CgPoints set to another This means that if you do not have all the CgPoint sets loaded then the chains cannot appear LandXML File Export Main Menu Import Export LandXML COGO Points Chains Export When this is used a LandXML file will be created All the points in the current project will be exported as CgPoints and all the figures will be converted into Chains Function 1 Select LandXML COGO Points Chains Export from the Import Export menu 2 Browse to the folder where
137. you to its sub menu Stake Points Use this to stake points from a list or from a screen selection Please see the Stake Points topic for more information Stake Line Use this to stake lines and arcs Please see the Stake Line topic for more information Stake Surface Use this to stake to a DTM Digital Terrain Model surface Please see the Stake Surface topic for more information Staking List Use this to define a staking list that can be used for staking Please see the Staking List topic for more information 274 Staking Menu Stake Alignment Use this to open the alignment tools screen Please see the Stake Alignment topic for more inform ation Cut Sheet Reports Use this to open the Cut Sheet Reports screen Please see the Cut Sheet Reports topic for more information Stake Points Main Menu Staking Stake Point Point Toolbar Stake Step 1 Select Design Point When you start the stake points command you will be able to pick a point from the map or enter a point id in the point id field or use a point list by turning on the Use List toggle Point Staking 8 Point ID 1 Prev Next Point Desc MARA Nearest Search T Use List Edit Staking List Design Point Offset Direction 0 00 00 Northing 5523093 929m Distance Easting 311584 666m 0 000m Elevation 384 037m r Do not show this screen again Y Stake Point Close Point ID This allows you to
138. you want to save the file enter a filename then press Save File 332 Import Export Menu FieldGenius will add a xml extension to the filename if you did not include it Template Import Main Menu Edit Menu Template Import If you have a template file saved you can import it back into your project When you start the com mand you will see the file browse dialog that allows you to find and open the template file After which you will see the template import toolbar If you need to create a template file refer to the Template Export topic Select Insert Pnt 40m Rotate 0 00 00 x Cancel Select Insertion Point After you select the template you can select the insertion point in the map screen and also define a rotation for the template A preview of the template will be displayed in the map screen in green press Next to continue Select Origin Point After you specify the insertion point you can then choose the origin point Select points green dots on the template preview to define a new origin position 333 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 150m Insert Pnt 1 of Next Rotate o 00 00 x Cancel Insert Template Once you are satisfied with the location and rotation of the template you can save it into the current project by pressing the Insert button New points and line work will be added to the project for you automatically CEA 16 Template Export Main Menu Edit Menu
139. 0 AR283 46460 ZE86 15500 Angle Offset SP PN4 N 0 0050 E 0 0051 EL0 5761 Line Distance Offset Main Menu Survey Methods Line Distance Offset The line distance offset command is used to define two points that will be used to establish a ref erence line Once the reference line is established you can then specify offsets along the reference line to the new point This is a very powerful offsetting tool that can be used in a lot of different situations 188 Survey Methods Menu When you define your reference line there are three types of offset that can be applied You can define a horizontal offset a perpendicular offset and a vertical elevation offset Each offset button is a toggle that allows you to toggle how the offset is to be applied in relation to the reference line When you define the offset direction you can then enter in the value that you want to offset by If the horizontal offset remains set to zero perpendicular or elevation offset will be applied in relation to point one on the reference line 189 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Offsets Horizontal Offset The horizontal offset can either be left or right of the first point on the reference line From the total sta tion s perspective if the new point is to the right of point 1 then you would use the Horz Offset Right of Pnt 1 If it is to the left then logically it would be a left offset so you would use the Horz
140. 000 BK OP1 BP2 B5145 00000 BCO 00000 l BR OP1 BP2 AR145 00000 ZE90 00000 SD100 00000 Orientation Notes several comment lines If the Reciprocate Traverse option was used then the following records will be written to the raw file TR OP1 FP3 AR45 00000 ZE90 00000 SD100 00000 Note this is the pre viously measured record not part of the occupy routine Reciprocate Traverse LS HI5 000 HR5 000 BK OP1 BP2 BS0 00000 BC0 00000 TR OP1 FP3 AR45 00000 ZE90 00150 SD100 0000 Orientation LS HI5 000 HR5 000 OC OP3 N 1070 7107 E 1070 7107 EL99 992 BK OP3 BP1 BS225 00000 BC0 00000 BR OP3 BP1 AR0 00000 ZE89 59300 SD100 01000 Orientation Notes several comment lines Multiple Backsight Multiple Backsight routine allows you to use multiple known control points to calculate a more accur ate backsight orientation 158 Survey Methods Menu Multiple Backsight Multiple Backsight gt ES Instrument Occupy Point 1 Instrument Height 0 0 Point Backsight Northing Easting 7 Add 100 000m 100 000m r 3 100 000m 200 000m E Delete 4 200 000m 200 000m A OK Cancel Occupy Point Your instrument location or Occupy Point can be entered here Double click the empty will show a drop down list You can then select the point from Map List or create a New point Instrument Height Enter the height of your in
141. 000 50 00 000 130 000 0 5000 Sta Check Parabolic Curve Element This option allows you to enter an equal tangent vertical parabolic curve At a minimum you need to know the PVI Station PVI Elevation and Curve Length for your vertical curve Furthermore if this is a new profile you need to define a PVI point before the vertical curve as well as define a PVI Para bolic or Unsymmetrical Parabolic curve after the vertical curve Elements are needed before and after the vertical curve element so the profile editor can calculate the tangents 485 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Profile Profile 1 Station Length Len Out 0 00 000 125 000 5 00 000 150 000 4 250 000 8 00 000 130 000 In the example you will see that a PVI was established for the beginning of the vertical profile Then the PVI for the vertical curve was defined as well as another parabolic curve You will also notice that if you click a Para element its location will be displayed in the display area Station Check You can also do a station check on a parabolic vertical curve Simply press the Sta Check button and enter the station you would like to compute an elevation for High Low Calculation With all vertical curves the high or low point can be computed For example if we use the High Low button to compute this information you will see the high point is at station 4 82 143 at an elevation of 146 429 486 Roads Profile Profile 1 Extrem
142. 000 000 Force Tangential Place a check mark in this box if you would like to automatically enforce the direction of alignment geometry elements so they remain tangental to previous geometry elements This rule can be useful to ensure the alignment geometry elements maintain a common tangent direction between adjacent elements Dynamic Horizontal Alignment Place a check mark in this box if you would like changes to the direction of aligment geometry ele ments to be applied to subsequent geometry elements To illustrate modify the direction of a line geo metry element by 10 clockwise With this feature is enabled all geometry elements following the modified line will also be rotated by 10 clockwise With this feature is disabled only the single line element will be rotated by 10 Value System Options Language Resource This is used for multi language support If you have installed a non English version of FieldGenius then set this option to your Language Resource file for example ResESM dll for Spanish Mexico Tip of the Day amp Application Tips When turned on a Tip of the Day will be displayed when FieldGenius is started and tooltips will be displayed when you hover over any button Turning this off will hide the Tip of the Day dialog and will disable tooltips on buttons Communication Trace File When turned on it will create a test file displaying information about the shot data going back and forth from Fiel
143. 000 23 in project units 1000 23 1000 23 1000 23 in project units 1000 23 1000 23usft 1000 23 US Survey Feet 1000 25 1000 23 usft 1000 23ftus 1000 23 ftus 20 117m 20 117 meters 66 00 10000m 10000 meters 32808 40 oom fe 10 feet 6 inches 10 50 106 1 2 10 feet 6 5 inches 10 54 10 6 1 2 45 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 1000 23 1000 23 in project units 1000 23 User Entered Value Interpreted As Result always matches project units 1000 23 1000 23 in project units 1000 23 10000 23usft 10000 23 US Survey Feet 10000 23 10000 23 usft 10000 23ftus 10000 23 ftus 10000 23ft 10000 23 International Feet 10000 21 fost fe 20 117m 20 117 meters 66 00 form ee 10000m 10000 meters 32808 33 CASO 106 10 feet 6 inches 10 50 10 6 10 6 106 1 2 10 feet 6 5 inches 10 54 10 6 1 2 User Entered Value Interpreted As Result always matches project units 1000 23 1000 23 in project units 1000 23m 1000 23 1000 23 International Feet 304 870m 10000 23usft 10000 23 US Survey Feet 3048 076m 10000 23 usft 10000 23ftus 10000 23 ftus 10000 23ft 10000 23 International Feet 3048 070m 46 Getting Started 10000 23 ft 20 117m 20 117 meters 20 117m 20 117m 10 feet 6 inches 3 200m 10 6 1 2 10 feet 6 1 2 inches 3 213m 106 Not allowed must enter units for feet such as 10ft 6 or 10usft 6 106 1 2 Not allowed must enter units for feet such as 10ft 6 Y or 10usft 6 Y Using Math Operation
144. 022222 cece cece ccoo 44 Unit Modifiers 2 2 2 2 ccc cece eee cece cece cece cece cecceecececcceeeeeeeees 44 Distance Entry Examples 00 0000000 c ccc ccc cece ccc cnc 45 13 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Using Math Operations 0 000000 o coco cece ccc ccc ccc cece cece eee ee eeeeeteeteeeeereeeeeed 47 Direction Entry amp Recall 2 00 0 c cece cece cececcccccncecccccucccccccceccecceseeeeees 48 Direction Enty aaa co saris Ii Ss Seed shad a Sass 48 Direction Recall 1 0 0 0 0 c cece cece cece ccc ccc ccc cece eee cece ee ce teeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 48 Unit Modifiers bes oc id o ri hl de yasmina 48 Direction Entry Examples asrasa 0000000 cc ccc cece cece aa E a 49 Using Math Operations 0 000 002 o ccc e ccc ccc ccc ccc cece cece cece eeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 51 Main Interface 5 0 5 2 a a os oN Soe AAA A on Ss eh ae ned Meek 8 53 Main Interface 0 000002 c ecco ccc ccc ccc cece nro 53 Display Toolbar rastera eens ous Be cei a e at th AE ee A ae 55 Observation T OOMWAR 0 200225 ae asiisscencate on liad meek ocednee tetas dns 56 Topo toolbar excita yrtinn co eh ret eee pean ena Sesto tee ace ee eee dee gees 57 ID View Toolbar ais cccs a a daa ta e id A goad ee ahead 59 Mint Toolbar Sacer ates sae ot Pte ates x nok Patt ta LP Ces ta e SAC o nds a 60 Instrument Toolbar vo c eee A a Se es te 61 Farget Height dim mica slo ico did Sn ahh ss ote SoD aa 62 Robotic Instrument Toolbar ooocccccccc
145. 1000 metre intervals when in metric projects There are three station format settings that you can choose from 0 000 000 0 00 00 or 0 000 You can change this by going to the Main Menu Settings Options or by pressing the Alignment C L but ton and selecting Settings Note Positive or negative start stations are valid 475 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Define Start Point or Coordinates Every road that you create needs to have a starting location defined You have two options available to define this location Start ID If you have a point stored in your project s database that is also the start point for the alignment you can use this point as the start location Simply enter the point number in the Start Pnt field or use the point chooser to select it from the map Once you ve selected the point the point s Northing and East ing values will be displayed At this point the elevation is not needed because the profile is what defines the elevations along the road When you use the point chooser or enter a point id all that will happen is the coordinates for the point are written to the alignment file The next time you open the alignment file you will no longer see the point ID that was used you will only see the coordinate values Enter Coordinates If you don t have a point that defines the start location you can define it by entering a Northing and Easting value You have to leave Start ID field blank if you want to e
146. 120 45 3 if your project is in Degrees Minutes or 120 453 if your project is in decimal degrees Direction Recall You can recall the direction between two points by inputting in the form lt firstID gt lt otherlD gt Example 26 84 will be recognized as the direction computed between points 26 and 84 The dir ection will be returned in whichever format your units settings is set to Unit Modifiers You can always override your project s units setting by entering the bearing with the cardinal quadrant indicated before or after the direction If there is no quadrant specified then the input direction will be interpreted as an Azimuth Decimal Degrees You can always specify that an angle is in decimal degrees by entering d after the value for example 45 5083d means 45 5083 or 45 30 30 Degrees Decimal Minutes You can always specify that an angle is in degrees and decimal minutes by entering dm after the value for example 45 305dm means 45 30 5 or 45 30 30 Degrees Minutes Decimal Seconds You can always specify that an angle is in degrees minutes and decimal seconds by entering dms after the value for example 45 3030dms means 45 30 30 Bearings To enter a bearing use the cardinal quadrant letters N E S and W before or after the angle For example NE60 4530 60 4530NE or N60 4530E means NE 60 45 30 if your project is in DMS NE 60 45 3 if your project is in DM or NE 60 453 if your
147. 133 160 Press Ok to save the modifiers Checking Width Modifiers At any time from the Template editor you can confirm that your modifiers are correct by using the sta tion slider If we use our example from above and want to preview the template at station 9 00 you can do so by entering it in the station field You will see at this station we have a typical road cross section emplate Surface 1 12 Q Zone View V view Zone Modifiers C Left 1 Station 3 00 00 Right Zo A 12 00 Vert Dist 6 667 ann VertNict R3 222 Y gt il Y x Commands section view Xx cance If we check station 10 78 54 you will see that we are at the full superelevation section 497 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 7 emplate Surface 1 p Zone View gt Y view Zone Modifiers Left Z Right Zo A 12 00 Vert Dist 26 667 32nn Vert Nict 22 222 Y Commands section view xX Cancel LandXML Cross Sections Main Menu Roads Manager Edit Road Cross Sections LandXML cross sections are created with desktop software such as Eagle Point Caice LDD and many others If you import a LandXML file that has cross sections in it you can immediately go to the Roads Man ager and select the road to stake You will see the roads in the Cross Sections list Choose one then press the Stake Roads button you will see the stake Alignment screen Stake Alignment DITCH 12309 Cross Section DESIGN1 DES
148. 19 8819 Perpendicular Pnt SP PN6 N 123 3028 E 100 0209 EL104 7737 RM 195 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 If the perpendicular point exists in your scene and you selected it using the point chooser then you will see a store point recorded as a note The last store point is the new point that was computed l Line Perpendicular Point l HI1 340 HRO 000 AR353 49520 ZE80 46560 5D21 3419 Pnt 1 of Line HI1 340 HRO 000 AR357 07330 ZE81 12210 SD22 4147 Pnt 2 of Line l SP PN7 N 119 2906 E 104 1611 EL103 7580 Perpendicular Pnt SP PN8 N 123 3107 E 100 0504 EL104 7751 SCR Trilateration Main Menu Survey Methods Trilateration This routine allows you to trilaterate the position of new points by observing their distances from two known positions The two known points will make up a baseline from which a distance distance inter section will be calculated to determine the position of each new point The primary use of this routine is for GPS users so they can locate inaccessible points They can loc ate two points with GPS and then use the Trilateration routine to locate the inaccessible points This routine can accept distances measured with the Leica Disto Lee Point 1 Dbl Click Add Point Switch Side Point 2 Dbl Click Save Point Map View new Pnt pnt 1 Dist Pnt 2 Dist j Side l Sd Measure From Pntl Measure From Pnt2 ES Close Static Points Ba
149. 38010 55 0P115 FP348 4R 333 38140 55 0P115 FP349 4R 316 04000 5S OP115 FP350 4R314 00050 55 0P115 FP351 4R303 02410 55 OP115 FP352 4R305 22280 55 0P115 FP353 4R 299 15130 55 0P115 FP354 4R 296 55360 4 Hide Map Raw File Backup When you open the Raw File Editor a copy of the original raw file will automatically be made and saved in your project directory The file will be named rawfile_bak raw where the backup number increments with every backup file that is made If you need to undo the changes you can close your project re open it and when the Review Project Files screen appears use the raw file button to choose the backup file to load You can also exit FieldGenius and use a text editor to manually edit the names of the files COGO History Viewer Main Menu Survey Tools COGO History Viewer When you use the COGO history command a viewer will open displaying the results of your COGO calculations This is a read only file and no changes can be made to it The file is saved in your project directory and is saved as CogoCalcs txt 217 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Chord Bearing N67 30 OO E Chord Distance 184 776 130 656 205 234 30 00 00 2 3 BS PC PT ingle 67 30 00 Total Distance 205 234 Both the Traverse Intersect and Inverse commands will save information to this file as well as Areas Volumes and various other calculations The size of the text can be set to n
150. 56 102 6739 5752 0 065 103 s6 3 942 0 083 105 a FA 241 0710 0 011 469 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 y O Calculate Parameters Edit Control Add Control T Do not calculate scale A Do not calculate vertical slopes f 101 amp 0015 0004 0009 102 Y amp 0009 o001 0010 103 amp 0021 0 003 0 014 105 FA FA 0001 0 003 0 000 X Close Enabling or disabling constraints in either the horizontal or vertical components for determining the transformation parameters is done with the Edit Control button The last three columns of dN dE and dH represents the residuals between the control coordinates and the transformed local meas ured coordinates in northing easting and height Local Transformation BO Calculate Parameters Edit Control Add Control F Do not calculate scale Do not calculate vertical slopes CtdPnt Horz Vert dN dE dH 102 0013 0 001 0 002 103 GB E 0025 0004 0021 J 106 GA 0003 0 004 0 001 202 MA 0010 0 009 0 011 x Cose Since this network is over constrained it is possible to reserve a couple of point pairs as check val ues in testing the parameters of the horizontal transformation Pairs 103 1103 and 105 1105 have been randomly selected as test pairs and have been deselected as constraints in the horizontal and vertical component 470 These two test pairs will not be used in the computation of the horizontal transformation par
151. 68 1 04 1 CP 0 012 000 L 1 000 eee Left Cut 1 00 1 NA 5001 100 15 100 15 0 002 0 498 0 501 1 498 0 501 0 99 1 CP 0 06 00 L 1 000 Left Cut 1 00 1_ N A 5002 100 14 100 18 0 017 0 521 0 5011 1 52 0 501 CP 0 06 00 L 1 000 Left Cut 1 00 1 1 5003 101 53 100 14 0 017 1513 0 501 2 513 0 501 REF CP 0 06 00 L 2 000 Left Cut 1 00 1_ N A 5004 100 14 100 14 0 002 0 498 0 501 1 498 0 501 CP 0 06 00 L 1 000 C ellet Cut 001 102 28 100 14 0 002 139 0 501 2387 0 501 0 99 1 REF CP 0 06 00 L 2 000 Point and Offset Stake Format This type of report will display the same records as the Point Stake and Offset Stake reports but com bine them into a single report 292 Offset Offset Length Design Pt As Built Pt 5005 Design N 5007 202 Staking Menu Design E Design El As Built El Cut Fill Delta N Delta E Design Desc As Built Desc 5003 499 100 202 100 2018 Design Pnt 17 5006 5006 076 5001 161 100 119 100 1191 Design Pnt 19 5007 5008 335 4998 831 100 061 100 0615 Design Pnt 20 5008 5015 5011 787 5006 573 5006 573 4997 663 4996 107 5011 047 5011 719 4992 566 4992 566 4996 693 4991 625 100 166 99 815 99 815 99 815 99 502 100 062 100 1662 100 0624 100 0629 GRD GRD E ASPH E ASPH 0 01 00 L 1 000 Design Pnt 51 Design Pnt 51 Design Pnt 30 Design Pnt 31 0 02 00 L 1 000
152. CAD desktop users line connectivity codes setup in the desktop Automap library will be used by FieldGenius For more information see the Draw Option Defaults section FieldGenius uses the concept of Figures for handling of linework Some software packages refer to these as Chains At the bottom of the FieldGenius interface you will see the Active Lines List button on the second row When a new project is started it will display lt No Line gt as the current active line When a new line figure is about to be started lt Start line gt will by displayed on the button After the first point for a new line has been measured the active line will be created made current and displayed 86 Points Lines Descriptions Inthe example shown notice E ASPH 1 on the button This is the current Active Line E ASPH is the point description and 1 is the group number added automatically Since this is the first figure in the map it is assigned group 1 A Figure is a continuous series of Line Curve and or Arc segments The Figure is identified by Point Description and a group number Whenever a new line is started a new Figure is created and added to the Active Lines list with an automatically assigned group number The group number will incre ment by one when a previously used point description is used for a subsequent line Notice there are two E ASPH lines in the example Furthermore all linework in FieldGenius is handled i
153. EDM electronic distance measurement targets You can create edit copy and delete targets GeoMax uses a different method for 360 determining prism offsets as they have a value called a GeoMax Constant See the help on the New or Edit Target screens for information on how to calculate a GeoMax Constant The Target Manager is divided into 2 sections Backsight and Foresight Target Manager Backsight Use the Backsight screen to define your backsight target choose a measure mode and enter a back sight target height Tap on the Backsight tab at the top of the screen to access the Backsight section Target Manager amp g Foresight Target A Target Height 2 000m lt EDM Mode IR Standard GeoMax Constant 0 0mm CA OK Target List Default Settings X Cancel Target Use this field to select a backsight target from the Target List Target Height Enter the height of your target here Press the Set Default Height button Em to assign the default height to this Target Height field The default height is defined in the Default Settings screen EDM Mode Use this field to select the EDM mode you would like to use You will only be able to select an EDM mode that corresponds to your target type GeoMax Constant Each target type will have a GeoMax constant also known as prism constant in the GeoMax prism system This field will display the GeoMax constant associated with your target See the New Target
154. EE me Stop Bits _ Flow Control d Link Information The Link Information screen displays detailed real time information about the correction message being received by your receiver via a radio link from a base receiver or via a cellular modem link from an NTRIP or GPRS server Information Data Age 10 sec Data Quality 26 Status RIK corrections being received Reference Latitude N49 52 09 62324 Longitude W119 34 50 85939 1554 52 Ellipsoidal Hgt 429 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Position Information The Position Information screen displays detailed real time information about your current position Position Information gt 8 Latitude N49 50 16 96183 gt Longitude W119 36 35 98857 Ellipsoidal Height 132234 Antenna Hgt Meas 0 00 Baseline Length Not Applicable Northing 18122968 03 Easting 1024710 58 Elevation 1322 34 Horz System UTM83 11 Vert Svstem Ellipsoidal Y oK Antenna Height The Antenna Height screen allows you to configure the antenna height of your GPS receiver Height 2s 8 O Model GS15 Measured Height 2 000m Measure Point Bottom of antenna mount Offsets Measure Point to ARP Offset Horizontal 0 0mm Measure Point to ARP Offset Vertical 00mm ARP to APC L1 Offset Vertical 202 1mm Y oK Active Tolerance Mode This button indicates which of the three tolerance modes setup in your Rover Profile
155. ES 90 5016d 90 5016 degrees 90 30 06 waa Io ES 100g 100 gradians 90 00 00 100g 100 2345g 100 2345 gradians 90 12 40 ome O IES 3 141593r 3 141593 radians 180 00 00 awe Io S Project Set to Bearings The angle codes below provide versatile direction input When your project is set to Bearings you are permitted to use numeric and alpha character codes for angle and direction input 1 or NE North East bearing 2 or SE South East bearing 3 or SW South West bearing 4 of NW North West bearing User Entered Value Interpreted As Result always matches project units 90 5016 90 degrees 50 minutes 16 S89 09 44 E seconds azimuth NE45 3030 North East quadrant 45 degrees N45 30 30 E NE 45 3030 30 minutes 30 seconds N45 3030E N 45 3030 E 50 Getting Started 45 3030NE 45 3030 NE SE45 3030 South East quadrant 45 degrees 45 30 30 E SE 45 3030 30 minutes 30 seconds S45 3030E S 45 3030 E 45 3030SE 45 3030 SE SW45 3030 South West quadrant 45 degrees 45 30 30 W SW 45 3030 30 minutes 30 seconds 45 3030W S 45 303 W 45 3030SW 45 3030 SW 90 5016dm 90 degrees 50 16 minutes azi 89 09 50 E 90 5016d 90 5016 degrees azimuth 89 29 54 E eae fe DA 100g 100 gradians 90 00 00 E om e es 100 2345g 100 2345 gradians 89 47 20 E ome o 3 141593r 3 141593 radians S0 00 00 W ewes loa IES Using Math Operations You can then use the calculator to further manipulate the ang
156. For the traverse closure we need to store a TR record in the raw file and because of this a point needs to be computed If you can t measure a dis tance to a prism you can use the Manual Distance measure mode which will record the plate reading 223 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 from your instrument and prompt you to manually enter in a distance Type in an arbitrary distance and a closing TR record will be computed Traverse Rules e All measurement modes on the instrument toolbar except for Sideshot Auto Store can be used to create TR records e The occupy point routine will be updated so the current setup is equal to your last TR shot and backsight is equal to your last setup You also need to do a setup directly after you shoot your TR record if you want to do leap frog traversing e Youcan have multiple traverses in the same raw file To start a new traverse you need to make sure the first setup point for the traverse isn t referenced in the raw file with a TR record The most current traverse that you re working on will be used in the traverse computations e Only one TR record is allowed per setup e If you re importing your project into MicroSurvey CAD orinCAD we will automatically recog nize your traverse points and create Station traverse setup for you in the MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD traverse file Traverse Adjustment Main Menu Survey Tools Traverse Report FieldGenius is capable of performing a traverse b
157. GPS observation you store is saved in the raw file as an EP record which is essentially a WGS84 position If you want FieldGenius to compute new Cartesian or local coordinates for the GPS observations you can Sim 229 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 ply press the Calculate Params button and FieldGenius will scan your raw file and will recompute new coordinates using the EP records and will apply your transformation parameters to the coordinates An example where this could be used is after you ve measured some constrain points to help you loc alize to a user local coordinate system After you compute your transformation parameters you will still have two coordinate systems one with the local coordinates and one with the GPS UTM or SPCS coordinates It is usually beneficial to transform the GPS derived constrain points so they are now in the local system Do Not Calculate Scale Checkbox If this is checked FieldGenius will not compute a scale factor and will force it to a value of 1 0 Do Not Calculate Vertical Slopes Checkbox If this is checked then FieldGenius will not compute any slope values Parameters Origin North and East This is the centroid of the measured coordinates or simply the average northing and easting of your measured constrain points Trans North and East If you move the measured points so that the centroid of your measured points is equal with the origin of the local system The translation north
158. Genius will take you directly to the map screen where you will see our point staking toolbar Staking Toolbar Viewing Instrument ag 7 0 007m Y HT 0 000m Q da 0 036m Q secre Y 0 012m Y Point 8 Desc None Grid Es Next Pnt 32 The staking toolbar is used in conjunction with the Observation Toolbar to help you navigate to your stake point If you re using a robotic or conventional instrument the staking process will be similar E 278 Staking Menu The staking toolbar can be accessed by pressing the Stake Point button on the screen It will also be accessed from many other commands that require a point to be staked When you first see the staking screen you maybe asked to take a measurement first so it can cal culate the current position of the rod Press the measure button if you re using a conventional instru ment or turn on the cursor tracking button if you re using a robot or GNSS You should define a map orientation in the staking settings Setting this will twist your map view to help you with your stakeout and change the way the move by distance are reported Press the top button Viewing North Instrument Prism to adjust your Orientation Reference setting For best res ults set the Orientation Reference to Prism for a conventional total station Instrument for a robotic total station North for GPNS staking Grid Staking Mode is selected by default select the Grid button on the bottom left
159. GeoMax Instrument Targets ooocccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 356 19 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Edit GeoMax Instrument Targets 0000 0000 e cece ee iraina ionann nan 357 Target List GeoMax Instruments 2 cc cecccceecccccccceecccccceceecccccceeeeeeecceeees 359 Target Manager GeoMax Instruments 0 0 0 000000 c cece cece cece cece cece ee cnn 360 Target Manager Leica Instruments 2 0 0002 e cece ee eececeeeeeeeeeees 364 Total Station Reference eieaa a e cece cece a a e E 368 Conventional Total Station bacsira eee cece ccc ccc cece cece cece ae e 368 Robotic Total Station 1 00 0 0000222 c cece ccc ccc ccc ccc cece cece cece cece cnn 369 Instrument Selection sota pan bs arco A eh E ad Bd Lhe 371 Make and Model Settings 0 2 2 c cece ccc ccc cece eee ceeeeeeeeeees 372 Total Station Profile 2 00 a a e a a a 373 Model and Communication 0 0 00 e cece ee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 374 Radio Configuration 2 20 0 0 c cece cece cece cece ccc e cee ce cee ceeceeeeeeeees 377 EDM Settings a zaide soba caged Josh eels orcas Aaa giana II Sees aa S eek 378 Measurement Tolerance 20 22 22 e cece cece cece cece eee e eee eeceeceeeeeeeees 381 SEalChiSettings 2 1 ses ee A es i te A ST A 382 No COMMUNICATION 2 2 202828 oh ould fae ooo Se Tee ales 122 Lov ae suse iva sales es 384 Instrument Toolbar 2 2 2 2 cece cece cece ccc e cece cece cece eecece
160. Horizontal Distance HD and Vertical Distance VD e Northing N Easting E and Elevation H If using a conventional non robotic total station the observations displayed in the toolbar will be from the last measurement taken with FieldGenius If using a robotic total station the observations displayed in the toolbar will continually update in real time 56 Main Interface GPS Observations GPS users can toggle through the following information e Latitude Lat Longitude Lon and Geodetic Height h e Northing N Easting E Orthometric Height H e Standard Deviation Horizontal SD H Standard Deviation Vertical SD V and Dilution of Pre cision PDOP e Velocity SOG and Heading COG of the GPS receiver as well as current UTC Time If using GPS the observations displayed in the toolbar will continually update in real time Display Size By tapping on the and buttons on the screen you can increase or decrease the displayed font size text for easier viewing Page Toggle The Page button allows you to swap between pages changing the displayed observation information Topo Toolbar P A A lt No Line gt Next ID ra 2 lt No Desc gt The Topo Toolbar is used to help automate linework as well as show you the description and next point number for your shot Just like previous versions of FieldGenius you can control your linework by tuning on and off the line arc and curvy toggles There is
161. IGN1 Station o 06 00 y Int 10 000m Prev Next offset 0 000m Dir Center ter right Stake Offset o o00m Setback 0 000m Elevation I 99 644m Vert Offset I 0 000m 2 2 el Q abe Est Xx Close 498 Roads Please see the Stake Alignment section for more information about using this command Alignment DTM Surface Main Menu Roads Manager Edit Road DTM Surface If you ve imported a surface file either through the QSB or LandXML importer you can stake to the surface along a defined horizontal alignment All you need to do is define the alignment using the Alignment C L button then select a surface from the surface drop down list found next to the DTM Surface button When you press the Stake Road button you will see the alignment screen In the area where you would normally see your cross section or template you will now see the surface at the stake station you have defined If you enter a Design Offset it will compute an elevation based on the surface Stake Alignment Road 1 12309 Templates Station 0 10 00 Int 10 000m prev Next Offset 9 000m Dir Roe ter fro Stake Offset 000m Setback flo o00m Elevation 99 683m Vert Offset 0 000m o gt lt veo e Alignment Staking Part 1 There are two things that have to happen before you can stake a road 1 You have to create an alignment vertical profile and a template Or 2 Importa LandXML file and use XML cross se
162. If this is checked when you select the description from the topo toolbar on the main display the con nect lines toggle will be turned on automatically Use this for descriptions that typically are connected by lines such as an edge of road or ditch center line Do not assign to DTM This is very useful for the creation of real time surface models If you toggle this ON then these points will not be included in any DTM created with FieldGenius Use this for descriptions that are not at ground level Deleting Descriptions from the Library from FieldGenius The AutoMap Editor allows you to delete descriptions from the library Pressing the Delete button will prompt you to make sure that you want to delete the selected entry This will delete that entry from the project s AutoMap Library file it does not affect the AutoMap Template file Editing an Existing Library outside of FieldGenius The AutoMap Library is a very powerful feature in FieldGenius When combined with our desktop products your downloaded files can literally be imported layers and symbols placed in seconds For this topic we will concentrate on helping you work with and edit the AutoMap library using FieldGenius The FieldGenius AutoMap library is a comma delimited file that can be edited with MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD with a text editor like Microsoft Notepad or with a spreadsheet application like Microsoft Excel Since not every FieldGenius user owns our desktop softwar
163. Instrument Settings Toolbar On this toolbar you can control specific settings for your total station such as EDM modes Target Manager Press this button to access the Target Manager Here you can create edit copy and delete targets Measurement Mode This button will open the Select Measurement Mode screen From here you can select what type of measurement you will be using When you choose your mode this button will display the mode you re using For example if you re using the Distance Off set mode the button will display Dist Off Measure Button Use this to trigger your total station to take a measurement If you are using a conventional non robotic total station please see the Instrument Toolbar topic If you are using GPS please see the GPS Toolbar topic 64 Main Interface GPS Toolbar OQ Y PDOP 1 6 mo Standard Measure KT Auton PDOP 1 7 mo Once the user has selected a GPS receiver and communication has been estab lished the GPS toolbar will appear on the main interface NOTE You will only see the GPS toolbar if you selected GPS Reference GPS Rover or GPS Demo as your instrument type If you have selected a GPS Profile but are not yet connected to the receiver most of these buttons will be disabled Auto Center Single tapping this button will re center the display on the current position of your receiver Double tapping this button will set the system into an auto pan m
164. Know the settings of your instrument you can set them here in FieldGenius They have to match exactly the ones on your instrument or you will get a communications error when you try to connect It is important to confirm these settings on your instrument when you re trying to connect FieldGenius for the first time Most connection problems occur because the user has specified parameters that don t match the ones on their instrument On many data collectors you can select Bluetooth as your communication port If you select the Bluetooth port the traditional serial communication options Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity will be replaced with a Bluetooth Search function Model and Communication E 12 Make Topcon 7 Model Status Not Connected Port Bluetooth vj Bluetooth Search Device Not Selected RC Port Bluetooth Search Device Not Selected Connect to Instrument aiad Xx Close Please note that not all bluetooth enabled devices will list Bluetooth as a Port option In some cases you must configure and use a virtual COM port through Windows CE s internal Bluetooth Settings for example COM6 Bluetooth Search If you set the port to Bluetooth a Bluetooth Search button will appear Press the search button to find the device you want to communicate wirelessly with All devices within range will be listed choose the one you want to use 375 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 The device you selected will be saved into your
165. List comes with 7 default GeoMax targets that can not be editted or deleted But you can copy a default target and edit the copy All targets are saved in the Settings xml file and is located in the Programs folder 359 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Target List amp Name Type Icon GeoMax Const Circular Prism Prism Circular 0 0mm 360 Prism Prism 360 23 1mm Mini 0 Prism Mini 0 0mm Mini Prism Prism Mini 17 5mm Mini 360 Prism 360 Mini 30 0mm Raflartive Tane Tane Reflective Tane 34 Amm New Copy CA Close You are not permitted to delete or edit a default target but you certainly can copy a target and edit the copy New Tap on this button to access the New Target dialog Here you can create a new target Edit Tap on a target to select it Then press the Edit button to access the Edit Target dialog Default tar gets can not be edited Delete Tap on a target to select it Then press the Delete button to delete the selected target You will receive a warning message that you must acknowledge before deletion is complete Default targets can not be deleted Copy Tap on a target to select it Then press the Copy button This will open the Edit Target dialog and you can then edit the copied parameters Close Pressing this button closes the dialog and returns you to the Target Manager screen Target Manager GeoMax Instruments MapView Target Manager The Target Manager is a place where you can manage your
166. MicroSurvey ZASFIELDGenius 7 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 v7 0 7 17 2014 Copyright 2014 MicroSurvey Software Inc All Rights Reserved MicroSurvey End User License Agreement This MicroSurvey End User License Agreement Agreement is a legal and binding agreement between you Licensee and MicroSurvey Software Inc a BC corporation MICROSURVEY con cerning the use of the MicroSurvey products the Product the software provided in connection with the use and operation of the Product including firmware and stored measurement data collectively the Software and all related documentation provided in connection with the acquisition of the Product Documentation The Software includes software owned by and licensed from third party licensors By clicking the ACCEPT check box and completing the process of installing the Software LICENSEE consents to and agrees to be bound by all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement BY CLICKING THE I REJECT CHECK BOX or IF LICENSEE disagrees with any of the terms or conditions of this Agreement LICENSEE IS not permitted to install and or use the Software PRODUCT AND DOCUMENTATION IF LICENSEE HAS ANY questions OR COMMENTS CONCERNING THIS AGREEMENT LICENSEE MAY CONTACT MICROSURVEY AT Westbank BC Canada 1 Title to Product and Rights to Use Software and Documentation Title to the Product and the rights to use the Software and Documentation are conditioned upon the payment
167. MicroSurvey FieldGenius E Nade3ToHarn gde 1 19KB GDC File 12 19 20 E FG Projects E Negd49ToNzad2k 43 bytes GDC File 12 19 20 E Programs E Vertcon gde 125 bytes GDC File 12 19 20 E Help a E E Temp EJES 11 objectis B Mobile Device NOTE the path shown may not exactly match your device Make sure you know where FieldGenius is installed in your data collector It might be in SystemCF C_Drive Disk Storage Card SD Card Built in Storage Program Files or some other memory location Import Export User Defined Coordinate Systems User defined coordinate systems created by a user are saved in the binary mapping system files It is useful to be able to export these user created coordinate systems for the following reasons 1 Abackup of your user defined coordinate systems 2 Allows you to share user defined coordinate systems with other crews 3 Allows you to load user defined coordinate systems after installing a FieldGenius update 447 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Export When you export the user defined coordinate systems you will be able to specify a directory to save the file to and a name for the file Exported files will automatically be saved with a CSMAP extension such as myco ordinatesystem csmap All user defined coordinate systems in FieldGenius will be exported to the file Import You can import coordinate systems from a previously saved file When you import a file you will be asked to bro
168. NECTING TO COMPUTER Microsoft ActiveSync Windows Mobile Device Center Microsoft ActiveSync Windows Mobile Device Center Microsoft ActiveSync and Microsoft Windows Mobile Device Center facilitate communication between your PC and your handheld device If you are using Windows XP or earlier Microsoft ActiveSync has to be installed on your computer so you can download data between your hand held and desktop computers The current version at time of printing is ActiveSync 4 5 You may have to use an earlier version if you are running Windows 95 or 98 Check the web page noted below for more information If you are using Windows Vista Microsoft Windows Mobile Device Center has to be installed on your computer rather than Microsoft ActiveSync The current version at time of printing is Windows Mobile Device Center 6 1 Installing ActiveSync Windows Mobile Device Center Installing From Web Microsoft ActiveSync or Microsoft Windows Mobile Device Center might already be installed on your computer you can confirm this by looking for it in your Windows Start Menu If you do not have Microsoft ActiveSync or the Windows Mobile Device Center installed you can download and install the latest version from Microsoft s website at this address http www microsoft com windows mobile activesync default ms px Note You may be asked to reboot your system once the installation is complete Installing From CD Microsoft ActiveSync
169. Offset Left of Pnt 1 setting Perpendicular Offset The perpendicular offset is a horizontal distance applied perpendicular to the reference line From the total station s perspective when moving perpendicular from the reference line if the new point ends up being closer to the total station then you would set the perpendicular offset to Perp Offset Towards Inst Alternatively if the new point ends up being farther from the total station then you would use the Perp Offset Away From Inst Elevation Offset This is the vertical offset from the reference line to the new point If the new point is above the ref erence line then you would set this to Elev Offset Up If the new point is below the reference line you would set it to Elev Offset Down Measure Points When you start line angle offset command you will see an empty list Highlight the row that you would like to make a measurement for and simply press the Measure but ton to begin the measuring process If you need to redo a measurement simply highlight it in the list and press the measure button Notes 1 The northing and easting values for the new point will be computed using the horizontal and per pendicular offsets defined by the user These horizontal offset is referenced to point 1 on the ref erence line The perpendicular offset is a perpendicular offset from the reference line 2 The z value for the new point will be computed using the projected elevation along the ref
170. Offset or Resections screens it will force the instrument to take a measurement instantly If this is turned off then pressing the Measure button will take you back to the map screen where you have to press the measure button on the instrument toolbar to take a measurement If you re using a robotic instrument you will probably want to keep this turned off Traverse Reciprocate When this is turned on you will be able to use the Reciprocate Traverse option on the Backsight Sum mary screen when occupying a traversed point This recalculates your setup point s position based on an average of the traverse shot to the point being occupied and the backsight shot from the point being occupied If this is turned off then the Reciprocate Traverse option within the Occupy Point routine will be grayed out For additional details please refer to the Backsight Summary topic GPS Options EP Records When this is used the standard EP record type specified by the RW5 format will be slightly different The main difference is that when turned on the standard deviations for the X Y and Z components will be stored Setting this to on is only required if you want to use FieldGenius with the OmniStar GPS service 125 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 OnPOZ Tagging Turn this on if you wish to use effigis ONPOZ GNSS post processing software If this is enabled then a measurement time start and end tag are written to the raw file Note An end tag is n
171. Out Points Place a check mark in this box if you would like to see staked out points displayed differently to non staked out points A staked out point will appear as a slightly greyed out inverted triangle This is for you to make quick assessments of what has been done and what remains to be finished 129 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Display Point Staking Screen Place a check mark in this box if you would like to see the Point Staking screen displayed This screen will always be displayed if there are values in the Design Point Offset fields This was done to ensure that you never stake a point with a forgotten and wrong offset Display Stake Result Screen Place a check mark in this box if you would like to see the Stake Result screen displayed after stak ing out a point This screen will always be displayed if the staked out point exceeds the staking tol erances Store Stake Point Place a check mark in this box if you would like the staked out point to be stored along with the raw data If no check mark is in this box then only the raw data is stored and the Store Point dialog will not be displayed By default this is checked What will happen is when you store a staked position using the store but ton on the stake toolbar you will be prompted with a screen allowing you to assign a point number and description to the new point that will be created The point description will default to the current description from the Automap
172. P4 AR201 48000 ZE93 10000 SD269 6600 0 00 00 C 0 000 Alignment Slope Staking Continued from Alignment Staking When you re staking a point from a template you can select the Stake Slope button from any point However you will usually slope stake from the hinge points on your template Stake Alignment Road 1 120 re eea sustos O Jm 2000 jo fu Offset 20 00 Dir Right Left Right Stake Offset 20 00 Setback 0 00 Elevation 97 76 VertOffset 0 00 212 meo S 0 p de a Offset Slope 4 Editor X When you start slope staking and you measure your first shot the program computes an intersection between a horizontal plane containing the measurement and the slope defined in the stake settings from the hinge point FieldGenius will then compute a best guess location for the catch point and will tell you how much you need to move After you measure a second shot FieldGenius will create an 510 Roads imaginary line between the two shots and intersects the slope from the hinge point It then computes a new solution for the catch point On Stn 0 00 Left 2 00 Page rip 100 ajo olplalol ES HT 0 00 Prism Stk CP 4 00 00 R 22 000 Staking Method Stationing Relative y y aloo El At anytime during your staking you can press the Profile button to see the actual rod Eeg position which will be shows as an orange circle You will also see the slope lines from t
173. Parcels a Image Files Add File Remove File File Settings You can load one LandXML file into your FieldGenius project at a time and control the visibility of its layers points chains alignments and parcels You can control the visibility of the entire XML file by checking or unchecking the name of the XML file under the LXML Files section of the tree If the box is checked then the file is turned on and all of its contents will be visible if unchecked then the file and all of its layers is tumed off and it will not be visible If the box has another smaller square inside it this means that some of its layers are turned on and other layers are turned off You can control the visibility of individual layers by expanding the name of the XML file under the LXML Files section of the tree and checking or unchecking the box beside the name of the layer If the box is checked then the layer is turned on and entities on that layer will be visible if unchecked then the layer is turned off and entities on it will not be visible When you close the project the layer status will be saved so that the next time the project is opened the layer visibility will automatically be set the same as you had left it so layers that were turned off will remain turned off the next time the project is opened up Add File Press the Add File button to select a LandXML file that you want to load into your project You will be able to browse to and selec
174. Part 2 Alignment Slope Staking 117 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 118 Settings Menu SETTINGS MENU Settings Menu _ O Z O OSS O Settings Menu Main Menu Settings The settings menu is used to setup and review settings that have been set for your current project You can also specify default settings for new projects that are created Most of these settings are stored in a file named msurvey ini which can be found in the Mi croSurvey FieldGenius Programs directory It is recommended that once you have defined your set tings that you make a backup of this msurvey ini file Settings 1309 Options Coordinate System Units and Scale Keyboard Shortcuts Instrument Selection Project Information ff Options Use this to set or change settings that affect FieldGenius s functionality Please see the Options topic for more information Units and Scale Use this to set or change the units bearings distances and scale settings for your project Please see the Units and Scale Settings topic for more information Instrument Selection Use this to set the type of equipment that will be used with FieldGenius If you re not connecting to anything you can specify that you would like to enter your measurements manually Please see the Instrument Selection topic for more information Note you will not see this option if FieldGenius is running onboard your instrument 119 MicroSurvey Fiel
175. Previous You can use this to zoom back up to 10 previous views This includes zoom and pan changes World Button It is used by the staking commands to hide unrelated points and lines in your map dur 55 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 ing stakeout 3D 3D View s This opens the 3D View Toolbar Layers Manager eo This opens the Layers Manager for managing visibility of layers in your database DXF Layers LandXML elements and Raster Images Surface Manager This opens the Surface Manager for importing and displaying DTM surface models TIN TGRID or Contours and for computing Volume Calculations Options 000 This opens the Options screen and will automatically expand the Point Labels section for quickly turning on or off the ID description and elevation labels for your points Help This opens the Help topic for the current toolbar s visible on your screen If there are multiple toolbars visible you are prompted to select the help file based on the position of the toolbar Top Side or Bottom Toolbar The help file will open up in your default web browser such as Internet Explorer Observation Toolbar Display Toolbar Observation Results button P You can access the Observation Toolbar by tapping on this icon in the Display Toolbar Total Station Observations Total Station users can toggle through the following information e Horizontal Angle HA Vertical Angle ZA and Slope Distance SD e Horizontal Angle HA
176. Select Line the toolbar is in line selection mode and will only accept lines picked from the map This button acts as a toggle and will toggle between Select Point and Select Line Switch Direction Since this routine accepts FieldGenius figures as well as DXF entities at times you need to switch the direction of a DXF line so that it matches the direction that you are traversing around to define the area boundary As you select lines from the map you will see a red marker appear at the end of the line Remove Previous Use this to remove segments that were defined for the area boundary This will remove the segments one at a time starting with the last segment that was defined Enclosed Area Calculation To compute an area you need to make sure you have the Calculate Area tab selected You can then press the Define Area button to define the boundary that will outline the area perimeter It is import ant to note that you are not required to close the area by selecting the original starting point 256 Calculations Menu 55 65 ft Select n Rad El Remove Paint ure Arc Arc Previous x The green marker indicates the start of the area perimeter where as the red marker indicates the last point on the perimeter When ready to compute the area simple press the exit button red X on the Define Area toolbar Area Calculations 123 Q Calculate Area Area 12999 8438 SqFt US 0 2984353 Ac
177. Short cuts settings Next ID Field This field displays the point number that will be assigned to your next shot You can change it at any time prior to recording your shot In a new project this field will always start at 1 If you open an existing project then we scan the raw file for the last sideshot or store point and if we find one we ll set the point number accordingly For example if the last sideshot in the raw file was to point 58 then the next time the project is setup we will set the next id to 59 Active Line List Button Much like the first line in the project just select the desired description from the list and select the desired draw option before shooting the first point for the new line When you press the button a screen will appear listing all your active lines Selecting one of them and pressing the OK button will make it the current line The key to note is the display of lt Start line gt in the Active Lines list Once the first point for the new line has been measured the Active Lines list will set and display the new line as current Main Interface To change the current line simply select the desired line from the Active Lines list and continue taking shots to add to the selected line All settings are stored for each line so there is no need to re select the Description or draw option Description Selection Button lt No Desc gt Use this button to set the current description that will be used when you
178. Station Reference Target Manager Backsight Target Default Prism Target Height 2 000m Er MaE 200r lt EDM Mode IR Standard Prism Constant 0 0mm CA OK Target List Default Settings X Cancel Target Use this field to select a foresight target Target Height Enter the height of your foresight target here Press the Set Default Height button rial to assign the default target height to this Target Height field The default height is defined in the Default Settings screen EDM Mode Use this field to select the EDM mode you would like to use Typically you will want to select an EDM mode that corresponds to your target type Use Temp Height Press this button to activate the Temporary Height function button is active in the above image To enable the temporary height be used you must press the Use Temp Height button Once activated the following measurement will use this temporary height but it will be a one time measurement and then the system will immediately revert back to the height defined in the Target Height field This is handy if you need to take a quick shot using a different height such as when meauring an invert Press the Set Default Height button sci to assign the default Temporary height to this Target Height field The default height is defined in the Default Settings screen 391 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Prism Constant This field will display whatever prism offset that you en
179. Template Export 334 Import Export Menu You can export and save line work figures and points to a file that can then be inserted into different projects An example of how this feature can be used is when you have a building that is common to several projects Instead of computing a new building in each project you can do it just once save it to a file then insert it into your other projects When you start the command you will see the template export toolbar a 9 2 219 212 ale Select Template Objects 200 Selection Method Window AI y Window Al v All Clear Selection i sa x Cancel There are four options available for selecting the line work and points Window All This option lets you window the objects All points and line work contained within the selection win dow will be accepted Window Points This option lets you window objects but only coordinate points will be selected all line work is ignored Single All Use this option to manually select objects in the map view to export You can select points or lines arcs If you select a line the points that define the line will be exported as well Single Points Use this option to select point one by one in the map screen Save Template When you re done selecting your objects you can save them to a file by pressing the Save button Choose a location for your template give the file a descriptive name and save it Template files have 335
180. The default height is defined in the Default Settings screen You can also define a default reflect orless height in the Default Settings screen Use Temp Height Press this button to activate the Temporary Height function button is active in the above image To enable the temporary height be used you must press the Use Temp Height button Once activated the following measurement will use this temporary height but it will be a one time measurement and then the system will immediately revert back to the height defined in the Target Height field This is handy if you need to take a quick shot using a different height such as when meauring an invert Press the Set Default Height button to assign the default height to the Target Height field The default height is defined in the Default Settings screen EDM Mode Use this field to select the EDM mode you would like to use You will only be able to select an EDM mode that corresponds to your target type GeoMax Constant Each target type will have a GeoMax constant also known as prism constant in the GeoMax prism system This field will display the GeoMax constant associated with your target See the New or Edit Target Help for an explanation of how to compute a GeoMax prism constant This will be espe cially important if you are using a non GeoMax target OK This records the settings you have just made closes the Target Manager and returns you to the MapView Target List Press thi
181. This routine allows you to create or edit point patterns and apply them to existing points in your pro ject This is useful for creating drill holes for bolt patterns pillar columns etc The pattern data files are completely interchangeable between both FieldGenius 7 and MicroSurvey CAD orinCAD so any patterns created in one program can be edited or used in the other Pattern Toolbar When you start the Point Pattern command you will see the Pattern Toolbar along the bottom of your map screen 77 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 2 4 Qa Q Select Insert Pnt A gt e t 2m Insert Pnt 1 Direction NO 00 00 E Load Pattern Edit Pattern Insert Pattern xX Insert Pnt Specify the point ID for an existing point in your project either by typing in its point ID or by tapping on a point in the map screen to select it when this field has focus The selected point will be highlighted in the map view with a large red point and the current pattern will be previewed with smaller green points Direction Use this to specify a direction value for your pattern The default direction of NO 00 00 E will orient the pattern exactly as it was defined To orient your pattern along any arbitrary line between two existing points enter those two points using the pt pt format like 1 2 and the direction between those two points will be automatically cal culated for you The pattern s X axis will be applied along this direc
182. This will remove the line from the Active Lines list so that no more segments or arcs can be added This works similar to closing a figure but differs in that the figure will not be forced to close back on to the original start point Re Activating Figures When a figure has been marked as complete you can activate it again as follows From the Line Toolbar yA You can visually pick on the map view the figure that you would like to re activate On the line toolbar select the activate button which will make the selected figure active MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Line 3DPLINE 1 10 to 2 99 5 From the Figure List You can also open the active lines list and if you turn off the Show Active Figures button you will see the figures that are marked as not active Simply select the figure you want and press the Switch Active State button which will set it to active Line Active Description Pnts 1 Yes EJASPH 3 2 Yes E ASPH 3 Deleting Figures To delete linework in your project simply select the figure you want to delete When you select the fig ure the line toolbar will open 104 Points Lines Descriptions pe Use this button on the line toolbar to delete an individual segment between two points or a three point arc F Use this to delete the entire figure that you have selected Splines Spline sections are considered to be one entity so using the delete entire fig ure or delete segmen
183. Trigonometric calculations Example Cosine of 12 3456 1 2 3 4 5 6 COS i 0 9768757205 Example Cosine of 12 34 56 1 2 3 4 5 6 DMS gt COS jl 0 9759844006 Example Arc Cosine of 0 3456 0 3 4 5 6 SHIFT ACOS it 69 78157371 1 X Inverse of X Example 1 4 4 1 X 0 25 272 x LOG x2 LN EEX pi xW 10 y e Calculations Menu Square Root of X Example ROOT 9 9 vx 3 Logarithm Base 10 Example LOG 1000 1 0 0 0 LOG 4 Change Sign Example 3 ENTER X Squared Example 3 2 3 x2 9 Natural Logarithm Example LN 148 1 4 8 LN 4 997212274 Scientific Notation Example 3x10 4 3 EEX 4 30 000 Pushes pi onto the stack Example SHIFT pi 3 141592654 X th root of Y Example 3ROOT 8 8 ENTER 3 SHIFT xvy 2 10 tothe X Example 10 3 3 SHIFT 10 1000 Y to the X Example 2 3 2 ENTER 3 SHIFT y 8 Exponent of X Example e1 1 ENTER SHIFT e 2 718281828 273 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 STAKING MENU Staking Menu Main Menu Staking Menu This menu contains staking related functions ss 8 O EN Stake Points e Stake Alignment Fa Stake Line Cut Sheet Reports oy Stake Surface EN Stake Elevation it Staking List O Go Back On the staking menu pressing any of the buttons will take
184. Zone Edit command from the commands button This will open the zone modifier screen for the zone In our example we ll be modifying zone 3 on the left side of the tem plate To add width modifiers press the Widths button From here you can press the Add button to add modifiers for the zone The following table shows the information that would have been inputted Zone Zone 3 123 Slopes 0 Cut Fill 0 wo Start Sta Start Wi End Stat End Width 6 00 00 5 00 7 00 00 7 00 00 10 00 8 00 00 8 00 00 10 00 9 00 00 Delete Press Ok to save the modifiers Checking Width Modifiers At any time from the Template editor you can confirm that your modifiers are correct by using the sta tion slider If we use our example from above and want to preview the template at station 6 00 you can do so by entering it in the station field 494 Roads Template Surface 1 Zone View gt 4 view Zone Modifiers Left P C Right Zone 1 12 00 Vert Dist 2 500 Fane ann VertNict R3 222 Y gt Template Surface 1 Zone View gt 4 view Zone Modifi Left E C Ri E Rit Station 7 00 00 Left Zones Width A Zone 1 12 00 Vert Dist 2 500 Fane 2 ann VertNict R3 222 Y i gt Commands section view xX Cancel Advanced Zone Editing Superelevation In this example we will use the template example from the Template section We want to add super elevation data to our
185. __Resection SP PN5000 N 1009 1534 E 1000 0000 EL100 3244 PN6034 N 1006 1995 E 1002 8319 EL99 7321 FS PN6035 N 1001 4706 E 1004 8775 EL99 7361 FS PN5000 CR359 59590 ZE87 49010 SD9 1600 PN6034 CR24 33000 ZE92 03450 SD6 8280 RS PN6035 CR73 13080 ZE92 43050 SD5 1010 D O N6036 N 999 9998 E 999 9998 EL100 0011 P6036 N 999 9998 E 999 9998 EL100 0011 SP PN5000 N 1009 1534 E 1000 0000 EL100 3244 BK OP6036 BP5000 BS0 00039 BC0 00000 Occupy Check 173 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 m Observed Values HA 0 00 00 0 VA 87 49 22 0 SD 9 160m HD 9 153m Distance Calculated 9 154m Distance Error 0 000m l BS Elevation 100 324m BS Elevation Error 0 001m Check Point Main Menu Survey Methods Check Point Use this to measure a check shot to an existing point When you start the command you will see the point chooser appear where you can create a new point or pick an existing one from a list or from the screen After you choose your point you will be ready to measure You will note the measure mode will be set to Check Pnt and if you need to cancel the operation you can do it by pressing the meas ure mode button and choose to cancel it Check Point Summary When you re ready to record the shot press the Measure button on the instrument toolbar You will be presented with a screen that compares your measured values to the ones that were comp
186. a in the Observation Toolbar which means you need to take a measurement first so it can calculate the current position of 286 Staking Menu the rod Press the measure button if you re using a conventional instrument or turn on the cursor tracking button if you re using a robot or GPS xh 2 o 000 O 3x Design 100 000m Elev 0 001m HT 0 000m Page Fill 99 999m Staking Prism y Ly 2 A 30m Stk GROUND TA Staking Method Elevation Store Y Point 4 j Once you take a shot you will see the following information in the Observation Toolbar near the top of the screen the Design elevation based on the surface model s elevation at your rod s horizontal pos ition the actual Height or elevation of the rod and the Cut or Fill between the two To help you visu alize where your shot is in relation to the surface you can always use our 3D view capabilities Staking Method Unlike Point or Line Arc staking there is only one available staking method Height Store Point When this is pressed the Store Edit Points screen will appear so you can store the position that was staked Also a raw record will be written to the raw file Information This isn t applicable when staking to a surface and will be grayed out Zoom This isn t applicable when staking to a surface and will be grayed out Settings This will open the Staking Settings screen which allows you to setup parameters that will be used dur ing the st
187. a the Occupy Point Multi Set or Resection commands Most of these modes will also not be available if you are using GPS MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Temporary No Store This will allow you to take a measurement without storing it Please see the Temporary No Store topic for more information Occupy Point Use this to define an instrument setup Please See Backsight Method on page 161 topic for more information Sideshot This mode allows you to measure a point After the measurement it will allow you to review your measurement data and allow you to make changes to the point id and description before it is stored Please see the Sideshot topic for more information Sideshot Auto Store This mode allows you to measure a point using the next available point id and the description and line toggles specified on the main map screen Using this is a very fast method for recording your meas urements Please see the Sideshot Auto Store following topic for more information Multi Set This will start the multi set routine that will help you collect repeat observations to your backsight and a new foresight point Please see the Multi Set topic for more information Resection This will start the multiple point resection routine to allow you to determine your current instrument position by measuring to known points Please see the Resection topic for more information Check Point Use this to display a check measurement to an existing poin
188. abase 353 49 13 0 357 07 26 0 1 13 02 0 Perp Pnt 12 10 23 0 3 00 S8 0 1 lt i On Select Perpendicular pre Store Prt Xx Close Note You can increase the size of the text shown in the grid by setting the Text Size option in the Options screen Select Perpendicular Point You can define the perpendicular point one of two ways The first is to simply take a measurement that will define the perpendicular point The shot is only used to make an intersection a point isn t stored at the measurement location Vertical Angle Lime Prt 1 0 47 36 0 Line Pnt 2 The other method is to choose an existing point that exists in your scene Press the Select Per pendicular Pnt button to select a point Store the Point Once you ve made your measurements and defined a perpendicular point that will be used to compute the intersection you can press the Store Point button This will store a point in the map screen store a point in the database as well as record information to the raw file Raw File Everything about the intersection is stored in the raw file In the following example if you shot the per pendicular point you will see a third shot that records the measurement l Line Perpendicular Point HI1 340 HRO 000 AR353 49130 ZE80 47360 SD21 3386 Pnt 1 of Line HI1 340 HRO 000 AR357 07260 ZE81 13020 SD22 4245 Pnt 2 of Line HI1 340 HRO 000 AR12 10230 ZE83 00580 SD
189. acksight method entered your points and instrument height you can move on to the next step by pressing the Observe Backsight button You will be taken back to the map view where you will see the graphical position of your setup and backsight points There are a few things you should take note of 153 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 1 You can always tell what mode you re in by the mode text that appears near the top of your drawing Since you re using the occupy point command you will see Observe Backsight near the top of the map area 2 You have two measure modes available to you on the instrument toolbar You can measure an angle and distance to the backsight or measure only your current plate reading without meas uring a distance The two options are described in more detail in the Backsight Measure Mode topic 3 You can cancel the setup by pressing the measure mode button and choosing Cancel Back sight 4 While in the backsight mode you can use any of the controls from the information and display toolbar 5 Youcan set the height of target by using the HT button on the instrument toolbar 6 When you re ready to measure to the backsight press the Measure button on the instrument toolbar Backsight Summary After you have taken your measurement you will see a Summary of your shot From this screen you can choose to accept the shot or re shoot it You can also specify if you want the plate reading set to zero or a Specific
190. actor and a translation For the most part the scale factor will not change very much over the workable range of your RTK system But if you want to update the combined scale factor you can Adjust Points Use this to compute new coordinates for your GPS derived points Each GPS observation you store is saved in the raw file as an EP record which is essentially a WGS84 position If you want FieldGenius to compute new Cartesian or local coordinates for the GPS observations you can Sim ply press the Calculate Params button and FieldGenius will scan your raw file and will recompute new coordinates using the EP records and will apply your transformation parameters to the coordinates An example where this could be used is after you ve measured some constrain points to help you loc alize to a user local coordinate system After you compute your transformation parameters you will still have two coordinate systems one with the local coordinates and one with the GPS UTM or SPCS coordinates It is usually beneficial to transform the GPS derived constrain points so they are now in the local system Do Not Calculate Scale Checkbox If this is checked FieldGenius will not compute a scale factor and will force it to a value of 1 0 Do Not Calculate Vertical Slopes Checkbox If this is checked then FieldGenius will not compute any slope values Parameters Origin North and East This is the centroid of the measured coordinates or simply the ave
191. actual measurement to the design point is indicated in the observation toolbar You can press the Page button to toggle between various information if you do not see these values If your measurement is within your defined tolerance of the design point then the text will be green if not then the text will be red This information is also avail able in the Staking Information screen The type of information shown will vary based on your current Staking Method 507 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Staking Information 130 Design 4 00 00 R 12 00 Actual 4 00 01 R 11 935 Move Back Sta 0 01 Out CL 0 07 Design Point Northing 10421 01 Easting 10150 00 Elevation S576 Rotate Instrument Template Preview El At anytime during your staking you can press the Profile button to see the actual rod Eeg position which will be shows as an orange circle in relation to the template defined for the alignment page Right 0 01 age Fill 0 15 Prism i Stk 4 00 00 R 12 00 Staking Method Directional y Y 0 Pl Zoom Stake If you press the Zoom Stake button in the staking toolbar you will be zoomed in to show you both the design point and the actual measurement The green circular area surrounding the design point reflects the area where you are within the defined staking tolerances 508 Roads ma pl oe 0 15 E moan Prism amp Stk 4 00 00 R o Staking Method Directional y
192. ad Clicking on this button will open up the Windows Start Menu Available on Pocket PC AY and Windows Mobile devices only Clicking on this button will open up the RPN Calculator Clicking on this button will open up the help page for whatever topic you are currently 2 at The help page will open up in an Internet Explorer window This button will take you back to the main menu rol Menu Home Sees e 4 This button will take you back to the map screen Map View PATA X Exit This button will save your project and close FieldGenius 40 Getting Started Y OK This button will accept the changes you ve made and will return you to the previous screen X ae This button will close the current screen and return you to the pre ae vious screen without saving any changes Pressing this will close the currently open toolbar and return you X to the previous screen O Pressing this will open the Point Chooser toolbar 7 FieldGenius Project Files Every FieldGenius project will contain usually 7 files but may contain more depending on what files you ve exported or copied to the directory Typically you will see that the file names will begin with the name of your project This is the index for the database file Filename dbf This is the database file that contains your coordinate information This file contains information pertinent to your project Filename raw This is the raw file that contains your observat
193. add a user defined coordinate system to the coordinate system list See the Add user defined System section below for more details Edit User Defined This allows you to review and edit a user defined coordinate system Select a user defined coordinate system from the list and press the Edit User Defined button Doing so will display the Edit User 437 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Defined System dialog Some predefined coordinate systems are read only and can t be edited You will see a waming mes sage when attempting to copy or edit system that can not be editted Delete User Defined Pressing the button will delete the selected user defined coordinate system You will need to confirm that you want to delete it from the database Since there is no und you may want to use the User Coordinate System Export routine to save a backup copy of your coordinate system before deleting anything Some predefined coordinate systems are read only and can t be deleted They can however be removed from the favourites list by using the Remove From List button Remove From List If you select either a user defined or predefined coordinate system and press this button the selected coordinate system will be removed from the coordinate system list It isn t deleted or removed from the mapping database OK Button This will save the coordinate system favourites list to the msurvey ini file Cancel Button This will exit the dialog and will sa
194. after the point pairs have been entered and their corresponding computed residuals With four point pairs being used the horizontal transformation has a redundancy of two point pairs and the vertical transformation has a redundancy of one point pair The residuals are within acceptable lim its and do not necessitate the removal of point pairs GPS Local Transformation O Calculate Parameters Edit Control Add Control F Do not calculate scale F Do not calculate vertical slopes _ dN dE dH Ctrl Pnt Horz Vert 202 0 003 0159 0 002 204 0 114 0 028 0 015 Figure 15 FieldGenius Constrained Points for Transformation Viewing the Parameters page as indicated in Figure 16 will provide feedback of the calculated hori zontal and vertical transformation parameters 463 Point Northing _ Easting _ Height Point Northing Easting Height 334 94 383 55 382 98 384 37 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 80 Edit Control Calculate Scale GPS Adjust Points Origin North 7098 779m Origin East 5871 316m Trans North 5516777 646m 315748 438m 0 00 01 10000000000 Trans Height 0 008m Figure 16 FieldGenius Calculated Parameters Using the calculated transformation parameters the control system points 101 108 can be trans formed First you need to open the coordinate database by going to Main Menu Data Manager Coordinate database Click the Find butto
195. aking It will list the coordinates of the point plus other information that will help you during your stakeout Toggle Observation View y This button allows you too see or hide the Observation Toolbar Select Next Point This button opens up options to select next point to Stake FL Zoom aN Map View only This will automatically zoom to the extents of your cur rent target position and the point you re staking Settings This will open the Staking Settings screen which allows you to setup parameters that will be used during the stakeout such as your Tol erance Orientation Reference and more X Close This will close the Staking Toolbar and return you to the previous screen StakingMethod Map View For each of the following methods if you are within the Tolerance setting defined in the Staking Set tings then the direction distance text will be green if you are outside the tolerance then the text will be red You can also switch pages within the Observation Toolbar at any time to see other meas urement information for example if you want to see the rod elevation instead of a Cut Fill Turn An Angle This method will display both the required and measured horizontal angles in the Observation Toolbar near the top of the screen This method is useful while staking with a conventional total station to quickly get online with the design point Directional This method will display the In Out and Left Right or N S E
196. aking process 287 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Staking List Main Menu Staking Staking List Use a staking list to stake points from a predetermined list of points Why Use a Staking List The staking list is separate from the Points database We have added intelligence to the staking list specifically for staking out After importing points and assigning the To Stake Out survey role to them you will never have a measured point appear as a point to be staked out Moreover the staking list will always search for and present the next nearest point shortest path from the current position as the next point to stake out This functionality was added to help you stake out more points in a day When you start the staking list command you will see the staking list screen and it will be empty if you haven t previously added any points to it The image below is of a staking list that contains points Staking List i s Point ID Description Staked Status 1 Nail amp 2 Nail pr 3 Nail 4 Nail Fr 5 Nail E Sort By Point ID Sort By Shortest Path Find Points Select Point Remove All j cose Points Sort By Point ID Use this to sort the staking list by Point ID Sort By Shortest Path Select the first point you want to stake then use this to sort the staking list by shortest path distance from the selected point 288 Staking Menu Find Points Use this to find points that will be added to the list You can fi
197. alance You can adjust the traverse using a vertical angle or compass balance You can select any one of the three adjustment types or apply all three of them to the traverse The traverse routine uses traverse TR records in the raw file to define the traverse points that will be used for the adjustment Please refer to the Traverse Report topic for more information on creating a traverse loop with FieldGenius When FieldGenius computes an adjustment it will write to the RAW file AP records with the new cal culated coordinates for the traverse points FieldGenius will adjust the sideshots after you perform an adjustment FieldGenius will scan the raw file from the beginning and re process all setups OC records and sideshots SS records Once you have completed your traverse and you would like to adjust it you need to do the following 1 Define the closing points using the Traverse Report screen 2 Compute the closure by pressing the View Report button 224 Survey Tools Menu 3 Review the closure report confirming its validity Apply an adjustment using the Ang Bal Vert Bal or Comp Bal adjustment buttons at the bottom of the traverse report screen 5 When you choose one of the adjustment types you will be asked to confirm that you want to go ahead with the adjustment 6 If you press Yes in the step 5 FieldGenius will adjust the traverse points and create AP records in the raw file It will then re process the raw file
198. ally update your current setup with the new shot to the backsight When you start the command you will be taken back to the map screen and the measure mode will be set to Check BS You have two measure modes available when taking a check shot to your back sight Please see the Backsight Measure Mode topic for more information Check Backsight Summary When you re ready to record the shot press the Measure button on the instrument toolbar You will be presented with a screen that compares your measured values to the ones that were stored for the cur rent backsight 175 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Backsight Setup 0 00 00 Backsight Measured 359 58 24 Backsight Error 0 01 36 Distance Calculated 100 00 Distance Measured 99 87 Distance Error 0 13 Update Backsight Pressing this will create a record in the raw file updating your setup and backsight record with the shot information from your check shot Several notes will also be written to the raw file summarizing your shot When you choose to update the backsight a new OC and BK record is saved as well as the shot information You will also see the word Updated which indicates that the user selected the Update button oc OP5 N 763 8748 E 1000 0000 ELO 0000 sp PNI N 1000 0000 E 1000 0000 EL100 0000 start BK OP5 BP1 BS0 00000 BC0 00000 LS HI0 000 HR5 000 Backsight Check Updated Observed Values HA 0 00 00 0 VA 90 00 00 0 SD 163 12 Backsig
199. also a user programmable button that can be customized to start any command Main Menu Button O This button takes you into the Main Menu 7 Mini Toolbar Button This button opens the Mini Toolbar Pa Draw Lines Button This is used to toggle on and off the draw lines function When turned on points will be connected with a line as you measure them 57 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Next ID lt No Line gt 58 Draw Cu Lines Button This is used to toggle on and off the draw curvy lines button This function will draw a best fit curve through your points as you shoot them Draw 3 Point Arc Button 3 Point arcs can be started using the same method as for a Line or Curvy Line However to switch to 3 Point arc within an ongoing Line select the Draw 3 Point Arc button before shooting the second of the three points that will define the arc POC Point on Curve Note that this is not the radius point After measuring to the 2nd point a dashed line will appear to illustrate that a 3 Point arc is in progress Shoot the 3rd point and the arc will appear The current draw option will change from Draw 3 Pt Arc to Draw Line after the third shot and the arc is complete Compound 3 point arcs are supported Simply re select the 3 Point Arc but ton before measuring the next POC User Defined Button This button can be customized to start any command By default it opens the Coordinate Database but this can be changed in the Keyboard
200. always be located at the selected Insertion Point so a point should not be included in your pattern at 0 0 You can also rotate the pattern into any orientation on the Pattern Toolbar see above so you do not need to create different variations of the same pattern to insert it in different ori entations Press the Delete Point button to remove the selected X Y offset from the pattem Load Pattern Press this button to load a previously saved pattern file 227 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Save Pattern Press this button to save the current pattern to disk This will always do a Save As type save so you can specify a new filename or select any existing pattern file to overwrite it with the changes You will always be prompted for confirmation before over writing an existing pattern file New Pattern To create a new pattern simply delete all of the existing points from the current pattern When you press the Save Pattern button you will always be prompted for a new filename so you will not lose the previous pattern Close Press this button to close the Pattern Editor and return to the Pattern Toolbar If you have not saved the current pattern you will be prompted to confirm this before discarding your changes GPS Local Transformation Main Menu Survey Tools GPS Local Transformation FieldGenius includes a flexible localization utility The first thing you need to do is specify the points that will be constrained You
201. ameters but the transformation parameters will be applied to the measured points 1103 and 1105 to produce the residuals as shown In this case we see that the residuals are acceptable and thus it can be assumed that the determined transformation parameters are reliable Adjustment Results Upon satisfaction of the applied constraints and relevant residuals the transformation parameters can be viewed or modified As indicated in Figure 9 the four horizontal transformation parameters translation in northing translation in easting scale and rotation and the three vertical transformation parameters bias slope in X and slope in Y are shown in the grid list GPS Local Transformation ET Edit Control Calculate Scale GPS Adjust Points Origin North 5523145 270m Origin East 311529 858m Trans North 4985 504m Trans East 4999 223m Rotation 1 00 S9 Scale 1 0000135774 Trans Height 0 011m ES z GPS Local Transformation amp Edit Control Calculate Scale GPS Adjust Points Trans North 4985 504m Trans East 4999 223m Rotation 1 00 59 Scale 10000135774 Trans Height 0 011m Slope North 0 00007 Slope East 0 00006 ES cose 471 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 When you press the Calc Parameters button it uses the point pairs that you ve defined to calculate the transformation parameters The values that are computed can be modified by the user You can do what if scenarios by changing any of the valu
202. ansformation 228 232 418 449 453 Local Transformation to Point 413 Lock 63 386 Lots 332 LS Line of Sight Instrument and Target Height 526 M Main Interface 53 Main Menu Button 113 Make and Model Settings 372 Manage Road 475 Manual Distance 183 Manual Entry 184 Manual Entry Alignment C L 476 Manual Entry Template 488 Manual Entry Vertical Profile 483 Map Data Layers Manager 298 Map Select Toolbar 66 Map View 53 Masks 405 mcvariable Primary ProductNameDesktop 105 542 Measure 61 64 384 385 387 Measure Backsight 151 Measure Benchmark 198 Measure Distance 67 Measurement 418 Measurement Mode 61 385 Measurement Mode 64 387 Measurement Modes GNSS 411 Measurement Tolerance 381 Microsoft ActiveSync 517 Microsoft Windows Mobile Device Center 517 MicroSurvey CAD 521 522 MicroSurvey Software Inc 11 Mini Toolbar Control 60 MO Mode Setup Record 526 Model and Communication 374 Modem Settings 423 Mount Point 432 MSCAD 521 522 Multi Set 163 Multi Set Tolerance 381 Multiple prisms 63 386 N Nautiz X7 83 New 35 New Figure 97 New Road 475 New Target 344 345 350 351 356 360 Nikon 368 No Communication 384 No Lock 63 386 No Store 151 Notes 81 NTRIP 423 432 O Observation Toolbar 56 OC Occupy Point Record 527 Occupy 151 OF Off Center Shot Record 527 Offset 177 179 181 184 186 188 193 246 Offset Intersection 245 Offset Staking 505 Open 32 Optio
203. applic able The Software and Documentation are licensed not sold and are protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and treaties Licensee shall take appropriate steps reas onably calculated to notify others of MICROSURVEY and its licensor s suppliers ownership of the Software and Documentation Warranty MICROSURVEY warrants that the Product will for 90 days after the Effective Date the Warranty Period substantially conform to the Documentation provided that Licensee must notify MICROSURVEY in writing of any breach of the foregoing warranty within the Warranty Period For any breach of the foregoing warranty reported during the War ranty Period MICROSURVEY will use reasonable efforts to promptly correct such defect without further charge If MICROSURVEY is unable to correct such defect then MICROSURVEY will refund the license fees paid for the Product This represents MICROSURVEY S exclusive liability and Licensee s sole and exclusive remedy in the event of a breach of the foregoing warranty Warranty Disclaimer EXCEPT AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 4 WARRANTY MICROSURVEY HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES RELATING TO THE PRODUCT SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY NON INFRINGEMENT AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE MICROSURVEY DOES NOT REPRESENT THAT THE OPERATION OF THE PRODUCT AND OR SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE WITHOUT LIMITING THE
204. ase see the ASCII Coordinate File Import topic for more information ASCII Coordinate File Export Use this to export an ASCII file of your points Please see the ASCII Coordinate File Export topic for more information DXF File Import Use this to import a DXF file into your project Please see the DXF File Import and Map Data Layers topics for more information DXF File Export Use this to export a DXF file of your current project The DXF file will contain drawing entities of your points and lines Please see the DXF File Export topic for more information 320 Import Export Menu LandXML File COGO Points Chains Export Use this to export a LandXML file containing CgPoints and Chains The file will be saved in your cur rent project directory Please see the LandXML File Export topic for more information Fieldbook File Export Use this to export a Softdesk FBK file that will contain you coordinates raw observations and figure information Please see the Fieldbook File Export topic for more information SDR File Export The SDR Export in FieldGenius will convert the existing raw file into a SDR 33 compatible format Please see the SDR File Export topic for more information Shapefile Export Use this to export an ESRI shapefile Please see the Shapefile Export topic for more information Import Template You can import a template that was previously exported using this command Please see the tem plate import comma
205. ation Storing the Shot After you record your measurements you can store the new point by pressing the Store Point button 178 Survey Methods Menu Horizontal Angle Offset Angle Center Distance 93 25 45 0 94 49 33 0 88 49 53 0 88 41 34 0 27 308m 0 000rn 1 035m Horizontal Distance 0 666m Observe Observe Store Point Xx Cancel Angle Distance After you store the point you can continue using the offset command to record additional points or exit it by pressing the Cancel button Raw File Record In the raw file the OF records represent the measurements that were made and the SS record is derived using the two OF records OF ARO4 49380 2E88 41340 SD27 3163 OF OL93 25450 Right Angle Offset SS OP1 FP23 AR93 25450 ZE88 41340 SD27 3081 ROAD Vertical Angle Offset Main Menu Survey Methods Vertical Angle Offset When you begin the vertical angle offset routine you will see the following screen Two observations are required one to record the top or bottom of the object and a second to measure a distance that is directly underneath or above the new point 179 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Vertical Angle Offset Angle Height Distance No Solution Observe Observe x On this screen you determine what order you will make these two measurements All you need to do is press either the Observe Angle or Observe Distance button Note You can increase the size of the text shown
206. ation Check Use this button to calculate an elevation along your vertical profile at the station you define In the example below you will see the station entered was 3 50 and the computed elevation is 137 50 The station check button can be used with all vertical element types 483 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Profile Profile 1 Station 100 000 sE B 150 000 25 0000 125 000 25 0000 130 000 5 0000 lt gt Check Station 3 50 000 Elevation 137 500 y OK High Low High Low Display When you use the High Low button it will compute the high and low points for your vertical profile Profile Profile 1 Extremum Station 1 00 000 100 000 3 00 000 150 000 4 00 000 125 000 5 00 000 130 000 Sta Check In the example above you can see that the high and low points are listed in the grid This option can be used to display the high low information for all vertical profile elements PVI Element PVI elements are essentially straight grade segments that change direction at grade breaks Each grade break PVI has to be defined by a station and elevation 484 Roads When you select to add a PVI element you will have two fields available where the station and the elevation at that station can be entered Once you have a minimum of two PVI points the slope of the line will be displayed Profile Profile 1 Station Elev 10 00 000 100 000 30 00 000 150 000 2 5000 40 00 000 125 000 2 5
207. ation and Rover Configuration topics for more information Rover Connection Procedure Main Menu Settings Instrument Selection 2 Choose GPS Rover as the type of instrument 3 If you have not already done so you need to create a profile for your rover receiver If you have a profile already defined select it now and then press Connect 4 You will then be prompted with the Correction Link Settings where you can configure your radio or modem settings Press the Connect button to turn on your radio or modem to begin receiving corrections 5 With a successful connection you will see the map screen The Measure button might say No Link to begin with then switch to RTK Float and finally to RTK Fixed 6 Torecord a position simply press the Measure button on the GPS toolbar Refer to the GPS Measurement topic for more information Rover Measurement Modes Main Menu Survey Modes GNSS Toolbar Measure Modes GNSS Measurement Modes Rover Receiver When you connect to a rover receiver you will have a choice of measurement modes available to you You can access three different measurement modes to program your receiver with a position by selecting the Measure Modes button in the main menu orthe measure modes button on the GNSS instrument toolbar GNSS Toolbar Rover Measure Main Menu Survey Modes y Modes 416 Survey Tools 0 E Calculations Es e Jo Selecting the Measure Modes button will di
208. ave Point A Save Point B Define Area e Xx Close Once a solution has been found you can always preview it by pressing the Map View button 261 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Xx Close Map As mentioned above FieldGenius will compute the new boundary so that it intersects the boundary lines connected to the start and finish points that were defined In the example below the original left side of the lot now has two segments that define it In this example the solution would have to intersect the boundary segments from 108 9001 and from 46 62 If we use the same predetermine area parameters as above FieldGenius will not be able to com pute a solution because the solution does not intersect the two segments 14 eas is Select n Rad 3 Pnt Remove Point ure Arc Arc Previous x However if the direction for the boundary is changed to 130 and the area amount changed to 7000 a solution can be computed because the solution intersects the two segments connected to the start and finish points 262 Calculations Menu Xx Close Map If you did want to keep the same area amount and direction all you would need to do is change the starting point Close Map Storing a Solution When you have a solution that you want to store simply press the Save Point button or buttons depending on the solution method you used If you used the parallel method you will have two solu t
209. averse Definition Foresight Method If we use CASE 1 as an example the user first setup on point 1 and backsighted point 2 He then foresighted and setup on points 3 to 5 and closed the traverse by recording one more TR record to point 6 To compute the traverse report you go to the Main Menu Survey and choose the Traverse Report button When selected you will see the following screen 220 TR 7 Survey Tools Menu Traverse Definition Foresight Method C Occupy point closes traverse Foresight point closes traverse C Foresight closes to direction Last traverse foresight at 6 OR Foresight Compare Pnt 1 Last traverse occupy at 5 oO Occupy Compare Pnt 2 y View Report Xx Close FieldGenius will automatically scan the raw file looking for the last TR foresight and the OC record that was used to measure the last foresight It will then search for any point within a 3 meter radius and use it as the match or point that defines the original coordinates If more than one point is found in the 3 meter radius it will use the one that is closest FieldGenius supports two closed traverse methods Choose Foresight Point Closes Traverse if you want to do a Text Book traverse closure If you choose the Occupy Point Closes Traverse method FieldGenius will not use your last foresight observation and assumes that the original back sight and occupy points are fixed Choosing this method will close the traverse on the original
210. button A minimum of two points are needed to compute a position for the instrument but you can shoot more points if needed to increase the accuracy of the instrument position The estimated accuracy of the instrument location will be displayed for you on the toolbar If the estimated error is within your own tol erances then you can can go ahead and store the point by pressing the Store Point button All suc cessful solutions will be displayed with green text starting with the characters StdDev Press the Close button to cancel out of the routine You may need to do this if the solution does not converge and you need to restart the routine Select Point A i A A 20m StdDev N 0 014m E 0 053m O V A Store Point Observed Point ES Close Instrument Height 0 000m 170 Survey Methods Menu Three or More Shots If you have more points to reference to you can continue measuring them using the same process as you did when you shot the second point As you record more points you should notice that the stand ard deviations for the northing and easting will begin to get smaller Standard Deviation This is the computed precision for the overall geometry of the resection Small errors indicate that the measured data fits very well with the geometry defined by the known points Large errors can indicate that bad measurements were recorded either due to careless measurement practices such as not holding the prism pole straight
211. ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccncn cnn cnn 63 GEPS To0lbar ti a e a de a at bes ld id a ek a 65 Map Select Toolbar tartas coat tod e daa alo id Dara 66 Points Lines Descriptions ie ersero a a datan sed 69 ROM Sd erse rc dt oda sona 69 Point Toolbar mocos tetas end 69 Select Point Toolbar 2 00000 eee ccc cece cece ccc ccc cece cece cece ce eeceeeeeeeeeeeees 71 Point Averaging 0 202 c cece cece r ce a eee teteeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 72 Point Database ccs oss es Sot ee Ee BS ee ST tele sere yk es 72 AutoMap Libra isidro dotadas 73 Point Patems etorri roo re era a 17 Patten toolbar ts it o ees de do a a odo o do o e dae e 17 PattemiBditor atan ca los da tue Sieh cal oo Male A IDAS 79 Partition LINeSs ATES cita id o tii geo ted 80 A A AO ATA RO NASA see eh ee 81 14 Table of Contents Feature Sto Ace Us hah Gs ie teen alah Adem ant iin Cites lied dans ona 83 Raw File Comment 1 0 0 0 22 cece eee e eee ec cece cece cccccccecececceeeeceeeeeteeeeeeeteneeeteeeneeeees 85 ACTIVE LINGWOIK ets coco ln it SA send td tt Hos DI 86 IQUITOS des Aik nea UN de rs o ele e NO Dee 88 A A a aa E N 89 Select Line Toolbar iaus aaa are ata aa 90 O AAA n O ER E A E a a a L 92 Using Active Figures oo dar issn sve A ees A It A A 93 Figure Direction Marker 2 0 2 oo e ccc c ccc c cece cece aarded aadorin aiora rnanan 96 New FIQUIG a ds cae ee as toe e a hak a ds dee te doc 97 Switching Active Figures 00000000 ccc c ccc ccc
212. ce Distance v Ol y E Prt 1 6 Distance 1 500m Pnt 2 7 Distance 1 000m Xx Close Method Interior Angle Traverse Use this to compute a new point by turning an angle from another point Enter the current setup and previous backsight points then the interior angle and the distance Positive angles will be inter preted as angle right if you want to turn an angle left enter the angle as negative To store the solu tion simply press the Store Pnt button After the point is stored the points will automatically leapfrog so you can continue traversing by just entering the next interior angle and distance a IA i ol method Interior Angle Traverse v O Pnt 2 Angle 90 00 00 Pnt P 1 Distance 50 00 x Close COGO Results Every calculation you make is written to the file called CogoCalcs txt located in your project folder 242 Calculations Menu Please see the COGO History Viewer topic for more information Inverse Main Menu Calculations Inverse This command will calculate for you the inverse between two points It will display the horizontal slope distance direction vertical distance and slope between the two points You do not need to have a line drawn between the points to use the inverse command 50 to 59 29 352m 233 04 19 Start Pnt so End Pnt Traverse Inverse Rad 3 C Radial Inverse Arc Arc A large font can be set for the results toolbar and COGO results P
213. ceeeeeceeeeeees 384 Robotic Instrument Toolbar 00 cece cece cccccccccececceceeceeeeeceteeeeeteeeeneeeeneees 385 Instrument Settings 00 00 e cece cece cece oaii rarnana aaeain rirnan nanenane 387 Target Manager s c2 os A A a nd Slt Last SS ey 389 Survey Methods Menu 0 000000 ccc ccc cece ccc cece ee cee cee ceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeees 393 Survey Methods Menu 0c cece cece cece cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecceseeseeeeees 393 SEL ANGIE 2c 32 c6 SRG e A DA ASSP PUMA O Att eR OEE OL ED 396 Check Levelies cc su2hso ee Se ee o O oa 397 Select GRS Profiles a co ee e gl ets 399 GPS Reference Profile 220 0 cece cece cece cece ccc cece ccc cccccceccecceceeceeeeeeneees 400 GPS Rover Profile ona ae cece cece cece cece cece cece cece cece conc cc cnc cnc 401 GPS Model and Communication 02 e cece ee eeeceeeeeeeeeee 402 GPS Tolerance Reference 0 00 ce eee cece cece eeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeee 405 GPS Tolerance Modes Rover 2 2222 e eee e cece cece ccc cece cece ee ceccceceeeeeees 406 DeEScnpllonia esias aa ete e sd dore eka eer al cette Nhat oot Scant 406 20 Table of Contents ETRE ter rt S A an A es fi knet T Sloman Sista solnnee wt i dene a fo ta 406 Real Time Tolerances 200 occ e cece cece cece cece cc ccccccccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 406 Standard DeVIAtION 302 2 8 peice cong ad BAS ER levee da Je soo dt Baden dese ened 407 Point Tolerance ovino Ales
214. ces and not re compute a new sur face 308 Data Manager Menu Color TIN When this is turned on then the surface color will be determined by the triangles elevation When turned off the surface will be displayed using a gray color If the TIN s wireframe and solid faces are both being displayed then the faces will be colored but the wireframe will be gray for better visibility Volume Calculation Main Menu Data Manager Surfaces Volumes FieldGenius allows you to calculate the volume between a surface and either another surface ora datum elevation The volume can be computed for the entire surface or it can be bound by a closed figure Volume Calculation Calculated Surface Surface Point Database Reference Surface Datum 0 000m I Constrain volume calculation within area y Calculate Xx Close Calculated Surface Choose the surface that you want to calculate the volumes for If you have imported any surfaces from a QSB or LandXML file they will be available to choose from or you can choose the realtime Point Database surface Reference Surface You can choose have the volume calculated between your selected surface and either a datum elev ation which defaults at 0 meters feet or if you have imported any surfaces from a QSB or LandXML file they will be available to choose as a reference surface 309 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Constrain volume calculation within area If
215. ch of the following functions so you may not see all of the following buttons when connected to your total station 387 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Level Instrument This will open the Check Level screen where you can check how level your instrument is Instrument Information When this is pressed we will display the current battery status of your instrument Note not all instru ments support this EDM Settings Use this to set the EDM mode for your instrument Every manufacturer has different measurement modes available but we will list only those that your instrument supports Please refer to your instru ment manual for more information on the EDM modes your instrument supports Any time you change your EDM Mode FieldGenius writes a comment into the raw file indicating which mode is being used Tolerance settings This will take you to you measurement tolerance settings Set Angle Use this to open the Set Angle screen where you can view the current angles and turn or flop your motorized instrument Auto Center On Off Use this to automatically center the map when a point is shot If turned on whenever you take a measurement the current prism location will always appear in the center of your map display ATR On Off Use this to turn on and off your instruments Auto Target Recognition feature Laser Pointer On Off This turns on and off the instrument s red laser pointer Guide Lights On Off This will turn on a
216. choose the one you want to use The device you selected will be saved into your instrument profile for future use so you do not need to Search every time Bluetooth PIN After initiating a Bluetooth connection you will be prompted to enter the PIN passkey for the instru ment you are connecting to If your instrument does not need one just leave it blank and continue by pressing OK The PIN you enter will be encrypted and stored in your instrument profile 404 GPS Tolerance Reference Tolerance gol 5 SVs Mask PDOP Mask 4 00 Elevation Mask 10 CA OK SVs Mask The SVs Mask setting is used to establish the minimum number of satellites that are necessary to pro duce a solution with a valid position The SVs must also pass the elevation mask test to be included in this number for the calculation of the rover position PDOP Mask The PDOP mask is used to control the acceptable geometry of the satellites used to compute the RTK position If the PDOP value exceeds this number the user will not be eligible to collect an RTK position Elevation Mask The Elevation Mask is used to determine which satellites to use in computing the differential cor rections to broadcast to the rover s Satellites below this value will not be used in the solution Elev ation mask angles are typically equal or less than the elevation mask set for the rover system Reference ID The Reference ID will be used by the rover t
217. component of the measured point to use either it s horizontal position vertical position or both An X indicates that the particular component should not be used in the transformation calculation Delta values are shown to help you determine how well your points match up with one another Once you specify your constrain points you can press the Calculate Parameters button which will compute the transformation parameters The deltas shown are the differences between the control points and the measured points if the transformation parameters were applied When you re satisfied with the transformation parameters the control point pairs and transformation parameters will be saved to the raw file upon exit Transformation Settings Calculate Parameters Use this to compute the transformation parameters You have to have constrain point pairs defined before you will see anything calculated 450 Calculate Scale GPS When this is used it will compute the combined scale factor at your current position This can be used while you re connected to either a base or rover receiver The combined scale factor is computed by multiplying the map scale by the ellipsoid scale factor The combined factor can then be applied to grid distances to get ground distances While programming the base if you use the one point localization option to help you localize into a user defined local system FieldGenius will automatically compute a combined scale f
218. create new coordinate systems copy predefined systems and edit or delete existing systems When pressed the Coordinate System List dialog will appear A predefined coordinate system is one that already exists and comes installed in FieldGeniusby default a user defined system is one that you have created Details This accesses a summary of all the parameters being used by the selected coordinate system The following information is displayed 1 What projection and parameters are being used 2 What datum transformation method and parameters are being used 3 What ellipsoid and parameters are being used See section 4 for more details Vertical Group This is where you define the vertical system also known as a geoid model for your project The default is ellipsoidal If needed you can copy geoid seperation files a k a geoid model into the FieldGenius mapping directory Any new files you copy to the mapping directory can be selected here Please review the Geoid Model topic for more details 137 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Save As Defaults Saves the Horizontal and Vertical systems to the msurvey ini file as defaults to be used for all new projects Select Horizontal Coordinate System FieldGenius ships with a default coordinate system definition of UTM NAD83 zone 11 You can change this at any time The Coordinate System List dialog is where you can select an existing coordinate system or create a new user defi
219. ctions to stake from 499 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Stake from Alignment Profile and Template If you ve taken the time to define your alignment you need to select the vertical profile and template that you want to stake from in the road settings screen Start Station 0400 00 Northing 10433 01 StartPnt Easting 9750 00 w AlignmentcA 500 00 w Vertical Profile Proflet y ow Template _ Templatet y Cw CroesSeci ns A oN E EO E y x Stake Road x Cancel Use the Stake Road button to start the road staking which will display the Stake Alignment screen Alignment Road 1 1309 EA station 0300 00 int 100 00 prev es offset 20 00 Dir Left Le Right Stake Offset 20 00 setbadk ooo Elevation 97 76 VertOffset 0 00 slop A Do e EA ap cose Station and Station Interval If you enter a station interval it will move forward and back along the alignment by this amount when you use the Prev and Next buttons This interval will start from the station that is currently entered in the Stake Station field 500 Roads Stake Station You can also manually enter the station you would like to stake by entering it in the Station field Design Offsets Move Along Template You can move along the template by using the Left and Right buttons As you do this the offset from the centerline will be displayed in the Offset field Furthermore you will see what side of the template
220. d for you The pattern s X axis will be applied along this direction Load Pattern Press this button to load a previously saved pattern file Edit Pattern Press this button to edit the currently loaded pattem or to create a new pattern if you have not loaded one Please see below for more information on the Pattern Editor Insert Pattern Press this button to apply the currently pattern to the selected insertion point New points will be stored in your project at the coordinates as previewed by the green pattern points All inserted points will be created with the description Pattern and with the same elevation as the selected insertion point To insert a pattern onto multiple points simply change the insertion point and insert the pattern onto each point one at a time as desired Pattern Editor When you press Edit Pattern on the Pattern Toolbar you will see the Pattern Editor screen 226 Survey Tools Menu D AARIA Select Insert Pnt j 2 s 2m Insert Pnt 1 Direction NO 00 00 E Load Pattern Edit Pattern Insert Pattern X Delete Point Load Pattern Save Pattern x Close Enter the X and Y offset values for your pattern as desired As you enter the points they will be pre viewed in the grid which will automatically zoom to the extents of your pattern Please see the Distance Entry amp Recall topic for options on entering the offset values in various units The 0 0 origin will
221. d in any way to the Product Software or this Agreement and or b related to any claim or demand made by any third party in connection with or arising out of i any breach by Licensee of any of the terms and conditions of this Agreement ii Licensee use or misuse of the Product or Software iii Licensee violation of applicable laws and or iv Licensee viol ation of the rights of any other person or entity MICROSURVEY reserves the right at its own expense to assume the exclusive defense and control of but not liability for any matter oth erwise subject to indemnification by Licensee Licensee will be liable to MICROSURVEY for reasonable attorney s fees in any such case Support a General Except as set forth in Section 9 b Website Support and 9 c Contract Sup port MICROSURVEY shall have no obligation under this Agreement to maintain or support the Software Licensee may contact MICROSURVEY to inquire about MICROSURVEY S commercially available support and maintenance services provided pursuant to separate agreements This Agreement shall not obligate either party to enter into any such separate agreement Any updates or error corrections to the Software that may be provided to Licensee from time to time if any shall be deemed Software hereunder and shall be licensed to Licensee under the terms and conditions of this Agreement If any such updates or error corrections are made available to Licensee then Licensee shall promptly
222. d polylines FieldGenius will automatically inter polate an elevation along the arc or curved section of the figure at 1 intervals e Contours will be drawn as polylines and will be 3D based on the contour elevation e Points or nodes will appear as an X marker in the DXF file because the PDMODE variable is being set to 3 in the DXF file In most desktop CAD programs you can change this marker type by typing PDMODE LandXML File Import Main Menu Import Export Import LandXML Main Menu Data Manager Map Data Layers Add File FieldGenius can import LandXML files Rather than convert these files into some different format you can read these files directly into FieldGenius Importing a LandXML File There are several different methods of importing a LandXML file e By using the Import LandXML File command e By using the Data Manager Map Data Layers Add File command e By placing a LandXML file into a project folder This is normally done by desktop software like MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD If FieldGenius finds a LandXML file that has the same name as the project and it is in the project folder then it will automatically be imported when you load the project 329 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 When a LandXML file is read it is scanned to make a list of the objects that it contains Loading the entire file into the FieldGenius project could use many megabytes of valuable memory Therefore when you wish to use data fr
223. d to a receiver you will see the Instrument Selection screen where you can edit your GPS profiles or connect to your receiver DOP Values This displays the current DOP Dilution of Precision values Pressing this button will cycle through the PDOP HDOP and VDOP The PDOP is the default setting as this is most often used to ascertain the quality of the satellite geometry Satellite Plot Satellite List This shows the total number of satellites the receiver is currently using in its solu tion Press this to view a sky plot of the current SVs visible to the rover orto access the Satellite List Standard GNSS Measurement Modes Menu rs This menu contains all the available measurement modes that can be used with your GNSS receiver Please review the GNSS Measurement Modes topic for more details x Measure This is the measure button Auton This button also indicates the current solution type This tells the user if the solution is Fixed Float WAAS DGPS or Autonomous This button will also indicate to the user if the corrections from the reference station have been discontinued by denot ing No Link Please refer to the GPS Measurement topic for more information If you are using a conventional non robotic total station please see the Instrument Toolbar topic If you are using a robotic total station please see the Robotic Instrument Toolbar topic Correction Link The Link Configure screen is used to configure the radio or GSM li
224. dGenius For localizing on a user defined coordinate system see the GPS Site Cal ibration section below These settings are stored in your project s ini file allowing you to easily use different coordinate sys tems for different projects Additional Grid Shift Files and Geoids Additional grid shift files or geoids can be downloaded from the MicroSurvey helpdesk 442 World Geoid models we support can be found here World grid shift files we support can be found here Older FieldGenius Mapping Files Many of the horizontal datums and vertical geoid models require the use of grid files for coordinate computations A desktop application has been provided with FieldGenius to extract user defined areas from the original files to create smaller more manageable files for the data collector See the topic on Datum Grid Editor for more information Datum Grid Editor This is a desktop program that is installed on your desktop computer You can start it by running Datum Grid Editor under the MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 program group on your system Special NOTE Software versions newer than 2011 don t require the use of this program All neces sary files are installed with versions newer than 2011 Versions Newer than 2011 As mentioned above if you are using a software versions newer than 2011 all necessary files for your coordinate systems are installed automatically for you with the following exceptions e Grid Shi
225. dGenius 7 Coordinate System Use this to define the coordinate system for your project Please see the Coordinate System Settings topic for more information Keyboard Shortcuts Use this to define shortcuts to FieldGenius commands and assign them to your keys Please see the Keyboard Shortcuts topic for more information Project Information Use this to enter and save information about your project Please see the Project Information topic for more information Main Menu Settings Options The options screen helps you set settings that affect the look and feel of FieldGenius Options amp s au au a au an on au Interface User Input Point Attributes Map Point Labels Default Units Total Station GNSS Staking Roading Y OK X Cancel Press the buttons along the left to expand show each section and the buttons to collapse hide it e Interface Options e User Input Options e Point Attributes Options 120 Settings Menu e Map Point Labels Options e Default Units Options e Total Station Options e GPS Options e Staking Options e Roading Options e System Options Interface Options Monochrome Optimized Use this to specify whether the main interface should display in full color or ina way more suitable to monochrome screens Enable Full Screen Use this to run FieldGenius in a full screen mode PocketPC devices only This is required for proper operation on devices running
226. dGenius and your instrument It can be used to diagnose communication problems and 131 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 should only be used in this situation The text file will be named tracets txt or tracegps txtand will be located in your MicroSurvey FieldGenius Programs directory on your device Bluetooth Persist On By default FieldGenius always disconnects existing Bluetooth connections and also turns the power off for the Bluetooth radio in your data collector when you exit the program The main reason we do this is to conserve battery power Some users prefer that power to the Bluetooth radio remains on no matter what In this case disable this feature The default is OFF Main Menu Settings Units and Scale The units and scale menu allows you to specify settings for your project Some of these settings are recorded in the raw file and the project s ini file as well as recorded in the msurvey ini file 7 The Distance Unit Meters or Feet and Angle Unit Degrees Radians or Gons can only be set when creating a new project After a project has been created these will remain greyed out and cannot be changed Unit Settings 8 Distance Unit Angle Unit E Degrees EI Format Z Format DDD MM sS s Precision 3 Precision 0 15 Direction Format North Azimuth Scale Factor 1 000000 r Curvature and Refraction Correction Y OK Save As Default Cancel You can set these s
227. datum settings you ve defined in your coordinate system settings FieldGenius will compute a Cartesian coordinate for each point using the Geodetic values imported from the ASCII file e A point is stored in the project database using the Cartesian Coordinates that was com puted The point will be assigned the point number that was imported from the ASCII file 324 Import Export Menu e AGS record is written in the raw file using the Cartesian Coordinates as a reference e An EP record is written to the raw file using the Geodetic Coordinates as a reference ASCII Coordinate File Export Main Menu Import Export ASCII Coordinate File Export Use this option to export a coordinate list from the current file This is useful for transfer of points from one file to another Export Coordinate File O Point List All Precision 3 Field Delimiter Comma File Format Standard Y Export X Cancel Function Specify a range of point to export in the form Accept default of All if desired Specify number of decimal places to carry on the export maximum 6 Specify if you want to export them with either a space or comma delimiter Choose the file format type that you want to use See below for more details about the different file formats If you are uncertain use the Standard format Choose Export to export the coordinates or Cancel to abort the export 6 Browse to the folder where you want to save the fi
228. de button if you see this screen 32 Getting Started FieldGenius 80 MicroSurvey Software Inc Copyright 2001 2012 MicroSurvey Software Version 6 0 0 2 2012 03 07 Device ID F008 5BiF ECAD 4DF6 Key ERE forc alos sir 356D Eaa oor IA Licensed Modules A Standard Advanced Total Station Robotic GNSS By default a project named FG Sample is installed For this example let s open it by highlighting it and pressing the Open button You can also double tap the file name which will also open it Project Manager gt e Y C Users Yifan Xia Documents MicroSurvey FieldGenius FG Projects FG Sample 5 26 2014 5 16 2014 You will then have to review the project files and decide what you want to load FieldGenius checks in the project s msurvey ini file to determine which files should be opened Press Continue New Delete P Project U pare ES 33 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Open Project Files FG Sample sw BO Generate New Name Active Raw File FG Sample raw rE e Copy Existing Project Automap FG Sample_automap csv r Use Template survey csv Feature File VA Continue Cancel The main menu will then be displayed Press the button to access the map screen or use any of the available menu commands Project FG Sample F Project Manager Y Staking e Settings O Roads Manager A Survey Modes qe Data Manager
229. dit and delete targets Cancel Press this button to discard any changed made to the Backsight dialog and returns you to the MapView 367 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 TOTAL STATION REFERENCE Conventional Total Station When connecting to a conventional total station there are a few things you need to confirm before con necting to FieldGenius You need to know what the communication parameters are set to on the instrument Please take the time to find what the following settings are set to on the instrument Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits and Parity Because of all the different instruments available we can not provide help on retrieving these settings from your instrument Please refer to your owner s manual or contact technical support from your equipment manufacturer Total Station Profile Once you know the settings you can connect FieldGenius to the instrument If you just installed FieldGenius you can start the program and follow the prompts until you get to the Instrument Selec tion screen From there select Total Station as the Instrument Type and then press the Add button to create a new Instrument Profile Name the profile for your instrument and then press the Edit but ton to access the Total Station Configuration screen to configure your profile From there choose the Model and Communication button to configure FieldGenius You can also access this screen by going to the Main Menu Settings Instrument Selecti
230. dit Total Station Profile EDM Settings From here you can specify EDM settings such as prism offsets and measurement modes EDM Settings 123 MEDM Settings Prism Offsets mm Mode TR Fine y Foresight 5 0 Time Out s 10 Backsight 0 0 MV Use default time RL 0 0 Minimum Orn V Set instrument to zero Maximum 10000m Reflectorless Settings Guide Light High y Std Dev y OK EDM Settings Mode This list will display all the measurement modes supported by your instrument These will be the same as the ones you re used to using and you can refer to your owner manual for more information on their specifications Time Out s Use this to specify the length of time FieldGenius will try to receive a measurement from your instru ment You may need to set this to a higher number if you re trying to receive measurement in wooded areas or long sights Use Default Time Out If this is checked on FieldGenius will use a default time out value If you would like to change it you need to uncheck it and update the Time Out field 378 Total Station Reference Minimum and Maximum You can specify the minimum and maximum distance that FieldGenius will accept as being valid Example is if you set this the minimum to 10 feet and you measure 5 feet FieldGenius will not record the measurement and will display a Distance out of range error in the status toolbar Guide Light If your inst
231. dot Each satellite is displayed with its PRN identification number and the Elevation Mask specified in your current Tolerance Mode is indicated by a red dashed line 425 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Satellite Plot N 74 25 E 3 82 17 wW 83 sf E 3 82 10 7 e GPS gt e GLONASS 0 Galileo e SBAS S View List Disable GLONASS j Close Press the View List button to open the Satellite List screen Press the Close button to return to the map screen GPS Satellite List T 8 To access this screen press the Satellite button on the GPS Toolbar then press the View List button on the Satellite Plot screen The Satellite List screen displays information on the current GNSS satellite constellation It shows all visible satellites including both GPS and Glonass Those satellites being used in the current solution are indicated with a checkmark and those being ignored are indicated with an X Each satellite is displayed with its PRN identification number Azimuth and Elevation and Signal to Noise Ratio 426 PRN System Azimuth Elevation 7 2 GPS 178 49 4 GPS 95 60 9 GPS 216 40 10 GPS 123 11 12 GPS 300 56 Gov GPS 70 26 G3 25 GPS 302 18 VA 27 GPS 209 35 maou ES om Press the View Plot button to open the Satellite Plot screen Press the Close button to return to the map screen se The GPS Settings screen is accessed from the GPS Toolbar Instrument
232. e 109 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Angle Chord Length Arc Length Specify one of the three available methods to define your arc e Angle Enter the interior delta angle of the arc e Chord Enter the chord length of the arc e Arc Enter the arc length of the arc Radius Specify the radius to define your arc Clockwise Counter Clockwise Arrows Use the Right Left arrow buttons to define whether the arc rotates clockwise or counter clockwise Store After you have defined the segment to add press this to store the new end and radial points and draw the arc segment into your project Store This does the same as the Store button but you will see the Store Edit Point screen Use this to con firm or view the coordinates or to specify a description Point by Arc Mode This is the same as the Arc mode except that when you press Store or Store it will only store the points without drawing the arc segment Connect Points Mode This mode lets you draw lines arcs by connecting points that already exist in your project 110 Points Lines Descriptions Os E e LA Ta 1 4 8 0 Start Pnt 2 Line Type Straight a Draw Connect Pnts Arc Pnt End Pnt Undo ES Close Start Point Specify the start point for the new segment For starting a new plan this should be set to an existing point in your project typically a corner that you will begin drawing the plan from As you continue connecting subse
233. e ed ASCH a File E Fieldbook File Export o DXF File Import E SDR File Export DXF File Export E Shapefile Export tal LandXML Import a plas Jota Go Back ASCII Coordinate File Import Use this to import an ASCII file into your project Please see the ASCII Coordinate File Import topic for more information ASCII Coordinate File Export Use this to export an ASCII file of your points Please see the ASCII Coordinate File Export topic for more information DXF File Import Use this to import a DXF file into your project Please see the DXF File Import and Map Data Layers topics for more information DXF File Export Use this to export a DXF file of your current project The DXF file will contain drawing entities of your points and lines Please see the DXF File Export topic for more information 318 Import Export Menu LandXML File COGO Points Chains Export Use this to export a LandXML file containing CgPoints and Chains The file will be saved in your cur rent project directory Please see the LandXML File Export topic for more information Fieldbook File Export Use this to export a Softdesk FBK file that will contain you coordinates raw observations and figure information Please see the Fieldbook File Export topic for more information SDR File Export The SDR Export in FieldGenius will convert the existing raw file into a SDR 33 compatible format Please see the SDR File Export topic for more info
234. e From this list you can click on a point and when you press the OK button it will be inserted into the Point ID field New Use this to open the Store Edit Points screen This will enable you to create a new point 71 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Cancel Pressing this will take you back to the routine you were selecting the point for without selecting the selected Point Point Averaging Main Menu Data Manager Point Database This routine allows you to select a number of points from within the Point Database and then cal culate the average of the coordinate values of the selected points You can then create and store a new point based on the averaged coordinates Point Database When you enter the Point Database tap on the green arrow button in the bottom toolbar until you see the Average button displayed Note The items will loop back around to the first item if you keep pressing the green arrow button Select multiple points by tapping on the screen and dragging a box around the items you wish to include in the averaging calculation Easting Elevation E 100 000 1200 000m 10 000m 100 000m 250 000m 15000m 250 000m 7 000m 200 000m 7 000m 250 026m 15 019m Use Name Description dDistance dDirection R 2 37 268m 26 33 54 q y 3 23 570m 135 00 00 1 q 4 37 268m 243 26 06 m Averaged Point Northing 66 667m Easting 233 333m Fleyvation 0O 667m Points Lines
235. e drawn as a wireframe solid and or with contours depending on what is set in the Settings screen 306 Data Manager Menu Surface Information You can see additional statistics about the surface by double clicking on its name in the list This will show the minimum and maximum bounding coordinates the number of points breaklines and tri angles in the surface the minimum and maximum slopes in the surface the plan and surface area the positive and negative volumes calculated from a datum elevation of 0 and the amount of memory that the surface is using Surface Information amp Name Point Database Description Minimum X 4975 600m Minimum Y 4943 319m Minimum Z 86 856m Maximum X 5082 533m Maximum Y 5080 279m Maximum Z 109 473m Number of points 337 Number of breaklines 0 Number of triangles 652 Minimum slope 0 09 02 Maximum slope 78 33 26 Plan area 0 000m Surface area 0 000m x Close Point Database Surface This can be used at any time and doesn t require a surface to be imported When this is turned on all the points and lines in your project will be used to create a real time DTM surface This can be used while you re taking shots Please refer the Realtime DTM Surface topic for more information on FieldGenius DTM surfaces Surface Settings Main Menu Data Manager Surfaces Settings Use the surface settings screen to define settings that affect TIN Triangular
236. e Edit button will bring up the menu shown below for the selected entry Automap Editor BLDG a Summary Building Point Symbol x Point Size 0 50 Point Colour Bm Line Colour E Layer Name BUILDING F Connect points with line F Do not assign to DTM CA OK X Cancel These properties are stored in the library in specific columns Please refer to the topic below about editing the library for more information Summary You can use this field to summarize your description For example a description IP may have a sum mary Iron Pin Point Symbol You can define a marker for a point These markers are not automatically transferred back to the desktop and are not similar to CAD blocks or parts They are simply point nodes that will be displayed in the map view to help distinguish different points on the screen There are 27 different marker types The symbol for each description is also shown on the AutoMap Library screen Point Size This allows you to change the size of the marker You will find that using a number of 1 is a good start ing point Adjust from there as needed Point Colour This allows you to set the colour of the markers You can choose from a list of 255 colours Line Colour This allows you to change the colour of lines in your drawing 75 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Layer Name This specifies the layer that will be used for lines and points with this description Connect Points With Line
237. e Target List comes with 2 default targets Default Prism and Default Reflectorless but you can create as many more as you like All targets are saved in the Settings xml file and is located in the Programs folder Click here for help on Leica Instrument Target List Click here for help on the GeoMax Target List Default Prism Default Reflect New Edit Delete Copy Clore You are not permitted to delete or edit a default target but you certainly can copy one and edit the copy New Tap on this button to access the New Target dialog Here you can create a new target Edit Tap on a target to select it Then press the Edit button to access the Edit Target dialog Default tar gets can not be edited 344 Delete Tap on a target to select it Then press the Delete button to delete the selected target You will receive a warning message that you must acknowledge before deletion is complete Default targets can not be deleted Copy Tap on a target to select it Then press the Copy button This will open the Edit Target dialog and you can then edit the copied parameters Close Pressing this button returns you to the Target Manager screen New Target MapView Target Manager Target List New Use this option to create a new target Provide the new target with a unique name a prism constant and select an icon to reprsent your new target Click here for help creating a new Leica Geosystems target Click here for
238. e cases might be easier than entering a point range Rotate Simple Angle This is the simplest form of rotating your points Specify the base point for the rotation and a rotation angle Rotate Translate Scale Points Rotate Parameters Rotation Base Point Simple Angle Direction Difference Rotation Angle 0 00 00 y Adjust ponts Restore Points x Close Rotation Base Point Use this to specify the pivot point for the rotation You can select the point by double tapping in the edit field Use the point chooser to select the point form the map or simply enter the point number Rotation Angle Specify the desired rotation in degrees minutes seconds or whatever your project units are set to You can also use the direction recall feature and enter to inverse between two point numbers Rotate Azimuth Difference This allows you to define two azimuths usually used to compute the angle needed to rotate a group of points to match a field azimuth to one from a plan 250 Calculations Menu Rotate Translate Scale Points Rotate Parameters Rotation Base Point C Simple Angle Direction Difference Original Direction 45 00 00 Destination Direction 60 30 30 y Adjust Pots Restore Points xX Close Rotation Base Point Use this to specify the pivot point for the rotation You can select the point by double tapping in the edit field Use the point chooser to select the poi
239. e done all four steps you can press the Connect to Instrument button If you see a status of Connected displayed above the Connect to Instrument button then you have successfully connected Getting Started To start taking measurement you need to exit out the Total Station Configuration screen by pressing the Connect button Depending on the instrument you connected to you will have different options available Please review the Robotic Instrument Toolbar topic for more information 370 Total Station Reference Instrument Selection Main Menu Settings Instrument Selection The Instrument Selection screen allows you to choose the type of equipment you will be connecting to FieldGenius An Instrument Profile can be created for each different instrument you will be working with to make changing between different hardware a breeze Once you have setup a profile for each different instrument you will be using switching between them is a simple matter of selecting the appropriate profile and pressing Connect Note this screen is not available if FieldGenius is running onboard your instrument 2 09 Instrument Selection Instrument Type Instrument Profile e Total Station Sokkia SET 530R3 x Total Station Demo GPS Rover Add Delete Edit GPS Reference Profiles contain equipment C GPS Demo settings and measurement tolerances C None Connect the data collector to the instrume
240. e either geodetic latitude and longitude or Cartesian northing and easting The contents of the Map Projection section and Grid Extents 444 section will reflect the selected coordinate type You can also specify a ZIP code that will define the center of your sub grid Grid Area The user sub grid extents can be entered as a rectangle where the diagonal corners of the northwest boundary and southeast boundary are used Alternatively a central coordinate can be used witha bounding radius Selection of either boundary method will be shown as parameters in the Grid Extents section Map Projection If using Cartesian coordinates northing and easting for defining the boundary of the sub grid it will be necessary to select the appropriate map projection for deriving geodetic coordinates used with internal computations The group field contains various national and regional coordinate systems com posed of map projection and related horizontal datum Each group will be composed of zones or sub coordinate systems and will be updated in the system field as the group field is changed Finally the linear unit can be selected for the coordinate entry Grid Extents The data source from which the sub grid is to be built must be selected and is defined by national organization All necessary grids and supporting files will be built for FieldGenius including horizontal datum transformations vertical datum transformations and geoid models Be aware
241. e is displayed on the screen It is up to you to determine how many observations or the duration of time you want to wait before accepting the averaged position At any time you can restart the process by pressing the Reset Aver age button You then have to define a local coordinate that you want to localize to It is assumed that the point exists in your project If it doesn t simply double tap the Point ID field which will open the point tool bar You can use the new option to create a point or if it exists select it from the map or from the list When you press Set Position FieldGenius will save the averaged location into the point database It will then compute a one point transformation which is simply a horizontal and vertical shift from the grid coordinate system into your local system as well as a combined scale factor All future GPS measurements will have your new transformation parameters applied automatically Overview Rover Receiver Before you can start your GPS survey there are a few things you need to confirm and setup 415 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Profile and Coordinate System Files e You will need to determine and select the correct coordinate system and optional geoid model to use for your GPS survey work e Create a profile for your reference base and rover receivers Profiles contain receiver settings such as baud rates and tolerance masks that are used by FieldGenius Refer to the Reference Configur
242. e map view From this view you can use the zoom controls to zoom around your drawing so you can find important or relevant data for your alignment such as a POB point Press the Close View button to return back to the Roads Manager Tell me more about Road Settings Manua Entry Alignment C L Manual Entry Vertical Profile Manual Entry Template LandXML Cross Sections Alignment DTM Surface Alignment Staking Part 1 Alignment Staking Part 2 Alignment Slope Staking 474 Roads Manage Road The road settings screen is used to help you create review or modify road elements a K 7 7 ShA 7 7 Road Start Station 0 000 000 Easting 5524047 598m Start Pnt o Northing 312307 876m Road 1 Alignment C L Vertical Profile Template Cross Sections DTM Surface OK AS 80 150 000m Profile 1 Ei Template 1 9 Stake Road Cancel From this screen you can do anyone of the following Define start station e Define start point or start coordinates e Define the horizontal element e Define the vertical profile e Choose either a template or XML cross sections e Choose an optional DTM surface Define Start Station Each road has to have a starting station defined The starting station will place the station sign auto matically for you after you enter the station Stations generally are measured in 100 foot intervals when working in feet and measured in
243. e we will discuss editing the file with Excel The first row in the file is reserved for the column header Some of the columns are reserved for our desktop products but the following columns are used in FieldGenius Column A Description String value Column B Summary of Description String value Column L Connect Points with Line 1 Yes O No Column M Layer Name String value Column O Line Colour Number 0 255 Column Q Line or Spline O Line 1 Spline This works in conjunction with Column L Column U Marker Type Number 0 26 Column V Marker Size Number 0 10 76 Points Lines Descriptions Column W Marker Colour Number 0 255 Column X Exclude from DTM 1 Yes Exclude 0 No Include Column AF Zone Number Numeric Value Create New Library outside of FieldGenius You can easily start a new library from scratch simply by creating a simple text file In the first row add a header followed by your descriptions and summaries You have to separate the values with a command and when you re done save the file with an extension of CSV an example filename might be CODES CSV DESCRIPTION SUMMARY PIN Iron Pin EC Edge of Concrete EP Edge of Pavement l You can then copy the file to your FG Projects directory When you create a new project or open an exiting one make sure to select it as the AutoMap Template File Point Patterns Main Menu Survey Tools Point Pattern
244. e when you run the program is the input listing dialog When you first run the program in a specific job it will display showing no entries 233 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 PS Local Transformation 123 Edit Control Adjust Points Origin North 0 000m A Origin East 0 000m Trans North 0 000m Trans East 0 000m Rotation 0 00 00 Scale 1 0000000000 Trans Height 0 000m Slope North 0 00000 Mi Xx Close You now have to define the coordinate pairs to use in the solution Press the Edit Control button to enter all of the common point sets that you have in your data but be careful to not confuse control points with measured points Remember that the control points are considered fixed and the meas ured points are going to be rotated shifted and possibly scaled GPS Local Transformation 23 alculate Parameters Edit Control Add Control M Do not calculate scale M Do not calculate vertical slopes Ctrl Pnt Horz Vert dN When you finish entering all of your point pairs it will display the delta differences between the coordinate pairs you defined We re not concerned about the 3D position of the points so we will turn these off You now have to go and calculate the solution so press OK so you re taken back to the Local Transformation page 234 Survey Tools Menu Press the Calculate Parameters button to compute the transformation so
245. ected and take you to the Stake Points screen Select Point Use these two buttons to scroll up and down numerically through the points in your database Points Lines Descriptions Point ID This displays the point id of the point you ve currently selected Select Point Toolbar The point chooser is a mechanism that is called by routines requiring a point number entry You access it by selecting the point chooser icon next to point number fields or by double tapping in an extended edit point number field as When select it you will see the point chooser toolbar open up towards the bottom of your screen Point ID 145 North 11448 417 202 East 4820 126 F Quick Select Hev 9 000 a e E Point ID You can either type the Point ID into this field if you know what it is or when you tap on a point in the map screen its point ID will be displayed here Quick Select If Quick Select is turned on then as soon as you tap on a point in the map screen you will be auto matically returned to the routine you were selecting the point for If Quick Select is turned off then after you tap on a point in the map screen the coordinate data of that point will be displayed and you must press the Select button to get back to the previous routine Select Pressing this will take you and your selected point back to the routine you were selecting the point for List Use this to open a grid displaying all the points in your project databas
246. ectory and if you change these coordinates they will be remembered for next time Selecting No will take you to the main interface Store Point o BO Point ID 1 4 IIA Description List Northing 100 000m Easting 100 000m Elevation 100 000m Advanced Note Tap to enter note Y Store Pnt Cancel If you chose to create a reference point in the step above you will be asked Would you like to setup the instrument at the new point Press Yes if you would like to do so which will open the Setup Occupy Point screen for measuring your backsight You will now have 3 Backsight options In most cases select Backsight by 1 Point or Directionand press OK Orientation Setup 238 Instrument Occupy Point if Instrument Height 0 000m Backsight Backsight Point c Backsight Direction 0 00 00 Backsight Distance Target Manager 0 000m Y OK Cancel 39 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Once you complete the setup routine and have measured your backsight you will see your setup and backsight positions in the map view QIRA OX A HT 0 000m Sideshot 1 R 0 9m oe aye PN lt No Line gt Kee ra Next ID gt Sy EN lt No Desc gt Common FieldGenius Buttons The FieldGenius interface has a consistent structure and to use it effectively the user needs to become familiar with several commonly used buttons Clicking on this button will open up the keyp
247. ed coordinate system to the favourites list Cancel Button This will cancel without saving User returned back to the Select Coordinate System dialog New Edit user defined System From this dialog you will either create a brand new coordinate system or edit an existing one you pre viously saved 140 Settings Menu Es New User Defined System System Name Description Ellipsoid Parameters Equitorial Radius a Polar Radius b Inverse Flattening 1 f Invalid Datum Parameters Datum Type lt Select Type gt G E System Name and Description Enter a name for your coordinate system and optionally enter a meaningful name that helps describe it The system name must have colon in the name Ellipsoid Parameters To define the ellipsoid for the coordinate system you must enter the known equatorial and polar radi uses for the ellipsoid The Inverse Flattening is not editable and will be computed automatically and can be used a check o Equatorial Radius a o Polar Radius b o Inverse Flattening 1 f Always a read only value automatically computed from the two ellips oid radiuses Datum Parameters There are 7 datum types to select from o Three Parameter o Four Parameter o Six Parameter o Seven Parameter o Bursa Wolf 141 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 o o DMA Molodensky None If none is selected then no transformation parameters will be applied to the coordina
248. ed receiver type Message Type The message type is used in determining what data streams are sent from the reference station to the rover They can be RTCM CMR or a proprietary format Communication Parameters The communication parameters are used for interaction between the receiver and the communication device Refer to the communication device s documentation for additional instructions and settings Correction Information GPS Toolbar Settings Link Information 424 The Correction Information screen is accessed from the GPS Settings screen It displays information about the correction message being received by your receiver via a radio link from a base receiver or via a cellular modem link from an NTRIP or GPRS server Link Information z6 Information Data Age 10 sec Data Quality 26 Status RTK corrections being received Reference Latitude N49 52 09 62324 Longitude W119 34 50 85939 Ellipsoidal Hgt 1554 52 Es ox For information on configuring your correction link please see the Correction Link topic GPS Satellite Plot Tye 8 To access this screen press the Satellite button on the GPS Toolbar The Satellite Plot screen is a graphical representation of the current GNSS satellite constellation It shows all visible satellites including both GPS and Glonass Those satellites being used in the cur rent solution are indicated with a black dot and those being ignored are indicated with a white
249. ed to define an alignment in the Road Manager screen Use this to quickly continue staking your alignment Please see the Road Reference section for more detailed information about creating and defining alignments Tell me more about Road Settings Manua Entry Alignment C L Manual Entry Vertical Profile Manual Entry Template LandXML Cross Sections Alignment DTM Surface Alignment Staking Part 1 Alignment Staking Part 2 290 Staking Menu Alignment Slope Staking Cut Sheet Reports Main Menu Staking Cut Sheet Reports FieldGenius includes a cut sheet generator When you stake points or alignments cut sheet records are recorded in the raw file Cut Sheet Reports Report File utSheet csy Cut Sheet Format Point Stake C Offset Stake C Slope Stake C Point and Offset Stake Create Report Open Report Xx Close The different cut sheet formats will be described below To create a cut sheet select the desired cut sheet format then press the Create Report button then choose the folder and filename for it You can give it any extension one will not be automatically added but we recommend using either CSV or TXT The extension you provide will not affect the contents of the file in any way If you ve already created a cut sheet and want to open it to review it press the Open Report button FieldGenius automatically creates a CSV comma separated value file for each cut sheet format yo
250. ee cc cccc ce ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 321 ASCII Coordinate File Export oia nn e c eee cc cece ccceeeeeeceeeseees 325 DXF File IMpOrte 20 esrer too dones ae estat ee Meta e data al to ia ado 327 DXEFlNS EXPO e o A cutie da e da coals 328 LandXML File Import occccccccccccccccccc none 329 LandXML File Export ooo ccoo cocos 332 Template IMport o cuaia sto ao ir da 333 Template Export aysa cau als e co et Doe ODO oia Arde do send in 334 Fieldbook Fil Export co o a ee e 336 SDR File EXPO a acotados 336 S ap fil EXPO ice a A ry Oe ciate cavas 337 Import Export User Defined Coordinate Systems 20 0 0 cece cececeeecccccceeeeeccceees 338 BackUPS a ot st cath el o ea eae teeta al eae nS tet Oy tered Wa kn O oJ atl 339 About FieldGenius 3 3232 A A ee IE Bs le 340 About FleldGeniuis y 220 om eiaeactn cts ceeenk acon eos t ng eet dee ks shania So aaa e dae 340 Target Manager occ cnc 341 PARCELS A o St AER A SIE Bt tie tt RIO LTE a 344 AENA ee e ntsc ta a eS se cee ORE ot Sa o es te L O ri bee ad 345 el EE KS S EEA EA A EEE sk ES ee SA E i co Dl es E 346 Default Settings 22 2 0 cece cece cece e cece ce eeeeceeeneeeeeceneenereeneneeeceeeeceeceeeeeees 348 Warget ListaleiCaiscscccame cof ots teccs tsa arta iioda dl 350 New Leica Instrument Targets 0000 0c cece eee cece cece eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 351 Edit Leica TargetS oie indices vee tick Se oo ah ane 353 Default Settings visi A A A A III ese 354 New
251. el and Communications set tings For more information about using FieldGenius for GPS surveying you should review the Start ing GPS topic The GPS Demo will simulate connecting FieldGenius to a GPS Rover receiver The coordinates in the GPS Demo are located outside our office in Westbank British Columbia Canada so to use the GPS Demo mode you need to set your Coordinate System Settings to UTM Zones NAD83 UTM83 11 Ellipsoidal None Use this option if you re not connecting anything to FieldGenius and also don t need to manually enter any shot information With this mode the instrument toolbar will not be displayed in the map screen Coordinate System Settings Main Menu Settings Coordinate System The datum settings are used to transform GPS derived curvilinear coordinates latitude longitude and ellipsoidal height into Cartesian coordinates northing y easting x and ellipsoid or orthometric height for presentation on the drawing window and data storage 136 Settings Menu Coordinate System Settings amp Horizontal System UTM83 11 Edit List Info NAD83 UTM Zone 11 North Meter North American Datum of 1983 Geodetic Reference System of 1980 Details Vertical System _ Ellipsoidal CA OK Save As Default X Cancel Horizontal Grou This is where you define the coordinate system for your project Edit List The Edit List button is used to create predefined or user defined coordinate systems
252. eldGenius 7 Please refer to the help menu in the editor for more information on how to create an effective feature file Feature files have a FEA extension and they should be copied to your FG Projects directory There is no limitation to the number of feature files that can be stored on your data collector Once you have created your file and copied it to FG Projects you can open it when you get to the Review Files Screen In this example we will open a Feature List File named Sample FEA Project Review FG Sample Select Automap Template File survey cs Select Feature List File Sample fea Select Raw Data File FG Sample raw r Modify Project Information y Continue Xx Cancel To collect attribute data for a point you have to press the GIS Attributes button on the store and edit dialog Point ID 3 Z S A Target Height 0 000m Line Spline Arc Description POWER POLE List io43 301m ooo Review i Measurement 2 09 Northing GIS Attributes Advanced y Store 55 y Store TR Xx Cancel 84 Points Lines Descriptions When you store a point during a measurement or edit one afterwards you will see that you can select the GIS Attributes button When you press this button it will look at the point s description and check to see if you have a feature defined that matches If it does it will open up that feature for you automatically in our example you will see that the Power Pole featu
253. eldGenius 7 Select Horizontal Coordinate System 0000000 c ccc cece cece ee eeeeeeeee 138 Add Predefined System 12 0 2 cece ccc ccccccccccccccceecceececeeceeceeceteecentecteeeneeeeees 139 New Edit user defined System 0 0000 e cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 140 Automatic Backup 2 2 2 s a a nec c cece cece aa a a apea e aaa y 143 Localization Site Calibration 0 0 00 0000 e cece eeeeeeeeeeeeees 143 Additional Grid Shift Files and Geoids 200 0000 eee eee cece cece eeeeeeeeeees 143 Older FieldGenius Mapping Files 0 00002222 eee eee cece cece ee eeeceeceeeeeeees 144 Keyboard Shortcuts acia e II yeaa cs eo AE es A ee 144 Project Information 20 000 e cece cece cece ccc e cee cecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 146 Survey Methods Menu cccccccccccccccececcecceceeeeeteeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 148 Survey Methods Menu 0 02 cece cece cece cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeececcsseeseeeees 148 Temporary No Store 00 000022 o coc ccc cece ccc ccc cee cece cece cece arana aa aaran nan 151 OCCUPY POE cris dd td soled 151 Backsight Measure Modes 0 00 eee cece cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 154 BaCk ght SUMMAT 2 A eae oe IS EB geek AR Ae 155 Multiple BaCkSight 22 22 2828 oe sls fxn ta 158 Backsight Method 2 0 00 c cece aoea cece cece cece cece cece eececeeeeeeeeees 161 SIGESMOL oo hoe see ve eh hace ttt Bi Rs aie Pe et B
254. elete Element Edit Element Y x Hide Map Qi Xx cance Auto Profile After you press OK you will be asked if you would like to create a vertical profile based on the chain point s elevation If you select Yes then you will be prompted for a Profile Name Vertical Profile As mentioned above a vertical profile can optionally be created automatically If this option is chosen by the user PVI points will be created for the profile Each PVI point represents the points that make up the chain 482 Roads Profile Profile 1 Station Slope 100 000 110 000 4 3937 112 546 6 5383 115 000 6 5283 gt v Add Element Delete Sta Check High Low Manual Entry Vertical Profile Main Menu Roads Manager Edit Road Vertical Profile To create your vertical profile for your alignment press the Vertical Profile button When you do this you will see two options New and Edit Press New to create a new profile If you want to edit an exist ing profile then you need to select the profile and then press the Edit button Delete Profile You can not delete a profile once it is created Profile Editor Overview When you create a new profile you will see the profile editor The Add Element button is the com mand center for you profiles and it allows you to add profile elements e PVI e Parabolic Curve e Unsymmetric Parabolic Curve Once created you can always edit and delete each element St
255. em GPS receivers by default generate geodetic coordinates latitude longitude and ellipsoidal height and the process of converting to Cartesian coordinates northing easting and ortho metric height or local system is done with existing well defined map projection systems such as Universal Transverse Mercator UTM or the State Plane Coordinate System SPCS 453 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Selection of the map projection in FieldGenius is done within the Datum page of the GPS Con figuration and a local zone is selected to minimize scale and meridian convergence distortion Most land boundary or property surveys are unique with regards to their generalized plane and coordinate origin for each project The coordinate system for these surveys is often referred to as aplan system with coordinate magnitudes being kept small for ease of recording and cal culations The majority of projects can suffice with a simple translation in northing and easting to produce plan system coordinates from GPS determined local system coordinates The trans lation is easily determined by comparing a plan system coordinate and a local system coordin ated for a single point Consideration for Scale and Rotation Projects with larger extents need to take into consideration the curvature of the earth s surface which can be handled by the application of scale and rotation transformations plus the pre viously mentioned translations In the case of mixing GPS obse
256. ength Inclination 0 00 58 5 Plummet Intensity Sec Div 130 r Check Level Every Shot Tolerance 6 n CA Continue Plummet Intensit If your instrument has a laser plummet or laser pointer FieldGeniuscan toggle those functions on or off On some models of total station this feature is turned on automatically 397 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Division You can now adjust the sensitivity of your display to show 20 30 and 60 second intervals Tolerance You can now set a tolerance for the level bubble sensor If you exceed that tolerance then you will receive a warning message that indicates your instrument is out of level Check Level Every Shot Use this option to force our software to check instrument level before every measurement The default is off If you re using a Trimble or Geodimeter instrument you can tum on the Calibrate Instrument option and when you press Close it will force the instrument to do a calibration 398 Select GPS Profile This is where you can create a new profile for each rover base receiver you will be using There are two ways to get to this screen 1 You can open the profile screen for your rover or base by going to Main Menu Settings Instru ment Selection This will display the Instrument Selection screen which contains the GPS Rover and GPS Reference profiles 2 If you already have your instrument type set to GPS and you re currently in the map view you can press t
257. ents that define it In this example the solution would have to intersect the boundary segments from 108 9001 If we use the same predetermined area parameters as above FieldGenius will not be able to compute a solution because the solution does not intersect the segment between 108 9001 It actually would intersect the line from 9001 109 14 ZA Select n Rad A Remove Paint ne Arc Arc Previous x 259 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 However if we increase the predetermined area amount from 10000 to 12000 a solution can be com puted because the solution can now intersect the segment between point 108 and 9001 If you did want to use an amount of 10000 all you would need to do is change the start point from 108 to 9001 45 1007 Xx Close Map Parallel Method The first thing you need to do is define the fixed sides for your area It is important to note that FieldGenius will try to compute the new boundary so that it intersects the segments connected to the start and finish points that you define The start and finish points markers are represented using a green and red circle marker You can always press world button on the Display toolbar which will place text labels next to the start and fin ish points 260 Calculations Menu a Calculations Determine rea Hinge Method Parallel Method rea 3000 000000 sq Feet US y Direction I 90 00 19 0 Calculate S
258. erence line plus or minus any elevation offsets defined by the user 190 Survey Methods Menu Line Distance Offset m 3 Q Highlight a point on the line and press the measure button to record an observation All offsets are respect to Point 1 Horizontal Angle Vertical Angle 357 09 12 0 81912 25 0 Line Pnt 1 Line Pnt 2 353 50 43 0 80 46 59 0 lt il Horz Offset Right of Pnt 1 2 00 Perp Offset Away From Inst 0 00 Elev Offset Up 0 00 Store Pnt x Close Note You can increase the size of the text shown in the grid by setting the Text Size option in the Options screen Store the Point Once you ve made your measurements that will be used to compute the intersection you can press the Store Point button This will store a point in the map screen store a point in the database as well as record information to the raw file vn Raw File Everything about the intersection is stored in the raw file l Line Distance Offset _ HI0 000 HRO 000 AR357 09120 ZE81 12250 SD22 4114 Pnt 1 of Line __70 000 HRO 000 AR353 50430 ZE80 46590 SD21 3255 Pnt 2 of Line Hori zontal Offset 2 000 ee Ine l Perpendicular Offset 0 000 Elevation Offset 0 000 SP PN1018 N 123 5558 E 100 2931 EL103 4035 EV2 Example The top corner in a closet needs to be located but it isn t visible from the total station So the user lays a
259. erence from the current rod position to the interpolated elevation of the sta tion point where a cut represents that the rod is higher than the interpolated station elevation and a fill represent that the rod is lower than the interpolated station elevation Stake Arc The process is identical whether staking a line or an arc the only difference is you begin by selecting or defining an arc instead of a line 285 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Selection Mode Segment Information Source User Figure Segment v Start Pnt 4 Switch Direction End Pnt 5 Length 185 211 vol Stn 0 22 777 Jo 40 320 6 000 Stk Line Staking Method Directional Stake Surface Main Menu Staking Stake Surface The Stake Surface command allows you to take a shot anywhere on a surface and a cut or fill value will be computed The current northing and easting position of the rod is based on the measurement but the Z value is computed by intersecting the surface at the rod location You will first be prompted to select a surface to stake If you have already imported and turned on the TIN or Contours for any surfaces they will be displayed in the list for you to choose from If the list is empty you need to use the Surface Manager to import or enable one Please refer to the Surface Man ager topic for more information on how to load a surface When you first see the staking toolbar you may see the words Waiting for dat
260. es and checking the residuals on the control screen You can always revert back to the default calculated values by pressing the Calc Para meters button again The number of horizontal transformation parameters can be decreased to three from four by fixing the scale to unity using the Do not calculate scale check box For the vertical component the determination of the parameters can be reduced to solving only fora vertical translation by toggling the parameter Do not calculate vertical slopes Upon enabling this the parameters North Slope and East Slope will be automatically set to zero 472 Roads ROADS Main Menu Roads Manager To stake an alignment you first need to define the geometry that defines the horizontal and vertical ele ment You can also define a template that will be used to define cross sections at specific stations along the alignment FieldGenius can use the following three methods to define an alignment 1 Manual Entry You can manually enter the data to define the alignment 2 Import XML You can import a LandXML file that contains your alignment data Roads Manager Em 123 Ga Hiwrsz Manage Road Road 1 Add Road Delete Road Map View Close 400 By default you will see an alignment in the list with the current project name A project can contain multiple roads and each road can contain the following elements e Horizontal Element This can contain straight tangents
261. es or pillars Store Edit Points Main Menu Survey Tools Store Points This is a multi use function that is used by many parts of the program Essentially any time a point needs to be stored or edited it will done via the store point screen Depending on what it is you re doing certain parts of the dialog will be disabled or not editable Following is an explanation of what you should expect Measured or Calculated Points Points that were measured or computed via any of our commands will automatically have their Sur vey Role set to measured When these types of points are edited only the description can be changed the point id and coordinate values will be non editable The reason we do this is so the coordinates don t accidentally get altered You can check a point s survey role by pressing the Advanced button You can override this by changing the survey role type to null Certain commands in FieldGenius are allowed to ignore the measured survey role such as the Rotate Translate Scale command or the overwrite option that is triggered when you try to store a point using a point id that already exists in the project Manually Entered or Imported Points Point that have been manually entered or imported from an ASCII file for example will have their Sur vey Role set to null Points that have a Survey Role set to null can be edited except for the point id 206 Survey Tools Menu Store Point 8 Point ID
262. eters press the Adjust Points button to apply to your coordinates Once you press it you will see a screen that will allow you to specify which points you want to apply the calculation to Restore Points After you adjust a group of points with the RTS command you have the option of undoing your changes and restore the points back to their previous coordinate values You can only undo the last operation that was done Also if you close FieldGenius the restore coordinate values are not saved Reset All Parameters After the RTS command is used if you start the command you will see a message Reset All Para meters If you choose yes then FieldGenius will restore all the RTS fields back to their default set tings If you choose no then your previously inputted data is retained 253 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Curve Calculator Main Menu Calculations Curve Calculator FieldGenius includes a curve calculator that can be used to check curve data and also compute and curve points Curve Calculator 12 Radius Arc Length y Arc Direction Arc Length Arc Radius Arc Chord Length Arc Chord Bear Arc Delta Angle Deg of Curve farc Deg of Curve chord Tannent ennth t Store PT Pnt Store Center Pnt Xx Define Known Data You first have to define what known information you want to use to compute the curve If you click on the drop down list you will see a list of all the option
263. ettings as defaults for new projects by pressing the Save as Default Settings button The default settings can also be set in the Options screen 132 Settings Menu Note the actual precision on distances and angles returned from your instrument may be limited to less than the precision you select here Selecting a higher precision here will not increase the pre cision of values queried from your instrument Distance Unit Choose the distance unit that you will be using Meters International Feet or US Survey Feet All dis tances will be displayed in the selected format All distances will be recorded to the raw file in decimal format Database coordinates are always stored with 6 decimal places and rounded to the desired precision for display Meters If you choose Meters as your distance unit you can also specify the number of decimal places to dis play within FieldGenius from 0 to 6 International Feet US Survey Feet If you choose International Feet or US Survey Feet then you can specify to use either a decimal format with a precision from 0 to 6 or a Fractional format with feet and inches If you use the decimal format distances will be displayed in decimal feet such as 10 5 to indicate 10 5 feet or 10feet Ginches If you use the fractional format distances will be displayed in feet and fractional inches such as 10 6 1 2 to indicate 10feet 6 5inches or 10 54166667 feet Angle Unit Choose the angula
264. ey Tools Menu Os E e LA Ta 1 4 8 0 Start Pnt 2 Line Type Straight a Draw Connect Pnts Arc Pnt End Pnt Undo ES Close Start Point Specify the start point for the new segment For starting a new plan this should be set to an existing point in your project typically a corner that you will begin drawing the plan from As you continue connecting subsequent points to your plan you will see the Start Point field auto matically advance for you Line Type Specify one of the five available methods to define your next figure segment e Straight this will draw a straight line between the specified Start Point and End Point e Arc CW this will draw a clockwise arc between the specified Start Point and End Point with the specified Radial Point e Arc CCW this will draw a counter clockwise arc between the specified Start Point and End Point with the specified Radial Point e Arc 3Pnt this will draw an arc clockwise or counter clockwise between the specified Start Point and End Point going through the specified intermediate Arc Point any point directly on the arc does not need to be the midpoint e Spline this will draw a curvey line between the specified Start Point and End Point Store Store The Store and Store buttons are disabled for this mode because new points are not being calculated for your project The line or arc segment will be automatically drawn into your project after you specify
265. f A2 and B2 The use of more coordinate observations will provide redundancy and the means to identify outliers for elimination Solving for over constrained parameters is done with the application of least squares to provide the most rigorous minimization of residuals Once transformation para meters have been resolved newly observed or existing coordinates can easily be converted to the plan coordinate system 455 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 y af As s git tha a X S X cos Y sin AX 0 Y S X sin 8 Y cos AY WHERE S Scale a Rotation 5 AX Translation in X A AY Translation in Y Oo gt By x Figure 2 Horizontal Four Parameter Transformation The selection of control points for determining the transformation parameters are critical in reducing a colinearity condition along a particular axis Colinearity will present itself if the control points are con centrated in a linear fashion as shown in Figure 3 Poor Design and thus weaken the parameters ina perpendicular direction Control points should extend to the corners of the project boundary and be extended with equal distances in both horizontal directions GOOD DESIGN POOR DESIGN Figure 3 Transformation Control Design 456 Vertical Transformation The vertical transformation function of FieldGenius operates independently of the horizontal trans formation A sloped plane is calculated from the residuals of the constrained point pair
266. f the area you want to confine the scanning to Once the scan area is defined you can define the scan resolution by using an angular value For example if you set it to 0 30 00 FieldGenius will create a pattern confined to the limits you defined and scan at 30 minute intervals both horizontally and vertically Once you ve defined the scan area and resolution FieldGenius will display an estimate of how many points will be stored You also can control how FieldGenius deals with measurement errors while scanning If you turn on Ignore all scanning errors FieldGenius will ignore measurement errors and continue without inter ruption If you don t tum this on FieldGenius will stop and display a message allowing you to stop the scanning process or continue on with the next measurement Press the Start Scan button to select the desired reflectorless EDM Mode and initiate scanning FieldGenius will display an estimate of the time remaining for the scan to complete Points will be stored using the description defined in the map screen The point number of the first point will be set to the next available id and will increment sequentially The shots are stored in the raw file as sideshots so you have a record of the observations Upon completion you will receive a summary showing the total number of successful measurements and errors received 203 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 204 Survey Tools Menu SURVEY TOOLS MENU Survey
267. ferences to the 0 0mm based in the Leica Geosystems TPS prism system Prism constants are always defined in millimetres The additive constant for non Leica prisms are often given in the true zero prism system Use the following formula to convert the published prism constant into a Leica constant to be entered in the Leica Constant field True zero constant 34 4mm Leica constant Most prism manufacturers define their prism constantas in the true zero prism system So for a Leica round prism the true zero constant is 34 4mm 34 4 34 4 0 0 The Leica total station is expecting a Leica constant So for example Say you are using a non Leica prism with a published prism constant of 30mm that has been defined in the true zero system then you would enter that value into the Leica formula as 30mm true zero constant 34 4mm 64 4mm Leica constant You would enter 64 4mm as the Leica constant You will see that the Absolute constant is automatically computed for you and should be 98 8mm It is strongly recommended that you test your use of prism constants on a known baseline to be sure that your non Leica prism is in the true zero prism system Absolute Constant mm This defines the relation of the distance measurement to the mechanical reference point of the reflector Use the formula in the Leica Constant section above to calculate the Leica constant Enter that value in the Leica Constant field and see the Absolute constant
268. ffset distance from the shot position to the new position Up Down Offset Enter the vertical offset distance from the shot position to the new position 182 Survey Methods Menu Store Point After you have entered your offsets you can press the Store Point button to save the point Raw Record A sideshot SS record will be computed to represent the shot The new SS record will use the original observation plus any offsets defined in the distance offset screen l oF AR55 00000 ZE90 00000 SD12 0000 OF HD1 5000 Horizontal Distance Offset OF LR1 0000 Left Right Offset OF VD0 0000 Elevation Offset ss op1 FP6028 AR59 14110 ZE90 00000 SD13 5370 Note Offsets that are to the left back or down will be stored in the raw file with a negative value Manual Distance Main Menu Survey Methods Manual Distance Use this mode to shoot an observation where only the horizontal and zenith angles will be measured with the instrument You will be then prompted to enter the distance When you set the measurement mode to manual distance and press the measure button the hori zontal and vertical angles will be read from your total station Since this is only measuring angles you do not need to have a prism to shoot to Following this you will see a screen allowing you to enter a horizontal distance Measure Manual Distance Use Horizontal Distance 0 00 I xX Cancel Press OK to save the poi
269. field which the cal culator was launched from 3 It can be launched from the map screen using its Keyboard Shortcut default is the F key 4 Orit can be launched through the menu system 267 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Calculator Stack Command Line _1 _2 _3 _ prop al sr pa E e _ ENTER Use The Stack The stack is a series of memory storage locations for numeric data Each location in the stack is called a Level There are a maximum of 20 Levels available in the Stack As you push new values on the stack the stack grows to accommodate them the new data moves into level 1 and older data is pushed to a higher level Data in level 1 will move to level 2 data in level 2 to level 3 and so on Any data in level 20 will be bumped off the stack if new data is added and is unrecoverable As you pop data off of the stack the number of levels decrease as data is auto matically bumped down to lower levels The stack display always shows levels 1 to 5 and you can use the scroll bar to view the other levels up to level 20 The Command Line The command line is where you enter or edit data You can enter up to 20 characters in the command line The command line is closely tied to the stack You use it to enter or edit data and then process it and the results are pushed onto level 1 of the stack Function Numeric Entry You can enter values using the keys provided on the calculato
270. final step in creating sub grids is transferring the entire contents of the defined export path to the data collector Microsoft ActiveSync provides easy access to Explore the contents of the data col lector Microsoft ActiveSync File View Tools Help oja B Sync top Details Exp Sxe Options locket PC gt Pocke ET Explore Device Y Connected Synchronized Information Type Status After cutting or copying the contents of the export path use the explorer to paste the files into the MicroSurvey FieldGenius Programs Mapping path on the data collector If prompted to overwrite the existing files while pasting respond with yes 446 2 Storage CardWicroSurvey FieldGenius ProgramsWapping File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Q tac QJ wi ya Search En roles Address Storage Card MicroSurvey FieldGenius Programs Mapping v Ge Folders x Name Size Type Modified Mobile Device A EJ Agd66ToGda94 gde 128bytes GDC File 12 19 20 8 My Windows Mobile Based Device B E Aqgd84ToGda94 gde 86 bytes GDC File 12 19 20 a Databases E Coordsys 1 42MB File 2 10 200 El My Documents E Datums 116KB File 2 10 200 E E Program Files E Elipsoid 21 3KB File 2 10 200 E Storage Card E geoid byn 2 78MB BYN File 12 19 20 E E BkFlash E GeoidHeight gde 397 bytes GDC File 2 11 200 2 MicroSurvey FieldConnect ES Nad27ToNad83 qdc 294 bytes GDC File 12 19 20 El E
271. ft Files In some countries or areas the use of grid shift files are required to accur ately compute a horizontal position These additional grid shift files are not installed and need to be downloaded from the MicroSurvey website Please review the Grid Shift Files topic for more information e Geoid Models If you require orthometric heights you will need to download a geoid model for your area Please review the Geoid Models topic for more information Pre 2011 Versions Older versions of our software older than 2011 require the use of the Datum Grid Editor The GPS module of FieldGenius requires geodetic datum transformation grids and geoid model grids in order to precisely determine positions and calculate orthometric heights in the user s coordinate system Usually these grids are supplied by national organizations such as the National Geodetic Survey USA or the Geodetic Survey Division of Canada and the data files can be upwards to 15 megabytes in size Older data collectors are restricted in storage resources and cannot handle the large sizes of the grid files therefore it is necessary to create smaller more manageable files The Datum Grid Editor is a 443 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 companion utility for FieldGenius to build smaller sub grids from the original grids while preserving integrity The process of building sub grids needs to be repeated only when performing GPS surveys in loc ations which exceed the area of the
272. g desktop software which is then imported into FieldGenius Manage Road This option is only available once you ve created a road using the New Road button or imported an XML file To input or review alignment data press the Manage Road button to access the Road Set tings screen If you imported a LandXML file or manually inputted a road you can stake it by pressing this button As aminimum you need to have the following before the stake command will continue e XML Cross sections e Horizontal C L Vertical Profile and template e Horizontal C L and DTM Surface Add Road Use this button to create a new road You can create as many roads as needed and they will be stored in an XML file that will reside is the project directory Delete Road Use this to delete a road You first need to highlight the road you want to delete and then press the button to remove the road from the alignment This road will be permanently deleted and can not be undone Map View Use this button to display the map view From this view you can use the zoom controls to zoom around your drawing so you can find important or relevant data for your alignment such as a POB point Press the Close View button to return back to the Roads Manager Tell me more about Road Settings Manua Entry Alignment C L Manual Entry Vertical Profile Manual Entry Template LandXML Cross Sections Alignment DTM Surface Alignment Staking Part 1 Alignment Staking
273. g to a foresight you need a minimum of 1 distance before you will be allowed to store it Raw File Record When you store your multi set points a point is created in the database as well as some records in the raw file l MultiSet StdDev HA 0 00 03 VA 0 00 04 SD 0 005m OC OP1 N 1000 0000 E 1000 0000 EL100 0000 sp PN5 N 1015 5153 E 1000 0000 EL99 1936 BS 5K 0P1 BP5 BS0 00000 BC359 59495 RB OP1 BP5 ARO 00000 ZE93 42400 SD15 5479 HR5 000 BS 168 Survey Methods Menu l RB OP1 BP5 AR179 59390 ZE266 17420 SD15 5512 HR5 000 BS l RF OP1 FP8 AR45 52150 ZE92 03370 SD22 3917 HR5 000 FS RF OP1 FP8 AR225 52100 ZE267 56580 SD22 4311 HR5 000 FS RF OP1 FP8 AR225 52100 ZE267 57000 SD22 4311 HR5 000 FS I RF OP1 FP8 AR45 52180 ZE92 03350 SD22 3917 HR5 000 FS 55 OP1 FP8 AR45 52132 ZE92 03185 SD22 4114 FS For each foresight point you store a OC record is created to indicate what point you setup on Alsoa BK record will be written to record which point you specified for the backsight An important thing to note here is that the BC value will be equal to the average backsight direction plate reading recorded for the backsight The Standard Deviations are written into the first comment record and it will also display Tolerance Exceeded if applicable RB records are your accepted measurements to the backsight RF records are your accepted measu
274. ght Select Line Stake Point Stake Line E Cose If you want to stake the line just press the Stake Line button which will display the stake line toolbar If you want to stake a specific point along the line specify the station offset distances then press the stake point toolba When the stake line toolbar opens you have to take a shot before any information will appear on the toolbar Stn 0 17 035 rs 10 143 0 001 ae Prism i Y a Stk Line Staking Method Directional y StakingMethods For each of the following methods if you are within the Tolerance setting defined in the Staking Set tings then the direction distance text will be green if you are outside the tolerance then the text will be red You can also switch pages within the Observation Toolbar at any time to see other meas urement information for example if you want to see the rod elevation instead of a Cut Fill Directional This method will display the current Station perpendicular from the rod as marked by a blue circle on the line the In Out Left Right or N S E W distance to the line from the rod to the red x on the line 284 Staking Menu keeping the same horizontal angle and the Cut Fill distance from the rod to the interpolated elev ation of the station point marked by the blue circle where a cut represents that the rod is higher than the interpolated station elevation and a fill represent that the rod
275. ght Observations HA 99 9000gon VA 99 9932gon SD 99 985m HD 99 985m HI 0 000m HT 0 000m Backsight Errors Calc Horz Dist 100 000m Error 0 015m Calc Elev 0 011m Error 0 01im Plate Setting Do Not Modify 99 9000gon VA Accept Observe Again X Cancel Backsight Observations and Errors If you specified the point backsight method you will see a comparison between what you measured and the theoretical inverse If you used the measure angle only mode or defined a backsight direction you will not see a comparison as there isn t enough information available to compute the inverse Reciprocate Traverse This option will only be available if the Traverse Reciprocate option in Options is turned on By default it is turned off This option can only be used if the point being occupied was previously measured and stored as a TR shot If it was stored as a SS shot then this will be grayed out If this option is turned on then when you measure the backsight FieldGenius will compute a new elev ation for the point being occupied based on 1 The measured elevation of the occupy point based on its previously recorded TR traverse measurement 2 The computed elevation of the occupy point based on the backsight observation and the elev ation of the backsight point These two elevations for the occupy point are averaged together and a new traverse observation is computed for the occupy point which will result in the occ
276. ght target height Target Manager 5 O Q me a e Target Default Prism Target Height 2 000m Er EDM Mode IR Standard Prism Constant 0 0mm Y OK Target List Default Settings X Cancel Target Use this field to select a backsight target from the Target List Target Height Enter the height of your target here 389 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Press the Set Default Height button to assign the default height to this Target Height field The default height is defined in the Default Settings screen EDM Mode Use this field to select the EDM mode you would like to use You will only be able to select an EDM mode that corresponds to your target type Prism Constant This field will display whatever prism constant that you entered for the selected target OK This records the settings you have just made closes the Target Manager and returns you to the MapView Target List Press this button to access the Target List The Target List consists of user defined and default instru ment targets Here you can create copy edit and delete targets Default Settings Press this button to access the Default Settings screen This is where you define the default target heights Cancel Press this button to discard any changed made to the Backsight dialog and returns you to the MapView Target Manager Foresight Use the Foresight screen to select the foresight target and enter a target height 390 Total
277. gnment DTM Surface 00 00 20 c cece cece cece cece aa raroa onnon rannen 499 Alignment Staking Part 1 200 0002 eee cece cece cece cece ccc ccc cece eee eceeeeeeeee 499 Alignment Offset Staking 2 0000 2 2 22 c cece cece cece cece cece ccc cece cece ccc ceeeeeeeeeeees 505 Alignment Slope Staking 0 00000 0000 cece cece cece cece eeeeeeeececeeeeceeees 510 22 Table of Contents Connecting to Computer 0000 cece ccc eee ee eee ee eeeeeeeceeeceeeees 517 Microsoft ActiveSync Windows Mobile Device Center 0 cccceeece cece cece eeees 517 Installing ActiveSync Windows Mobile Device Center _ 200 2222 e eee eee eee 517 Connecting ActiveSync Windows Mobile Device Center 0 0 0022220 518 MicroSurvey Transfer oo o oo e cece cece cece ccc c cece cece eee eceeeeeeeeenes 521 Synchronize with MicroSurvey CAD orinCAD 0 000 e cece eeeeeee 522 RAW File Reference 0 0 222222 c cece eee cece ccc cece cc cece cee cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 525 Raw File Record Types 0 ctas A BA A Latas De BAS 525 Conventional Raw Data Records 0 00002 e cece eeeeceeeeeeeees 525 GPS Raw Data Records 00 cece cece cee ccceccccccccccecccccccccccecceueeeeeee 532 O AA NA 537 23 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 24 Getting Started GETTING STARTED Introduction _ O Z SSS O Introduction MicroSurvey FieldGenius was designed for Land Survey
278. hand tape on the floor with the start of the tape located at the bottom corner of the closet directly below the point that needs to be recorded The direction of the tape is then laid out such that two measurements can be made on the tape Essentially the tape now becomes the reference line Two shots are taken one at the 2 foot mark and the other at the 5 foot mark 191 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 After you take your two measurements all you need to define is the offset distances In this example the corner is two feet to the right of the first measurement point 1 and 8 up from the floor After you define the offset directions and offset amounts you can press the Store Pnt button to store the new point 192 Survey Methods Menu Line Distance Offset m 12 Highlight a point on the line and press the measure button to record an observation All offsets are respect to Point 1 Point O O Horizontal Angle Lime Pnt 1 356 23 58 0 Line Pnt 2 350 02 09 0 5 33 33 0 lt jij Horz Offset Right of Pnt 1 2 00 Perp Offset Away From Imst 0 00 Elev Offset Up 8 00 Store Pnt xX Close Line Perpendicular Point Main Menu Survey Methods Line Perpendicular Point This offset command is used to define two points that will be used to establish a reference line Once the reference line is established you can specify a point that will be used to compute a perpendicular inte
279. hat defines the beginning of the bearing Enter a direction in the Angle Dir field Enter an offset if needed You are not required to enter an offset so the field can be left blank Repeat for the second point the first three steps ar wnd Press the green checkmark to save your point It will save the point using the Store Edit Points function Offset Tool Main Menu Calculations Station Offset This routine allows you to calculate and draw points and or figures offset from other existing points figures or DXF entities in your project You can calculate points on a line or down and out from a line or offset complete figures Selection Mode Press the Select Line button to go into Selection Mode You will also automatically go into Selection Mode if aline is not yet selected when you start this command Select Start Pnt e E 4 n Selection Mode Line Type Straight y Define Points Start Point 1 Switch Direction End Point 2 Y ok 98 Cancel Arc Point Whichever Selection Mode you use the selected line will be highlighted in red in the map screen along with a direction indicator If necessary you can press the Switch Direction button to reverse 246 Calculations Menu the start and end of the selected line Press OK to accept the selected line and proceed to the next step Selection Mode Figure DXF Pick this mode to select an existing figure or DXF entity by selecting the desired figure f
280. have the opportunity to use a manually entered comment with this method but the new line will be linked to the selected Line Description The comment will appear in the Active Lines list to aid correct selection of the line Switching Active Figures You may work on several figures at once As described ongoing figures are listed in the Figure List You will notice that in this project there are three figures N SideShot 12 de E a HT 0 HT omo ONY ee eBo rA Next ID EJASPH 98 Points Lines Descriptions To change the current line simply select the active line button which will open the Select Figure from List screen In this example it is the E ASPH 3 button Figure List 12 Switch Active Close Delete on ss Figure Figure Active Description EJASPH Yes EJASPH Yes EJASPH Xm Select the desired figure from the list and continue taking shots to add to the selected line All settings are stored for each line so there is no need to reselect the Description or draw option To draw a three point arc on an ongoing Line select the Draw 3 Point Arc button before shooting the second of the three points that will define the arc POC Note that this is not the radius point After measuring to the 2nd point a dashed line will appear to illustrate that a 3 Point arc is in progress Shoot the 3rd point and the arc will appear The current draw option will change from Draw 3 Pt Arc to Dra
281. he Settings button on the GPS toolbar This will display the Instrument Selection screen which contains the GPS Rover and GPS Reference profiles Instrument Selection amp Instrument Type Instrument Profile Total Station Rover Sample Total Station Demo GPS Rover Delete Edit GPS Reference Profiles contain equipment GPS Demo settings and measurement tolerances None Connect the data collector to the instrument and switch the power on prior to pressing the Connect button y Connect X Close Editing Profiles On the Add Profile screen you can enter any name you wish for the profile Profiles can be copied from one data collector to another so you can have a Master profile file that is sent to all crews so they can quickly set up systems When you re ready to edit the settings for the profile you have selected press the Edit button This will display the GPS configuration screen for the selected rover or reference profile Refer to the GPS Configuration Reference or GPS Configuration Rover topics for more information on the settings available for your profiles Your profiles are stored in the file MicroSurvey FieldGenius Programs MSURVEY INI so once you have configured one data collector you can simply copy this file onto your other data collectors to make the profiles available on them This file should also be backed up for easy recovery 399 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Using Profi
282. he hinge point On Stn 0 00 o HT 0 00 Prism Stk CP 4 00 00 R 22 000 Staking Method Stationing Relative y viola X When you get near the catch point if you press the Zoom Stake button you will see a green circle in the map view representing the area within your specified staking tolerances 511 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 ale SAPPL cal On stn 0 00 oleo HT 0 00 Prism a Stk CP 4 00 00 R 21 998 ME Staking Method Stationing Relative v Store violas R Slope Staking Results When you store your catch point position you will see the results screen This screen will always report the following Slope Staking Results 1230 Cut Slope a Design 2 0000 3 Observed 2 0025 Station Design 4 00 00 3 Observed 4 00 00 Hinge Point HD 2 00 Cut 1 00 _ Center Line HD 22 00 Save Point and Raw Data Save Raw Data x Cancel Cut or Fill Slope The first line will always tell you if you staked a cut slope or fill slope It will also display the design slope that was specified and record the actual computed slope that was staked Station This will display the station of the template or cross section and will show the actual station staked at the catch point 512 Roads Hinge Point This is the distance from the rod position to the hinge point It will also indicate the ver tical distance from rod position to the hinge po
283. he line The calculated point will be previewed in green in the map screen Press the Save button to store this point Station Point Mode Use this mode to calculate the Down and Out distances to a selected point and to calculate a per pendicular intersection point On the selected line Select Offsdt2Pr 2 33 i 30 offset Prt Select Line Start Stn Switch Direction Station fo s9 21 T E2 of Save x Close Offset Mode After selecting a line using any of the above Selection Modes pick this mode and select the Offset Point by either typing in its Point ID or by selecting it from the map screen when the Offset Pnt field has focus 248 Calculations Menu The selected point will be highlighted in red in the map screen and its Station Offset distances from the selected line will be displayed A perpendicular intersection point On the line will be calculated and previewed in green in the map screen Press the Save button to store this point Line Mode Use this mode to draw a new line or figure offset from the selected line i es SOM 31 10 Nod Select Line C Left Switch Direction 8 Right Y save X Close O Both After selecting a line using any of the above Selection Modes pick this mode and enter the distance and direction left or right looking down the line or both sides The offset line will be calculated and previewed in green i
284. he map screen store a point in the database as well as record information to the raw file Raw File Everything about the intersection is stored in the raw file l Two Line Intersection HI1 340 HRO 000 AR280 55220 ZE81 15170 SD6 8350 Pnt 1 of Line HI1 340 HRO 000 AR276 59380 ZE81 05590 SD6 4400 Pnt 2 of Line HI1 340 HRO 000 AR287 18580 ZE81 13350 SD6 7960 Pnt 1 of Line HI1 340 HRO 000 AR296 06280 ZE80 14520 SD6 0940 Pnt 2 of Line SP PN3 N 0 0039 E 0 0060 EL0 5325 NNRR Line Angle Offset Main Menu Survey Methods Line Angle Offset The line angle offset command is used to define two points that will be used to establish a reference line then measure an angle that intersects this reference line and FieldGenius will automatically com pute the coordinate at the intersecting point 186 Survey Methods Menu An example of where you might use this is to locate the comer wall of a building Simply shoot two points on one of the walls then turn the instrument so it is pointing anywhere along the corner of the building This command is intended to be used with reflectorless total stations Measure Points When you start line angle offset command you will see an empty list Highlight the row that you would like to make a measurement for and simply press the Measure but ton to begin the measuring process If you need to redo a measurement simply highlight it in the list and pre
285. he partition toolbar The partition line and arc command allows you to compute points along objects in your project You can partition figures that have line and arc segments that have a radius point defined 3 point arcs can not be partitioned Straight lines in DXF files can be partitioned all other DXF entities are not com patible with the partition command 80 Points Lines Descriptions 6 Method Equal Partitions bal wf Partition Partition 5 I Cancel Equal Partitions You can partition the segment by equal divisions Simply select the partition number and press the Partition button This will compute new points and split the object up into separate segments By Distance You can partition the segment by specifying a distance between partitions Simply define the partition distance then press the Partition button This will compute new points and split the object up into sep arate segments Use this to enter or record audio notes for your points You can access the notes screen by pressing the Notes button on the Store Edit Points screen 81 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Note Audio Note Text Notes You can type a note up to 32 characters in length and it will be stored in the project s DBF file You can not enter more than this limit into the Note field When the file is imported into MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD the note will appear in its own field or can be appended to the point s description f
286. he vertical mapping plane prior to starting the Vertical Projection command When ready to continue press the OK button You will now be in the Vertical projection mode which will be indicated by the measurement mode but ton on the instrument toolbar To begin calculating points on the vertical plane you need to point the total station at the new point you want to create To complete the shot press the measure button and then store the point Note You do not need to use a prism when measuring points on the vertical plane Simply point the instrument at the point you want to create Since vertical planes represent 3D data it is sometimes necessary to rotate your perspective of the project to help you see the point you re computing on the vertical plane Press the 3D View button on the display toolbar which will open the 3D toolbar If you press the Planar View button your scene will be rotated so it matches your perspective For example a vertical plane was defined by points 27 and 28 When the planar view option is used you can see your work in a 3D perspective You can now see the 4 measurements points 500 503 that were made to record the position of a window on the vertical plane 201 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Plan View 3D Perspective You can also hide objects that are behind the vertical plane from viewing by pressing the Vert Grid button In the example below you will see that after this is turned on some
287. hese types of fields are called Extended Edit Fields and can be used not only for typing values but can also launch related commands such as the keypad calculator point chooser inverse tool etc This type of functionality is unique to FieldGenius You can control how these Extended Edit Fields will be triggered by changing the Extended Edit Boxes option in the Options screen to require a single tap a double tap or to disable them so that you can only type values into them Text Entry For most text entry fields in the program tapping in it will open up the keypad On PocketPC and Windows Mobile devices you can select which keypad to display by changing the SIP Type option in the Options screen Points When you see an extended edit field for a point id tapping in it will open the point chooser toolbar Distance and Angles Tapping in other numeric fields such as those for directions and distances will open the RPN Cal culator and some distance fields will open the Inverse tool Multi function Fields Some fields will display a pop up menu if multiple functions can be opened from that field just select the desired function from the list Getting Started Keypad The keypad can be opened from any extended edit entry field This provides a method of easy text and numeric entry on devices that do not have a physical keypad but it can be used on any device Key Pad Adele pp be fF ite iwi EL IK tL iimM in
288. his defines the duration of the static collection if the minimum number of satellites being tracked dur ing the static session is 6 satellites Default 20 minutes Time Less than 8 SVs This defines the duration of the static collection if the minimum number of satellites being tracked dur ing the static session is 7 satellites Default 15 minutes Time 8 or more SVs This defines the duration of the static collection if the minimum number of satellites being tracked dur ing the static session is 8 or more satellites Default 10 minutes GPS Antenna Height The antenna settings are used to calculate or enter the height of the antenna phase center above the ground You can enter the true height if it is known or enter the measured height and any horizontal or vertical offsets and have FieldGenius calculate the antenna height for you Antenna Height se Model GS15 J Measured Height 2 000m Measure Point Bottom of antenna mount Offsets Measure Point to ARP Offset Horizontal 0 0mm Measure Point to ARP Offset Vertical 0 0mm ARP to APC L1 Offset Vertical 202 1mm ok Depending on the model you ve selected manufacturer specific antenna offsets will be listed If your specific antenna model is not listed you can select User Supplied and specify appropriate offset 409 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 measurements For more detailed information about these offsets refer to your users guide for your
289. horizontal distance HD Difference column shows the difference in horizontal distance Observe Again This button allows you to re measure the selected control point if the residual offset value is greater than expected 160 Survey Methods Menu Azimuth Offset This is calculated Azimuth for your improved backsight direction You can adjust this value by select ing desired control points from the above table The Offset Residual column can be used to assess the quality of each control point RMS This is Root Mean Square RMS value for all selected Offset Residuals Once you are satisfied with the result click OK to See Backsight Summary on page 155 Backsight Method After you choose Occupy Point routine the first screen you will see is the Backsight Method Screen Backsight Method Backsight by Multiple Directions Y OK Cancel Backsight Method You will have 2 options to set up your backsight Backsight by 1 Point or Direction The first option allows you to use 1 point or direction to set up your total station See Occupy Point on page 151for detailed information 161 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Backsight by Multiple Points or Directions The second option allows you to use multiple points or directions to calculate a more accurate back sight orientation and set up your total station See Multiple Backsight on page 158for detailed inform ation Main Menu Survey Me
290. ht Default Settings Ss Default Target Heights Prism Height 0 000m RL Height 0 000m Temporary Height 0 000m P Set instrument prism constant to zero Y OK xX Cancel Prism Height Enter your most common prism height into this field When you press the Use Default Height button in the Target Manager screen this value will populate the Target Height field This is convenient when you have a standard prism height and want to assign it quickly Important Note You must be in a prism measure mode to be able to use the Default Height button in the Target Manager screen and have it use a default prism height RL Height Enter your most common ReflectorLess RL height into this field When you press the Use Default Height button in the Target Manager screen this value will populate the Target Height field with this default height Important Note You must be using a reflectorless measure mode to populate this field using the Default Height button in the Target Manager screen and have it use the default reflectorless height Temporary Height The temporary height fucntion works as a one time measurement using the height entered into this field After the measurement has completed the target height will revert back to the height that had 348 been defined in the Target Height field This is very handy when you want to take a quick one time measurement such as for when measuring an invert Set instrument prism constant to zero
291. ht and foresight target for example See the Target Managertopic for more information EDM Settings This allows you to specify if you will be using prism offsets in FieldGenius and allows you to specify tolerances that will be used to ensure yourEDM measurement meet your criteria See the EDM Set tings topic for more information 373 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Tolerance Settings This allows you to specify angular distance tolerances that will be used by the traverse routines See the Measurement Tolerance topic for more information Search Settings When using a robotic instrument you can specify search window parameters See the Search Set tings topic for more information Model and Communication Main Menu Settings Instrument Selection Edit Total Station Profile Model and Com munication This is where you can specify the make and model of instrument you will be connecting to as well as specify your communication parameters Model and Communication 130 Status Not Connected Port COM1 v Baud Rate 19200 y Data Bits s y Stop Bits 1 y Parity None y D o S Total Station Make Use this to select the make of your instrument Total Station Model Use this to select the model of your instrument Status This indicates whether FieldGenius is Connected or Not Connected to your instrument 374 Total Station Reference Port Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits and Parity If you
292. ht Setup 0 00 00 Backsight Measured 0 00 00 Backsight Error 0 00 00 Distance Calculated 236 13 Distance Measured 163 12 Distance Error 73 01 Close Pressing this will exit the function and write several notes to the raw file summarizing your check shot __Backsight Check Not Updated Observed Values HA 0 00 00 0 VA 90 00 00 0 SD 236 10 Backsight Setup 0 00 00 ls Backsight Measured 0 00 00 Nee Backsight Error 0 00 00 les Distance Calculated 236 13 176 Survey Methods Menu l Distance Measured 236 10 j Distance Error 0 03 l Horizontal Angle Offset Main Menu Survey Methods Horizontal Angle Offset FieldGenius includes a flexible angle offset routine It allows you to shoot the angle and distance to a point that can not be occupied by the rod An example of where you would use this is if you wanted to record the center of a large object such as a tree When you choose the Horizontal Angle Offset measurement mode you will see the following screen Horizontal Angle Offset Angle Center Distance HI No Solution Observe Observe x Two observations are required one to record the angle to the center of the object and a second to measure a distance perpendicular to the object s center On this screen you determine what order you will make these two measurements All you need to do is press either the Obse
293. i bo add Ak Ib hi hai va ee 408 Post Processing Tolerances 00 0000 c cece cece ccc cece cece cece cece cece ceeeeeeeeeeeees 408 GPS Antenna Height p ti llanto didas 409 GPS Auto Recording 00 e cece e cece cece eeeeccceceeccccceceeeeees 410 Overview Reference Receiver 2 2 0 2 e cece cece cece ee eeececcecececeseeeeeees 410 Select Reference Position Modes 0 00000 c cece ccc ccc cece cece eee eeeeceeeeeeeeees 411 GNSS Measurement Modes Reference Base Receiver ececeececceeeees 411 Overview Reference Position Modes 0 00 02 e cece cece ecececccceceeeeeeeees 413 Overview Rover Receiver 22 2 2 eee cece cece e cece eee eeeeeeeceeeeccececeseeeeeees 415 Rover Measurement Modes 000 0222 e cece cece cece ec cece cece ce ceeeeeeeeeeee 416 GNSS Measurement Modes Rover Receiver 000022 e cece cece cece cece ce eeeeees 416 Rover Measurement 0 0000000 c cece ccc cee cee eee cece cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 418 GNSS Measurement Mode Offset 00 00 e ec eeeeeeee eee e eee eeeceeeeeeeeeee 419 Measurement Mode Local Transformation Point 0 000000 ccc eee ee eee eee 420 Use For Local Transformation 2000 00 c cece cece ccc cc ec cccccccccecceceeeeeeeeenees 420 Check Potts arses be te os Rhett eal ahh Go ada 420 GPS Toolbar 2 2 6255 teal ese hs AS NA A Ne 422 Comecon ONK aesan seiorn oaae ta a akn lso ts sica 423
294. icrosurvey com register Just enter the serial number you which to retrieve the key code for and the key code and the device id it is assigned to will be displayed Technical Support If you need help with FieldGenius please contact Technical Support Project Manager Main Menu Project Manager The Project Manager is used to create open or delete projects currently residing in your data col lector When you start FieldGenius this is always the first screen you will see Project Manager as Y Y C Users Yifan Xia Documents MicroSurvey FieldGenius FG Projects 5 26 2014 5 16 2014 vA New Delete aaa LA Project Project X E By default the project manager will display the contents of the FG Projects directory which is the default location for all projects that you create You can sort the list by project name or date by tapping on the column s header FG Projects Folder Press this button to specify a different project folder than the default The default isFG Projects Once you set the directory it is written to the msurvey ini file so it is used for all subsequent projects Open Project To open an existing project simply select it in the list and press the Open button 30 Getting Started New Project To create a new project simply press the New button You will then see the new project screen which will allow you to enter a name choose your automap library and set the units for the
295. ie kha tty dl 162 Sideshot Auto Store 0 000000 c coco cece cee cece ee eee ee cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 163 AAA N EAE A A AER TAE da Gea Tele hs aig tt 163 Resection raras cd oe esate nae a rt da 169 Checks POint 000 cos lt bea 174 Check Backsight 0 0000000 cece cece cece ee cece cece cece cece eee eeceecceeceseeaeaees 175 Horizontal Angle Offset 2 000000 e cece cece cece ccc ce cece cece ceceeeeeeeeees 177 Vertical Angle Offset 4 A So ke 179 Distance Offset art oem a tesla ddan Mss auc callie ia did 181 Manual Distance ION 183 Manual Entry mesnet ete e y O BID Duet SSRIS A TANS REL HD tals Sel SIE BORE BANE e ae 184 Two Line Intersection 1 2 2 2222 e cc ec cece cece eect cnn 184 Line Angle Omset acc E A a bead e id ke 186 Line Distance Offset 22000000022 c cece 0 cece ccc ccc raara raiona ranana 188 16 Table of Contents Line Perpendicular Point 02 222 2202 cece eee c ccc cccc nec c cece cccceeeeccecececseeees 193 Trilateration ooo cece cece cece cece cece cc cccececcececceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeneneees 196 Obsenve Benchmark ws soncs ds A at Dawa soca os 198 Add IV con ete e e bes tects teen oP eae ied peer ha 199 Vertical Plane Projection 000 00000 ccc eee cece cece cece cece eeeeceececeeseeeeees 200 ROE SCANNING Icomos Fes ir rt A tits ls 203 Survey Tools Menu 2 2 0 2 2 cece cece cece cece cece ccc ccceeeceeeeeeeeees 205 survey Tools Men
296. ield Continue using this note Use this if you want to use the note you just entered automatically for future points that are stored Audio Notes Use this function to record and playback audio notes that are related to stored points These notes will be transferred to MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD desktop software for playback in the office The notes will be stored in your project directory and will be automatically named for you Example if you recorded a note for point 2 a file would be created pnt2 wav The file that is created is a standard windows WAV file that can be played by most audio players MicroSurvey CAD or inCADdesktop software will automatically link to any audio note you recorded This allows you to easily see which points have audio notes Recording and Playback Controls Circle record Square stop Triangle playback Trash delete 82 Points Lines Descriptions Note that not all handheld devices support audio notes You must have a record and playback func tionality which for some units requires optional accessories To Store an Audio Note 1 Tap the red circle to activate recording Speak into your microphone to record the desired information This post is bent etc 2 Press the square button to stop the recording 3 To confirm your note press the playback arrow now green on color displays and listen to your note To replace an Audio Note with a new note 1 Delete the existing audio
297. ill see an empty list Each row represents a measurement to a point on one of the two lines needed to compute the intersection Highlight the row that you would like to make a measurement for and simply press the Measure but ton to begin the measuring process If you need to redo a measurement simply highlight it in the list and press the measure button Notes 1 You can shoot the points in any order you like FieldGenius will determine what direction to go in to compute an intersection 2 The northing and easting values for the new point will be computed using the intersection of the two lines 3 The two lines you define will rarely intersect at exactly the same point The elevation of where the lines intersect will be averaged and used as the z value for the new point 185 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Two Line Intersection m 12 Q Highlight a point and press the measure button to record an observation Horizontal Angle Vertical Angle Line 1 Pnt 1 272 27 03 0 49 24 56 0 Line 1 Pnt 2 339 07 04 0 63938 59 0 Lime 2 Pnt 1 47 03 37 0 75 26 09 0 Line 2 Pnt 2 24016 52 0 72 56 40 0 lt Store Pnt xX Close Note You can increase the size of the text shown in the grid by setting the Text Size option in the Options screen Store the Point Once you ve made measurements to the four points that will define the two intersection lines you can press the Store Point button This will store a point in t
298. in the grid by setting the Text Size option in the Options screen Note The Quick Measure Modes option in the Options screen will affect what happens when you press the Measure button when you are using the offset routines If Quick Measure Modes is on a measurement will automatically be taken If it is off the measure button doesn t actually trigger your total station to take a measurement it simply takes you to the map screen where you can press the measure button once you are ready to take the measurement 180 Survey Methods Menu For example if point B was the bottom of an underpass you could measure it s height Usually it is easier if you position the prism so it is directly beneath the point you want to shoot You would then record a distance observation to this location which will also be the horizontal position for the new point Then without turning your instrument you could rotate the scope vertically so it is sighted on the bottom of the overpass You could then record this observation which will be used to compute the elevation for the new point Once you ve recorded these two measurements you will be able to store the new position Storing the Shot After you make your measurements you will be able to store the new point Press the Store Point button to store the point Raw File Record In the raw file the OF records represent the measurements that were made The SS record is the record that was used to c
299. ines Selection Mode Figure Segment Pick this mode to select an individual line or arc segment from a complex figure by selecting the desired segment from the map screen You can select any of the following e aline or arc segment from a Figure but not a curvey segment e line or arc segments from a DXF polyline cannot be selected Selection Mode Define Points Pick this mode to select points in your project to define a line or arc You can define the following line types e Straight Line select a Start Point and End Point e Arc CW select a Start of Curve Point Radial Point and End of Curve Point 91 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 e Arc CCW select a Start of Curve Point Radial Point and End of Curve Point e Arc 3Pnt select a Start of Curve Point Point on Curve and End of Curve Point Switch Direction The line direction will reverse and the arrowhead shown in the map screen will show the current for ward direction of the line OK The highlighted line will be selected and you will be returned to the appropriate command Cancel You will return to the previous screen without selecting anything Figure List The figure list contains a listing of all figures in your project Figure List D Dete State Figure Figure Figure Line Active Description Pnts Closed 1 Yes EP 3 No Line Column This is the group id assigned to the figure Refer to the Active Linework topic for more informa
300. ines Break lines represent 3D continuous traces in space think of them as a 3D polyline which 1 Define the surface elevation 2 Force slopes to be different on either side of the break line o ya a ae E a g This line represents a location an the site where the slope changes from a steep hill to a relatively flat area Contours Generated without use of Top of Bank breakline 314 Data Manager Menu Without a breakline the contours flow over the top of the bank and the contours do not look correct Contours generated with use of Top of Bank breakline o AS With a breakline the contours are forced to honor the line as a change in slope that helps the con tours to look correct Breakline Control The user would want to use a figure as a break line in the triangle formation process TIN for the edge of pavement but probably not for a line connecting points that are not related to the surface features An example of this might be a chain connecting legal boundaries as they might cross over roads or creeks without consideration for the existing topography Breaklines are used in the creation of the DTM by forcing the triangulation to follow them Triangles created in the DTM cannot cross a breakline The edges of the triangles will always follow the break line When necessary FieldGenius will automatically densify the DTM along the breakline to create triangles that conform to the breaklines
301. ing Civil Engineering Seismic Surveying and Construction Staking professionals to provide unequalled data collection simplicity and field cal culating performance The Graphic User interface allows you to build the drawing as you measure providing you with instant visual confirmation of accurate data collection and survey calculations It includes the ability to draw linework as you measure from point to point without the need for cumbersome line coding FieldGenius takes advantage of the Windows CE touch screen capability by allowing you to tap points and lines in your drawing to open toolbars with all the function you need instantly Functions that are not available directly from FieldGenius graphics display are available from a simple main menu which is organized by task Please spend some time looking over this document or watch our movies to become familiar with the functionality of FieldGenius Once you ve collected your data in the field you can export it directly out of FieldGenius using many different file types such as ASCII DXF XML SDR or ESRI Shapefiles If you have MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD desktop software then you can read your FieldGenius projects into it directly FieldGenius raw file is based on the popular industry standard TDS RW5 format which means you probably already have software that can import this raw file type and process it This means you don t need to purchase expensive products to process your FieldGenius projects
302. ing EL Elevation Description SP PNLOS N 3135 070 E 1511 185 EL399 795 l SS Sideshot When you record a shot a SS record will be recorded in the raw file Many other functions also create a SS record such as when offset and multi set shots are reduced OP Occupy point FP Foresight point AR Angle right ZE Zenith SD Slope distance Description SS OP1 FP7 AR176 11093 ZE90 00000 SD60 1332 lt No Desc gt l TR Traverse Shot When you record your shot as a Traverse shot a TR record will be recorded to the raw file Please refer to the Measurement Info and Traverse Report topics for more information OP Occupy point FP Foresight point AR Angle right ZE Zenith 531 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 SD Slope distance Description TR OP1 FP7 AR176 11093 ZE90 00000 SD60 1332 lt No Desc gt GPS Raw Data Records AH GPS Antenna Height DC Derivation Code ENUM MA Measured antenna height ME Measure Method ENUM RA Reduced antenna height to phase center BL GPS Base Line DC Derivation PN Point Name DX Base line Delta X DY Base line Delta Y DZ Base line Delta Z Description Feature Code GM GPS Measure Method ENUM CL Classification HP Horizontal Precision VP Vertical Precision BP Set Base Receiver Position PN Point Name LA Latitude LN Longitude HT Ellipsoid Height SG Setup Group default 0
303. instrument profile for future use so you do not need to Search every time Bluetooth PIN After initiating a Bluetooth connection you will be prompted to enter the PIN passkey for the instru ment you are connecting to If your instrument does not need one just leave it blank and continue by pressing OK The PIN you enter will be encrypted and stored in your instrument profile RC Port If you are connecting with a Topcon Robot you can specify which port on your data collector the RC unit is connected to Radio Settings Use this to set the communication parameters for your radios or other communication device such as the channel or frequency You can also use it to specify a direct connection to FieldGenius instead of using radios Please see the Radio Settings topic for additional information Connect Use this to connect to your instrument after you have specified your communication settings After pressing the Connect button FieldGenius will display a reminder screen listing some items you should check before continuing Model and Communication 123 Please ensure that the following steps have been completed to the instrument before pressing continue 1 Powered on 2 Levelled 3 Compensated if required 4 Data cable connected 5 Ready for communication When you press Continue on the screen and you see the following message No communication with instrument Check settings cables and power read the N
304. int A cut indicates that the hinge point is lower fill indic ates that it is higher than the current rod position Center Line This is the distance from the rod position to the centerline It will also indicate the ver tical distance from rod position to the centerline A cut indicates that the centerline is lower fill indic ates that it is higher than the current rod position Save Shot Press Save Point and Raw Data store a point for this shot and to write your stake and cut sheet records to the raw file By default the description for the stored stake point will equal the station and offset that was being slope staked An example of an auto generated description is CP 4 00 00 R 22 000 The CP stands for Catch Point Press Save Raw Data to write your stake and cut sheet records to the raw file without storing a point If you press Cancel nothing is stored or written to the raw file Records written to raw file Following are the records that are written to the raw file when you store a point If you do not store the staked point the SP Store Point record will not be recorded as no point was stored in the database SP PN81 N 5002 9770 E 4997 8367 EL99 9829 CP 0 12 00 L 1 000 i SL ST12 000 0D2 EL99 983 GD99 983 AS0 005 HHO 985 VHO 966 HC1 985 VCO 966 l l l ICFO DS1 000000 0B1 019583 SK OP100 FP81 AR282 28000 ZE90 16000 SD3 6800 CP 0 12 00 L 1 000 Slope Staking with Offset Setback In the
305. int Database surface lt P EIN Tee E pcb mee e Do SAIS Each point in the database has an attribute called DTM Attribute This can be set to donotinclude If you set a point to this value you will see that the surface no longer includes this point This only applies to the current surface that is computed in FieldGenius It does not apply to surfaces imported from a QSB or LandXML file What is the difference between a TIN and a TGRID The user should become familiar with both options and decide which option is best suited for their pro ject TIN honors breaklines but may be too restrictive for contours to follow the natural flow of the terrain Contours around small hills may look jagged if too few data points were collected 312 Data Manager Menu T TGRD honors breaklines and allows the contours to follow the natural flow of the terrain Contours around small hills will look better if the TGRD option is used Generally the TGRDis for cases where you want curvature introduced between your data points and you have break lines This is most easily shown with an example Adding Breaklines to a Surface If a break in the slope continuity is desired the user MUST ALWAYS use the TIN or TGRD Tri angulated Grid in conjunction with break lines When modeling a surface containing break lines a TIN or TGRD honors break lines exactly 313 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 What happens when you add break l
306. io PP fair fs fit Lo Jj Uv jw oc Ea e N un 00 won lalo Calculator The RPN Scientific Calculator can be called up from the keypad by pressing the Calculator button If you press the Calculator button the value entered in the keypad entry field will be copied to the cal culator s command line Note it must be a numeric value alpha portions will be stripped off in the cal culator where it can be used for any calculations When you are done with the calculator pressing its OK button will return the result back into the keypad OK Pressing the OK button will close the keypad and set the entered value into the text field from which the keypad was opened Cancel Pressing the Cancel button will close the keypad without setting anything into the text field from which the keypad was opened Keypad Settings There are two important settings related to the keypad which are both found in the Options screen SIP Type Use this to specify which SIP keypad type you want to use such as the full screen MicroSurvey alphanumeric keypad the small PocketPC qwerty keypad or the small PocketPC MicroSurvey 43 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 numeric keypad Not all SIP types are available on all data collectors Extended Edit Boxes Use this to control how you want to bring up the selected keypad when tapping in an edit box either with a single tap a double tap or off Users of devices with a ke
307. ion If you know the direction and end station of the tangent enter these known values in their respective fields Once you ve done this the length and end coordinate fields will be updated automatically End Point ID If you have a point in the project database that defines the end of the tangent you can enter the point number in the ID field or use the point chooser to select it from the map Once you ve done this the direction length end coordinates and end station fields will automatically be updated Curve Element When you select this option your will see the curve editor with most of the fields being empty 478 Curve Editor 130 Radius Arc Length v Arc Direction Right A Arc Length 0 000 Arc Radius 0 000 Arc Chord Length Arc Chord Bear Arc Delta Angle Deg of Curve farc Deg of Curve chord Tannent ennth X Define Known Data You first have to define what known information you want to use to compute the curve If you click on the drop down list you will see a list of all the options that can be used to compute the unknown val ues Enter the Known Data Once you define the known data format you will see grayed out fields which indicate they can t be edited White areas indicate fields that can be edited and these fields will match what you defined in the first step 1 You always have to define the direction for the curve either right or left 2 Ente
308. ions If the raw file is encrypted it or File will have a rae extension Note you can have more than one raw file name rae Filename_fig This is the database for your figures in your project ures dbf Filename_fig This is the index file for the figures database ures cdx Filename _ This is the Automap Library for your project automap csv When you create a new project the project name that you use will become the folder for your project files By default your project will be stored in the FG Projects directory After creating a new project do not later rename the folder containing your project s files or the actual files doing so will cause FieldGenius to not recognize the folder as a valid project and you will not be able to open it 41 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Automatic Save There are a few things to keep in mind when manually entering data in FieldGenius All stored data is automatically saved There is no need for a Save function Always close the pro gram by going to the Main Menu and choose the Exit button to prevent loss of measurement data Input fields that are left blank are stored as undefined For example if you enter only a horizontal coordinate for a point and leave the elevation field blank we do not automatically set the elevation as 0 000 The elevation remains undefined Data Entry Extended Edit Fields Throughout FieldGenius you will see edit fields for entering various values T
309. ions to choose from You can switch to the Map view and turn the World button off if you want to see some temporary text labels next to the computed solution points 263 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 sa ution B AA A A e xX Close Map Triangle Calculator Main Menu Calculations Triangle Calculator The triangle calculator can be used to solve unknown sides or angle of a triangle given three know components Triangle Calculator Method Side Side Side y Side a 100 000m Side b 45 000m Side c 80 000m view Results xX Close You first need to select a Method for the triangle calculation There are 5 methods available to choose from and you can decide what method to use based on your known triangle components 264 Calculations Menu e Side Side Side Use this when you know the length of the three sides of a triangle e Angle Side Angle Use this when you know two angles and the distance between them e Side Angle Angle Use this when you know two angles and one side The know side must not lie in between the two known angles e Side Angle Side Use this when two sides and the angle between them are known e Side Side Angle Use this when two sides and one angle that is not between the known sides are known This method will produce two solutions After you choose the solution method and enter the known components of the triangle press the View Results button to complete the calculation
310. ip would you like to establish between your device and this computer Standard partnership want to synchronize data between my device and this computer keeping data such as e mail and calendar items up to date in both places Guest partnership want to only copy and move information between my device and this computer add and remove programs or restore a backup image on a device whose memory has been reset do not want to synchronize data Or if you are using a handheld device running Windows Mobile 5 0 or newer you may instead see the Synchronization Setup Wizard simply press Cancel to use a guest connection 519 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Synchronization Setup Wizard Welcome to the Pocket PC Sync Setup Wizard To set up 4 sync partnership between this computer and your Pocket PC click Next IF you click Cancel you can still Copy and move files between your Pocket PC and this computer Add and remove programs on your Pocket PC KE Coses ActiveSync should now display as shown below 520 Connecting to Computer Microsoft ActiveSync File View Tools Help Guest Connected Hide Details 2 Information Type Status Y ou are now ready to move on to the next step MicroSurvey Transfer Program A small circular ActiveSync icon will appear in the lower right comer of your desktop like the one at right in the above image This will display in gray when ActiveS
311. irst thing is to confirm that your hardware is supported by FieldGenius 7 If you re reading this topic then you probably already know if FieldGenius will run on your data collector If you re not sure you can refer to the hard ware requirements topic or call our technical support department To install onto your data collector you need to make sure you have a Microsoft ActiveSync or Win dows Mobile Device Center connection established between your computer and your data collector There are two ways that you can install FieldGenius onto your device it can be installed from the CD that came with your purchase or it can be downloaded from our website at www microsurvey com Starting FieldGenius During install shortcuts are created and will be located in either your Start Menu or Start Menu Pro grams or directly on your desktop Simply press the shortcut to start the program MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Auto Repair Upon startup FieldGenius checks the registry for corruption and also checks to make sure important system files are where they need to be for FieldGenius to run properly If it detects any problems it will automatically fix them for you Hard Reset or Battery Drain In these scenarios with other software you would usually have to re install your software However because FieldGenius can repair itself all you need to do is use the File Explorer or My Computer pro gram on your data collector to browse to where FieldGenius i
312. is currently being used Press this button to select the active tolerance mode To configure the three tolerance modes 430 see the Sensor Configure button described above Select Tolerance so Autonomous RTK Float CA RTK Fixed X Cancel Raw Data Logging The Raw Data Logging screen is used to start and stop raw data logging on your GPS reference or rover receiver for later post processing GNSS Raw Data Logging ll Logging Name Logging Rate 10 Sec a Memory Total 1000544 kB Memory Free 947840 kB Start Logging View Files Y ox Reset RTK Filters Use this to reset the RTK solution in your receiver to force it to recalculate a new solution and resolve any ambiguities again from scratch This has the same effect as inverting your receiver to reset the solution 431 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Select Mount Point Use this to select a different mount point from the NTRIP caster you are currently connected to Instrument Disconnect Use this to disconnect from your receiver If you are connected to a reference receiver corrections will continue to be transmitted after you disconnect Sensor Information GPS Toolbar Settings Sensor Information The Sensor Information screen is accessed from the GPS Settings screen It displays information about the hardware you are connected to The specific information available will vary by model but typically you will see the
313. is information will be exported Zone Use this to enter a zone number that will be written to the database file If you export an XML file this information will be exported Drawing Tool Main Menu Survey Tools Drawing Tool Line Toolbar Pencil button Point Toolbar Pencil button This tool allows you to quickly draw a plan such as a pad or a building footprint into your project and is typically used to recreate plans from a paper hard copy You can use this to either calculate new points or to connect existing points that are already in your project 209 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 You must have at least one point in your project before you can start to define the starting position for your plan If a point does not yet exist for example if this is the first command you run in a new pro ject you will be prompted to store a new point before you can proceed Line Mode Use the Line draw mode to add straight line segments to your figure Os ar EL E a AHAA SY A 1 8 0 Start Pnt 1 Distance 10 0 Draw Line Direction 0 00 00 Store Store Ed cose 90 00 00 Start Point Specify the start point for the new segment For starting a new plan this should be set to an existing point in your project typically a corner that you will begin drawing the plan from As you continue adding subsequent points segments to your plan you will see the Start Point field automatically advance for you Distance
314. ition MEA This shot will be used to compute only the vertical position EA The shot will be ignored in the computation You can also select which observation is to be your backsight point HA Error The horizontal angle error is computed as follows Using the computed resection point and the meas ured horizontal angle a theoretical direction is computed to the reference point This direction is then compared to the direction measured plate reading and the difference is noted in the HA Err column HD Error The horizontal distance error is computed as follows An inverse is made between the resection point and the reference point This inversed distance is then compared to the measured distance and the dif ference is noted in the HD Err column VD Error The vertical distance error is computed as follows Using the resection elevation and the observation to the reference point a new elevation is computed for the reference point This computed elevation is then compared to the reference point s original elevation and the difference is noted in the VD column Resection Modes At any time during the collection of your observations you can choose to shoot an Angle amp Distance or Angles Only measurement You can control this by pressing the measurement mode button on the instrument toolbar after you have started your resection Store the Resection Point When you re satisfied with the resection point you can store its new po
315. ius will upload an offset of zero to your instrument and apply the 30 mm offset to the measurement after it is received In your raw file you will see the following note FieldGenius Prism 30mm Instrument Prism Omm Most prism offset are specified in millimeters FieldGenius will make the necessary conversions so the proper adjustment is applied If FieldGenius can t set the prism offset on your instrument it usually can t read it either Since a prism offset wasn t uploaded we don t know what prism offset is set on the instrument So we indic ate this by writing to the raw file that the instrument prism offset is unknown 380 Total Station Reference FieldGenius Prism 30mm Instrument Prism Unknown l When this happens you will usually want to confirm what offset are currently configured on your instru ment in regards to prism offsets Special Notes When using instruments that don t support uploading of prism constants be sure not i to double up your prism offsets by applying it in the instrument and FieldGenius at the same time Since prism offsets are so important on the measurement progress meter you will see what offset is being applied to your measurement Measuring Prism 30mm 20 Reflectorless Settings Std Dev This applies only to Trimble instruments See your instrument guide for information on how the stand ard deviation affects your reflectorless measurements Measurement Tole
316. l __ __ fi Observed Values HA 45 00 00 0 VA 90 00 00 0 SD 23 00 HR 5 00 lies __ l Northing 4 59 Fasting 1 82 Elevation 4 96 Observed Point Northing 5016 26 Observed Point Easting 5016 26 Observed Point Elevation 95 00 Close This will exit the check shot function and not write anything to the raw file or storing a new point 421 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 GPS Toolbar O Y PDOP 1 6 mo Standard Measure KT Auton ES PDOP 1 7 my 422 Once the user has selected a GPS receiver and communication has been estab lished the GPS toolbar will appear on the main interface NOTE You will only see the GPS toolbar if you selected GPS Reference GPS Rover or GPS Demo as your instrument type If you have selected a GPS Profile but are not yet connected to the receiver most of these buttons will be disabled Auto Center Single tapping this button will re center the display on the current position of your receiver Double tapping this button will set the system into an auto pan mode where the dis play will always be centered on the current position When active single tapping this button once more will disable the auto pan mode GPS Settings If you press this button while you are connected to a receiver you will see the GPS Settings screen At any time this button can be used to adjust or stop your GPS sur vey If you press this button without being connecte
317. l and any transformation will not be applied to GPS positions as indicated in Figure 7 GPS Local Transformation es Edit Control Calculate Scale GPS Adjust Points Origin North 0 00 Origin East 0 00 Trans North 0 00 Trans East 0 00 Rotation 0 00 00 Scale 1 0000000000 Trans Height 0 00 X Close 458 Figure 7 FieldGenius Default Transformation Parameters From the Local Transformation Setup select the Edit Control button for the entry of control and meas ured point pairs to be used in the determination of the transformation parameters Calculate Parameters Edit Control Do not calculate scale F Do not calculate vertical slopes npn Hoz ver NE Figure 8 FieldGenius Default Control Measured Point Pairs Select the Add Control button to enter the control and measured points As seen in Figure 9 point 203 is selected as a measured local coordinate point and corresponding point 103 is entered as a control system point The check boxes for constraining to horizontal and vertical are left enabled GPS Local Transformation 80 Control Point 103 P Horizontal Vertical Local Coordinates Select Point Northing 5523295 939m Easting 311585 808m Elevation 401 103m G GB Figure 9 FieldGenius Control Point Pair Definition 459 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Select the Calculate Parameters button to have FieldGenius calculate new transformation para
318. l be indicated in green text in the Observation Toolbar at the top left hand corner of the screen Green text will be displayed to notify you that you re meeting your tolerance if you do not meet the tolerance the text will switch to red Orientation Reference Total Station amp GNSS The user can set an orientation preference for either total station or GNSS layout Depending on the equipment currently in use FieldGenius will automatically use the defined orientation Orientation Reference North With the North orientation North is the reference direction The move by distances are standard car dinal directions North This is the distance you need to move North South This is the distance you need to move South 126 Settings Menu East This is the distance you need to move East West This is the distance you need to move West Cut This is the amount you have to go down from the current rod position to the stake point s elevation Fill This is the amount you have to go up from the current rod position to the stake point s elev ation Orientation Reference Instrument With the staking reference set to Instrument the map view will be twisted so the instrument is centered towards the top of your screen The move by distances are with respect to the rod position looking towards the instrument This view is useful when using a robotic instrument In This is the distance you need to move towards the instrument
319. le For example if you want to determine 1 2 then add 90 degrees enter 1 2 to recall that angle Then double tap in the extended edit field to pull that recalled angle into the calculator where you can add 90 to it or perform any other cal culations with it Note You can perform advanced direction recall functions that include math operators directly in a dir ection field For example 1 2 90 is a valid entry In this example the direction between points 1 and 2 will have 90 degrees added to it if project is in degrees 51 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Math operations can also be done using the RPN calculator Please refer to the Calculator section for more information on performing specific math operations 52 Main Interface MAIN INTERFACE Main Interface The FieldGenius interface is separated into various toolbars which contain common functions or tools that the user will use most often Information and Display Toolbar Instrument Toolbar 5 Bad DA NAY setos Topo Toolbar Mini Toolbar Control Main Menu Control Display Toolbar Instrument Toolbar Topo Toolbar Mini Toolbar button Main Menu button Two Versions of the User Interface There are two versions of the user interface depending on which handheld device you re using Some devices have a landscape screen orientation and have the advantage of a physical keyboard Others 53 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 have a
320. le enter a filename including an extension then press Save File FieldGenius will not add any extension to the filename you enter 7 You will be shown a confirmation of how many points were exported AOUN a 325 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 File Formats Both space and comma delimited files are supported For all formats the order of the Northing and Easting fields are determined by setting the Coordinate Order in the Options screen Standard lID Northing Y or Easting X Easting X or Northing Y Elevation Descrip ltion Note This format will append any notes you have to your description separated by a colon Standard with Header Same as the Standard format but with Header data in the first row Extended l ID Northing Y or Easting X Easting X or Northing Y Elevation Descrip ltion Note Latitude Longitude EllipsoidalHeight LatitudeStdDev Lon IgitudeStdDev HeightStdDev This format is different than the Standard such that notes are separated from descriptions If you collected GPS data the WGS 84 information will also be exported along with other information related to the GPS point The WGS 84 information will be extracted from your GS records in the raw file Extended with Header Same as the Extended format but with Header data in the first row GD 1 This format allows you to export your GPS measured points in a slightly different format than the Extended format This option
321. le and points are computed based on the values you enter A profile is not needed for this mode just press Connect to begin using the Total Station Demo mode GPS Rover GPS Reference When you set it to GPS Rover or GPS Reference you will be able to Add Delete or Edit a profile for your rover or reference receiver When you edit a GPS Rover or GPS Reference profile you will see the Configure Rover or Configure Reference screens For more information about using FieldGenius for GPS surveying you should review the Starting GPS topic If you have not purchased the GPS module for FieldGenius then you will not have access to the GPS commands and you will see a Requires GPS module license message GPS Demo When you set it to GPS Demo you will be able to Edit and Connect to a profile for a simulated rover receiver When you edit the RTK Demo profile you will see the Configure Rover screen Feel free to play with the Tolerance Mode settings but please do not change the Model and Communications set tings For more information about using FieldGenius for GPS surveying you should review the Start ing GPS topic The GPS Demo will simulate connecting FieldGenius to a GPS Rover receiver The coordinates in the GPS Demo are located outside our office in Westbank British Columbia Canada so to use the GPS Demo mode you need to set your Coordinate System Settings to UTM Zones NAD83 UTM83 11 Ellipsoidal None Use this option if yo
322. lease refer to the Options topic for more information All inverse information is saved in the COGO History file called CogoCalcs txt located in your project folder Please refer to the COGO History Viewer topic for more information Traverse Inverse Function 1 Start the inverse command and make sure the Traverse Inverse and Line options are selec ted 2 Enter or choose the first point to calculate from and press your enter key to continue on to the next point 3 Now you can choose or enter the second point and press your Enter button to compute an answer 4 The inverse information will be displayed in the results toolbar 5 Inthe COGO history you will see the following information for the two points pwr 44 to 8 HD 1352 84 NA 323 48 03 1 SD 1353 39 GR 2 85 VD 138 51 AR 323 48 03 1 Your first inverse will calculate a right angle from north to the direction you inversed 243 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Multiple Lines After you have specified two points you can continue inversing from point to point You should notice that the point id previously in the 2nd point field will move to the 1st point field and the cursor will remain in the 2nd point field allowing you to quickly enter in your next point If you continue inversing from point to point the angle right will not be referenced to north but the last leg you inversed Essentially this is computing a clockwise angle between the cur
323. lect the options for your DXF file Export Points If this is checked your coordinate point nodes will be exported to the DXF file You can also specify what layer you want the labels to go on and a default text height Export Lines If this is checked all figures lines arcs and splines will be exported to the DXF file Export Contours If this is checked all contour lines drawn using the Surface Manager will be exported to the DXF file 2 Click Export 3 Browse to the folder where you want to save the file enter a filename then press Save File FieldGenius will add a dxf extension to the filename if you did not include it 4 The DXF file is created and you can copy it to your desktop computer 328 Import Export Menu Notes about DXF files e Upon export FieldGenius will compare the figure name to see if it has a match in the AutoMap file If it does FieldGenius will draw the points along the figure as well as draw the figure on the layer specified in the AutoMap library e Points that are exported will match the point color settings set in the Automap library e Figures that don t have a match in the Automap library will be drawn on a layer named Default Color setting will be set to 256 e Points or nodes will be 2D or 3D depending on the Z value e Lines will be 2D or 3D depending on the Z values of the end points e Figures will be drawn as polylines e Curvy lines or arcs will be drawn as segmente
324. les for Connection Once you ve created your profiles you can use them to connect to your receiver Simply select the correct GPS Mode either GPS Rover or GPS Reference then select the profile you want to use in the profile list When you ve physically connected the your data collector to your receiver press the Connect button to start the connection process If it isn t successful you will see the following message Could not detect GPS receiver Please check configuration cable and power You can then press the Auto Detect Baud Rate button to force FieldGenius to automatically try different baud rate settings If this doesn t work you should review your profile settings and ensure that you have the correct COM port selected and that you have your data collector connected to the correct port on the GPS receiver GPS Demo The GPS Demo Mode contains a profile called RTK Demo which can be used to explore the GPS Capabilities of FieldGenius without being connected to a receiver GPS Reference Profile The GPS Configuration for your reference unit is accessed from the Instrument Selection screen by selecting GPS Reference as the Instrument Type then pressing the Edit button to configure your selected GPS Reference Profile GPS Profile e Model and Communication Tolerance Antenna Height X Close 400 Model and Communication This is used to select the Make and Model of receiver the port that the data collector is
325. listing for this user coordinate system For the rest of the example we will refer to this as the Plan System We will make the assumption that the plan system is to be held fixed that is we want to transform our GPS derived UTM coordinates into the user plan system 465 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 100 4937 480 5033 487 399 367 101 soo9097 4999 688 401 188 102 004 814 4977 172 400 850 103 4975631 4980 361 399 795 104 4999 713 4990346 399 552 105 4914 671 4975 005 399 233 106 4886 675 4988 968 396 049 201 5002 175 4995 656 400 632 202 5000 000 sooo ooo 4oo e65 aa 5007341 5008 610 401 095 204 005 103 5020 902 400 946 P25 013 644 4963513 401686 GPS Observations This project is going to be surveyed using a RTK system so measurement were made to some of the plan points and tagged with a new point number The GPS derived coordinates are in the 1000 range Their coordinates are listed below and for the remainder of this topic we will refer to this coordinate system as the local system Paint ID _ Northing Easting __ Elevation Description If you do a zoom extents in the project you will see the two coordinate systems 466 a AA RAYON v PDOP Au Ty 6 Standard Measure ra 2000000m a a A lt No Line gt T RTK Fixed Next ID raj 1205 lt No Desc gt Adjustment Analysis The program assumes the
326. lls to secure RAM by default Carlson Explorer FieldGenius installs to SystemCF by default which is secure Carlson Surveyor FieldGenius installs to secure RAM by default Compaq iPAQ Pocket PC H4100 3600 3700 3800 3900 series or newer FieldGenius installs to volatile RAM by default which is not secure you should install the program to a stor age card 64 MB of RAM required Compaq iPAQ Pocket PC H3210 and H3215 FieldGenius installs to volatile RAM by default which is not secure you should install the program to a storage card HP iPAQ Windows Mobile 2003 2003SE FieldGenius installs to volatile RAM by default which is not secure you should install the program to a storage card HP iPAQ Windows Mobile 5 6 FieldGenius installs to secure RAM by default a storage card is not necessary for persistent storage Leica RX 1250 FieldGenius installs to StorageCard by default which is secure Leica TS15 CS10 and CS15 FieldGenius installs to secure RAM by default a storage card is not necessary for persistent storage Sokkia SHC250 FieldGenius installs to secure RAM by default Sokkia SHC2500 FieldGenius installs to the SystemCF by default which is secure Sokkia SRX onboard FieldGenius must be installed to ROMDisk which is secure Symbol PDT 8100 Pocket PC FieldGenius installs to volatile RAM by default which is not secure you should install the program to a storage card TDS Nomad FieldGenius installs to
327. lt lt Convert Information Northing Latitude 5523097 874m N49 49 50 41836 Easting A Longitude 311564 984m W119 37 12 98055 Elevation Elevation 383 133m 399 387m Select Coordinate Systems X Close 266 Calculations Menu Information Press the information button to see details about the coordinate system such as grid scale and con vergence angle Calculator Main Menu Calculations Scientific Calculator FieldGenius includes an RPN Reverse Polish Notation Calculator RPN Calculators Such as the HP48 are stack based where values are popped from a stack and the results of the calculation are pushed back onto the stack This type of calculator may seem foreign at first so several examples of its use are included below The calculator can be launched several ways 1 By tapping inside certain numeric entry fields to directly open the Calculator This will copy whatever value is currently in that entry field into the calculator s command line and the cal culated value can then be automatically copied back into the field which the calculator was launched from 2 By tapping inside most text and numeric entry fields to open the keypad and then tapping the Calculator button on the keypad This will copy whatever value was currently in that entry field first into the keypad and then into the calculator s command line The calculated value can then be automatically copied back into the keypad and then to the
328. lution For our example we want the measured point to retain their geometry so we will turn on the do not calculate scale option This will set the scale value 1 0 Furthermore since we re not doing a localization for GPS derived coordinates turn on Do not calculate vertical slopes Edit Control Origin North GPS Local Transformation 23 Adjust Points peta ta 38 3049m Origin East 34 8522m Trans North 37 5000m Trans East 30 0000m Rotation 9 56 45 Scale 1 0000000000 E Trans Height 0 0000m Slope North 0 00000 M Xx Close Residuals If you edit the control again you can take a look at the pair residuals to make sure they meet your tol erances In our example you will see a large delta in the northing at point pair 3 107 Let s remove this point by pressing the green checkmark You have to go back and compute the solution again and then you will see the residuals are now more acceptable The summary of residuals illustrates the displacement between the plan coordinates and the pro posed transformed coordinates of the corresponding local point This is presented as northing dis placement easting displacement and total distance displacement and direction The units listed represent actual drawing units used in the drawing The example shown is in meters Review the residuals carefully Be sure that all of the pairs used in calculating the so
329. lution have resid uals within your expected limits If any one pair has residual values significantly larger than the rest click on Cancel This will return you to the Input dialog where you will be able to delete the erroneous pair and re compute the solution You can now close the transformation setup screen and move on to the next step 235 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 GPS Local Transformation 123 Q alculate Parameters Edit Control Add Control M Do not calculate scale M Do not calculate vertical slopes Ctrl Pnt x dN dE dH 0 011 0 007 106 1 CAC 0 014 0 025 108 1 0 005 0 004 104 13 gt Close Transform Points Once you are happy with the results of the computation you can consider transformation of the Local points into the Plan system To apply the transformation parameters that you calculated to points in your project you need to press the Main Menu button then Data Manager and finally press Point Database button This will open the Coordinate Database screen where you can select the points that you want the transformation applied to In the example we will use the Find command to select a range of 101 115 Now if you scroll through the list you should see that these points are highlighted in blue Coordinate Database Northing Easting Elevation 20 000m 10 000m 0 000m 55 000m 10 000m 0 000m 55 000m 30 000m 0 000m 20 000m 30 000m 0 000m 55 000m 50 000m 0 000m cena TEET
330. ly see the multiset point list where you will see your measurement to your foresight points They will have the FS tag in the Type column Reviewing Foresight measurements To review you foresight measurement for any point simply highlight it in the list and press the Edit Set button MultiSet Observations T FS Point 6 F1 1 F2 1 Std Dev HA 0 00 00 0 VA 0 00 03 5 SD 0 000m Average HA 45 00 02 VA 89 59 59 SD 19 987m BS FS Angle 60 00 02 Use Face dHA dVA dsD F 1 0 00 00 0 00 03 0 000m iv A m m m m m r 2 0 00 00 0 00 03 0 000m 4 Store Pnt xX Close Towards the top you will see the foresight point you measurement to and a summary of the total face 1 and face 2 measurements recorded Next you will see the standard deviation that is computed using all the directions that have a green check mark Next is the averaged direction plate reading to the foresight point Finally you will see the computed clockwise angle between the average backsight and foresight dir ection 167 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 By default all measurements will be used to compute the averaged position However you can decide what measurements you want to use to compute the averaged position by pressing the green checkmark icon Doing so will switch it to a red X which will remove it from the computation Once you re satisfied with your observations you can press the Store Pnt button which will take you to
331. m Icon User Defined gt Leica Constant mm 0 0mm Absolute Constant mm 84 4mm Y Save X Cancel Target Name Use this field to either edit or enter a new name for the target you are creating Target Type There are two target types available to select Prism is to be used when you are selecting a target that has a known offset This can be a round prism 360 mini etc RL stands for reflectorless and you should select this target type if you are using an instrument that is reflectorless capable and you do not wish to use a designated reflector Prism Icon The manatory icon for any new Leica target must have the User Defined prism icon This is a Leica instrument requirement and therefore can not be changed 351 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Leica Constant mm Leica Geosystems uses a different way of calculating prism constants than other manufacturers Leica defines their additive constant for their standard round reflector GPR1 as 0 0mm All entered or selected additive constant values are differences to the 0 0mm based in the Leica Geosystems TPS prism system Prism constants are always defined in millimetres The additive constant for non Leica prisms are often given in the true zero prism system Use the following formula to convert the published prism constant into a Leica constant to be entered into the Leica instrument True zero constant 34 4mm Leica constant Most prism manufacturers define their pris
332. m constantas in the true zero prism system So for a Leica round prism the true zero constant is 34 4mm 34 4 34 4 0 0 The Leica total station is expecting a Leica constant So for example Say you are using a non Leica prism with a published prism constant of 30mm that has been defined in the true zero system then you would enter that value into the Leica formula as 30mm true zero constant 34 4mm 64 4mm Leica constant You would enter 64 4mm as the Leica constant You will see that the Absolute constant is automatically computed for you and should be 98 8mm It is strongly recommended that you test your use of prism constants on a known baseline to be sure that your non Leica prism is in the true zero prism system Absolute Constant mm This defines the relation of the distance measurement to the mechanical reference point of the reflector Use the formula in the Leica Constant section above to calculate the Leica constant Enter that value in the Leica Constant field and see the Absolute constant be automatically computed for you Save Press this button to store your new changes to the Settings xml file and return you to the Target List screen Cancel Press this buton to cancel creating a new target You will be returned to the Target List screen 352 Edit Leica Targets MapView Target Manager Target List Use this option to edit an existing user defined target or edit a copy of a Leica instrument ta
333. make and model of your receiver its serial number battery status firmware information and more Sensor Information Ss Sensor Model GS15 Hardware GS15 Serial Number 1502868 System Version 4 03 Measure Version 6 110 Boot Version 4 00 Battery A 90 Battery B None A A E Dl m Y a Position Information GPS Toolbar Settings Position Information The Position Information screen is accessed from the GPS Settings screen It displays detailed information about your current position 432 Position Information Ss Latitude N49 50 16 96183 Longitude W119 36 35 98857 Ellipsoidal Height 132234 Antenna Hgt Meas 0 00 Baseline Length Not Applicable Northing 18122968 03 Easting 1024710 58 Elevation 1322 34 Horz System UTM83 11 Vert Svstem Ellipsoidal The following information is displayed and updates in realtime e Geodetic Position Latitude Longitude Ellipsoid Height e Measured Antenna Height e Baseline Length e Cartesian Position Northing Easting Elevation e Coordinate Systems Horizontal and Vertical e Solution Type e Standard Deviation e PDOP e Number of Satellites e UTC Date and Time Raw Data Logging GPS Toolbar Settings Raw Data Logging Use this to start and stop raw data logging on your GPS reference or rover receiver for later post pro cessing of your point data You can log raw data on the receiver while you carry on with your survey in FieldGenius
334. manually enter the distance Please see the Manual Distance topic for more information Manual Entry This will allow you to manually enter in a shot including HA VA and SD Please see the Manual Entry topic for more information Two Line Intersection This allows you to measure two baselines and FieldGenius will compute the intersection point Please see the Two Line Intersection topic for more information Line Angle Offset This allows you to measure two points to define a baseline measure an angle and FieldGenius will compute the intersection point Please see the Line Angle Offset topic for more information Line Distance Offset This allows you to measure two points to define a baseline then manually enter measured distances These distances will be used to compute a new point based on the baseline Please see the Line Distance Offset topic for more information Line Perpendicular Point This allows you to measure two points to define a baseline then you can select an existing point which will be used to compute a perpendicular intersection Please see the Line Perpendicular Point topic for more information Trilateration This will allow you to compute new points by observing their distances from two known existing points Please see the Trilateration topic for more information Observe Benchmark Use this to check your current setup elevation or compute a new one based on a known elevation Please see the Measure Be
335. mmands that may be started directly from the edit field such as the Point Chooser or Inverse Tool so that edit fields can only be used for typing values from your physical keypad Menu Shortcuts This will enable menu shortcuts so if you have a keyboard device you can press letter and number keys to navigate around the program Instrument Toolbar You can define if the instrument toolbar is located on either the Right or Left Side of your map screen Map Position Select If this is turned on tapping a blank part of the map screen will display the Map Select Toolbar Map Point Select If this is turned on then tapping on a point from the map screen will select it and open the Point Tool bar Map Line Select If this is turned on then tapping on a line from the map screen will select it and open the Line Toolbar SIP Type Use this to specify which SIP keypad type you want to use such as the full screen MicroSurvey alphanumeric keypad all devices the small PocketPC qwerty keypad PocketPC and Windows Mobile devices only or the small MicroSurvey numeric keypad PocketPC and Windows Mobile devices only Point Attributes Options Coordinate Order Use this to control the display of coordinate values in FieldGenius Options are NEH ENH XYZ and will affect any area of the program where coordinates are displayed This option also affects whether the ASCII Import and ASCII Export commands use a N E or E N X Y file format
336. more information New Target Target Name Target Type Prism st Prism Icon User Defined GeoMax Constant mm 0 0mm CA Save X Cancel Target Name Use this field to enter a unique name for the target you are creating Target Type There are two target types available to select Prism is to be used when you are selecting a target that has a known offset This can be a round prism 360 mini etc RL stands for reflectorless and you should select this target type if you are using an instrument that is reflectorless capable and you do not wish to use a designated reflector Prism Icon When creating GeoMax instrument targets the prism icon must be User Entered and that s why you are not permitted to edit the target s icon This is a GeoMax instrument requirement and therefore can 356 not be changed GeoMax Constant mm GeoMax defines their additive constant for their standard round reflector ZPR100 as 0 0mm All entered or selected additive constant values are differences to the 0 0mm based in the GeoMax TPS prism system Prism constants are always defined in millimetres The additive constant for non GeoMax prisms are often given in the true zero prism system Use the following formula to convert the published prism constant into a GeoMax constant to be entered into the GeoMax instrument True zero constant 34 4mm GeoMax constant Most prism manufacturers define their prism constant in the true zero prism s
337. mpute a solution Solution Each observation must be of the specified solution type or better You can select from several Solu tion modes depending on your receiver make and model these can be 406 e Autonomous e WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System e DGPS differential code solution e RTK Float differential carrier solution e RTK Fixed differential carrier solution Please refer to your GPS manufacturer s documentation for the solutions respective positional accur acy Elevation Mask The elevation mask is used to filter out satellites that are close to the horizon and are thus unre liable Typical elevation mask angles can range between 10 and 20 PDOP The PDOP Position Dilusion Of Precision mask is used to control the acceptable geometry of the satellites used to compute the solution If the PDOP value exceeds this number the user will not be eligible to collect a position Typical PDOP masks are 5 or 6 Satellites SVs The Satellites mask is used to establish the minimum number of satellites that are necessary to pro duce a solution with a valid position Each satellite must also pass the elevation mask test to be included in this number for the calculation of the rover position Reference ID The Reference ID is used to tell the Rover which reference station base to use for the differential cor rections If Any is selected it will use the first correction set identified for all future positi
338. n 3D 14 E ASPHE ASPH 4p Bs a memo When you press the E ASPH 2 Active Line button you will see a list of the figures in your project 87 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 n Li E Switch Active New Close Delete State Figure Figure Figure Line Active Description Pnts Closed 1 Yes EP 3 No See Also e Automap Library Tangents arcs and curvy lines in FieldGenius are also called figures Figures are created auto matically for you as soon as you connect points in the drawing Figures can be created while you survey in realtime using our active linework or you can manually cre ate the figure using the pencil tool FieldGenius Figures When you click on a figure the Line Toolbar will appear You will also see bold text in the drawing area indicating what you selected DXF Linework When you import a DXF drawing you will see all the linework that exists in the drawing When you select a DXF line or arc you will see the Line Toolbar but everything will be greyed out except for the stake and perpendicular distance buttons If you press the stake button or perpendicular offset to point button they will open up their respective toolbars When you click on a DXF entity you will see bold text in the drawing area indicating that you picked a DXF line or arc and it will display which layer it is on You can control the visibility of DXF layers through the Layers Manager screen 88 Points
339. n 533 Equal Partitions 81 539 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 ESRI 83 338 Exit 113 Export 291 318 320 325 328 332 336 337 Export User Defined 338 447 Extended Edit Fields 42 F FBK File 336 FEA File 83 Feature List Editor 83 Fieldbook File 336 Figure Direction Marker 96 Figure List 98 Figures 86 88 92 93 96 99 101 104 112 332 Figures Draw Manually 110 212 Figures Toolbar 89 File Types 41 Files 30 114 Foresight 341 361 362 364 389 G Geodetic Coordinate 265 Geodimeter 368 369 Geoid 136 265 435 Geoid Files 443 Geoids 448 GeoMax 356 359 360 GeoMax Constant 357 358 361 GeoMax instrument targets 362 363 GeoMax Instruments 359 360 540 GeoMax Instruments Target List 359 GeoMax Prism 356 360 361 GeoMax prism constant 357 358 361 Georeferenced Images 298 GIS 83 GNSS 449 GNSS Measurement Modes 411 GPS 65 399 405 406 409 410 418 422 423 425 427 449 453 Correction Information 424 Position Information 432 Raw Data Logging 433 Satellite List 426 Sensor Information 432 GPS Demo 136 372 GPS Local Transformation 228 449 GPS Model and Communication 402 GPS Profile 135 372 GPS Raw Data Records 532 GPS Reference Profile 400 GPS Rover 406 GPS Rover Profile 401 GPS Settings 427 GPS Tasks 427 GPS Toolbar 65 422 Grid Shift Files 449 GS GPS Store Point 534 GSM 432 GSM modems 423 Guide Lights 387 H HA Horizontal Calibration Adjust 534 Hardware
340. n and enter a point range 101 108 to select these points The list of terrestrially derived points is entered as shown in Figure 17 11 ci 20 3060 696m 102 A 6765 098m 1674 638m 105 106 107 Figure 17 Transforming Existing Points to the Control System To apply the transformation parameters to the local points go to the second set of buttons by press ing the green arrow and then the Local Transform button 464 After successfully transforming the points 101 through 108 from the local system to the plan system which was constrained to the GPS point 202 through 208 the results can be seen in Figure 18 The dia gram illustrates the matching of points 102 104 106 and 108 with corresponding points 202 204 206 and 208 respectively 5 1 E Eb e my i A 101 208 202 103 Pes 3500m Figure 18 Results of the Transformation Local Transformation Example C Two approaches can be used in applying the Local Transformation utility parameters can be manu ally entered or automatically computed given a set of control points The explanation of the use of FieldGenius s Local Transformation is best described with an example of integrating GPS obser vations and terrestrial observations and using the utility to compute the parameters Terrestrial Observations The example project has a local user defined system that was uploaded to the data collector Below you will find the coordinate
341. n as the cursor tracking provides real time positions to the Obser vation Toolbar To help with navigating set your map orientation to Instrument in the Settings screen This will force the map to orientate itself so the instrument is at the top and the prism is at the bottom You can set the EDM mode on the instrument toolbar to use a fine measurement setting that can be used to record the position of the point When cursor tracking is on it uses a coarse mode which might not be suitable for the storing the point but suitable enough to for navigation For precise stakeout you can use the following procedure 1 Use cursor tracking to navigate to your point 2 When you attain the position to be staked you can do one of two things a If tracking mode is precise enough for your needs you can turn off cursor tracking then press the Lock button to stop the instrument from tracking the prism It is useful to do this as the instrument will still be pointed at the stake location and prevents the instru ment from following the prism if you have to lay it down b If youneed to take a more accurate position before marking the point or pounding in your stake You can turn off cursor tracking then press the measure button to help you 281 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 locate the stake point By doing this it will use the EDM mode set in the instrument tool bar make certain it is set to a fine mode instead of using the coarse tracking mode
342. n the map screen Press the Save button to store this line When a line is saved points will be automatically stored at the start and end points arc radial points if applicable and polyline vertex points if applicable Rotate Translate Scale Points Main Menu Calculations Rotate Translate Scale Use this to rotate translate and scale a point or group of points When this command is used notes will automatically be written to the raw file indicating what parameters were entered by the user Coordinates that are updated with the RTS command will be recorded in the raw file with AP Adjus ted Points records The RTS command has the three options located on separate screens The user can specify more than one option at the same time for example you could rotate a group of points by 45 CW then translate them 25 east This can be done in one operation instead of two separate ones 249 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 All of the fields have extended edit functionality On the direction or distance fields if you double tap them you will see a popup menu From there you can start the calculator or use the inverse command When using the inverse option simply type the two numbers for the inverse then press the ESC key to automatically copy the value that was computed during the inverse The RTS function can also be accessed from the coordinate database Accessing it from there allows you to select your points form the list which in som
343. ncel The alignment offset staking process is very similar to normal point staking What is different is you will see the station offset information about where the prism is in relation to the alignment and more importantly to the point you re staking 506 Roads ale AAA 4 on 0 01 ii HT 0 miooo p Am i Stk 4400 00 R bar Staking Method SAR Store Point Staking Method Turn an Angle You will see the horizontal angles to the design point and to your actual meas urement This is useful for getting online left right with a conventional total station Directional You will see the move distances In Out Left Right or N S E W as well as Cut Fill guid ing you from the actual measurement to the design point Radial You will see a direction and distance guiding you from the actual measurement to the design point Stationing Absolute You will see the offset of the actual measurement along the alignment Stationing Relative You will see the move distances guiding you along the alignment from the actual measurement to the design point Staking Information The station offset of the design point is indicated directly on the staking toolbar and also in the Staking Information screen which you can access by pressing the Info button in the staking toolbar The station offset of the actual measurement is available in the Staking Information screen The move or rotate information which will guide you from the
344. nchmark topic for more information Add Invert Use this to open the invert toolbar You will then be able to record invert measurements Please see the Add Invert topic for more information 150 Survey Methods Menu Vertical Plane Projection This will allow you to compute points on a user defined vertical plane Please see the Vertical Plane Projection topic for more information Point Scanning Use this to activate Point Scanning with your motorized reflectorless instrument Please see the Point Scanning topic for more information Temporary No Store Main Menu Survey Methods Temporary No Store The temporary mode will allow you to take a measurement with your instrument without storing a point or recording anything to the raw file It also doesn t require you to have established a setup It is the same as pressing the measure button on the instrument where all it does is report back to you the HA ZA SD HD and VD When in this mode you will see the word Temp on the measure mode button No Setup Established If you haven t established a setup and you use the temp mode when you press the measure button you will see the results of your measurement Setup Established If you have an instrument setup established when you use the temp mode and press the measure but ton you will see the measurement information as well as calculated coordinates in the observation toolbar The coordinates will be based on the current setup a
345. nd for more information Export Template You can export figures and points using this command Please see the Export Template topic for more information Import User Coordinate Systems You can import a template that was previously exported using this command Please see the tem plate import command for more information Export User Coordinate Systems You can export figures and points using this command Please see the Export Template topic for more information For importing DXF LandXML and raster image files please see the Map Data Layers topic i in the Data Manager menu For importing DTM surface files please see the Surfaces topic in the Data Manager ASCII Coordinate File Import Main Menu Import Export ASCII Coordinate File Import Use this option to import a list of coordinates to the current project 321 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Import Coordinate File Gu File Name Browse for File Field Delimiter Comma File Format Standard Assigned Role User Entered Point Write SP record to raw file Overwrite Existing Coordinates X Cancel This may be required if a separate coordinate file is uploaded to the device by itself not as part of a project with linework This is also useful for transfer of points from one file to another Function Click on the Browse for File button to navigate to and select your file 2 Choose the field delimiter either Comma or Space 3
346. nd off your instrument s guide lights Instrument Joystick This is the Total Station Joystick function When activated you will be able to move your motorized instrument to the left right up and down by using the joystick touch screen There are three speeds that can be activated slow medium and fast The smaller inside blue buttons activate the slowest turn mode and the larger outside blue buttons activate the fastest turn mode To stop the instrument from turning simply press the red Stop button at the center The directions assume you are at the 388 Total Station Reference pole looking at the instrument Pressing the right buttons will turn the instrument to your right pressing the up buttons will turn the scope up etc Instrument Connect Disconnect Use this to connect or disconnect FieldGenius from the instrument When you are connected to the instrument you will see the Disconnect Instrument button Target Manager MapView Target Manager The Target Manager is a place where you can manage your EDM electronic distance measurement targets You can create edit copy and delete targets The Target Manager is divided into 2 sections Backsight and Foresight Note Leica users should refer to the Leica version of the Target Manager topic GeoMax users should refer to ths GeoMax version of the Target Manager topic Target Manager Backsight Use the Backsight screen to define your backsight target and enter a backsi
347. nd points based on the Point ID Coordin ate or Description The system will look in the Points database for points to add to the staking list Select Point Use this to pick a point from the map Points will be added to the list in the order they re selected Remove Points Use this to delete a single row or multiple rows This will only remove the points from the list and will not delete any points from the Points database Remove All Points Use this to clear the current list This will only remove the points from the list and will not delete any points from the Points database Move Up This will move the currently highlighted point up one row Move Down button This will move the currently highlighted point down one row Stake Pnt This will take you to the staking toolbar to stake out the point that is currently highlighted in the list Staking Status If a point in your staking list has not been staked yet it will have a stake icon displayed in the Staked Status column You will see a green checkmark icon if the point has already been staked Point ID Description Staked Status 1 Nail Y 2 Nail As you can see in the image above point 1 has been staked and point 2 has not Adding Points to the Staking List There are two ways to add points to a staking list You can add points that already exist in the Points database via the staking list screen by pressing the Find Points button The alternative
348. nd robotic total stations as well as laser devices See the Total Station Configuration topic for more details about configuration for your total station For more information on connecting to your instrument please refer to the Conventional Total Station and Robotic Total Station topics Total Station Demo If you choose this you will have to manually enter your shots Manually entered shots are recorded in the raw file and points are computed based on the values you enter A profile is not needed for this mode just press Connect to begin using the Total Station Demo mode GPS Rover GPS Reference When you set it to GPS Rover or GPS Reference you will be able to Add Delete or Edit a profile for your rover or reference receiver When you edit a GPS Rover or GPS Reference profile you will see 135 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 the Configure Rover or Configure Reference screens For more information about using FieldGenius for GPS surveying you should review the Starting GPS topic If you have not purchased the GPS module for FieldGenius then you will not have access to the GPS commands and you will see a Requires GPS module license message GPS Demo When you set it to GPS Demo you will be able to Edit and Connect to a profile for a simulated rover receiver When you edit the RTK Demo profile you will see the Configure Rover screen Feel free to play with the Tolerance Mode settings but please do not change the Mod
349. nd the reading from the temporary shot Occupy Point Main Menu Survey Methods Occupy Point Use this command to specify the instrument location and orientation You will be asked to specify the point your instrument is occupying an instrument height and if you will be assuming a backsight dir ection or sighting an exiting point After you have established your setup and backsight FieldGenius will graphically show you your setup points A Occupied Point Location Backsight Point Location 151 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Backsight Method Direction With the backsight method set to Direction you will be able to specify the point you want to setup on and specify a backsight direction When you go to measure you have the option of recording an angle and distance to the backsight or the option of just recording an angle If a distance is measured to the backsight you will have the option of storing a point for the backsight after you press the measure button Orientation Setup YO Instrument Occupy Point Instrument Height 0 000m Backsight Backsight Point e Backsight Direction c Backsight Distance Target Manager 0 000m VA OK Cancel Occupy Point Type in an existing point number or double tap in this field to open the keypad or to select a point from the map You will be able to create a new point pick one from a list or pick one from your drawing Instrument Height
350. nder normal circumstances you will set the backsight prism offset to be equal to what you defined for the foresight prism offset The only time these would be different is in situations where you re using different prisms that have different prism offsets This is very common with robotic total sta tions where a permanent prism might be setup on the backsight and a 360 prism is used at the pole Typically these two configurations require different offsets be applied at the backsight and foresight shots If you re unsure about your prism offsets refer to your instrument s owners manual or the dealer who sold you the instrument 379 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Note If you specify a prism offset here you need to make sure the prism offsets are set to zero on your instrument Otherwise a double offset could be applied to your measurement which will produce incorrect answers When you first configure FieldGenius with your instrument you should take the time to confirm that the distances being measured are correct You can do this by first measuring a precise distance between your current occupy point and a point that you can easily reference and take a measurement to When you compare the distance measured by FieldGenius to your manually measured distance they should agree very closely RL Reflectorless Prism Offset Most instruments when shooting reflectorlessly apply a zero offset to the measurement Depending on the type of material
351. ned coordinate system and add them to a favourites list This list allows you to define the coordinate systems you uses most often for easy access from the Coordinate System Settings screen Coordinate System List amp Add Predefined New User Defined Coordinate Systems UTM83 11 Predefined UTM83 01 Predefined Romania70 Predefined Remove From List G Em Add Predefined Press this button to access a list of existing coordinate system See the Add Predefined System sec tion below for more details New User Defined This allows you to add a user defined coordinate system to the coordinate system list See the Add user defined System section below for more details Edit User Defined This allows you to review and edit a user defined coordinate system Select a user defined coordinate system from the list and press the Edit User Defined button Doing so will display the Edit User 138 Settings Menu Defined System dialog Some predefined coordinate systems are read only and can t be edited You will see a waming mes sage when attempting to copy or edit system that can not be editted Delete User Defined Pressing the button will delete the selected user defined coordinate system You will need to confirm that you want to delete it from the database Since there is no und you may want to use the User Coordinate System Export routine to save a backup copy of your coordinate system before deleting anything
352. ng the store point command a SD record will be written to the raw file It is the difference between the design location DE record and the actual point staked SP record ND Delta northing ED Delta easting LD Delta elevation SK Stake Out Record When you stake out a point and use the Store Point command a SK record will be written to the raw file This is the raw observation that was recorded when you stored you stake point OP Occupy point FP Foresight point AR Angle right ZE Zenith SD Slope distance SK OP251 FP10000 AR175 00000 ZE90 00000 SD6 0000 Design Point 342 SL Slope Staking Record ST Station OD Offset direction ENUM EL Actual catch point elevation GD Grade design elevation of the catch point based on the slope line AS Ahead on station positive when rod is beyond design station negative when before station HH Horizontal distance to hinge point always positive VH Vertical distance to hinge point positive when rod is above hinge HC Horizontal distance to center line always positive VC Vertical distance to center point positive when rod is above center point CF Slope used ENUM 530 RAW File Reference DS Design slope OB Observed slope SP Store Point Many routines in FieldGenius will write a SP record to the raw file SP records contain coordinate information that can be used for setups resections etc PN Point number N Northing E East
353. nius 7 Zone zone3 Q Hep Slopes 0 Cutjrill o waso Zone Name Zone Priority Start Station Start Width Start Slope Start DeltaZ gt o 2 lt Add By default when you create a zone the width delta elevation and slope are used from the beginning of the zone to the end The start and end stations are determined by start and end station defined in the horizontal alignment Slopes Modifier When you use this button you will see the slope modifier page On this page you can define different modifiers that change the slope or delta Z value for the zone Cut Fill Modifier When you use this button you will see the cut fill modifier page On this page you can define different modifiers that change the cut fill value for the zone Note This function is currently not implemented fully and is reserved for a future version Cut Fill Slope values from the hinge point can be set in the Options screen Widths Modifier When you use this button you will see the widths modifier page On this page you can define different modifiers that change the width value for the zone Advanced Template Editing Advanced Zone Edit Widening Example In this example we will use the template example from the Template section We want to widen the template at a specific station and change the grade of the template 492 Roads The original zone 3 has a constant elevation and width from beginning t
354. nk for transmitting or receiving RTK corrections The mode will vary depending on your receiver type The Setup button allows the user to go into further device details including channels and frequencies for radios and GSM modems If you need to connect to a NTRIP caster you can also access that in the setup screen Accessing Link Configure To access this screen you need to first connect to a reference or rover receiver Once connected you can access this dialog Please review the Reference Base Receiver Overview or the Rover Receiver Overview topics for more details about work flow 423 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Link Configure 5l Link Device Link Communication GPS Port Port3 l Setup Baud Rate Data Format Parity gt stake Data Bits Stop Bits Flow Control M Disconnect X Close Mode Select the appropriate Correction Link mode such as Radio Modem or None Setup When you press the Setup button on the dialog above the Radio Setup or Modem Setup screen will appear Choose the radio make and model from the pulldown and set the channel or frequency the radio will be programmed by FieldGenius to the channel or frequency selected on some models If you are using an NTRIP or GPRS server enter your internet and server credentials here Enable WAAS Option The option to enable WAAS solution is available depending on your receiver type FieldGenius will indicate if WAAS is available for the select
355. nn nn cnn 27 Starting FieldGenius 2 22 22 c cece cece cece cece eee e cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 27 Registration amp Demo Mode 22 c cece cece ccc c ccc cece cece cceccecceeeeeeeees 28 NANI 28 Available Modules o oooooccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccnnn cnc cnc cnn cnn 29 Run Demo Mode 2 2 2 2 eee eee cece cece cece cece ce eee eee eens ee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 29 Retrieve Lost Key Codes passwords 222 0 22222222 eee eee eee 30 Technical Support cc cece eee cece cece cece cece ce ceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 30 Project Manager 22 222 c cece cece cece cece cece ccccccceceeceeeeeeeeees 30 Project Review 000 00 0c cece cece cece cece ee eee cece cece cece eee ee cee ceceeeseeeeees 31 Quick Start Open Existing Project 00 00000002 cece ccc ccc ccc cece cece cece eect ranana 32 Quick Start New Project 0 0 00 000 c ccc ccc ccc ce eee e cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 35 Common FieldGenius Buttons 0 0000000 cece ce eee cece eeeeeteeeeeeeeees 40 FieldGenius Project Files 2 0 0 0 2 c cece cece cece cece cece cece ce eee e cece ee eecceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 41 Automatic Save 2 2 2 eee ee eee cece eee e cece ee a aaora nananana 42 Data Entry Extended Edit Fields 00000 00000 e cece eeeeee 42 ATEN 43 Distance Entry amp Recall 2 22 00 eee cece cece cece eececceeeeceeseeeees 44 Distance Enty asas sas todita coe essen ede ee 44 Distance Recall 0
356. note You will be prompted to confirm the deletion 2 Record anew audio note Photo Notes Nautiz X7 Only Use this function to record photo notes for a point This option is only available on the Nautiz X7 data collector If you are using a Nautiz X7 data collector you will see two buttons for recording and deleting pictures Camera The Camera button is used to take a picture When you press it it will start the onboard camera soft ware and allow you to snap a picture The picture will be saved in you current project with the filename point number jpg The image quality and settings will be determined by the camera setup for the device If the Camera button is greyed out it means that a photo note already exists for this point and you must delete it first if you would like to replace it The photos will be automatically imported into your MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD desktop software for viewing in the office Delete Picture The Delete Picture button will delete the photo stored for the point Feature List A feature list is a tool built into FieldGenius so you can collect attribute data for your points Feature files allow you to define what data needs to be collected about a point s attributes You can define mandatory fields default values true false items and select from list options First you need to create a feature list file using the Feature List Editor which can be installed from your FieldGenius CD 83 MicroSurvey Fi
357. ns 120 Default Units 124 GPS 125 Interface 121 Point Attributes 122 Point Labels 124 Roading 131 Staking 126 System 131 Total Station 125 User Input 122 Orthometric Height 448 P Pan 55 Parcels 332 Parcels XML 316 Index Partition Lines Arcs 80 Patterns 77 225 PDOP 65 422 Pentax 368 Perpendicular Offset 246 Photo Notes 83 Planar Projection 200 point 73 Point Averaging 72 Point by Arc Mode 110 212 Point by Line Mode 109 211 Point Chooser Toolbar 71 Point Labels 55 124 Point Notes 81 Point Patterns 77 225 Point Scanning 203 Point Staking Toolbar 278 Point Toolbar 69 Points 69 Points Database 296 Position Information 430 Predefined 136 435 Predetermine Areas 255 Prism 347 Prism Constant 358 365 Prism Constant 347 Prism Icon 351 353 356 358 Prism Offset 367 Prism Offsets 378 Prism Search 63 386 Prism Search Settings 382 543 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Prisms Use multiple 63 386 Profile 399 Profiles 116 331 473 Program Base Receiver 411 Program Receiver 413 Program Reference Base 411 Program Settings 120 Project Files 41 Project Information 146 Project Manager 30 114 Project Review 31 Projection 136 338 435 447 Projects 30 114 Q QSB File 316 Quick Start New Project 35 Quick Start Open Existing Project 32 R Radio Configuration 377 Radio Settings 423 Radios 423 Raster Images 298 Raw Data Logging 431 Raw File Comment 85 Raw File Record Ty
358. nstant 34 4mm GeoMax constant 358 Most prism manufacturers define their prism constant in the true zero prism system So for a GeoMax round prism the true zero constant is 34 4mm 34 4 34 4 0 0 The GeoMax total station is expecting a GeoMax constant Please note on the GeoMax Zoom80 total station in the Manage Reflectors dialog the column says Add constant but in this case they are treating the additive constant as a GeoMax constant and actually want the GeoMax constant So for example Say you are using a non GeoMax prism with a published prism constant of 30mm that has been defined in the true zero system then you would enter that value into the GeoMax for mula as 30mm true zero constant 34 4mm 64 4mm GeoMax constant You would enter 64 4mm as the GeoMax constant It is strongly recommended that you test your use of prism constants on a known baseline to be sure your non GeoMax prism is in the true zero prism system Save Press this button to store your target edits Targets are stored to the Settings xml file and you are returned to the Target List screen Cancel Press this buton to cancel creating a new target You will be returned to the Target List screen Target List GeoMax Instruments MapView Target Manager Target List The Target List is where user defined and default GeoMax instrument targets are kept Here you can create edit copy and delete targets The GeoMax Instruments Target
359. nt Use this to measure a check shot to an existing point When you start the command you will see the point chooser appear where you can create a new point or pick an existing one from a list or from the screen After you choose your point you will be ready to measure You will note the measure mode 420 will be set to Check Pnt and if you need to cancel the operation you can do it by pressing the meas ure mode button and choose to cancel it Check Point Summary When you re ready to record the shot press the Measure button on the instrument toolbar You will be presented with a screen that compares your measured values to the ones that were computed for the check shot point Check Point Identifier 5 Description Delta Northing 0 01 Delta Easting 0 01 Delta Elevation 4 92 Delta Horizontal 0 02 Observed Point Northing 1044 05 Easting 952 20 N Elevation 100 00 y Store Point Xx Close The deltas that are displayed are computed by subtracting the shot coordinates from the known coordinates In other works if you add the deltas to the shot point coordinates you will end up at the known point Store Point Pressing this will exit the function and write several notes to the raw file summarizing your check shot and allow you to store the shot using the Store Edit Point screen l Check Point Check Point I Check Point d Check Point d Check Point d Check Point dHorizontal 4 94 D 110
360. nt You will now see the measurement info screen 183 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 A regular sideshot or traverse record will be created in the raw file Manual Entry Main Menu Survey Methods Manual Entry When you set the measurement mode to manual entry on the instrument toolbar you will be required to manually input your measurements When you press the measure button you will see the following screen Manual Observation Input Horzizontal Angle o 00 00 Vertical Angle 90 00 00 Slope Distance 99 00 XxX Cancel Press OK to Store the point A normal sideshot or traverse record will be written to the raw file just as if you shot it with a total sta tion A A a You can also use the Manual Entry mode for repeating your last shot If you have pre viously taken a measurement then the angle and distance values on this screen will default to those of your previous shot Two Line Intersection Main Menu Survey Methods Two Line Intersection The two line intersection command is used to locate the corner of an object whose corner can not be directly measured Two intersecting lines will be defined by four measurements two shots on each 184 Survey Methods Menu line The intersection of these two lines will define the corner of the object This routine is intended to be used with a reflectorless total station Measure Points When you start the two line intersection command you w
361. nt and switch the power on prior to pressing the Connect button Xm For all future projects you create with FieldGenius when you create a new or open an existing project you will see the Instrument Selection screen with the profiles you have already created It will default to the last Profile you used so if you are using the same instrument just press Connect If you are using different equipment just select the appropriate Instrument Type and Profile or add a new profile if one does not yet exist for it then press Connect Your profiles are stored in the file MicroSurvey FieldGenius Programs MSURVEY INI so once you have configured one data collector you can simply copy this file onto your other data collectors to make the profiles available on them This file should also be backed up for easy recovery Total Station When you select Total Station mode you will be able to Add Delete or Edit a profile to setup para meters for connecting to your conventional and robotic total stations as well as laser devices See the Total Station Configuration topic for more details about configuration for your total station 371 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 For more information on connecting to your instrument please refer to the Conventional Total Station and Robotic Total Station topics Total Station Demo If you choose this you will have to manually enter your shots Manually entered shots are recorded in the raw fi
362. nt form the map or simply enter the point number Original amp Destination Direction Specify the desired rotation in degrees minutes seconds Depending on your project units you will be entering either a bearing or an azimuth You can not use the direction recall feature such as Instead use the inverse command that appears when you double tap the field Translate Use this option to specify a shift to a point or group of points The translation is separated into three groups shift from point to point shift by coordinate change and shift by direction and distance In most circumstances you will only need to use one of the three types but you can use them in con junction with on another if you need to For example you could specify that the points are to be shifted by coordinate difference between points 10 and 20 then shifted again to the east by 50 feet 251 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Rotate Translate Scale Points pose taa see Translate Parameters Original Point Destination Point Add Northing 0 000m Add Easting 0 000m Add Elevation 0 000m Add Direction o 00 00 Distance 0 000m y Adjust Pots Restore Points x Close Original amp Destination Points These work in conjunction with one another The difference in coordinates to get from one point to the other is calculated and added to all points You can use the point chooser to select your points or simply type the points in the
363. nt screen to manually enter a new point Find Use this to select multiple points based on a single point ID a point ID range a point coordinate range or point descriptions RTS Rotate Translate Scale Use this to rotate or translate your points that are currently selected in the coordinate list When you press the button you will see the Rotate Translate Scale Points screen Please refer to the Rotate Translate Scale topic for more information Local Transform Use this to apply a coordinate transformation to a point or selection in the coordinate list You need to have calculated the transformation parameters prior to pressing this button See the Statistics Use this to display statistics of the coordinate database including the total number of points bound ing minimum and maximum coordinate values and point ID s in use and point ID s not in use 297 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Map View Use this to display the currently highlighted points on the screen Average Press this button to enter the Point Averaging routine Map Data Layers Manager Main Menu Data Manager Map Data Layers Use this to load unload and control the visibility of DXF files LandXML files and JPG or TIFF raster image files that are associated with your project and to control the visibility of your database layers 2 User Data M Database 2 DXF Files M Westbank DXF S LXML Files 2 Image Files 82e 082 029 j
364. nt using the next available point id and the description and line toggles specified on the main map screen Using this is a very fast method for recording your meas urements Please see the Sideshot Auto Store following topic for more information Multi Set This will start the multi set routine that will help you collect repeat observations to your backsight and a new foresight point Please see the Multi Set topic for more information Resection This will start the multiple point resection routine to allow you to determine your current instrument position by measuring to known points Please see the Resection topic for more information Check Point Use this to display a check measurement to an existing point in your project Please see the Check Shot topic for more information Check Backsight Use this to compare your backsight to your previously measured values Please see the Check Back sight topic for more information Horizontal Angle Offset This will start the angle offset routine Please see the Horizontal Angle Offset topic for more inform ation Vertical Angle Offset This will allow you to compute the height of an object Please see the Vertical Angle Offset topic for more information 149 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Distance Offset This will start the distance offset routine Please see the Distance Offset topic for more information Manual Distance This will record a HA and VA for a shot but the user can
365. nter coordinates Manual Entry Alignment C L Main Menu Roads Manager Edit Road Alignment C L To define the centerline data press the Alignment C L button which will open a menu On this menu select Edit to open the C L Editor If you re entering a new road the C L Editor will not have any elements listed In the example shown below there are three elements defined 2 tangents and 1 curve element In the element list it will always display the length of the element and its end station Furthermore all elements that are defined will be displayed in the Map so you can visually confirm that the geometry is correct Delete C L Alignment You can not delete a C L Alignment once it has been created 476 Roads Alignment Road 1 Element Line 500 5000 105 00 500 Curve 157 0796 106 57 580 933 2410 115 90 821 Element Delete Element Edit Element 2o2 ft Hide Map mae xX cance The C L Editor can display a view of the map along the bottom This view can be toggled on and off by pressing the Show Map Hide Map button If you would like to zoom into or pan around the map press the Map View button which will display zoom and pan controls Press the Close View button when you want to return the C L Editor Adding an Element To add an element to a road you need to use the Add Element button Once you press this you will see 5 options appear that will help you define the different elements supported by
366. o cess in any such action by registered mail return receipt requested or by any other means provided by law The application of the United Nations Convention of Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded Severability The illegality invalidity or unenforceability of one or more provisions of this Agreement shall not affect the legality validity or enforceability of any other pro vision and this Agreement shall be construed in all respects as if such illegal invalid or unenforceable provision were deemed amended to achieve as near as possible the same economic effect as the original in a legal valid and enforceable manner if pos sible Further Relationships Neither party is obligated by this Agreement to enter into any further business relationship after the termination or expiration of this Agreement Notices All notices under this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be deemed given when personally delivered when received if by nationally recognized courier or three days after being sent by postage prepaid certified or registered Canadian Mail as applicable to MICROSURVEY at MICROSURVEY s address as set forth herein or to Licensee at the address that Licensee provided upon entering into this Agreement or such other address as a party last provided to the other by written notice Independent Contractor MICROSURVEY and Licensee are independent con tractors No partnership joint venture or other join
367. o Communication topic for possible causes 376 Total Station Reference FieldGenius connects successfully the Status will change to Connected and if your instrument supports graphical representation of the level bubble you will see the Check Level screen Radio Configuration Main Menu Settings Instrument Selection Edit Total Station Profile Model and Com munication Radio Settings Use this to specify if you want to connect to your robotic instrument using a direct connection or through the instrument s radios If you re using a Topcon you can specify your RC unit as the com munication device Radio Configuration r Connection Settings Channel Station Address Remote Address Connection Direct This will allow you to connect directly to your instrument through an instrument cable Radio This will allow you to connect to your instrument using external radios Select your radio channel if this option is available Note If you are using radios with your instrument but this option is disabled or not available then pick the Direct option instead RC This will allow FieldGenius and your instrument to communicate through the RC unit 377 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Settings If you re using a Trimble or Geodimeter total station you will be able to specify the radio settings required to communicate with your instrument Main Menu Settings Instrument Selection E
368. o be read only points Surfaces Surfaces can be imported into FieldGenius from a LandXML file The surfaces can be imported in two ways 330 Import Export Menu e Fast We can use the points that define the surface and let FieldGenius re calculate the TIN model This might be acceptable for an area where no attempt was made to edit the triangles or add break lines FieldGenius can compute a surface in seconds from large numbers of points e Maintain Triangulation we can force FieldGenius to read the TIN exactly as computed by the desktop software This requires much more computing by the import program but it will exactly maintain the triangulation in the original surface For example if the LandXML surface was created by using breaklines and hand editing you will want to maintain the exact triangles for staking and viewing the surface You can set the import method by going to the Main Menu Data Manager Surfaces Surface Options From the Surfaces screen you can see a list of the surfaces in the XML file Select the one you want to load Alignments Profiles and Cross Sections Alignments cross sections and staking of these items are some of the powerful features in FieldGenius Almost all modern road design software will export alignments in LandXML format We read the horizontal alignment which is normally at elevation zero the vertical profile and the cross sections from LandXML files Individual components can be
369. o determine which differential corrections it is receiving if you have more that one reference station in use This is useful information to know if one of the base stations goes down or experiences problems during an RTK session 405 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 GPS Tolerance Modes Rover The tolerances modes are used to enter information used in computing the position of the rover once a GPS measurement has begun Tolerance 1 ST Description Autonomous Real Time Observations 5 Solution Autonomous Elevation 10 E PDOP 4 00 Satellites Computed 5 StdDev Horizontal 5 000m Close You can define three different tolerance modes that can be selected from the GPS Tasks menu while surveying Tolerance modes are used to ensure that certain criteria are being met every time you take a measurement The reason for three different settings is to allow you to specify different tolerances for different types of measurements you might need to make For example control points would need to be measured more precisely then those used for topographic measurements Description This is where you can assign a friendly description to your three tolerance modes to make them more easily identifiable to you for example Control Points or Topo Points Masks Real Time Tolerances Observations This is the minimum number of observations that the receiver must collect and average in order to co
370. o end but we want to modify it to include a section that has a slope and width difference g The new zone 3 will look like the following example From station 6 00 to 7 00 the width of the zone transitions from a width of 5 to 10 and the elevation transitions from 0 down to 2 Then from station 8 00 to 9 00 it transitions back to the normal width and grade S Ae e e Slope Modifier First you need to highlight the zone that you want to add modifiers to Then select the Advanced Zone Edit command from the commands button This will open the zone modifier screen for the zone In our example we ll be modifying zone 3 on the left side of the tem plate To add slope modifiers press the Slopes button From here you can press the Add button to add modifiers for the zone The following table shows the information that would have been inputted You have to define if you are entering a relative vertical change or want FieldGenius to compute it for you using a slope percent and horizontal distance forthe zone You can do this by selecting the Vert Type and set it to Vertical Distance or Slope 493 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Start Delta Z End Slope End Delta Z 6 00 00 000 70 20 0 20 0 200 800 200 200 200 20090 00 000 Press Ok to save the modifiers Widths Modifier First you need to highlight the zone that you want to add modifiers to Then select the Advanced
371. od and parameters are being used 3 What ellipsoid and parameters are being used See section 4 for more details Vertical Group This is where you define the vertical system also known as a geoid model for your project The default is ellipsoidal If needed you can copy geoid seperation files a k a geoid model into the FieldGenius mapping directory Any new files you copy to the mapping directory can be selected here Please review the Geoid Model topic for more details 436 Save As Defaults Saves the Horizontal and Vertical systems to the msurvey ini file as defaults to be used for all new projects Select Horizontal Coordinate System FieldGenius ships with a default coordinate system definition of UTM NAD83 zone 11 You can change this at any time The Coordinate System List dialog is where you can select an existing coordinate system or create a new user defined coordinate system and add them to a favourites list This list allows you to define the coordinate systems you uses most often for easy access from the Coordinate System Settings screen Coordinate System List amp Add Predefined New User Defined Coordinate Systems UTM83 11 Predefined UTM83 01 Predefined Romania70 Predefined Remove From List G Em Add Predefined Press this button to access a list of existing coordinate system See the Add Predefined System sec tion below for more details New User Defined This allows you to
372. ode where the dis play will always be centered on the current position When active single tapping this button once more will disable the auto pan mode GPS Settings If you press this button while you are connected to a receiver you will see the GPS Settings screen At any time this button can be used to adjust or stop your GPS sur vey If you press this button without being connected to a receiver you will see the Instrument Selection screen where you can edit your GPS profiles or connect to your receiver DOP Values This displays the current DOP Dilution of Precision values Pressing this button will cycle through the PDOP HDOP and VDOP The PDOP is the default setting as this is most often used to ascertain the quality of the satellite geometry Satellite Plot Satellite List This shows the total number of satellites the receiver is currently using in its solu tion Press this to view a sky plot of the current SVs visible to the rover orto access the Satellite List 65 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Standard GNSS Measurement Modes Menu Measure This menu contains all the available measurement modes that can be used with your GNSS receiver Please review the GNSS Measurement Modes topic for more details w Measure K This is the measure button This button also indicates the current solution type This tells the user if the solution is Fixed Float WAAS DGPS or Autonomous This button will also indicate to the user if
373. of a job site Surfaces contain one or more parts such as points break lines triangulated irregular networks TIN or triangulated grids TGRID A surface is not a drawing entity rather it is a mathematical description held in the data collectors memory Representations of a surface such as contours TGRIDS or TINS may be drawn into your diagram as polylines and polyface entities Creating a Realtime DTM in FieldGenius FieldGenius will compute a DTM model from points collected staked or imported from any ASCII file and from any existing FieldGenius project There are no limits to the number of points that are used to create the DTM The Automap Library controls what points and or lines are included or excluded from the DTM surface The DTM is created in real time and can be appended as additional points are picked up To create a DTM follow the instructions below 311 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 From Main Menu Data Manager Surfaces you can turn on the Realtime DTM Surface by placing a checkmark in the box before the Point Database surface Expanding the tree will allow you to define whether it is displayed as Contour Lines Solid Faces and or Triangle Edges The surface can be viewed or used in volume computations immediately Before turning on the Point Database surface Ha t ES Nf h 4 4447 Fo t th ul Pt ara After tuming on the Po
374. of the required purchase price and any applicable license and maintenance fees and Licensee s acceptance of the terms and conditions of this Agreement 2 License 1 License Grant MICROSURVEY hereby grants Licensee a nonexclusive non trans ferable non sublicensable right to i install and use one copy of the Software and Docu mentation on the Product and one copy for use on no more than one personal computer simultaneously and ii to access the stored measurement data generated by the Soft ware for Licensee s own internal business purposes and in accordance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement MICROSURVEY also hereby grants Licensee a nonexclusive non sublicensable right to reproduce the Documentation solely as necessary for Licensee s internal use of the Product and Software 2 Conditions and Restrictions The following conditions and restrictions apply to the use of the Product Software and Documentation MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 vi Licensee shall not and shall not attempt to reverse engineer decompile dis assemble or otherwise attempt to identify the source code of any object code portions of distribute modify encrypt or create derivative works of the Soft ware Documentation and or any stored measurement data in whole orin part including but not limited to stored measurement data Licensee shall not use the Software or Documentation for any purpose not expressly permitted by this Agreement
375. of the line work is hidden from view a a ua To exit this routine simply switch to a different measurement mode Raw File Each point that is computed on the vertical plane will also have a computed sideshot stored in the raw file da PART PEAB l i SS OP1 FP503 AR142 24510 ZE78 37170 SD17 8888 VERTICAL For each shot you record you will see a note before the shot in the raw file indicating which points were used to define the vertical plane Special Notes Vertical projection measurements will automatically be recognized by your MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD desktop software Please refer to theMicroSurvey CAD or inCAD help file for more inform ation regarding importing vertical projections 202 Survey Methods Menu Point Scanning Main Menu Survey Methods Point Scanning FieldGenius supports point scanning which allows you to create a point cloud of data To use this routine you need a reflectorless instrument that has servo motors 123 Point Scan Horizontal Range Vertical Range Left Boundary Top Boundary ooo Oo 60 00 00 Right Boundary Bottom Boundary 30 00 00 fi 20 00 00 Resolution 1 00 00 Approximately 1891 points to scan Y Ignore all scanning errors y Start Scan Measure Range x Close To start you will be asked to define a scan area by pressing the Measure Range button and pointing the instrument at the Bottom Left and Top Right corners o
376. ojection tool to tum on a vertical grid that will be displayed in your drawing You can set the grid spacing in the settings Planar View Use this when using the Vertical Projection tool to set the view perpendicular to the vertical plane so that the wall or other projected plane is displayed face on in the map view Grid Settings Eh Use this to set parameters that affect the grid spacing and origin You can select the grid origin using a point chooser and specify lengths for the sides You can also specify the interval for each axis Mini Toolbar a menu controls Instrument The mini toolbar control is found directly beneath the Main Menu button on the Topo Tool bar It is used to help you maximize your screen space by allowing you to control which toolbars you need to keep active in the main interface When you press the mini toolbar control you will see the mini toolbar appear toward the bottom of the main interface A Use this to display the full topo toolbar Menu Use this to display the main menu Controls Use this show or hide the display toolbar Instrument Use this to show or hide the instrument toolbar 60 Main Interface Instrument Toolbar When you use FieldGenius in either manual or total station mode you will see the instrument toolbar beside the map area SideShot This toolbar allows you to control your instrument settings EDM modes meas urement modes and target heights HT 0 000m
377. olbar The Display toolbar displays the design elevation the intended or desired elevation the actual measured elevation displayed in the Elev field and the cut fill amount required to get to the design elevation from the measured elevation Design Elev Fill amount or Design Elev Cut amount Get elevation from point Press this button to acquire an elevation from a selected point s elevation The point database dialog will open and you can select a point to use its elevation The Elev and Cut Fill text fields will display values that are within your staking tolerance in the colour green Measurements made outside of your staking tolerance are displayed in the colour red Design 383 304m Design 383 304m Elev 383 285m Elev 383 476m Fill 0 019m Cut 0 172m Please refer to the Options Staking topic for more information on staking tolerances Staking Tool Bar Stk 1250 00 Staking Method Height x j Please refer to the point staking toolbar topic for more information on how to use the staking toolbar 294 Data Manager Menu DATA MANAGER MENU Data Manager Menu Main Menu Data Manager This menu allows you to organize manipulate and view the different data types that may be asso ciated with your FieldGenius projects Data Management Coordinate Database Map Data Layers Parcels XML EA PEA MA mu Coordinate Database Use this to open the points database From here you will find numer
378. om a LandXML file you need to load it as needed Sample LandXML files are available at the LandXML web site www landxml org One of the example files posted is subdivision xsec xml We have downloaded and are now going to show the results of reading it into FieldGenius LandXML Components and How to Use Them There are many different types of objects in a LandXML file FieldGenius will be expanding the use of these objects as the program grows As of the date this manual was written the following objects are supported This list will change so you may notice other options on the smart menus for these objects CgPoints A LandXML file can contain many different sets of points The LandXML specification requires that every point in a LandXML file have a different id For example you can not have two CgPoint sets con taining a point with the same id Since a LandXML file can contain many different CgPoint sets and these point sets may contain thousands of points FieldGenius lists these sets in the Project Man ager When you want to see them on the screen you need to use the Smart Menu to Load the CgPoint Sets By default when you import your LandXML file the CgPoints will be displayed on the screen CgPoints are not stored in the database but they can be used by our commands For example you can use the Occupy Point command and select the CgPoints with the point chooser for the setup and backsight points You can also consider them t
379. ompute the coordinate point for the angle offset and will be a compilation of your two shots l OF AR52 53170 ZE91 12240 SD9 5616 Oeae 2210r coke Angle Offset SS OP1 FP2 AR52 53170 ZE91 12240 SD9 5616 lt No Desc gt i Distance Offset Main Menu Survey Methods Distance Offset FieldGenius allows you to do a distance offset to specify an offset forward or backward along the line of sight left or right and vertically up or down When you choose distance offset command and take a measurement you will see the following screen 181 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Distance Offsets Offsets viewed from the instrument C Offsets viewed from the prism Forward Offset 1 500m Right Offset 1 000m Up Offset 0 000m All distances are with respect to the horizontal plane y Store Point Xx Cancel From this screen you can specify if the offsets are with respect to the instrument or prism e Offset buttons act as toggles which allow you to easily define the direction the offset should be applied e Anegative offset will automatically be converted to a positive value e The elevation of the point will be computed from your shot This elevation will remain unchanged unless you specify a vertical offset e The distance is assumed to be horizontal Forward Back Offset Enter the offset distance from the shot position to the new position Right Left Offset Enter the perpendicular o
380. on If you re using a non robotic instrument you will see the turn to screen displaying the angle and dis tance you need to measure to stake the point Please see section Step 2a below If you re using a robotic instrument or GPS you will see the map screen and the point staking toolbar Please see section Step 2b or 2c below 276 Staking Menu caput 2a Non Robotic Total Station Layout Point 1 amp Rotate instrument to HA 299 36 04 VA 90 00 00 SD 75 831m HD 75 831m CA Continue Zero Plate X Cancel Rotate instrument to From this screen you will see what angle and distance you need to turn to on your instrument to stake your point At this point you can turn your instrument to match the angles and when ready to start press the Continue button The Turn To information is also available on the next screen in case you need to see it again Note Your target height is used to determine the vertical angle for the stake point Auto Rotate If your instrument has servo motors and FieldGenius supports your instrument this option will be available It will be on by default and will automatically turn to match both the horizontal and vertical angles needed to stake the point The instrument will begin to turn when you press the Continue but ton Zero Plate This is used to modify plate reading on your instrument in such a way that if you manually turn to zero you will be facing towards the point you want to stake
381. on the GPS antenna should have an unobstructed view to the satellite con stellation to ensure that the rover station operates at its full potential If the reference station is unable to occupy a plan system point the rover station can instead measure an existing plan system point with local system coordinates and for this example that case will be assumed Using FieldGenius to configure the GPS reference station a suitable map projection is selected and the reference station position will be determined autonomously Once the reference station is operating and transmitting corrections the rover station is used to meas ure plan system point 103 and the new local system point is assigned point number 203 Table 2 indic ates the measured coordinates of point 203 in the local system which corresponds to point number 103 in the plan system Figure 6 illustrates that FieldGenius now has points in two different coordinate systems as indicated by the large separation Figure 6 FieldGenius with Two Coordinate Systems Point Northing Easting 5523295 939 m 311585 808 m Table 2 Local System Point Now that points exist in each of the coordinate systems the local transformation parameters can be determined and applied Transformation Settings can be accessed from the Main Menu Survey Tools GPS Local Transformation Initially the transformation parameters of translation in north ing translation in easting scale and rotation will be nul
382. on and choose total station Select Make and Model FieldGenius uses a smart driver that will poll the instrument to see what commands it supports Because of this you will see that in the Model section we don t list every instrument built by the man ufacturer If you re unsure of what make and model to choose visit our website and use the online help desk support center to do a search for your instrument Communication Settings Confirm the settings so they match the settings from your instrument If you don t know what the set tings on the instrument are you can always try the Default Comm Settings button Other Settings On the Total Station Configuration screen you can review the other options to set some additional parameters for your instrument Total Station Reference Connect to Instrument If you re not connected to the instrument you will see a status of Not Connected displayed above the Connect to Instrument button When you re ready to connect make sure you have done the fol lowing 1 Powered on the instrument 2 Levelled the instrument 3 Compensated the instrument 4 Connected the data cable from the instrument to your data collector Once you have done all four steps you can press the Connect to Instrument button If you see a status of Connected displayed above the Connect to Instrument button then you have successfully connected Getting Started To start taking measurement you need to exit out the T
383. on solu tions Standard Deviation Standard Deviation Horizontal FieldGenius will use the instantaneous Standard Deviation values that your receiver is outputting to determine if the measurement can proceed If the instantaneous Standard Deviation values are equal to or less than the values you ve specified then the measurement can proceed Once this happens FieldGenius will start averaging the measurements and will compute and display averaged Standard Deviation values These averaged Standard Deviation values must then remain equal to or less than the values you ve specified for the entire duration of the measurement for the measurement to be accepted as being within the specified tolerances 407 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 This is your maximum acceptable horizontal standard deviation to be maintained during the point measurement Standard Deviation Vertical This is your maximum acceptable vertical standard deviation to be maintained during the point meas urement Point Tolerance Point Tolerance Observations This is the minimum number of observations that the receiver must collect and average in order to compute a solution Point Tolerance Time This is the minimum time duration that the receiver must collect and average observations in order to compute a solution Post Processing Tolerances These settings apply when using FieldGenius to collect static data for later post processing Please n
384. onstrated in the following two images the first has LOD turned on and the second has LOD turned off With LOD on as soon as you zoom in to a reasonable level the labels will appear automatically Under normal circumstances you will keep the LOD feature active Default Units Options These options provide the default settings shown in the Units amp Scale screen when creating a new project they do not necessarily reflect the actual settings for the current project Please see the Units amp Scale topic for more detailed information on each option Distance Unit Format Precision Specify whether new projects should default to Meters or Feet in which format and with how much precision 1242 Settings Menu Angle Unit Format Precision Specify whether new projects should default to Degrees Radians or Gons Grads in which format and with how much precision Direction Format Specify whether to use Bearings or Azimuths by default for new projects Scale Specify the default ground to grid scale factor to use for new projects Corrections Specify whether to enable or disable the Curvature and Refraction Corrections option by default for new projects Total Station Options Default Measure Mode This specifies which measure mode FieldGenius will default to either Sideshot or Sideshot Auto Quick Measure Modes When this is turned on when you press the Measure button in routines such as the Horizontal Angle
385. oo sl EI ET AS ok hon dS cee 205 Store Edit Points ore oae ae aaa ccc ee eee cece cece cece a A E E 206 Drawing ool ts see dt tee De 209 Delete Last Saved Point 2200000 e cece cece ccc cc cece cece cece eee ceeeeeeenes 214 Raw File Viewer 2 2 2 2 0 c cece ccc c eee ce cece cece cece ceeeeeceeeeeeeeeenes 214 COGO HIStory VIEWER cos cones sl it dt 217 Traverse Reposici n Sore pei eta don e de ated bet eto Sted A SP o 218 EENEI o TUEA A EA E nonnoco conoces 224 Point Patterns 2 cota tr a a eead a ete da tee e 225 Pattern Toolbar 00 00 0000 coco ccc ccc cece cece cece cece eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 225 Patter Editor lt 25 0 5 52 dou e i ia 226 GPS Local Transformation o oooccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccnccn cece cece cece cnn 228 Transform Points Helmerts Transformation 000 000222 c cece cece cece cece eee cc cece ee eeee 232 Calculations Menu loa todo rta 238 Calculations Menu 22 2222 eee cnc nono 238 Traverse Intersection 00000 o ccc e cece cc ccc ccc ccc cece cece cece cece eeeeeeteeteeeeeeeees 239 INVESCO shy co e do Crea sett itd Ai e oe et o Sok ra e AS Gee 243 Offset Intersection oven Lee A as Ss SUR E 245 Offset TOON scene hated rl Wess nee ae E aaa a a as e Saanaa A 246 Rotate Translate Scale Points 2 0000 22 c eee e cece cece ce cece ccc ceceeceeeeees 249 CUE Calculator ecenin e UR ERS dede dee edad 254 Area Calculator coc dl id ra cdi 255 Detiningani A
386. opened the image visibility will automatically be set the same as you had left it Add File Press the Add File button to select an image or DXF file to load into your project You will be able to browse to and select any JPG or TIF file JPG files must have a corresponding JGW world file and TIF files must have a corresponding TFW world file these world files contain the georeferenced pos 303 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 itioning information The world file must have the same file name as the image file just with the appro priate extension and it will be automatically used to position the image Remove File Highlight the image or DXF file you want to remove from your project then press the Remove File button If a file is not highlighted you will be reminded that a file must first be selected from the tree This will turn off the selected image in your FieldGenius project and disassociate the image file File Settings Highlight the image file you want to view or change the display settings for then press the File Set tings button You will see the file s name size and position information You can also adjust the opa city of the image The default value of 100 will cause the image to be displayed normally and reducing this value will make it appear fainter on the screen This is useful if the image file being dis played makes your other FieldGenius data too hard to see over top of the image Pressing the Close button
387. opic for more information LG mm es Jose 9 Pa abe 69 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 When you tap on an existing point in the drawing you will see the point toolbar appear near the bottom of your screen The point toolbar contains functions that are frequently used on points in your project Following is an explanation of what each button will do El e r t r r a k 7 oc r 70 Points List This will display the list of all points in your current project and you can sort the list by tapping on any of the column headings When you find the point you want simply tap it and press the ok button Draw Tool Use this to draw lines points and connect line work between existing points This will open the Draw Tool New Point This will open the store and edit dialog and allow you to enter coordinates for a new point Edit Point Use this to edit the coordinate value for the selected point Delete Point This will delete the selected point from the drawing and data base You will be asked to confirm that you want to delete the point Offset This will open the Offset Tool Inverse Tool Use this to measure the inverse between points Zoom to Point This button when pressed for the first time will force the point to be centered on the screen Subsequently if you keep press ing it it will continue to zoom in on the point Stake Point Pressing this will help you stake the point that is currently sel
388. or you can type any value if you need to increment it by some other amount Store After you have defined the segment to add press this to store the new point and line segment into your project 108 Points Lines Descriptions Store This does the same as the Store button but you will see the Store Edit Point screen Use this to con firm or view the coordinates or to specify a description Point by Line Mode This is the same as the Line mode except that when you press Store or Store it will only store the point without drawing the line segment Arc Mode Use the Arc draw mode to add arc segments to your figure De EL l A s ji A 8 0 Start Pnt 1 Direction 0 00 00 Draw Arc Angle 90 00 00 Store Store Radius ES Start Point Specify the start point for the new segment For starting a new plan this should be set to an existing point in your project typically a corner that you will begin drawing the plan from As you continue adding subsequent points segments to your plan you will see the Start Point field automatically advance for you Direction Specify the direction Azimuth or Bearing of the tangent in to the arc segment you wish to draw This will default to either the direction of the previous line segment or the tangent out of the previous arc segment so as long as your arc is tangential to the previous segment you will not need to change this valu
389. ored Alphanumeric Point ID s can have a maximum length of 31 characters LandXML Export Prefix IDs When this is enabled point numbers will be prefixed with the point s description upon creation of an XML file For example if a point has a number of 100 and description of PIN in the XML file its ID will be PIN100 New Description Prompt This controls how FieldGenius deals with descriptions that don t match anything in your Automap lib rary If this is on when you enter a description that isn t in the Automap library you will see a warning message asking you if you want to add it If itis off any description that doesn t have a match in the Automap library will be automatically added to your project s Automap library Time Stamp Saved Points This tells FieldGenius to write a timestamp into the raw file whenever a point is stored 123 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Map Point Labels Options Show ID This is used to show or hide the point number labels for your points Show Description This is used to show or hide the point description labels for your points Show Elevation This is used to show or hide the point elevation labels for your points Level of Detail The Level of Detail filter when turned off will force FieldGenius to show the point labels all the time independent of your zoom level If it is turned on FieldGenius uses an algorithm to determine if dis playing the point labels is necessary This is dem
390. oresight target here Press the Set Default Height button SS to assign the default height to this Target Height field The default height is defined in the Default Settings screen Use Temp Height Press this button to activate the Temporary Height function button is active in the above image To enable the temporary height be used you must press the Use Temp Height button Once activated the following measurement will use this temporary height but it will be a one time measurement and then the system will immediately revert back to the height defined in the Target Height field This is handy if you need to take a quick shot using a different height such as when meauring an invert Press the Set Default Height button ai to assign the default height to the Target Height field The default height is defined in the Default Settings screen EDM Mode Use this field to select the EDM mode you would like to use Typically you will want to select an EDM mode that corresponds to your target type 366 Leica Constant This field will display the Leica constant associated with your target See the New or Edit Target Help for an explanation of how to compute a Leica constant This will be especially important if you are using a non Leica target OK This records the settings you have just made closes the Target Manager and returns you to the MapView Target List Press this button to access the Target List Here you can create copy e
391. original sub grids The Datum Grid Editor is installed on the desktop machine and is available for download from our website www microsurvey com When it starts you will see the following dialog 2 Datum Grid Editor Source Data Path Ic Program Files MicroSurvey FieldGenius 2006 Datum Grid Editorimapping Browse Export Data Path Ic Program Files MicroSurveyFieldGenius 2006 Datum Grid Editor mapping export Browse Coordinate Type Grid Area Grid Extents Latitude Longitude Rectangular Area lata Source Unit ed States i C Northing Easting Circular Area ZIP Code NW Latitude N 49 00 00 Map Projection NW Longitude w 119 00 00 G nes NAD27 a SE Latitude N 47 00 00 System SE Longitude fw 116 00 00 Units Help Exit Data Paths Installation of the Datum Grid Editor utility will include recent grid data for both the United States and Canada The edit box for the source data path will contain the installed path for the datum con figuration files and the respective national grid data Newly built grids will be written to the path defined by the edit box for the export data path The installation process will have created a specific export path Paths can be modified by changing the contents of the edit boxes or by pressing the adjoining browse button and selecting the path from the presented directory tree Coordinate Type Coordinates for defining the extents of the user sub grid can b
392. ormal or large using the Use large info text option in the program settings Traverse Report Main Menu Survey Tools Traverse Report Use this to compute a traverse closure based on traverse points you ve measured and recorded The traverse report scans your raw file for traverse records which appear with a TR record type You can save your shot as a TR record by choosing the TR button when the Measurement Info screen appears TR records are also useful when you use the Setup Occupy Point function because your last TR shot will now become the current setup point and the BS point will be set to the last setup point for you automatically You can also balance your traverse using an angle compass and vertical balance routine See the Traverse Adjustment topic for more information The following examples will show you the traverse scenarios that FieldGenius supports The open tri angles depict known or computed points TR records indicate all the foresight shots that were meas ured and recorded and the OC record indicate the points that were occupied Finally the BK record indicates the point that was used for the initial backsight 218 Survey Tools Menu TRROLS TR amp OL 4 TRA OLS TR amp OF 4 TRE OLS Case 3 TR3 OL 6 OC 1 TRE OLY 219 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 PK 2 TR amp Ow TR AROS Case 4 a a a A Of l TR amp OF 4 BK 2 TREBOL 3 Casa 5 TR OL 5 OC 1 TR amp OC 4 TR amp OC 6 Tr
393. ot written until you press the Store Pnt button in the GNSS measurement dialog Remember you must be logging GNSS data for this to work If this is turned on during a measurement if the tolerances are met the store point screen will appear automatically If this is off then the user is required to press continue to get to the store point screen Auto Start Store If this is turned on the user will not see the store point screen It is a fast way to store your GPS points and is useful when used in conjunction with the Auto Start Statistics option Correction Timeout GPS data sent from a reference base had a time stamp of the start of the transmission associated with the positions being broadcast When the rover processes the data the time stamp is compared to the current time to ensure that there wasn t a big delay in receiving the position Large time gaps can deteriorate the position quality at the rover You can adjust the time check comparison value by adjusting the correction timeout value Sometimes you have to increase this setting if you are far from your reference receiver or are experiencing transmission interference You can use any value between 0 and 20 seconds Staking Options Note You can also access these options directly from the staking toolbar Tolerance This is the error tolerance that the staking command will use When your staking move by distances are equal to or less than this amount your direction to a point wil
394. otal Station Configuration screen by pressing close button Depending on the instrument you connected to you will have different options available Please review the Instrument Toolbar topic for more information Tip You can use the enter key on your device to take a measurement For example if your meas urement mode is set to Sideshot and you press the enter key your instrument will take a measurement Robotic Total Station When connecting to a robotic total station there are a few things you need to confirm before con necting to FieldGenius You need to know what the communication parameters are set to on the instrument Please take the time to find what the following settings are set to on the instrument Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits and Parity Because of all the different instruments available we can not provide help on retrieving these settings from your instrument Please refer to your owner s manual or contact technical support from your equipment manufacturer Create Total Station Profile Once you know the settings you can connect FieldGenius to the instrument If you just installed FieldGenius you can start the program and follow the prompts until you get to the Instrument Selec tion screen From there select Total Station as the Instrument Type and then press the Add button 369 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 to create a new Instrument Profile Name the profile for your instrument and then press the Edit but
395. ote that FieldGenius does not support collecting raw data on all GPS receivers please refer to the Raw Data Logging topic for additional details including a list of receivers which support this function Usage This option determines whether FieldGenius should use Post Process mode to collect static data for later post processing Selecting Always instructs FieldGenius to automatically switch into Post Process mode to collect static data for all points Selecting Auto Start instructs FieldGenius to automatically switch into Post Process mode to collect static data for the point currently being measured if the current solution masks are not met Selecting Manual allows you to switch into Post Process mode to collect static data for any point as it is being measured but FieldGenius will not do so automatically Time Less than 5 SVs This defines the duration of the static collection if the minimum number of satellites being tracked dur ing the static session is 4 satellites Default 30 minutes If at any time the number of satellites drops below 4 which is the minimum number of satellites required to post process a 3D solution the internal clock timing the static session will reset to zero and begin again 408 Time Less than 6 SVs This defines the duration of the static collection if the minimum number of satellites being tracked dur ing the static session is 5 satellites Default 25 minutes Time Less than 7 SVs T
396. ou begin a measurement For a faster way to get to this screen you can also press the measure mode button which is located on the instrument toolbar HT 2 000m IR Std E Select Measure Mode 2 8 lo A Temporary No Store a Occupy Point A ep Sideshot re Sideshot Auto Store f lt ai j KP Multi Set AE Resection KT Check Point EY Check Backsight B B Horizontal Angle Offset CR Vertical Angle Offset I Use the vertical scroll bar along the side to access additional measurement modes if they cannot all fit on screen at the same time Note Several of these modes will not be available until you have setup an occupy point and meas ured a backsight via the Occupy Point Multi Set or Resection commands Most of these modes will also not be available if you are using GPS 1482 Survey Methods Menu Temporary No Store This will allow you to take a measurement without storing it Please see the Temporary No Store topic for more information Occupy Point Use this to define an instrument setup Please See Backsight Method on page 161 topic for more information Sideshot This mode allows you to measure a point After the measurement it will allow you to review your measurement data and allow you to make changes to the point id and description before it is stored Please see the Sideshot topic for more information Sideshot Auto Store This mode allows you to measure a poi
397. ous tools that can be used to edit your points Please see the Coordinate Database topic for more information Map Data Layers Use this to import DXF LandXML and georeferenced raster image files into your project and to con trol the visibility of database layers and any files that you may have associated with your project Please see the Map Data Layers topic for more information Surfaces Use this to import DTM surface files into your project view and edit your DTM surfaces and perform volume calculations Please see the Surfaces topic for more information Parcels XML Use this to edit and view your XML parcels that are associated with your project Please see the Par cels XML topic for more information 295 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Point Database Main Menu Data Manager Point Database The point database dialog is used to review edit and manipulate your point data in your project data base The list will display all points currently stored in the database and the data can be sorted by pressing the column headers Point Database gt p Point ID Northing Easting Elevation 2 al A 5523958 627m 312330 376m 393 413m 2 15 5523853 28 m 312321 092m 392 877m i 3 5523853 567m 312320 797m 392 747m 4 AN 5523947 627m 312330 376m 391413m 5 A 223882 649m 312304 231m 394 168m 6 2 5523851 309m 312319 695m 393 413m 7 azn 5523869 731m 312330 376m 393 678m a ii dit Delete Add Find
398. pes 525 Raw File Viewer 214 RB Repeat Backsight 528 RC 2 377 Re activating Figures 103 RE Remote Elevation 529 544 Realtime DTM Surface 311 Reference 151 405 Reference Base Setup 411 Reference Position Modes 413 Reference Receiver 410 Reference Setup 410 Registration 28 Remote Height 179 Repair 28 Repeat Last Shot 184 Repitition 163 Resection 169 Resection Errors 171 Reset RTK Filters 431 Review Project Files 31 RF Repeat Foresight 528 Road Alignment 290 Road Settings 475 Roading 116 473 475 476 483 488 492 498 499 505 510 Roads 475 492 505 510 Roads Manager 116 473 Robotic Instrument Toolbar 63 385 Robotic Total Station 369 Rotate 249 Rotate Translate Scale 297 Rotate Translate Scale Points 249 Rover 406 Rover Measurement Modes 416 Rover Receiver 415 Rover Setup 415 RP Local coordinates of calibration point 534 RPN Calculator 267 RS Resection 529 RTK 418 423 RTS 249 297 341 389 RW5 525 S Satellite List 65 422 Satellite Plot 65 422 425 Save 42 Save as Default Settings 134 Save Coordinate System 338 447 Save Template 335 Scale 249 Scale Factor 134 Scientific Calculator 267 Scripts 434 SD Stakeout Deltas 530 SDR 336 search 63 386 Search 63 386 Search Settings 382 Sections 498 Seed Position 321 Select GPS Profile 399 Select Line Toolbar 90 Select Point Toolbar 71 Send commands 434 Sensitivity Level Bubble 398 Sensor Configure
399. pg 82e 082 039 jpg Add File Remove File File Settings r al lt No Line gt e jz Neat ID lt No Desc gt Data Manager Menu Layer Manager SO ER user Doral 4 J Database DXF Files E Sample dxf Add File Remove File File Settings Close User Data r Manager 5 2 Eat Database BC BD BD OTHER BR OTHER Add File Remove File File Settings FieldGenius uses the layer names specified in the Automap library to control the visibility of points and figures by their description You can control the visibility of the entire database both points and figures by checking or uncheck ing the Database option under the User Data section of the tree If the box is checked then the data base is turned on and all of its layers will be visible if unchecked then the file and all of its layers is turned off and it will not be visible If the box has another smaller square inside it this means that some of its layers are turned on and other layers are turned off 299 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 You can control the visibility of individual layers by expanding Database option under the User Data section of the tree and checking or unchecking the box beside the name of the layer If the box is checked then the layer is turned on and entities on that layer will be visible if unchecked then the layer is turned off and entities on it will not be visible When you close the project the
400. point as a traverse point You would typically use this when the measured point belongs to a traverse You will not see this button when measuring with GPS Cancel Button Press this to cancel the measurement Advanced Button Use this button to add or edit advanced tags to your point You will mainly use this to help you dis tinguish points that are exported when you use the XML export 208 Survey Tools Menu Advanced Settings 38 Date Survey Role User Entered Point y DTM State Determine By Feature y Point Type Null S Geometry Point y Zone 0 Y OK Cancel DTM Attribute Use this to choose the DTM attribute that will be written to the database file Ground is the default value if you don t want the point used in FieldGenius s modeling commands you can set the DTM value to Do not Include If you export an XML file this information will be exported Survey Role Use this to edit the survey role for the point By default points that are measured will have a role of Measured Points with a Measured role type are read only when they re viewed with the store and edit screen If you export an XML file this information will be exported Point Type Use this to enter a point type that will be written to the database file If you export an XML file this information will be exported Geometry Use this to enter a geometry type that will be written to the database file If you export an XML file th
401. portrait screen orientation and utilize a virtual on screen keyboard Note that the function of both versions is essentially the same Portrait Displa SideShot 3 HT 0 000m a Start Ls S EE lt No Line gt Next ID ae Landscape Displa HT 0000 0 000m g s PETE as Main Interface Display Toolbar DARERRRA 3D Day Gm Q The display toolbar located at the top of the map screen is used to zoom pan change 3d per spectives and for displaying information Ka Next Previous These switch to the next or previous set of buttons Observation This opens or closes the Observation Toolbar Many different functions in FieldGenius will display information in this toolbar such as when you select a point on the screen the point s coordinates are displayed in this toolbar Zoom Extents This is a zoom extents which will zoom to the extents of your project Dynamic Zoom This is a dynamic zoom When enabled drag from top to bottom of the screen to zoom out or bottom to top of the screen to zoom in Or when enabled you can also use the arrow keys on your keypad to zoom in and out in the map Zoom Window This is a zoom window When enabled drag on the map screen to define a zoom window Dynamic Pan This is a dynamic pan When enabled you can drag across your map screen to pan around your project Or when enabled you can use the toggle or arrow keys on your keypad to pan around Zoom
402. profile and pressing Connect Note this screen is not available if FieldGenius is running onboard your instrument 434 Settings Menu 23 Instrument Selection Instrument Type Instrument Profile ie E D a iie Sokkia SET 530R3 Total Station Demo C GPS Rover Add Delete Edit C GPS Reference Profiles contain equipment C GPS Demo settings and measurement tolerances C None Connect the data collector to the instrument and switch the power on prior to pressing the Connect button Xm For all future projects you create with FieldGenius when you create a new or open an existing project you will see the Instrument Selection screen with the profiles you have already created It will default to the last Profile you used so if you are using the same instrument just press Connect If you are using different equipment just select the appropriate Instrument Type and Profile or add a new profile if one does not yet exist for it then press Connect Your profiles are stored in the file MicroSurvey FieldGenius Programs MSURVEY INI so once you have configured one data collector you can simply copy this file onto your other data collectors to make the profiles available on them This file should also be backed up for easy recovery Total Station When you select Total Station mode you will be able to Add Delete or Edit a profile to setup para meters for connecting to your conventional a
403. project is in decimal degrees It does not matter if you have spaces between the quadrant designation and the angle You can also separate the degrees minutes and seconds values with a space For example N 60 45 30 E or N60 4530E both mean NE 60 45 30 You can of course also use any of the d dm or dms or g or r see below designators with a bearing entry such as NE45 305dm to mean N 45 30 30 E 48 Getting Started Gons Gradients You can specify that an angle is in Gons Gradients by entering g after the value for example 100g means 100 Gradients equals 90 degrees Radians You can specify that an angle is in Radians by entering r after the value for example 1 57r and means 1 57 Radians approximately 90 degrees Project set to Azimuth Direction Entry Examples User Entered Value Interpreted As Result always matches project units 90 5016 90 degrees 50 minutes 16 90 50 16 NE45 3030 North East quadrant 45 degrees 45 30 30 NE 45 3030 30 minutes 30 seconds N45 3030E N 45 3030 E 45 3030NE 45 3030 NE SE45 3030 South East quadrant 45 degrees 134 29 30 SE 45 3030 30 minutes 30 seconds S45 3030E S 45 3030 E 45 3030SE 45 3030 SE SW45 3030 South West quadrant 45 degrees 225 30 30 SW 45 3030 30 minutes 30 seconds 45 3030W S 45 303 W 49 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 45 3030SW 45 3030 SW 90 5016dm 90 degrees 50 16 minutes 90 50 10 Perro
404. ptions to the AutoMap Library on the fly When you enter a description that isn t in the library you will be prompted with a message asking you if you want to add it to your project s AutoMap Library file 73 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 amp Description Summary Layer X BC Bottom of Curb CURB BOTTOM X BLDG Building BUILDING X CB Catch Basin UTILITY CB xa Curb Inlet UTILITY dl X a Center Line ROAD CENTER T Show descriptions in use only CA Add Edit Delete X Note This prompt can be turned off so FieldGenius always uses the new descriptions without adding them into the AutoMap Library file To do this you need to make sure you have the Prompt New Descriptions toggle turned off in the Options menu Store Point 3 The description TREE is not found in the automap library Add to the project automap file G B If you answer Yes then the description will be added into the project s AutoMap Library file not to the AutoMap Template file If you answer No then the description will be used without adding it into the AutoMap Library If you do not add it to the AutoMap Library then you will not be able to set options such as defining the layer and colour of points and lines with this description 74 Points Lines Descriptions Editing Descriptions in the Library in FieldGenius The AutoMap Library editor allows you to edit properties for each description in the library Pressing th
405. quent points to your plan you will see the Start Point field auto matically advance for you Line Type Specify one of the five available methods to define your next figure segment e Straight this will draw a straight line between the specified Start Point and End Point e Arc CW this will draw a clockwise arc between the specified Start Point and End Point with the specified Radial Point e Arc CCW this will draw a counter clockwise arc between the specified Start Point and End Point with the specified Radial Point e Arc 3Pnt this will draw an arc clockwise or counter clockwise between the specified Start Point and End Point going through the specified intermediate Arc Point any point directly on the arc does not need to be the midpoint e Spline this will draw a curvey line between the specified Start Point and End Point Store Store The Store and Store buttons are disabled for this mode because new points are not being calculated for your project The line or arc segment will be automatically drawn into your project after you specify 111 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 its parameters Undo Press the Undo button to Undo the last segment you computed removing both the point and or the line segment as appropriate from your project You can undo multiple steps Note there is no Redo function Close Press the Close button to exit from the Draw Plan command and you will be returned to the map
406. r instrument supports uploading of angles the Set To Zero option will be available to you If it doesn t support this it will be grayed out You will see a direction value of zero displayed beside the pull down list When you press the Accept button FieldGenius will upload and set your circle plate reading to zero When you Accept the setup this value will be used as the backsight plate reading in the raw file Finishing the Setup Routine Accept Once you ve reviewed your backsight information you can complete it by pressing the Accept button This will write a record to the raw file and exit the setup routine If you specified the direction backsight method you will be prompted to Store the point observed at the backsight Press Yes to store a point for the backsight or No to complete the setup without cre ating a new point at the backsight 157 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Observe Again If you re not satisfied with the results or made a mistake you can re shoot the backsight by using this button Doing so will take you back to the main display where you can take another shot on the back sight Occupy Point Raw Records When you accept your occupy point points will be stored in the database for the setup and backsight if applicable Also the following records will be written to the raw file I SP PN2 N 918 0848 E 1057 3576 EL0 0000 H l__orientation s HI5 000 HR5 000 loc oP1 N 1000 0000 E 1000 0000 EL0 0
407. r measured distances These distances will be used to compute a new point based on the baseline Please see the Line Distance Offset topic for more information Line Perpendicular Point This allows you to measure two points to define a baseline then you can select an existing point which will be used to compute a perpendicular intersection Please see the Line Perpendicular Point topic for more information Trilateration This will allow you to compute new points by observing their distances from two known existing points Please see the Trilateration topic for more information Observe Benchmark Use this to check your current setup elevation or compute a new one based on a known elevation Please see the Measure Benchmark topic for more information Add Invert Use this to open the invert toolbar You will then be able to record invert measurements Please see the Add Invert topic for more information 395 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Vertical Plane Projection This will allow you to compute points on a user defined vertical plane Please see the Vertical Plane Projection topic for more information Point Scanning Use this to activate Point Scanning with your motorized reflectorless instrument Please see the Point Scanning topic for more information Set Angle Instrument Settings toolbar Set Angle You can access this screen by pressing the Set Angle button on the instrument settings toolbar Set Angle Horz Angle
408. r or use the numeric keys on your key board 268 Calculations Menu 0 9 Types numeric data into the command line lt Types a backspace into the command line You can also use the Backspace key on your keyboard Stack Operations Functions are available to help you manipulate data that is currently stored in the stack EDIT Pops data from level 1 of the stack into the command line bumping all other data down one level SWAP Switches positions of the data in levels 1 and 2 of the stack Or you can highlight a level on the stack and pressing the Swap button will move the value to level 1 CLEAR Deletes all data from the stack DROP Deletes the data in level 1 of the stack bumping all other data down one level ENTER Pushes data from the command line into level 1 of the stack bumping all other data up one level You can also use your keyboard s Enter key The Shift Button SHIFT This is used to show the reverse functions of each operation ps son se ral _7 _8 _9 sw E a eos _1 _2 _3 proe 5 User oj e ome _ When the shift key highlighted in yellow it Indicates that the shift key is currently depressed press it again to un shift 269 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 f ons r z e o E sue pres Por pos 1 _2 3 gt oo E Ga o paa a The OK Cancel button OK copies the value in level 1 of the
409. r unit that you will be using Degrees Gons Gradients or Radians All angular val ues written into the raw file will be recorded in the selected format Degrees If you select Degrees then you can also select which format to use either DDD MM SS s for degrees minutes decimal seconds DDD MM m for degrees decimal minutes or DDD d for decimal degrees You can also specify the number of decimal places to use from 0 to 8 Gons Gradients If you select Gons Gradients then you can also specify the number of decimal places to use from O to 8 Radians If you select Radians then you can also specify the number of decimal places to use from 0 to 8 133 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Direction Format Choose the direction format that you will be using North Azimuth South Azimuth or Bearings When entering a direction you can always override this setting by entering the angle with the cardinal quad rant indicated before or after the angle If there is no quadrant specified then the input angle will be interpreted as an Azimuth Scale Factor You can use a scale factor to adjust ground distances to grid distances Distances measured with a total station will be recorded in the raw file with the unscaled true meas ured slope distance This scale factor is applied to the computation of coordinates only Distances entered using the Traverse Intersect tool COGO will be scaled by the scale factor Distances calculated u
410. r your know values 3 You don t have to specify the PC point the function will assume that you re beginning at the end of the last leg 4 APC Tangent direction will automatically be computed based on the previous tangent You can always over ride this value if you need to define a non tangent curve 5 Press OK to save your inputted values Cancel to exit without saving Spiral Element When you select this option your will see the spiral editor This will help you define a spiral segment for your alignment 479 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Spiral Editor Spiral Direction Right Radius Start Infinite Radius End 0 000 Spiral Length 0 000 Spiral Angle Starting Station 105 00 500 Starting Northing 4980 000 Starting Easting 5500 500 Starting Tangent 90 00 00 E Ending Station 105 00 500 v Ya K Define Known Data To solve for this type of element you need to know e Spiral Direction e End Radius e Spiral Length Inthe editor gray fields indicate fields that can not be edited All other non gray fields can be edited by the user Press OK to save your inputted values Cancel to exit without saving Spiral Curve Spiral When you select this option you will see the Spiral Curve Spiral editor 480 Roads Spiral Curve Spiral Editor Curve Direction Right Spiral In Length 0 000 Spiral Out Length 0 000 Curve Radius 0 000 Curve Length 0 000
411. rage northing and easting of your measured constrain points Trans North and East If you move the measured points so that the centroid of your measured points is equal with the origin of the local system The translation north and east is the shift amount that needs to be applied to your measured points to move them into the local system 451 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Rotation This is the rotation amount between your measured and local systems Scale This is the scale difference between your measured and local systems If you turn on Do not calculate scale these values will be equal to 1 0 Trans Height This is the vertical shift that will be applied to the transformation It is computed by averaging the elev ation differences between your point pairs Positive translation heights will be added while negative heights will be subtracted Slope North amp Slope East This is an indication of or much your measured system is inclined in the north and east directions The value that is displayed is the slope of each direction For example if the difference in elevation along the north axis of your measured system is 3 meters and the length of it is 19 meters the slope of the axis will be rise over run or 0 15789 Negative slopes indicate that it is inclined downward from the origin and positive slopes are inclined upwards You should only use vertical slopes if you do not have a geoid model to use for your point s elev ations
412. rance Main Menu Settings Instrument Selection Edit Total Station Profile Tolerance Set tings Use this to set tolerances that are used when you re using the multi set collection function in FieldGenius Horizontal Angle Tolerance sec L Vertical Angle Tolerance sec 30 0 Distance Tolerance 0 010m y xX Cancel 381 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Horizontal Angle Tolerance sec Use this to specify the tolerance for your horizontal angles in seconds When you store your multi set point if the Standard Deviation exceeds this value you will be notified when you store the point Vertical Angle Tolerance sec Use this to specify the tolerance for your vertical angles in seconds When you store your multi set point if the Standard Deviation exceeds this value you will be notified when you store the point Distance Tolerance Use this to specify the tolerance for your measured distances When you store your multi set point if the Standard Deviation exceeds this value you will be notified when you store the point Please refer to the Muti Set topic for more information on how to record a set Search Settings Main Menu Settings Instrument Selection Edit Total Station Profile Search Settings When using a robotic or motorized instrument you can specify search settings for your instrument Search a 12 Search Mode Z Search Window Range Horizontal C 30 00 00 5 Measure Vertical 30 00
413. rance masks that are used by FieldGenius Refer to the Reference Configuration and Rover Configuration topics for more information Reference Base Connection Procedure Main Menu Settings Instrument Selection 2 Choose GPS Reference as the type of instrument 3 If you have not already done so you need to create a profile for your reference receiver If you have a profile already defined select it now and then press Connect 4 You will then be prompted with the Correction Link Settings where you can configure your radio settings Press the Connect button to turn on your radio to prepare to begin broadcasting corrections 5 If your profile is configured properly you will see a message Press the measure button at any time to configure the reference receiver with a position and to enable the transmission of cor rections Select Continue 6 You will now see the map screen On the GPS Toolbar you can review information about receiver sky plot list display current position and review DOP values 7 When you re ready to program a position into the base receiver all you need to do is press the Measure button on the GPS Toolbar There are several different options you can use to pro gram the position and they re described in more detail in the Program Reference Receiver topic 8 After you program the receiver with a position you can disconnect the data collector Select Reference Position Modes Main Menu Measure Modes GNSS
414. rching RC 2 Fast Track If you re using a Topcon instrument you can set the search mode to RC 2 This will force the instru ment to use the RC 2 system for the search PS Next CW This setting will appear if your Leica instrument has the power search system Settings it to this will force the instrument to search in a clockwise direction PS Next CCW This setting will appear if your Leica instrument has the power search system Settings it to this will force the instrument to search in a counter clockwise direction PS Absolute Window This setting will appear if your Leica instrument has the power search system This will force the power search system to do a relative search based on the search window range RC PR If you re using a Sokkia SRX you can set the search mode to RC PR This will force the instrument to use the RC system for the search Search Window Range Use this to define the upper right commer and lower left corner of your search window Pressing the measure button will step you through the procedure and it will calculate the horizontal and vertical 383 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 search range This range will be applied to the instrument s current direction when the user presses the search button Search Window Center Use this to set an absolute center for your search window The search window range parameters will be applied to the search window values that were measured Pressing the mea
415. re Us Perimeter 459 997 O x Determine Area Predetermined FieldGenius can compute predetermined areas using the Hinge or Parallel Methods The Hinge Method allows you to specify a fixed point that the new boundary should hinge from The Parallel Method helps you compute the location of a new boundary using a user entered direction usually parallel to one of the fixed sides 257 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Hinge Method The first thing you need to do when using the hinge method is define the fixed sides of your boundary Once you do this on the determine area screen you can enter the predetermined area amount you want to compute a solution for plus define what point is fixed and is to be used as the hinge point The start and finish points markers are represented using a green and red circle marker You can always press world button on the Display toolbar which will place text labels next to the start and fin ish points Area Calculations Determine rea Hinge Method Parallel Method rea 10000 000000 5q Feet Us y Hinge Point 46 End y Calculate Save Point Define Area ve Xx Close 258 Calculations Menu Xx Close Map FieldGenius will compute the new boundary so that it intersects the boundary segments con nected to the start and finish points that were defined In the example below the original left side of the lot now has two segm
416. re not using the User Point orientation then this does not have any effect Attached User ID Use this to add a value to the point number you re currently staking For example if the point your stak ing is point 8 and this field is set to 1000 In the raw file it will show that you staked point 1008 and will also store the staked position as point 1008 in the project database Turn Instrument Mode If you have a motorized instrument including robotics you can control how FieldGenius turns the instrument during stakeouts If you want FieldGenius to compute the horizontal and vertical angle needed to stake your point use the 3D HA VA option If all you want is the horizontal angle to be turned and the vertical left alone select the 2D HA option 128 Settings Menu Line Mode Use this to control how your navigation distances are computed and displayed when staking a Line In Auto mode FieldGenius will automatically determine if it should display in out or left right offsets to the line Auto mode will display in out distances if the line of sight intersects the line equal or greater than 45 In Out if it is less than 45 then FieldGenius will display Left Right offsets to the line You can force FieldGenius to always display In Out distances to the line by setting it to In Out Use Left Right to always see the Left Right offset to the line If you re staking an arc FieldGenius will always display in out offsets no ma
417. re the colon as a description and everything after the colon will be considered to be a note Standard with Header Same as the Standard format but the first row in the file is ignored Extended l ID Northing Y or Easting X Easting X or Northing Y Elevation Descrip I ltion Note Latitude Longitude Ellipsoidal Height Latitude StdDev Lon Igitude StdDev Height StdDev l This format is different than the standard such that notes are separate from descriptions Also if you collected GPS data the WGS 84 information can also be included and imported along with other information related to the GPS point Extended with Header Same as the Extended format but the first row in the file is ignored More about the Extended Format If you import aFieldGenius extended file format ASCII file FieldGenius will create EP and GS records in the raw file Also the coordinates will be imported and stored in the database Importing this type of file is useful for seeding points when using the OmniStar GPS system or to create a list of geodetic and cartesian points that you can select while programming a GPS base receiver 323 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 100 6523097 874 311564 984 399 387 CONTROL 101 5523168 871 311529 912 401 188 CONTROL 102 5523164 192 311507 476 400 85 CONTROL 49 83067177 119 6202724 49 03129064 119 62079 49 03124955 119 621103 E AAA 103 6523135 07 311511185 399 795 CONTROL
418. re was opened Feature y fee Serial Number Material 123 Height m Transformers Y Lamp Attached Condition xX Cancel As you can see feature files help you collect consistent and accurate notes about a point you meas ured When you store the point a file will be created in the project directory The file will have the same name as the feature and will have a DBF extension In our example the file would be named POWER POLE DBF Each point will be appended to the same database file The DBF database file can be opened with Microsoft Excel Raw File Comment Shortcut Key X At any time you can enter a note that will be recorded to the raw file Simply press the X key on your keyboard device which will open the Enter Comment dialog Enter a comment that you want appen ded to the end of your raw file You are limited to 99 characters 85 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Raw File Note Enter note to store in raw data file This is a comment 25 Xx Cancel If you view your raw file your comments will appear as shown in the following example This is a comment l You can also enter comments into the raw file by using the Raw File Viewer Active Linework FieldGenius has Code Free linework control in the field to eliminate the need to remember line codes To activate linework on the fly while surveying you simply choose the description you want and start taking shots For MicroSurvey CAD or in
419. reas 0 id dd nce A dated AAA Ai 255 Enclosed Area Calculation oooccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccncnncnncnnnnnnnnnnns 256 17 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Determine Area Predetermined 1 2 2 2 222222 e eee cece cece cece cece cece ce ccc cece ec eeeeeeeees 257 Triangle Calculator 2 0 ccc cece cece cece ccc ccc cecceccececcceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeenenees 264 Coordinate Geodetic Calculator 00 000 e cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 265 Calculator coat reo ee arch at Sch es ech edo eo es test dl odo La 267 AAA ita sie Nee hah ection dak te a ped eras alae etna elke Rady cela tee 268 Gonverting Units 2 2 202868 od aes cas ce eeu indie dt 3 oe a aaaea bates es bbeyobine dec att 270 Basic Mathematical Operations 22 22 2 c cece cece cece ccce eee eccccccccceeeeeees 271 Advanced Mathematical Operations 022 222 cece cece ccceeececeecccceeeeeee 271 Staking Men vice da ei add Wee oan dee sik 274 Staking Ments222 2s cence foes o Sate ls e de eo oie 274 Stake PONS caanoe aaaea rss talco lloret aida ise 275 EIN 278 Stak Line ATC noia cad id A e II ve aN 283 Stake Lie innato hant a e e e Stor Ee NN A ce Since thes S328 IO 283 LAA e e ed ee 285 StakKe SUTACO tora a rr ade 286 E RS ence 288 stake Alignment do 290 CutSh et REpons scsi acotada a e Do eo oats Ses la glas Rete cd eis 291 stakeElevation v2 2225 eceseiis IAS Be eae es te Sasa ls eek 293 Data EEN 295 Data Manager Menu
420. receiver The true height is simply computed by the use of Pythagoras theorem TrueHeight VerticalOffset sqrt MeasuredHeight HorizontalOffset You can change the true or measured antenna height at any time on the Store Point screen when stor ing your GPS shots GPS Auto Recording The Auto Recording settings are used when collecting GPS data in a Kinematic mode The receiver can automatically log a point every X distance or Y seconds The user simply selects what option they prefer to use for logging Kinematic data and start the survey Keep in mind while collecting data at higher velocities that FieldGenius receives position updates from the GPS at a maximum rate of once per second Auto Recording SO Interval Mode Distance Distance Interval 5 000m Time Interval Y a Once configured Auto Recording is activated on the Rover Measurement Mode screen after pressing the Measure button Once activated Auto Recording is deactivated by pressing the Measure button again Overview Reference Receiver Before you can start your GPS survey there are a few things you need to confirm and setup 410 Profile and Coordinate System Files e You will need to determine and select the correct coordinate system and optional geoid model to use for your GPS survey work e Create a profile for your reference base and rover receivers Profiles contain receiver settings such as baud rates and tole
421. recorded for the point Saved If the foresight measurement hasn t been saved you will see a red X measurements that have been saved will have a green checkmark Since your backsight readings are always toa known point or an assumed direction you will see N A as there is nothing to save Measuring the Backsight If you want to shoot your backsight then do the following Select the first row which is the backsight record by tapping on it Press the Measure button to start the measurement process On the map screen confirm that you have selected the correct target height When you re ready to record the measurement press the Measure button on the instrument toolbar FwoON ZS 165 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 5 You will automatically see the multiset point list where you will see your measurement which will be indicated in the F1 or F2 field Reviewing the Backsight measurements If you press the Edit Set button you will see a summary of the two measurements MultiSet Observations 3 o BS Point 2 Fi 1 F2 1 Std Dev HA 0 00 05 0 VA 0 00 02 5 SD 0 002m Average HA 345 00 05 VA 89959 58 SD 19 985m Use Face dHA dVA dsD 7 1 0 00 05 0 00 02 0 002m E 2 0 00 05 0 00 02 0 002m i Close The summary will display the standard deviations for the averaged measurements as well as the com puted average measurement In the list you will see the delta difference between the measured meas urement and
422. refixed with the word Edited Undo Changes Undo will ignore your changes and return them to the original values Insert LS Record The most common modification to the raw file is to insert a LS record The LS record will be inserted above the highlighted row and a comment will be written as well to indicate that it was inserted Insert Note Record This will allow you to enter a comment The comment will be inserted above the current line you have highlighted in the grid Append Note Record This will allow you to enter a comment The comment will be appended to the end of the raw file Reprocess File After you have made your changes you can re coordinate the raw file so the changes are displayed on the screen and saved in the project database When you re coordinate the raw file it will process the whole file from beginning to end This means if you have changed the coordinate information for a point there is a chance that it will be changed back to its original value if it was measured and recorded in the raw file Show Map This will change the raw file viewer to a split screen display with a map view of your scene on half of the screen When certain raw file records are selected you will be shown the reference and backsight points and the selected measurement record will be highlighted on the map 216 Survey Tools Menu Raw File Editor SS5 OP115 FP346 4R357 30180 A 55 0P115 FP347 4R 332
423. rements to the foresight The last item will always be aSS or TR record This is the averaged direction plate reading to the foresight point Resection Main Menu Survey Methods Resection FieldGenius has a multi point resection routine that can be used to compute a point for a setup It will use a least squares solution to determine the coordinates from the measurements you make to your points The goal at the end of a resection is to compute the unknown coordinates of the instrument s current location based on measurements made to other known points in the project e Asaminimum you need to have two points to resect to e Youcan shoot the resection point in the direct or reverse face e You can take multiple shots to the same resection point e There is no limit to the amount of points you can resect to e When you store your resection point an occupy record will be created for you automatically Specify the Resection Reference Points First Shot When you start the command you will see the reference point toolbar Specify your instrument height and select a reference point to measure After you select a point you can press the Measure button to record a shot 169 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Select Point A 20m Please select point and take measurement Observed Point ES Close Instrument Height 0 000m Second Shot To record the second shot simply select it from the map screen then press the Measure
424. rent and last legs you inverse Perimeter Distance and Area If you close back to the first point a perimeter distance and enclosed area will also be computed Radial Inverse You can compute radial inverses from a point Function Start the inverse command and make sure the Radial Inverse and Line options are selected 2 Enter or choose the 1st point to calculate from and press your enter key to continue on to the next point 3 Now you can choose or enter the 2nd point and press your Enter button to compute an answer 4 The inverse information will be displayed in the results toolbar 5 You can now continue computing radial inverses The 2nd point field will remain activated allowing you to continue entering point numbers Radial Arc You can compute the curve information for an arc defined by three points PC start Radius Point and PT End Function Start the inverse command and make sure the Rad Arc button is turned on 2 Enter or choose the starting point for the arc in the Start field and press your enter key to con tinue on to the next point 3 Enter or choose the radius point in the Arc field and press your enter key to continue on to the next point 4 Enter or choose the end point for the arc in the End field and press your enter key to compute an answer 5 The inverse information will be displayed in the results toolbar 244 Calculations Menu Three Point Arc You can compute the cur
425. rget You will also see this display after you copy an existing target Leica uses a different prism offset method than other manufacturers and you should familiarized yourself with how they are computed See the Leica Constant section below for more information Edit Target s0 Target Name Leica Round Prism Target Type Prism Prism Icon User Defined Leica Constant mm 0 0mm Absolute Constant mm 34 4mm Y Save X Cancel Target Name Use this field to either edit or enter a new and unique name for the target you are editing Target Type There are two target types available Prism is to be used when you are selecting a target that has a known offset or prism constant This can be a round prism 360 mini etc RL stands for reflectorless and you should select this target type if you are using an instrument that is reflectorless capable and you do not wish to or can not use a designated reflector Prism Icon When creating Leica instrument targets the prism icon must be User Entered and that s why you are not permitted to edit the target s icon This is a Leica instrument requirement and therefore can not be changed Leica Constant mm Leica Geosystems uses a different way of calculating prism constants than other manufacturers 353 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Leica defines their additive constant for their standard round reflector GPR1 as 0 0mm All entered or selected additive constant values are dif
426. ries points having been established with a total station 461 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 DAAA i sm 2500000m e 3 A lt No Line gt Next ID Faj 209 lt No Desc gt AO PDOP 2 2 ie s Standard Measure KT RTK Fixed Figure 13 FieldGenius Project with Points in the Local System The GPS reference station occupies a national geodetic control point and has been configured with the corresponding published coordinates The GPS rover station is used to measure points 102 104 106 and 108 to establish coordinates in the plan system and these new points are respectively named 202 204 206 and 208 Table 3 gt Tea ZOOM BOX y e i A 204 PISA a IRTA A GX PDOP A 2 2 We s Standard Measure 8500m lt No Line gt T RTK Fixed lt No Dese gt Figure 14 FieldGenius Project with Points in the Plan System 462 Local System Conventional Points 101 10820 603 3060 696 383 133 ee a A Pros _3736304 8810273 383289 7105 7227118 9939 654 382 980 206 35165905353 319816369 mo 11539300 9323628 381785 T Table 3 Coordinate Listing Now that coordinates have been established in both the plan system and local system the Trans formation Setup is started from the Point menu of FieldGenius Transformation Settings can be accessed from the Main Menu Survey Tools GPS Local Transformation Figure 15 shows the Constrain page
427. rk Shot function a RE record will be recorded in the raw file RE records will be accompanied by a SP record The FE value will be defined by the Benchmark Method selected by the user as being either an exist ing point or a user entered value Please refer to the Measure Benchmark topic for more information OP Occupied point FE Foresight elevation ZE Zenith angle SD Slope distance always Remote elev RE OP1 FE10 000 ZE90 00000 SD50 0000 Remote elev l RS Resection When you use the resection function a RS record will be recorded for each observation made to your control points Please refer to the Resection topic for more information PN Point number CR Circular reading ZE Zenith or VA CE SD Slope distance or HD RS PN103 CR2 42220 ZE90 00000 SD25 0980 When you complete a resection the control points you used will be written as SP records and after the RS records you will see one final SP for the computed resection point An example of a resection is shown below __Resection SP PN103 N 3135 070 1 SP PN100 N 3097 874 1 1511 185 EL399 795 1 11 300 HRO 000 1564 984 EL399 387 m B m B RS PN103 CR2 42220 ZE90 00000 SD25 0980 RS PN100 CR102 26120 ZE90 00000 SD56 3050 SP PN999 N 3110 000 E 1510 000 EL398 291 529 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 SD Stakeout Deltas When you complete a stakeout by pressi
428. rmation Keyboard Shortcuts Main Menu Settings Keyboard Shortcuts You can now assign command shortcuts to keys on your data collector This has been added to sup port our new keyboard layout on the newer Trackers but it also works with any device that has a keyboard The defaults for the shortcut keys are based on the MicroSurvey Tracker custom keyboard layout but you can assign any key you want to the list of available commands The shortcut definitions are stored in the msurvey ini file so they re portable to your other data collectors if you ve defined a cus tom _ Keyboard Shortcuts 1309 Set Shortcut Set User Key Shortcut Key Button Reset All Measure Point Sideshot Auto Store I Sideshot J Temporary Observation K Distance Offset E Horizontal Angle Offset A Disable All Shortcuts Y OK x Cancel Another great feature is that the EDM mode for the current instrument you have selected can have shortcut keys assigned to them For example if you refer to the list above you would press the 1 key to set your EDM mode on the instrument to IR Standard 144 Settings Menu The shortcut keys will only function from the map screen Set Shortcut Key Use this to assign a command to a key on your keyboard Highlight the command you want to modify press the Set Shortcut Key button then press the button on your keyboard to map the command to it You new key map will automatically be
429. rmation Shapefile Export Use this to export an ESRI shapefile Please see the Shapefile Export topic for more information Import Template You can import a template that was previously exported using this command Please see the tem plate import command for more information Export Template You can export figures and points using this command Please see the Export Template topic for more information Import User Coordinate Systems You can import a template that was previously exported using this command Please see the tem plate import command for more information Export User Coordinate Systems You can export figures and points using this command Please see the Export Template topic for more information For importing DXF LandXML and raster image files please see the Map Data Layers topic i in the Data Manager menu For importing DTM surface files please see the Surfaces topic in the Data Manager 319 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 IMPORT EXPORT MENU Import Export Menu Main Menu Import Export Use this menu to display different options for importing data into or exporting data out of your project Export Y O 2 ASCII Coordinate File Export Template ed ASCH a File E Fieldbook File Export o DXF File Import E SDR File Export DXF File Export E Shapefile Export tal LandXML Import a plas Jota Go Back ASCII Coordinate File Import Use this to import an ASCII file into your project Ple
430. rom the map screen You can select any of the following e Figures containing lines and or arcs but not curvey splines e DXF lines arcs and or polylines but not splines splined polylines or fitted polylines Selection Mode Figure Segment Pick this mode to select an individual line or arc segment from a complex figure by selecting the desired segment from the map screen You can select any of the following e aline or arc segment from a Figure but not a curvey segment e line or arc segments from a DXF polyline cannot be selected Selection Mode Define Points Pick this mode to select points in your project to define a line or arc You can define the following line types e Straight Line select a Start Point and End Point e Arc CW select a Start of Curve Point Radial Point and End of Curve Point e Arc CCW select a Start of Curve Point Radial Point and End of Curve Point e Arc 3Pnt select a Start of Curve Point Point on Curve and End of Curve Point Offset Point Mode Use this mode to calculate a point measured Down and Out from the selected line 247 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 30 Mode Offset Pot v Start Stn 0 00 00 Select Line Station 0 75 00 Switch Direction Offset Y save X close O Left 8 Right After selecting a line using any of the above Selection Modes pick this mode and enter the Sta tion Offset distances and the offset direction left or right looking down t
431. rsection from the point to the reference line The point can either be shot or you can select an exist ing point from your scene database or map 193 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 M Shot or Existing Point N New Point An example of where you could use this is to pick up the corner of a building whose corner can not be scene from the total station You could take two shots on one wall to define the reference line and then take another shot on the intersecting wall A perpendicular intersection will be computed which in this case would be the corner of the building Measure Points When you start the command you will see an empty list Highlight the row that you would like to make a measurement for and simply press the Measure but ton to begin the measuring process If you need to redo a measurement simply highlight it in the list and press the measure button Notes 1 The northing and easting values for the new point will be computed by computing a perpendicular intersection between the reference line and a point defined by the user 2 The z value for the new point will be computed using the projected elevation along the reference line to the point where a perpendicular intersection occurs 194 Survey Methods Menu Line Perpendicular Point m 123 Highlight a point and press the measure button to record an observation The perpendicular point can either be observed or selected from the points dat
432. rument has guide lights you will be able to set their intensity modes here Please refer to your owners manual for more information on the different intensities Prism Offsets Foresight Prism Offset Use this if you want FieldGenius to control your prism offsets for your foresight shots The values must be entered in millimeters A positive value will be added to the distance that is measured whereas a negative value will be subtracted All measurements other than the measurements to your backsight reference measurement are con sidered to be a foresight shot Note If you specify a prism offset here you need to make sure the prism offsets are set to zero on your instrument Otherwise a double offset could be applied to your measurement which will produce incorrect answers When you first configure FieldGenius with your instrument you should take the time to confirm that the distances being measured are correct You can do this by first measuring a precise distance between your current occupy point and a point that you can easily reference and take a measurement to When you compare the distance measured by FieldGenius to your manually measured distance they should agree very closely Backsight Prism Offset Use this if you want FieldGenius to control your backsight prism offsets The values must be entered in millimeters A positive value will be added to the distance that is measured whereas a negative value will be subtracted U
433. rvations and terrestrial obser vations it does become important to apply a transformation especially in scale due to the fact that there is a difference in distance between positions measured on the ellipsoid and the ter rain surface As seen in Figure 1 coordinates derived from GPS are always referenced to the surface of the ellipsoid as per the application of map projections When the two points on the ellipsoid are projected upwards along the ellipsoid normals onto the earth s surface they diverge and a terrestrial distance observed between the points will be greater than the com puted distance of the same two points on the ellipsoid The effects of this zenith divergence becomes more evident as distance between the two points becomes greater and for larger ter rain heights above the ellipsoidal surface 454 gt Earth s Surface A epeok Surface Figure 1 Divergence of Ellipsoid Normals Transformation Concepts In order for the transformation parameters to be resolved a sufficient number of control points are required with coordinates in both the plan system and local system The determination of a four para meter transformation two translations scale and rotation on a horizontal plane requires at minimum two physical points with each having two sets of corresponding coordinates as illustrated in Figure 2 Points A1 and B1 exist in what is termed the local system and are transformed into the plan system points o
434. rve Angle or Observe Distance button Note You can increase the size of the text shown in the grid by setting the Text Size option in the Options screen Note The Quick Measure Modes option in the Options screen will affect what happens when you press the Observe buttons when you are using the offset routines If Quick Measure Modes is on a measurement will automatically be taken If it is off the Observe button doesn t actually trigger your total station to take a measurement it simply takes you to the map screen where you can press the measure button once you are ready to take the measurement 177 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 A on q em See ae t _ al A ln kk Caw er ae T q Angle Center This will record the total station s horizontal angle When measuring the angle you should point the total station towards the center of the new point that will be created This would be measurement A in the diagram shown above Note You do not need to sight a prism to record the angle simply sight the new point and press the Observe Angle button Distance This will record a distance measured to a prism which is located at the side of the object You should try to locate the prism so that it is perpendicular to the center of the object and the line of sight from the total station This is measurement B in the diagram shown above Note The target height is important on this shot because the new point will have the same elev
435. rvey Transfer program Synchronize with MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD To import your projects into your MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD desktop product please refer to the FieldGenius SyncWizard topic in the MicroSurvey CAD orinCAD help file 522 Connecting to Computer FieldGenius 2004 2005 projects can only be imported directly into MicroSurvey CAD 2004 or later or inCAD 2004 or later FieldGenius 2006 and newer projects with an unencrypted raw file raw can only be imported into MicroSurvey CAD 2005 SP1 2 or later or inCAD 2006 or later FieldGenius 2007 and newer projects with an encrypted raw file rae can only be imported into MicroSurvey CAD 2008 or newer 523 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 524 RAW File Reference RAW FILE REFERENCE Raw File Record Types To increase our compatibility with other data collectors and desktop systems FieldGenius uses the TDS RW5 raw file format The raw file contains virtually all the measurements made in the field and is a complete history of what was recorded For more information on the raw data record format or for additional record types please review the Raw Data Record Specification document from Tripod Data Systems Inc It is available for down load at www tdsway com Conventional Raw Data Records Note or Comment Records A comment in the raw file will be depicted with a record type of two dashes Text found after the dash is the comment Comments
436. s Math operators are now supported again You are now permitted to use math operators in distance fields 3 5 2 1 2 3 5 divided by 2 plus 1 2 2 95 feet 2 950 metres 1 2 2 10 Distance from point 1 to 2 15 00 feet 15 000 metres assume 1 2 divided by 2 plus 10 10 8 feet plus 3 feet 11 00 3 353m 1 2 3 1m 1 foot plus 2 feet 3 inches 6 53 1 991m plus 1 metre Note If your project is set to feet and you enter 2 3 2 space 3 this will be interpretted as 2 feet 3 inches This occurs if your project is set to either decimal or fractional feet You can also use the RPN Calculator to further manipulate distance values For example if you want to find the distance halfway between points 1 and 2 enter 1 2 into the distance field to recall that dis tance Then double tap on that extended edit field to pull that recalled distance into the calculator where you can divide the distance by 2 or perform any other calculations with it Then press the OK button in the calculator to copy the result back into the field you started from 47 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Direction Entry amp Recall Direction Entry You can customize FieldGenius to work with the direction input of your choice See the Units amp Scale Settings topic for details To enter an angle using the format selected in your units settings simply enter the angle For example 120 4530 means 120 45 30 if your project is in Degrees Minutes Seconds
437. s NOTE Your serial number is valid for only one activation Step 2 Using the Key generated by the online registration system enter the key values into FieldGenius When done press the Apply Key You will see the words Activation Key Valid and it will list the mod ules that were registered The Run Demo Mode button will also change to say Continue More Help or Purchase HELP For online help click here To purchase FieldGenius 7 please call MicroSurvey at 1 800 668 3312 Available Modules There are several modules available for use on a data collector and they re as follows e Standard Real time Automated Linework COGO Calculations Traverse Closure and Adjust ments ASCII DXF Import Export MicroSurvey Transfer and more e Total Station Adds non robotic total station control e GNSS adds RTK GNSS GPS and Glonass control Coordinate Calculator Helmerts Trans formations e Advanced adds Surface Modeling Roading LandXML GIS Attribute Collection Pre determined Area Calculations e Robotic adds Robotic Total Station control Run Demo Mode To run FieldGenius in demo mode press the Run Demo Mode button In Demo mode FieldGenius is limited to storing only 30 points each time it is run but otherwise it is fully functional 29 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Retrieve Lost Key Codes passwords The key code that was generated for a serial number can be accessed from the online registration page www m
438. s Traverse Intersection FieldGenius includes a powerful COGO function that allows you to compute new points The toolbar allows you to specify the solution type point numbers directions and distances When you enter enough information to compute a solution it will be draw visually on the screen Pressing the Store Pnt button will store the point that you just solved Input You can type in the point ID or select a point by tapping on the map screen The direction and distance fields support the direction and distance recall feature To learn more about this refer to these topics in the Calculating With FieldGenius section If you are measuring distances with a Leica Disto just double tap in the distance field and choose the Disto Observation option Disto Distances If you have a Leica Disto you can send distances back to the distance edit fields Simply double tap the distance field and select Disto Observation which will then set FieldGenius in a waiting mode 239 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Take the measurement with the Disto press the Bluetooth icon on the Disto and the measured dis tance will be accepted by FieldGenius Calculator You can open our calculator by double tapping the Direction or Distance fields then pressing Cal culator on the Keypad screen Information You can review the results of your calculation by pressing the i information button For intersections with multiple solutions the result
439. s button to access the Target List The Target List consists of default GeoMax instrument tar gets and User Defined targets Here you can create copy edit and delete targets 363 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Cancel Press this button to discard any changed made to the Backsight dialog and returns you to the MapView Target Manager Leica Instruments MapView Target Manager The Target Manager is a place where you can manage your EDM electronic distance measurement targets You can create edit copy and delete targets Leica Geosystems uses a different method for determining prism offsets as they have a value called a Leica Constant See the help on the New or Edit Target screens for information on how to calculate a Leica Constant The Target Manager is divided into 2 sections Backsight and Foresight Target Manager Backsight Use the Backsight screen to define your backsight target choose a measure mode and enter a back sight target height Tap on the Backsight tab at the top of the screen to access the Backsight section Target Manager AZ a mu Target Leica Round Prism Target Height 0 00 lt a EDM Mode IR Standard Leica Constant 0 0mm CA OK Target List Default Settings X Cancel Target Use this field to select a backsight target from the Target List Target Height Enter the height of your target here 364 Press the Set Default Height button to assign the default Target height
440. s installed and find the programs folder In there if you run the splash program it will automatically fix all problems and re install your short cuts for you The splash program will be an executable file and it will include the word splash in it For example on the Archer the file is called SplashPPC exe Registration amp Demo Mode When you start FieldGenius for the first time you will see the registration screen which will list the machine ID This ID is unique for each device that FieldGenius is installed on FieldGenius gol MicroSurvey Software Inc Copyright 2001 2012 MicroSurvey Software Version 6 0 0 2 2012 03 07 Device ID F008 5B1F ECAD 4DF6 Key Foc A103 518F Apply Key 35ED E4EA 9EDF 93F6 Licensed Modules Standard Advanced Total Station Robotic GNSS Y Continue xX Cancel Activation To activate FieldGenius you need access to the Internet With your purchase you should have received a GUID Serial Number that you will need along with the Device ID generated by FieldGenius 28 Getting Started A typical serial number will look something like the following D9C83164 FB0E 4713 B457 CE593EFEA296 A typical device id will look something like the following F008 F38C 4421 B482 Step 1 From a computer that has access to the internet please visit the following web page www microsurvey com register Follow the instructions on the FieldGenius registration page
441. s of both solutions will be displayed Solution Methods Method Traverse The traverse method allows you to define a direction and distance that you want to traverse After you solve your point and store it it will become the new start point method Traverse z Ol Pnt 5 Direction 0 00 00 0 Distance 1 230m Method Direction Distance This will compute two solutions based on the values you input To store the solution simply press the Store Pnt button which will ask you what solution to use in this case either A or B 240 Calculations Menu i fs method Direction Distance pe Ol Pnt 1 1 Direction 90 00 00 0 Pnt 2 2 Distance 2 000m Method Direction Direction Use this to compute a new point by computing an intersection using directions After you enter your known values a solution will be displayed on the screen To store the solution simply press the Store Pnt button a Nx method Direction Direction y Ol y Store Prt Pnt 1 6 Direction 135 00 00 0 Pnt 2 5 Direction 45 00 00 0 chose Method Distance Distance Use this to compute a new point by computing an intersection using distances This will compute two solutions based on the values you input To store the solution simply press the Store Pnt button which will ask you what solution to use in this case either A or B 241 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Method Distan
442. s that can be used to compute the unknown val ues Enter the Known Data Once you define the known data format you will see grayed out fields which indicate they can t be edited White areas indicate fields that can be edited and these fields will match what you defined in the first step You always have to define the direction for the curve either right or left Enter your know values 3 If you want to store points you need to define the PC point You can enter the point id or use the point chooser 4 You also need to define the PC Tangent direction so FieldGenius knows the orientation of the curve 254 Calculations Menu Store Points Once you have computed your curve data you have the option of storing the PT and Center points When you press either button you will see the store and edit screen Area Calculator Main Menu Calculations Area Calculator The area calculator is used to compute areas as well as predetermined areas When defining the boundary area you can select points lines and arcs from the map or type the point numbers in manually Lines and points from DXF files are also valid and can be selected using the Define Area toolbar Defining an Area Define Area Toolbar Points Select Pp Rad pd Remove Xx re Arc Arc Previous Select Point The define area toolbar is used to help you define an area If the first button is set to Select Point the toolbar is in
443. s to determine a vertical bias slope in X and slope in Y To determine a vertical bias at least one point pair must be con strained and for all three parameters to be determined at least three point pairs must be constrained The use of the vertical transformation function should be restricted to cases where a geoid model is not available or there is a know problem with an existing geoid model Local Transformation Example A For this example the simple case of translating the GPS derived coordinates to the desired plan coordinates will be used The example will demonstrate how FieldGenius can be used to determine and apply the transformation parameters A project is created consisting of four points in the plan sys tem as denoted in Figure 4 and the corresponding coordinate listing shown in Table 1 AA y AA A eS PDOP 2 3 ty s Standard Measure m 2000000m Pa ols A lt No Line gt T FE Next ID DGPS IE 04 lt No Desc gt v Figure 4 FieldGenius Project with Points in the Plan System Point Northing Easting 1000 000 m 1000 000 m 1000 000 m 1200 000 m 1200 000 m 1200 000 m 1200 000 m 1000 000 m Table 1 Plan System Points 457 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 The GPS reference station will need to occupy a point within the project area which can be an existing plan system point 101 104 or a new point set up randomly somewhere in the project area For either setup of the reference stati
444. saved to the msurvey ini file Disable Shortcut Ke Use this to disable individual shortcuts Set User Button Fase this to set the currently selected command to the User Button found on the main interface The command currently set with the user button is indicated in the Function list with the same icon Reset All This resets all the shortcuts to the factory defaults and all customized settings will be lost Disable All Shortcuts This is a toggle that controls if the shortcut keys are disabled or enabled Default Shortcut Keys muse oo 145 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Traverse Intersect Staion Offset YJ Calculator F Automapy sD Figuelist ooo Toggle GPS Coordinates G Store Points w BlpointDatabse PO Project Information Main Menu Settings Project Information 146 Settings Menu Use this option to record job information about your project Tap OK to save your information to the raw file or Cancel to exit without saving your changes Each entry field can accept up to 64 characters This screen can also be accessed by pressing the Modify Project Information button located on the Project Review screen 147 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 SURVEY METHODS MENU Survey Methods Menu ssi Survey Methods Menu Main Menu Survey Methods These are commands built into FieldGenius that will help you measure and map your points The desired method must be selected before y
445. secure RAM by default TDS Ranger Windows Mobile 2003SE FieldGenius installs to volatile RAM by default which is not secure you should install the program to Disk TDS Ranger Windows Mobile 5 FieldGenius installs to secure RAM by default Getting Started e TDS Recon Pocket PC FieldGenius installs to volatile RAM by default which is not secure you should install the program to Built in Storage e TDS Recon Windows Mobile 5 6 FieldGenius installs to secure RAM by default e Thales Mobile Mapper CE CX FieldGenius installs to RAM by default which is not secure you should install the program to a storage card e Topcon FC 120 FC 200 FieldGenius should be installed to Storage Card which is secure e Topcon FC 250 FieldGenius installs to secure RAM by default e Topcon FC 2200 FC 2500 FieldGenius installs to SystemCF by default which is secure e Topcon GPT 9000 onboard FieldGenius installs to Internal Disk by default which is secure e Trimble TSC2 FieldGenius installs to secure RAM by default e Trimble GeoxT FieldGenius should be installed to Disk which is secure Call MicroSurvey at 1 800 668 3312 or check our web site at www microsurvey com if your device is not listed here Installing FieldGenius If you purchased a new data collector with FieldGenius 7 from MicroSurvey then FieldGenius comes pre loaded on it If you are installing FieldGenius yourself onto an existing data collector the f
446. sed to recreate plans from a paper hard copy You can use this to either calculate new points or to connect existing points that are already in your project You must have at least one point in your project before you can start to define the starting position for your plan If a point does not yet exist for example if this is the first command you run in a new pro ject you will be prompted to store a new point before you can proceed 107 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Line Mode Use the Line draw mode to add straight line segments to your figure y El e A ES A 1 8 0 Start Pnt 1 Distance 10 0 Draw Line Direction 0 00 00 Store Store Ed Close 90 00 00 E Start Point Specify the start point for the new segment For starting a new plan this should be set to an existing point in your project typically a corner that you will begin drawing the plan from As you continue adding subsequent points segments to your plan you will see the Start Point field automatically advance for you Distance Specify the length of the line segment you wish to draw Direction Specify the direction Azimuth or Bearing of the line segment you wish to draw The easiest way to do this is to use the right left arrow buttons which will increment decrement the direction value by the amount shown in the pulldown list below the arrows You can select a common angle from the choices in the list 90 45 or 30 degrees
447. see by displaying notices or links to notices to Licensee generally on the Site Governing Law Forum Attorney s Fees Injunctive Relief The terms of this Agree ment shall be construed and governed exclusively by the laws of the province of British Columbia excluding the application of its conflict of law provisions and rules Any dis pute controversy or claim between the parties arising out of or relating to this Agree ment or a breach of this Agreement shall be settled pursuant to the terms of this Section 11 c by arbitration before three neutral arbitrators selected from a panel of per sons having experience with and knowledge of the computer business provided at least one of which arbitrators shall be an attorney and administered by the Arbitrators Association of British Columbia in accordance with its Commercial Arbitration Rules in Kelowna British Columbia Any provisional or equitable remedy which would be avail able from a court of law shall be available from the arbitrators to the parties Judgment upon the award of the arbitrators may be enforced in any court having jurisdiction thereof The parties hereby consent to the non exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the Province of British Columbia for any action i to compel arbitration ii to enforce the award of the arbitrators or iii prior to the appointment and confirmation of the arbit rators for temporary interim or provisional equitable remedies and to service of pr
448. seline Select your two baseline points from which you will be observing the distances to the new points Add Point Use this to add a new unknown point to solve for When you press this you will be prompted for the new point number and description and whether it is on the left or right side of the baseline 196 Survey Methods Menu Add Trilateration Point Point ID 201 Description EVID Baseline Side Left Right xX Cancel This saves the selected New Point into your project Switch Side This toggles the selected New Point to the Left or Right side of the baseline Save Point Map View This takes you to a map view showing your baseline the distance measured from each point and the calculated position of the new point Close Map If desired you can press the World View button on the Display toolbar to hide unnecessary data 197 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Measure from Point 1 Press this to record the distance from Point 1 of your baseline to the selected New Point Measure from Point 2 Press this to record the distance from Point 2 of your baseline to the selected New Point Observe Benchmark Main Menu Survey Methods Observe Benchmark Use this to check your current setup elevation or use it to establish an elevation for your setup When you start the command you will be taken to the main interface and you will note that the measure mode will be set to Benchmark If you need
449. should familiarized yourself with how they are computed See the GeoMax Constant section below for more information Edit Target 88 Target Name gt Target Type Prism Prism Icon User Defined GeoMax Constant mm 0 0mm Y Save X Cancel Target Name Use this field to either edit or enter a new and unique name for the target you are editing Target Type There are two target types available to select Prism is to be used when you are selecting a target that has a known offset This can be a round prism 360 mini etc RL stands for reflectorless and you should select this target type if you are using an instrument that is reflectorless capable and you do not wish to use a designated reflector Prism Icon When creating GeoMax instrument targets the prism icon must be User Entered and that s why you are not permitted to edit the target s icon This is a GeoMax instrument requirement and therefore can not be changed GeoMax Constant mm GeoMax defines their additive constant for their standard round reflector ZPR 100 as 0 0mm All entered or selected additive constant values are differences to the 0 0mm based in the GeoMax TPS prism system Prism constants are always defined in millimetres The additive constant for non GeoMax prisms are often given in the true zero prism system Use the following formula to convert the published prism constant into a GeoMax constant to be entered into GeoMax Constant field True zero co
450. sing the Inverse tool or recalled using the pt pt format will be scaled by the inverse of this scale factor The result will be the inversed grid distance times the inverse of the scale factor so that the ground distance is returned This Scale Factor does not affect any GPS measurements Please see the GPS Local Trans formation topic for information on using a GPS Scale Factor Curvature and Refraction Correction When selected the correction is applied to the computation of drawing coordinates only Raw data will not be altered in any way When available from your instrument we recommend the use of that option and leave this setting toggled OFF in FieldGenius Note Be careful to not have this setting toggled ON in both your instrument AND FieldGenius Save As Default Use this to permanently write the current settings to the msurvey ini file When you create a new pro ject it will use these settings The default settings can also be set in the Options screen Instrument Selection Main Menu Settings Instrument Selection The Instrument Selection screen allows you to choose the type of equipment you will be connecting to FieldGenius An Instrument Profile can be created for each different instrument you will be working with to make changing between different hardware a breeze Once you have setup a profile for each different instrument you will be using switching between them is a simple matter of selecting the appropriate
451. sition by pressing the Store Pnt button This will then display the store edit screen Finally you will see the backsight results screen 172 Backsight Observations HA 345 00 00 VA 90 00 00 SD 19 969m HD 19 969m HI 0 000m HT 0 000m Backsight Errors Calc Horz Dist 19 979m Error 0 010m Calc Elev 100 000m Error 0 000m f Plate Setting Do Not Modify 345 00 00 CA Accept Observe Again X Cancel Survey Methods Menu The backsight point that will be stored will be based on which point you selected in the Information screen shown above which by default is the first reference point you observed You do not need to take another measurement to the backsight as it has the original measurement you made At this point you can do the following e Confirm the instrument and target heights e Decide if you want to set the plate reading on the instrument to zero or an azimuth e Decide if you would like to sight it again and take another measurement If you re satisfied with the backsight you can store it by pressing the Accept button If you re setting a plate reading on the instrument you need to make sure it is pointing at the backsight point prior to pressing the Accept button For example if you want to set zero on the backsight point you need to make sure that the instrument is pointing at the backsight point Raw File Record After your store you point several records will be written to the raw file
452. so Target Name Johns Prism Target Type Prism Prism Icon Circular Prism Constant mm 0 0mm CA Save X Cancel Target Name Use this field to either edit or enter a new name for the target you are editing Target Type There are two target types available to select Prism is to be used when you are selecting a target that has a known offset This can be a round prism 360 mini etc RL stands for reflectorless and you should select this target type if you are using an instrument that is reflectorless capable and you do not wish to use a designated reflector Prism Icon Use this field to select an icon for your new target Prism Constant mm This defines the relation of the distance measurement to the mechanical reference point of the reflector Your prism will have a published offset Save Press this button to store your new changes to the Settings xml file and return you to the Target List screen Cancel Press this buton to cancel creating a new target You will be returned to the Target List screen 347 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Default Settings The Default Settings screen is where you can define the default target heights for prism targets RL reflectorless targets and a temporary height The temporary height value is used for taking a one time measurement using the height value entered in this field After the measurement is completed the system will revert back to using the current target heig
453. splay seven options Standard Measurement Offset Measurement Auto Record Points Check Point Trilateration Add Invert NDAN Local Transformation Point O Staking Roads Manager Data Manager Import Export About Exit O Xx PDOP 1 9 Hes Standard Measure 417 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Measurement Modes Standard Measurement 14 Offset Measurement KT Local Transformation Point K I Check Point IA Trilateration mE Add Invert e AT auto Record Points a Rover Measurement When you have connected to your rover and you press the measure button on the GPS Toolbar you will see the GPS Measurement Screen FekiGenus GNSS Measurement TI Solution Autonomous Satellites 10 PDOP 2 10 Real Time Status Accepted Horizontal StdDev 9 407m Vertical StdDev 21 029m Post Process Status Waiting to start Total Time 0 sec CA Store Position ES Cancel The measurement process works like this 418 Once the satellites have been filtered out based on your tolerance settings FieldGenius will only begin collecting measurement data if all your tolerances are met During the measurement process you might see that certain tolerances are not being satisfied this is normal FieldGenius will continue monitoring the measurement data and will accept measurements that pass the mask criteria Once the tolerances have been met the position status will change to an Accepted position
454. ss the measure button Notes 1 You can shoot the points in any order you like FieldGenius will determine what direction to go in to compute an intersection 2 The northing and easting values for the new point will be computed using the intersection of the line and the angle that was read 3 The z value for the new point will be computed using the projected elevation along the reference line to the point where an intersection is computed 187 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Line Angle Offset e 23 Q Highlight a point and press the measure button to record an observation Point O Horizontal Angle Vertical Angle 75 5 1 37 0 Lime Pnt 1 358932 26 0 75 26 50 0 75 26 52 0 19940 52 0 24 22 49 0 Line Pnt 2 Angle Offset lt Store Pnt xX Close Note You can increase the size of the text shown in the grid by setting the Text Size option in the Options screen Store the Point Once you ve made your measurements that will be used to compute the intersection you can press the Store Point button This will store a point in the map screen store a point in the database as well as record information to the raw file lw Raw File Everything about the intersection is stored in the raw file l Line Angle Offset HI1 340 HRO 000 AR280 55530 ZE81 12550 SD6 8330 Pnt 1 of Line HI1 340 HRO 000 AR277 37420 ZE80 47010 SD6 5020 Pnt 2 of Line HI1 340 HRO 00
455. stack back into the either the keypad or the numeric entry field which was double tapped to launch the calculator and closes the calculator Cancel closes the calculator without copying the data anywhere All dat data will remain on the Stack and will be available the next time the calculator is re started On Exiting from FieldGenius all data on the stack is written out to a file called CalcStack bin and will be automatically re loaded when FieldGenius is re started Converting Units METER FEET FTUS Assigns a linear unit to the data in the Command Line and places it on the Stack If the Command Line is empty then the unit is applied to the data currently in Level 1 of the Stack DEG RAD GRAD Assigns an angular unit to the data in the Command Line and places it on the Stack If the Command Line is empty then the unit is applied to the data currently in Level 1 of the Stack You do not need to press enter before pressing a unit button it will automatically move whatever data is in the Command Line into Level 1 of the Stack Example determine the metric equivalent of 15 feet 1 5 FEET METER 1 4 572_m 270 Calculations Menu Example determine the gradient equivalent of 45 degrees 4 5 DEG GRAD 1 50_grad Basic Mathematical Operations 1 1 x 1 Performs a mathematical operation on the data in Level 1 and Level 2 of the Stack or on Level 1 and the Command Line
456. strument set up it will be used in the calculation Control Points Table You can click Add button to select backsight points A minimum of 2 points are required for cal culation You can use the second column to select a desired backsight point unchecked backsight points will be used to improve the accuracy of the selected one 159 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Multiple Backsight Results Multiple Backsight Results 8 Instrument Occupy Point 1 Instrument Height 0 0 Point Use Azimuth Offset Offset Residual 2 a 359 21 23 F2T 2 a Ohcene Y 3 0 06 03 0 17 19 Again a a E 0 08 37 0 19 53 S Azimuth Offset 359 48 45 Rms 0 21 56 NI B After taking measurements for each control points entered Multiple Backsight results screen will show up to display calculated results and allow you to refine Azimuth Offset base on Offset Residual values Control Points Table Point column shows the Point ID for each control points measured Use column allows you to toggle if the selected control point will be used in the calculation or not Azimuth Offset column shows individual azimuth offset value for each control point Offset Residual column shows individual offset residual value this value can be used to access the accuracy of each control point HA Observed column shows the measured horizontal angle HD Observed column shows the measured
457. sure button will step you through the procedure and it will calculate the horizontal and vertical search range Auto search for prism If this is checked then if your instrument has lost its lock on the prism FieldGenius will automatically initiate a search for the prism when the measure button is pressed You will see the word Search on the lock button at the top of the robotic instrument toolbar while a search is in progress No Communication When trying to communicate with your instrument you will see sometimes see a No communication with instrument Check settings cables and power error message if FieldGenius can t make a con nection with your instrument Usually this happens when your communication parameters are not the same on the instrument and in FieldGenius You need to check these settings again to make sure they re correct This can also happen if you have a bad cable If you re using a robotic instrument you might have setup your radios incorrectly Instrument Toolbar When you use FieldGenius in either manual or total station mode you will see the instrument toolbar beside the map area SideShot This toolbar allows you to control your instrument settings EDM modes meas urement modes and target heights HT 0 000rn ds RL Fine a Auto Center This toggles the auto center feature on or off If turned on whenever you take a y Sideshot HT 0 000m KY Total Station Reference measurement
458. t each will do the same thing The entire spline will be deleted If asegment or arc is deleted from the middle of a figure the figure will be broken into two pieces Each new figure will be assigned a new group number Closed or ended fig ures will be re activated and added to the Active Lines list You can also delete a figure by selecting it in the active lines list then pressing the Delete Figure but ton gu e Switch Active New Close Delete State Figure Figure Description Pnts Closed E ASPH 3 E ASPH 3 No No Draw Option Defaults To setup draw option defaults you need to own a copy of MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD From within MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD you can use the Automap editor to set default draw settings for each Description in the MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD AutoMap Library When this library is copied to your collector selecting a Description will choose the correct FieldGenius Draw option for Active Linework in FieldGenius 105 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Lines Choose the following in your desktop Automap library editor to set the draw default for FieldGenius to Lines AutoMAP Line Work V Connect Points 2D Connection C 3D Connection Lines Palylines Width In FieldGenius when the description is selected the line toggle will be automatically turned on As shown below the line toggle has been automatically turned on when the E ASPH description was selected from
459. t Review screen this is where you can specify which Raw File Automap Library Tem plate File and Feature List File to use whether you want your raw file to be encrypted and or appended 37 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 New Project Files NewProj 238 Generate New Name Active Raw File NewProj raw C Encrypted Copy Existing Project Automap NewProj_automap csv m Use Template survey csv Feature File VA Continue Cancel Press OK on the New Project screen You will then see the Instrument Selection screen where you are prompted to select the instrument that you want to connect to Let s set it to Total Station Demo and press Connect to continue Note you will not see this screen if FieldGenius is running onboard your instrument Instrument Selection 8 Instrument Type Instrument Profile Total Station Sample El Total Station Demo GNSS Rover Add Delete Edit Profiles contain equipment settings and measurement tolerances GNSS Reference c GNSS Demo c None Always Auto Reconnect 9 Connect Close If you selected Total Station or Total Station Demo you will then see a message asking Would you like to create a new point now Press Yes if you would like to which will open the Store Edit Points screen The default coordinates that are displayed are retrieved from the msurvey ini file found 38 Getting Started in the programs dir
460. t an EDM mode that corresponds to your target type Use Temp Height Press this button to activate the Temporary Height function button is active in the above image To enable the temporary height be used you must press the Use Temp Height button Once activated the following measurement will use this temporary height but it will be a one time measurement and then the system will immediately revert back to the height defined in the Target Height field This is handy if you need to take a quick shot using a different height such as when meauring an invert Press the Set Default Height button aii to assign the default Temporary height to this Target Height field The default height is defined in the Default Settings screen Prism Constant This field will display whatever prism offset that you entered for the selected target OK This records the settings you have just made closes the Target Manager and returns you to the MapView Target List Press this button to access the Target List Here you can create copy edit and delete targets Default Settings Press this button to access the Default Settings screen This is where you define the default target heights Cancel Press this button to discard any changed made to the Backsight dialog and returns you to the MapView 343 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Target List MapView Target Manager The Target List is where you can create edit copy and delete targets Th
461. t any XML file Please see the Import LandXML File topic for more inform ation Note you must first unload the currently loaded XML file before loading a different one 302 Data Manager Menu Remove File Highlight the XML file that you want to remove from your project then press the Remove File button If a file is not highlighted you will be reminded that a file must first be selected from the tree This will turn off all components of the selected file in your FieldGenius project and disassociate the XML file It does not delete the XML file File Settings The File Settings button does not apply to LandXML files Image Files Layer Manager St User Data Database 2 DXF Files Westbank DXF 32 LXML Files 2 2 MES 82e 082 029 jpg O 82e 082 030 jpg 82e 082 039 jpg O 82e 082 040 jpg Add File Remove File File Settings You can load multiple georeferenced JPG or TIFF images into your FieldGenius project and control the visibility of each of them independently from the others You can control the visibility of your images by checking or unchecking the box beside the name of the image file under the Image Files section of the tree If the box is checked then the image is turned on and it will be visible if unchecked then the image is turned off and it will not be visible When you close the project the visibility and opacity status of each image file will be saved so that the next time the project is
462. t field with this default height Important Note You must be using a reflectorless measure mode to populate this field using the Default Height button in the Target Manager screen and have it use the default reflectorless height Temporary Height The temporary height fucntion works as a one time measurement using the height entered into this field After the measurement has completed the target height will revert back to the height that had been defined in the Target Height field This is very handy when you want to take a quick one time measurement such as for when measuring an invert OK Pressing this button will save your changes in this dialog and return you to the Target Manager Cancel Pressing this button will ignore your changes in this dialog and return you to the Target Manager 355 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Note If you are wondering where the Set Instrument Prism Constant to Zero check box is this is now done automatically when using Leica or GeoMax instruments New GeoMax Instrument Targets MapView Target Manager Target List New Use this option to create a new target for your GeoMax instrument Here you can provide your new tar get with a unique name define the target type and provide the GeoMax prism constant for your new target GeoMax uses a different prism offset method than other manufacturers and you should famil iarized yourself with how they are computed See the GeoMax Constant section below for
463. t in your project Please see the Check Shot topic for more information Check Backsight Use this to compare your backsight to your previously measured values Please see the Check Back sight topic for more information Horizontal Angle Offset This will start the angle offset routine Please see the Horizontal Angle Offset topic for more inform ation Vertical Angle Offset This will allow you to compute the height of an object Please see the Vertical Angle Offset topic for more information 394 Survey Methods Menu Distance Offset This will start the distance offset routine Please see the Distance Offset topic for more information Manual Distance This will record a HA and VA for a shot but the user can manually enter the distance Please see the Manual Distance topic for more information Manual Entry This will allow you to manually enter in a shot including HA VA and SD Please see the Manual Entry topic for more information Two Line Intersection This allows you to measure two baselines and FieldGenius will compute the intersection point Please see the Two Line Intersection topic for more information Line Angle Offset This allows you to measure two points to define a baseline measure an angle and FieldGenius will compute the intersection point Please see the Line Angle Offset topic for more information Line Distance Offset This allows you to measure two points to define a baseline then manually ente
464. t relationship is created by this Agree ment Entire Agreement This Agreement represents the entire agreement between the parties relating to its subject matter and supersedes all prior representations dis cussions negotiations and agreements All changes modifications additions or dele tions shall be effective immediately upon notice thereof which may be given by means including but not limited to posting on the Site or by electronic or conventional mail or by any other means by which Licensee may obtain notice thereof Use of the Product and or Software after such notice constitutes acceptance of such changes modi fications or additions This Agreement may be amended at any time by mutual agree ment of the parties Technical Support MicroSurvey Software Technical Support is available to help you get the most out of your MicroSur vey program The following information explains how to prepare for your call so that your inquiry can be answered promptly and accurately Please prepare yourself before you call for Technical Support Take a few minutes before you place your call to check the printed documentation and the online help files to see if the answer is already at your disposal Our Web site on the Internet can also save time Please check it for assistance if you can Please have the following information available if reques ted Hardware model version of the program and your Technical Support Number Please make sure tha
465. t you have all the steps you completed prior to your problem and can explain them to the technical support representative We may ask that you forward a copy of your data to us if we cannot find the problem immediately MicroSurvey offers a 90 day complimentary support period to all of our registered users starting the date of purchase Introductory support is available weekdays between 8 00 am and 5 00 pm Pacific Time excluding holidays Yearly Support For clients who have had their original 90 day complimentary support period expire and feel that they will need on going support over the next year we have a Yearly Support Contact option available This gives you the ability to contact us for technical support as much as you require and you pay a flat fee once a year This option is not to be used in place of training but is to assist you on the occa sions when you really need it The charge for the Yearly Support Contract is to be billed and paid for prior to the support commencing This rate is subject to change call for current rates Electronic Support MicroSurvey maintains and provides at no charge our Internet Web site at the following address www microsurvey com This web site has sections on frequently asked questions Technical Notes Technical Spe cifications and as required free updates and program fixes along with a lot of other helpful inform ation Training MicroSurvey Software Inc can provide training to you in yo
466. ta Layers button Press the Add File button on the Layer Manager Using the browse window find the DXF file you would like to import and press the Open File but ton 4 Use the Layer Manager to turn on or off any layers you don t want to view 5 Press Close and return to the map view 6 Press the zoom extents button to see your entire DXF file For more information on the layer manager please visit the Layer Manager topic imponan Notes Your CAD desktop system likely has a super fast processor and 1GB or more of RAM but most current Windows CE devices run at 206Mhz and have 32 or maybe 64MB of RAM For this reason you will not be able to manipulate a 5MB DXF file with the same speed as your desktop system so minimize the size of the DXF files for most efficient operation TEXT is the biggest performance reducer in your DXF files For best performance minimize the amount of text in the DXF files or turn off layers containing text when not needed 327 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 DXF File Export Main Menu Import Export DXF File Export Use this to export your current FieldGenius drawing as a DXF file This allows for easy import of line work and nodes into most cad or graphic systems Y Export Points M PointIDs PNTID V Descriptions PNTDESC MV Notes PNT_NOTE V Elevations PNTELEY Text Height 0 200000 V Export Lines Export Contours y Export Xx Cancel Function 1 Se
467. ta collector will be connected to Port Specify the port on your data collector usually COM1 that you will connect a cable between your receiver and this port Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Specify the communication paramaters for the serial connection If you re unsure of what baud rate your receiver is set to you might want to set the baud rate to Auto Detect This will force FieldGenius to check for communication using all the baud rate settings and if successful it will set this baud rate in the profile Bluetooth Connection Port On many data collectors you can select Bluetooth as your communication port If you select the Bluetooth port the traditional serial communication options Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity will be replaced with a Bluetooth Search function 403 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Model and Communication 30 Make Leica Model GS15 z Status Not Connected Port Bluetooth Bluetooth Search Device 651502868 y Connect X Close Please note that not all bluetooth enabled devices will list Bluetooth as a Port option In some cases you must configure and use a virtual COM port through Windows CE s internal Bluetooth Settings for example COM6 Bluetooth Search If you set the port to Bluetooth a Bluetooth Search button will appear Press the search button to find the device you want to communicate wirelessly with All devices within range will be listed
468. te Averaged Geodetic Position Use this to measure and average an Autonomous Geodetic position Reference Position E Average Geodetic Position Latitude N49950 17 05539 Longitude W119 36 36 22135 Ellipsoidal Height 1311 43 Modify Antenna Height Averaging 2 position epochs over 0 0 minutes CA Set Position Reset Average i Cancel It is up to you to determine how many observations or the duration of time you want to wait before accepting the averaged position At any time you can restart the process by pressing the Reset Aver age button If you press Set Position your receiver will be programmed with the new position and you will have the option of storing a point s position in the database 414 Local Transform to Point Use this to compute a one point transformation so your GPS derived measurements can be ref erenced into a local system Reference Position amp Average Geodetic Position Local Transformation Point Latitude Point ID N49 50 17 00798 1 Longitude Northing W119 36 36 20466 100 00 Ellipsoidal Height Easting 1325 21 100 00 Elevation Modify Antenna Height 100 00 Averaging 19 position epochs over 0 3 minutes CA Set Position Reset Average X Cancel When this option is used FieldGenius starts receiving data and computes an averaged Autonomous position for the base receiver The current position how many epochs it has received and the total elapsed tim
469. te system trans formation If a datum other than none is selected then the user will be able to enter the following parameters o o o o o o Delta X m Delta Y m Delta Z m X Rotation Y Rotation Z Rotation Scale PPM YS _ SS Projection Parameters The user can select one of nineteen projections o o 142 Lambert Conformal Conic One Standard Parallels Lambert Conformal Conic Two Standard Parallels Transverse Mercator or Gauss Kruger Universal Transverse Mercator Albers Equal Area Conic Rectified Skew Orthomorphic Azimuth at Projection Center Mercator Cylindrical Projection with Standard Parallel Mercator Cylindrical Projection with Scale Reduction Lambert Azimuthal Equal Area Lambert Azimuthal Equidistant Miller Cylindrical Oblique Sterographic Polar Sterographic Sinusoidal Projection Optionally Interrupted Equidistant Cylindrical Settings Menu o Cassini o Robinson Cylindrical o Bonne Pseidoconical o Krovac Oblique Conformal Conic Czechoslovokia Typical projection parameters for most cases are o Scale Factor o Central Meridian o Origin Latitude o Origin Longitude o False Northing o False Easting Ok Button This will save the user defined parameters to the CS MAP coordinate system database files coord sys datum and ellipsoid Cancel Button This will cancel the current operation and nothing will be saved Automatic Backup Whenever yo
470. template so it can be staked in the field FieldGenius can not calculate surperel evations you need to know what delta z or slope the zone should be transitioning for your superelevation section To do this we will be adding slope modifiers to Zone 1 L and Zone 1 R 495 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 AAA m 0000 gt ee fp e a ae Labels A to F show the stations where we will be adding modifiers to modify the template so the road transitions from normal crown to full superelevation and back Note In this example the super elevation is exaggerated for ease of viewing Slope Modifier First you need to highlight the zone that you want to add modifiers to Then select the Advanced Zone Edit command from the commands button This will open the zone modifier screen for the zone In our example we ll be modifying zone 3 on the left side of the tem plate To add slope modifiers press the Slopes button From here you can press the Add button to add modifiers for the zone The following table shows the information that would have been inputted 496 Roads Start Station Start Slope Start Delta Z End Station End Slope End Delta Z Start Station Start Slope Start Delta Z End Station End Slope End Delta Z 0 67 080 1000 1000 13 3 1 60 1078 54 13 3 1 60 1078 54 26 7 3 20 1157 08 13 3 1 60 1157 08 26 7 320 1235 62 123562 13 3 _ 160 1300 1235 62 o 0 6 7 080 1000
471. tered for the selected target OK This records the settings you have just made closes the Target Manager and returns you to the MapView Target List Press this button to access the Target List Here you can create copy edit and delete targets Default Settings Press this button to access the Default Settings screen This is where you define the default target heights Cancel Press this button to discard any changed made to the Backsight dialog and returns you to the MapView 392 Survey Methods Menu SURVEY METHODS MENU Survey Methods Menu Main Menu Survey Methods These are commands built into FieldGenius that will help you measure and map your points The desired method must be selected before you begin a measurement For a faster way to get to this screen you can also press the measure mode button which is located on the instrument toolbar HT 2 000m IR Std O Select Measure Mode Fo A Temporary No Store a MEN Occupy Point A ep Sideshot re Sideshot Auto Store FD Multi Sel ai g ulti Set AE Resection KT Check Point EY Check Backsight B Horizontal Angle Offset a CR Vertical Angle Offset I Use the vertical scroll bar along the side to access additional measurement modes if they cannot all fit on screen at the same time Note Several of these modes will not be available until you have setup an occupy point and meas ured a backsight vi
472. the Store and Edit screen From here you can review the description and store it as either a SS or TR measurement Note After you store your point you will not be able to add anymore observations Auto Turn Sets If you have a motorized instrument you will be able to have FieldGenius plunge your scope and turn back to the foresight or backsight for you Simply highlight the measurement you want to record an observation for and select the Auto Turn option so the checkbox is checked Now when you press the Measure button the instrument will automatically plunge and turn back to your foresight point for you You can then press the measure button on the instrument toolbar to record the measurement When you re using the Auto Turn option FieldGenius will first check to see how many Face 1 and Face 2 observations you have It will automatically keep these numbers equal to one another For example if you have 1 Face1 measurement and 2 Face2 measurements FieldGenius will auto matically sight the foresight using Face 1 Furthermore if you re instrument is equipped with auto target recognition you can use this feature in combination with the auto turn for greater productivity Multiset Measure Modes At any time during the collection of your observations you can choose to shoot an angle amp distance or angles only measurement You can control this by pressing the measurement mode button on the instrument toolbar If you re measurin
473. the corrections from the reference station have been discontinued by denot ing No Link Please refer to the GPS Measurement topic for more information If you are using a conventional non robotic total station please see the Instrument Toolbar topic If you are using a robotic total station please see the Robotic Instrument Toolbar topic Map Select Toolbar When you tap on an empty spot in the map view the selected point will be highlighted with a blue dot and the Map Select toolbar will appear along the bottom of the screen showing the coordinate of the selected point 10m Location N 112 975m E 120 161m Distance 92 142m Dir 278 34 38 US Store Pnt Note this toolbar functionality can be enabled or disabled via the Map Position Select check box in the Options screen 66 Main Interface Measure Distance When this is toggled on subsequent taps will cause the blue dot to move to the new location a second blue dot will appear at the previous location and a dashed line will follow the entire path of the selected points The total distance and the direction of the last segment will be displayed To reset the measured distance toggle this mode off then back on again Turn to Point If you are using a motorized total station and have occupied a point in the project this will cause your instrument to tum to the selected point as indicated by the blue dot in the map Store Point This will open the Store Point
474. the list LS A Curvy Lines Choose the following to set the draw default for FieldGenius to Curvy Lines AutoMAP Line Work V Connect Points 2D Connection C 3D Connection Lines Palylines 0 Width In FieldGenius when the description is selected the curvey toggle will be automatically turned on As shown below the curvy toggle has been automatically turned on when the E ASPH description was selected from the list LIA 106 Points Lines Descriptions None Choose the following to set the draw default for FieldGenius to None AutoMAP Line Work T Connect Points f 2D Connection 3D Connector C Line J Heli fo Width As shown below when the HUB description was selected all line connectivity toggles are turned off f S A The 2D Connection and 3D Connection settings do not affect FieldGenius we only make use of these settings as defaults in MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD All FieldGenius figures are 3D With FieldGenius data imported to MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD there is no need to process Automap connections as FieldGenius figures are drawn auto matically For more details on the AutoMap Library see your MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD Help System Drawing Tool Main Menu Survey Tools Drawing Tool Line Toolbar Pencil button Point Toolbar Pencil button This tool allows you to quickly draw a plan such as a pad or a building footprint into your project and is typically u
475. this by writing to the raw file that the instrument prism offset is unknown FieldGenius Prism 30mm Instrument Prism Unknown l When this happens you will usually want to confirm what offset are currently configured on your instru ment in regards to prism offsets Special Notes When using instruments that don t support uploading of prism constants be sure not to double up your prism offsets by applying it in the instrument and FieldGenius at the same time Since prism offsets are so important on the measurement progress meter you will see what offset is being applied to your measurement OK Pressing this button will save your changes in this dialog and return you to the Target Manager Cancel Pressing this button will ignore your changes in this dialog and return you to the Target Manager 349 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Target List Leica MapView Target Manager Target List The Target List is where user defined and default Leica targets are kept The Target List is where you can create edit copy and delete targets The Leica instruments Target List comes with 9 default Leica targets You can not edit or delete a default Leica target but you can copy a default target and edit the copy All targets are saved in the Settings xml file and is located in the Programs folder Target List Name Type Icon Leica Constant Absolute Const Leica Round Pri MI are a AATE Leica 360 Prism Prism 360 23
476. this to compute points that are located at computed intersections and offsets This is essentially a bearing bearing intersection but you can specify offsets Please see the Offset Intersection topic for more information Station Offset Use this to compute points at pre defined stations and offsets You can also use this to display the station and offset of existing points Please see the Station Offset topic for more information 238 Calculations Menu Rotate Translate Scale Use this to compute coordinate shifts based on rotation translation and scale parameters Please see the RTS topic for more information Curve Calculator Use this to open acurve calculator You define the values that you know enter them and then the remaining unknowns will be computed Once you compute these values you have the option of stor ing the PT and Center points Please see the Curve Calculator topic for more information Area Calculator Use this to compute areas using points or lines in your project You can also use this to compute pre determined areas Please see the Area Calculator topic for more information Triangle Calculator Use this to compute a triangle solution using known angles or distances Please refer to the Triangle Calculator topic for more information Scientific Calculator Use this to display the RPN calculator Please see the Calculator topic for more information Traverse Intersection Main Menu Calculation
477. thods Sideshot If you like reviewing your shots prior to being stored in the database and raw file then this is the mode you should use When you press the measure button on the instrument toolbar after the shot is meas ured you will see the store point screen prior to storing the point When you set this mode you will see the word Sideshot on the measurement mode button When you take a shot using the measure button you will see the Store Edit Point screen You can also confirm or change the Target Height used for this shot Store Point 120 Point ID 6 Fai Poe Line Spline Arc Description List i gt Review Northing 86 60 Measurement Easting 50 00 Elevation 0 00 Advanced Note Tap to enter note Prism Hgt 0 00 J Storess 4 Store TR 198 Cancel After reviewing the information you have three choices to make Store SS Press this to store the coordinate in the database and create a sideshot record SS in the raw file 55 0P350 FP3 AR0 00000 ZE94 50090 S5D13 2700 lt No Desc gt l Store TR Press this to store the coordinate in the database and create a traverse record TR in the raw file TR OP350 FP4 AR0 00000 ZE94 50080 SD13 2700 lt No Desc gt l 162 Survey Methods Menu Traverse records are needed if you want to compute a traverse closure If your last shot from a setup is recorded as a traverse record when you use the occupy point routine it will automatically advance
478. tion Load Pattern Press this button to load a previously saved pattern file Edit Pattern Press this button to edit the currently loaded pattem or to create a new pattern if you have not loaded one Please see below for more information on the Pattern Editor Insert Pattern Press this button to apply the currently pattern to the selected insertion point New points will be stored in your project at the coordinates as previewed by the green pattern points All inserted points will be created with the description Pattern and with the same elevation as the selected insertion point 78 Points Lines Descriptions To insert a pattern onto multiple points simply change the insertion point and insert the pattern onto each point one at a time as desired Pattern Editor When you press Edit Pattern on the Pattern Toolbar you will see the Pattern Editor screen OASIS Select Insert Pnt r 2 2m Insert Pot 1 Direction NO 00 00 E Load Pattern Edit Pattern Insert Pattern X Delete Point Load Pattern Save Pattern XR Close Enter the X and Y offset values for your pattern as desired As you enter the points they will be pre viewed in the grid which will automatically zoom to the extents of your pattern Please see the Distance Entry amp Recall topic for options on entering the offset values in various units The 0 0 origin will always be located at the selected Insertion Point so a
479. tion Active Column If the figure is active you will see the work YES To make a figure not active press the Switch Active State button 92 Points Lines Descriptions Description Column This is the name of your figure which will usually match the description of the first point that the figure is connected to Points Column This is the total number of points that the figure is connected to Closed Column If you closed the figure you will see the word Yes Show Active Figures When this is selected default setting all of your active figures will be listed You can select a figure that you would like to work on simply by selecting it in the list and pressing the OK button If this is turned off then all the figures in the project will be displayed Switch Active State Use this to change the status of a figure to finished When this is done it will no longer be displayed in the figure list of the Show Active Figures button is on Once a figure is switched to a not active state nothing can be added to it Figures that are not active can be made active again simply by selecting the figure you want to use and pressing the Switch State button New Figure Use this to create a new figure in the figure list Close Figure Use this to close a figure so it will close back to the starting point Delete Figure Use this to delete a figure that you have highlighted in the list You can delete figures that are flagged as ac
480. tive or not active Review the delete figures topic for more info on deleting Using Active Figures Active Linework Options We have 3 Draw Options for Active Linework selected from buttons that appear beside the Descrip tion and Active Lines drop down lists 93 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Draw Lines button Connect points with straight lines Draw Curvy Lines button Connect Points with a best fit curvy line Draw 3 Point Arc button Fit an arc through three measured points Start the first Line in a Project To start the first line in a new project choose the desired point Description from the Description List and select the desired draw option before you start taking measurements The Active Lines list will display lt Start line gt as shown At this point the next point measured will be the first point of a new Active Line using the E ASPH Description Use the measure button to measure the starting point for the new line Ca MA x 13 10 gr 11 Start E Ss a lt Start Line gt ENE 94 Points Lines Descriptions 5 HT 0 000m E ASPH 2 Measure EJASPH 3 H Auto E ASPH 4 e A PN lt No Line gt Next ID 8 sil After the shot to the first point for the new line is complete the line will be added to the Active Lines list identified by the current point description and an automatically assigned group number E ASPH 3 The group number is three because this
481. to cancel the operation you can do it by pressing the measure mode button and choose the Cancel Benchmark button When you re ready to record the shot press the Measure button on the instrument toolbar You will then see the benchmark shot screen Benchmark Method Elevation C Point BM Elevation 100 000m HI 1 523m HT 1 500m New Occupy Elevation 99 977m Old Occupy Elevation 100 000m Elevation Difference 0 023m y Set Elevation Xx Cancel Calculating an Elevation Benchmark Method Elevation Use this option if you want to manually enter the know elevation for the point you re basing your shot on The elevation you enter will be used to calculate the elevation of the current setup The difference in the current and calculated elevations will be displayed towards the bottom of the screen You can enter in your know elevation in the BM Elevation field 198 Survey Methods Menu Benchmark Method Point Use this option if you want to base the calculated elevation on an existing point in your project The elevation of the point you choose will be used to calculate the elevation of the current setup The dif ference in the current and calculated elevations will be displayed towards the bottom of the screen You can choose your point by using the point chooser button HI This is where you would enter your height of instrument Note this value will be used to compute the new instrument elevation
482. to give an example Procedure The program assumes the following 1 The coordinates of the control system are considered fixed and error free 2 Equal weighting is applied to all measured coordinates used to calculate the solution A minimum of two points common in both the Plan and Local systems are needed to be able to solve the four unknown transformation parameters This gives what is known as a unique solution only one possible set of transformation parameters can be solved for When more than two points are com mon in each system redundancy exists and a Least Squares method is used to determine the optimum best fit transformation parameters We ll work through an example as we explain the function of the Helmerts Transformation routine Inthe example below you ll see a plan of 2 simple lots with lot corner point numbers 1 through 6 These will be our Control fixed points You will also see our Measured ties Local points for all six corners and 4 points on a simple building Points 101 and 105 are traverse points points 102 104 and 106 108 are corner ties and 109 112 represent ties to the building 232 Survey Tools Menu 90 voog ove og 104 ol The objective here is to transform our local field survey into the plan system and at the same time check to see if the corner posts tied are located where the previous surveyors plan says they are Program Function The first dialog box you will se
483. to re compute the sideshots Point Patterns Main Menu Survey Tools Point Pattern This routine allows you to create or edit point patterns and apply them to existing points in your pro ject This is useful for creating drill holes for bolt patterns pillar columns etc The pattern data files are completely interchangeable between both FieldGenius 7 and MicroSurvey CAD orinCAD so any patterns created in one program can be edited or used in the other Pattern Toolbar When you start the Point Pattern command you will see the Pattern Toolbar along the bottom of your Select Insert Pnt A 5 e ES e 2m Insert Pnt 1 Direction NO 00 00 E Load Pattern Edit Pattern Insert Pattern xX 225 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Insert Pnt Specify the point ID for an existing point in your project either by typing in its point ID or by tapping on a point in the map screen to select it when this field has focus The selected point will be highlighted in the map view with a large red point and the current pattern will be previewed with smaller green points Direction Use this to specify a direction value for your pattern The default direction of NO 00 00 E will orient the pattern exactly as it was defined To orient your pattern along any arbitrary line between two existing points enter those two points using the pt pt format like 1 2 and the direction between those two points will be automatically cal culate
484. toolbar On the toolbar press the Line Spline but ton which will convert the line to a curvy line If the line is already a curvy line it will convert it to straight tangents between the points Note that any 3 point arcs or straight line segments will be lost when you use this function Complex Figure Figures that contain straight segments arcs and spline segments are said to be a complex figure Closing Figures Pe To make a closed figure with an Active Line select the Close Current Line button on the line toolbar This will draw a line from the last point to the first point shot in the fig ure The Line will be removed from the Active Lines list as it is now considered com plete Line SDPLINE 1 9 to 10 ms ea m m Te S 2 110 sn dl 9 ar You will see that the figure now is closed back to the original start point 99 5 N4 6 a 10 t 102 Points Lines Descriptions In the active lines list if you tum off the Show Active Figures you will see that the 3DPLINE figure is flagged as Active NO and Closed YES 123 Show Active Switch Active New Close Delete es State Figure Figure Figure Line Active Description Pms Closes 1 N Xm Alternatively you can also close a figure in the Figure List screen by using the Close Figure button End complete a Figure Fa To mark a line as complete or finished use the End Current Line button on the line toolbar
485. tter what line mode set ting FieldGenius is set to This option has no effect if you have selected the Line Orientation Reference option Robotic Staking If you re using a robotic instrument and this is turned on if you stake a point FieldGenius will go into a dynamic staking mode Using this mode will not force the instrument to turn to the stake point It will go into a tracking mode and will dynamically tell you how far you re away from the stake point Cut and Fill Slopes Use this to specify your cut and fill slopes when you re slope staking The fill slope value will be used when the hinge point is higher than the calculated catch point and this will occur in areas that require a fill The cut slope will be used when the hinge point falls below the calculated catch point This will occur in areas that require a cut A Cut of 2 1 means you would have a cut of 1 unit for every 2 units traveled horizontally DTM Staking Name Use this to select a surface that will be used to compute a new z value for the design point When you select a surface you need to have the Stake to DTM toggle checked Once this is turned on the elevation for any point you stake will be computed using this surface In other words if you re doing point staking and the point has a design elevation it will be ignored The stake point s N amp E will be used to intersect a point on the surface and that elevation will be used to stake the point Fade Staked
486. u add or edit a user defined coordinate system FieldGenius will automatically create and save your parameters to a file named user coordsys backup csmap to the mapping directory This backup file stores your user defined coordinate systems If you accidentally remove or overwrite your user defined coordinate systems you can re import them from this backup file using the Import user defined Coordinate System command Localization Site Calibration Further coordinate transformations can be accomplished with the use of the Local Transformation function of FieldGenius For localizing on a user defined coordinate system see the GPS Site Cal ibration section below These settings are stored in your project s ini file allowing you to easily use different coordinate sys tems for different projects Additional Grid Shift Files and Geoids Additional grid shift files or geoids can be downloaded from the MicroSurvey helpdesk 143 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 World Geoid models we support can be found here World grid shift files we support can be found here Older FieldGenius Mapping Files Many of the horizontal datums and vertical geoid models require the use of grid files for coordinate computations A desktop application has been provided with FieldGenius to extract user defined areas from the original files to create smaller more manageable files for the data collector See the topic on Datum Grid Editor for more info
487. u can input the Key Code you received from MicroSurvey You will see an area that will show you the status of your license including any modules that you cur rently have licensed If you want to use FieldGenius in demo mode press the Run Demo Mode but ton Please refer to the Registration amp Demo Mode topic for further information 340 Target Manager MapView Target Manager The Target Manager is a place where you can manage your EDM electronic distance measurement targets You can create edit copy and delete targets The Target Manager is divided into 2 sections Backsight and Foresight Note Leica users should refer to the Leica version of the Target Manager topic GeoMax users should refer to ths GeoMax version of the Target Manager topic Target Manager Backsight Use the Backsight screen to define your backsight target and enter a backsight target height Target Manager 5 o Target Default Prism Target Height 2 000m Er EDM Mode IR Standard Prism Constant 0 0mm CA OK Target List Default Settings X Cancel Target Use this field to select a backsight target from the Target List Target Height Enter the height of your target here Press the Set Default Height button 22 Ito assign the default height to this Target Height field The default height is defined in the Default Settings screen 341 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 EDM Mode Use this field to select the EDM mode yo
488. u create This file can be read into Excel which will allow you to format it and print it The records stored during staking follow the RW5 format so cut sheet records can be created using software pack ages that support this format Point Stake Format If you ve staked points using the Stake Point command you will be able to create a stake point cut sheet report 291 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 tr 5005 ojsoo7202 s003 499 100 202 ol OIGRD_ Design Pnt 17 19 5006 5006 076 5001161 100 119 0 007 OIGRD_ Design Pnt 19 ao sor 8008 935 4998 831 100 061 0 007 OJGRD Design Pnt 20 JASPH Design Pnt 31 LM80 Format This option will format the cut sheet in the LM 80 format Offset Stakes Format If you ve staked points using the stake alignment command you can create a cut sheet report for your Station and offset stakes o ifler 1002 100 1662 100 1665 0 01 00 L 1 000 Left 0984 100 0624 100 0619 0 02 00 L 1 000 p 2fPight 1 005 100 0622 100 0619 0 02 00 R 1 000 Slope Stake Format If you ve staked points using the slope stake alignment command you can create a cut sheet report for your slope stakes Station Offset Cut Fill Design Offset Pt Actual Design Ahead On HD to VD to Bete band Observed Description Direction Slope Length Name El El Station Hinge Pt Hinge Pt Line Line Slope P 12fter Cut 1 00 1 WA 81 99 984 100 24 0 032 1 011 0 968 2 011 0 9
489. u re not connecting anything to FieldGenius and also don t need to manually enter any shot information With this mode the instrument toolbar will not be displayed in the map screen Make and Model Settings FieldGenius includes instrument and GNSS drivers for most popular brands This list of supported hardware is constantly changing and for a complete list of supported hardware please visit the fol lowing webage http www microsurvey com products fieldgenius hardware_table php 372 Total Station Reference Total Station Profile Main Menu Settings Instrument Selection Total Station Edit This screen will help you configure your total stating settings such as the make and model of instru ment you plan on using and set any desired parameters you may need to use with your instrument This option will only be available if you specified Total Station in the Instrument Selection screen and then Edit a profile Total Station Profile amp o Model and Communication Target Manager EDM Settings Tolerance Settings Search Settings X Close Model and Communication This allows you to specify the make and model of instrument that will be connected to FieldGenius You can also specify the communication settings such as baud rate and com port See the Model and Communication topic for more information Target Manager This allows you to create copy and delete targets in FieldGenius You can define a unique backsig
490. u to review it in an easy to read grid For reference on the different raw file record types that FieldGenius uses you can refer to the Raw File Record Types topic for more information w File Editor m 12 nsert LS Insert Note Append Note Recot Record Record Instrument Selected Total Station Demo 5 0P112 FP282 4R337 46110 2E92 45300 5D22 3876 GRD S OP112 FP283 4R333 19150 2E90 54330 SD27 8679 GRD OF AR342 57230 2E90 54370 SD26 0970 OF OL343 33350 Right Angle Offset lt ii gt B Show Map Reprocess File Xx Close Edit Record edit button to start editing the record Raw File Editor 130 5P PN1029 N 710 1956 E 830 2944 EL100 0000 E ASPH YA PY3 N 0 0000 E 0 0000 L70 0000 500 000 5 OP112 FP284 4R343 33350 2E90 54370 SD26 0955 TREE To edit a record simply tap the line in the raw file that has the record you want to edit Then tap on the Save Changes Undo Changes CS CO3 ZGUTM Zones NAD83 ZNUTM83 11 1 VA PY3 N 0 0000 E 0 0000 L70 0000 500 000 SP PN1029 N 710 1956 E 830 2944 EL100 00 MO AD0 UNO SF1 000000 EC0 E00 0 4U0 y Save Changes When you press the Save Changes button you will see the Raw File Edit screen which shows you the changes that will be made when you press the Yes button Press No to cancel 215 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 After you press yes the record will be changed and we will also write the original one to the raw file as acomment and it will be p
491. u will see it automatically get converted to 328 08 feet Feet International or US Survey The symbol will be interpreted as either International Feet or US Survey Feet whichever units the current project is in For example entering 1000 will match the feet units that your project is in so it can mean either 1000 International Feet or 1000 US Survey Feet If your project is in meters then the symbol is interpreted as International Feet 44 Getting Started Fractional Feet When entering distances in a fractional format use a symbol or a space between the feet and inches values to separate them An symbol is not required For example you can enter 10 6 or 10 6 which both mean 10 6 You can enter fractional inches by placing a space between the whole and fractional inches and using a symbol in the fraction For example 10 6 1 2 or 10 6 1 2 both mean 10 6 5 You can also enter decimal values such as 10 5 to mean 10 6 or 10 6 5 or just 10 6 5 to mean 10 6 Y International Feet You can specify that a distance is in International Feet by entering ft after the value for example 1000ft means 1000 International Feet US Survey Feet You can specify that a distance is in US Survey Feet by entering usft or ftus after the value for example 1000usft and 1000ftus both mean 1000 US Survey Feet Distance Entry Examples User Entered Value Interpreted As Result always matches project units 1000 23 1
492. u would like to use You will only be able to select an EDM mode that corresponds to your target type Prism Constant This field will display whatever prism constant that you entered for the selected target OK This records the settings you have just made closes the Target Manager and returns you to the MapView Target List Press this button to access the Target List The Target List consists of user defined and default instru ment targets Here you can create copy edit and delete targets Default Settings Press this button to access the Default Settings screen This is where you define the default target heights Cancel Press this button to discard any changed made to the Backsight dialog and returns you to the MapView Target Manager Foresight Use the Foresight screen to select the foresight target and enter a target height Target Manager se A Backsight Target Default Prism Target Height 2 000m lt ata ET e EDM Mode IR Standard Prism Constant 0 0mm CA OK Target List Default Settings X Cancel 342 Target Use this field to select a foresight target Target Height Enter the height of your foresight target here Press the Set Default Height button cz to assign the default target height to this Target Height field The default height is defined in the Default Settings screen EDM Mode Use this field to select the EDM mode you would like to use Typically you will want to selec
493. ual catch point that was staked HT 0 00 Staking Results 12309 Cut Slope a Design 2 0000 Observed 2 0045 Station Design 4 00 00 mW Observed 4 00 00 Hinge Point HD 4 01 Cut 1 00 Center Line HD 24 01 Save jor Raw Save Raw Data x Cancel When you store the point you will see that the description that is auto generated for the point will be similar to the following example REF CP 4 00 00 R 24 00 Records written to raw file Following are the records that are written to the raw file when you store a point If you have the Store Staked Point toggle turned off in the stake settings screen you will see that no SP record is recorded as no point was stored in the database SP PN5004 N 5007 7522 E 5001 5139 EL100 1445 CP 0 06 00 L 1 000 l 515 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 SL ST6 000 0D2 EL100 144 GD100 144 AS 10 002 HHO 498 VHO 501 HC1 498 VCO 501 CF0 DS1 000000 0B0 994169 sk OP101 FP5004 AR353 45220 ZE90 23420 SD13 9200 CP 0 06 00 L 1 000 sp PN82 N 5007 2194 E 5002 2307 EL102 2842 REF CP 0 06 00 L 2 000 SR ST6 000 OD2 EL102 284 GD100 144 AS 10 002 HH2 390 VHO 501 HC2 387 VC0 501 CF0 DS1 000000 OB0 994169 OL1 000 DE PNCP Setback N 5007 078 E 5002 253 EL100 144 SD ND 0 141 ED0 022 LD 2 140 Sk OP101 FP82 AR351 10340 ZE82 00000 SD14 6850 REF CP 0 06 00 L 2 000 516 Connecting to Computer CON
494. um Station 0 00 000 125 000 4 82 143 146 429 8 00 000 130 000 Add Element Sta Check Unsymmetrical Parabolic Curve Element This option allows you to enter an unequal tangent vertical parabolic curve As a minimum you need to know the PVI Station PVI Elevation Curve Length In and Curve Length Out for your vertical curve Furthermore if this is a new profile you need to define a PVI point before the vertical curve as well as define a PVI Parabolic or Unsymmetrical Parabolic curve after the vertical curve Elements are needed before and after the vertical curve element so the profile editor can calculate the tangents Length Len Out 80 00 000 757 240 743 240 2 0000 400 00 600 00 100 00 764 040 1 6000 Sta Check High Low In the example you will see that a PVI was established for the beginning of the vertical profile Then the PVI for the unsymmetrical vertical curve was defined as well as another PVI element You will also notice that if you click an Unsym element its location will be displayed in the display area 487 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Station Check You can also do a station check on an unsymmetrical vertical curve Simply press the Sta Check but ton and enter the station you would like to compute an elevation for High Low Calculation With all vertical curves the high or low point can be computed For example if we use the High Low button to compute this information you
495. upy point having this new averaged elev ation This computed observation is written to the raw file as a new TR record overriding the previous TR record to the occupy point 156 Survey Methods Menu Plate Setting If your instrument supports uploading of angles the Set To Direction and Set To Zero options will be available to you If it doesn t support this then these options will be grayed out These functions can be used to help you set your backsight plate angles on your instrument Do Not Modify With this option selected the plate reading on the instrument will not be modified by FieldGenius You will see the current plate reading displayed beside the pull down list Set To Direction If your instrument supports uploading of angles the Set To Direction option will be available to you If it doesn t support this it will be grayed out Beside the pull down list you will see the direction field which will contain a value based on two factors 1 If you specified a points for the occupy and backsight points you will see the computed inversed direction 2 If you specified a setup point and a direction to the backsight you will see the direction that you previously entered When you press the Accept button FieldGenius will upload the angle to your instrument and set it as the current plate reading When you Accept the setup this value will be used as the backsight plate reading in the raw file Set To Zero If you
496. ur office or ina classroom situation where facilities and numbers allow MicroSurvey has training staff that will travel to almost anywhere and provide you with the professional skills you require to operate your MicroSurvey program Please feel free to call and ask for a quotation or inquire about potential classroom situations Your local dealer may also be able to setup or arrange a training session for you Contact our head office for more information about training 10 MicroSurvey Contact Information Corporate Head Office MicroSurvey Software Inc 205 3500 Carrington Road Westbank BC V4T 3C1 Canada Office Hours 8 00 am to 5 00 pm Pacific Time Monday to Friday except holidays Sales amp Technical Support 1 800 668 3312 International Voice 1 250 707 0000 Fax 250 707 0150 Internet Website www microsurvey com Support Helpdesk www microsurvey com helpdesk General Information E Mail info microsurvey com 11 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 12 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS MicroSurvey End User License Agreement occ 22222 eee 3 Technical Support 2 2 2 2 2222 ns 10 MicroSurvey Contact Information 00 0000222 c cece cece e cece cece cece cece cece cece ceceeeeeeees 11 Table of Contents _ 2 22222 eee 13 Getting Started nociva ltda darian 25 Introduction 0000 ae 25 Hardware Requirements 22222 coco ccoo 25 Installing FieldGenius 2 22 2 22222 cnn cnc c
497. ure List File Use this to select a feature list that you want to use with the project for collecting GIS point attrib utes Select Raw Data File This indicates the name of the raw file that is going to be used You can select a different one by pressing the button and either creating a new raw file or choosing the one to open The Encrypted option indicates whether or not this raw file is encrypted You can only change this option when creating a new project once set this option can not be undone Encrypting the raw file ensures that users can not accidentally or intentionally edit their raw files with a text editor or other software At this time no other applications besides FieldGenius 7 or newer and MicroSurvey CAD 2014 or newer can read an encrypted raw file Previous versions of MicroSurvey CAD inCAD and FieldGenius will not be able to read FieldGenius encrypted raw files Modify Project Information This option will take you directly to the Project Information screen where you can enter notes about the project Please see the Project Information topic for further information Quick Start Open Existing Project Start FieldGenius by running the icon contained either in your Start Menu or on the Desktop of your data collector If you start FieldGenius in demo mode the first screen you will see is the About screen where you can enter a registration code to license your copy of FieldGenius Press the Run Demo Mo
498. uted for the check shot point Check Point Identifier 5 Description Delta Northing 0 01 Delta Easting 0 01 Delta Elevation 4 92 Delta Horizontal 0 02 Observed Point Northing 1044 05 Easting 952 20 N Elevation 100 00 y Store Point Xx Close The deltas that are displayed are computed by subtracting the shot coordinates from the known coordinates In other works if you add the deltas to the shot point coordinates you will end up at the known point Store Point Pressing this will exit the function and write several notes to the raw file summarizing your check shot and allow you to store the shot using the Store Edit Point screen 174 Survey Methods Menu Check Point Check Point Check Point dNorthing 4 59 ID 110 d Check Point dEasting 1 82 d d I ie Check Point dElevation 4 96 tes Check Point dHorizontal 4 94 ES Observed Values HA 45 00 00 0 VA 90 00 00 0 SD 23 00 HR 5 00 ES Observed Point Northing 5016 26 thes Observed Point Easting 5016 26 t Elevation 95 00 Observed Poin This will exit the check shot function and not write anything to the raw file or storing a new point Check Backsight Main Menu Survey Methods Check Backsight Use this to check your backsight FieldGenius will compare your newly measured value to the one that was stored for your current setup You will be able to review difference and option
499. ve information for an arc defined by three points along the arc Function Start the inverse command and make sure the 3 Pt Arc button is turned on 2 Enter or choose the starting point for the arc in the Start field and press your enter key to con tinue on to the next point 3 Enter or choose the point that falls on the arc in the Arc field and press your enter key to con tinue on to the next point 4 Enter or choose the end point for the arc in the End field and press your enter key to compute an answer 5 The inverse information will be displayed in the results toolbar Offset Intersection Main Menu Calculations Offset Intersection Use this function to compute a point at specified offsets from an implied bearing bearing intersection calculated from two existing points as shown passsssasssasssas 1 On Pnt Angle Dir Offset y 1 o0 00 00 5 000m o x 2 270 00 00 5 000m Xx When you start the command you will see the offset intersection toolbar appear towards the bottom of the main interface Use the point chooser to select the points that you want to use to define your dir ections Offsets are computed positive to the right and negative to the left looking in the direction of 245 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 the bearing you entered You can use angle and distance recall features to help you compute your answer Function 1 Use the point chooser to select a point or manually type one in t
500. ve nothing You will be automatically returned to the Coordinate System Settings dialog Add Predefined System When the Add Predefined button is selected you will be able to select an existing coordinate system from the mapping database 438 Add Predefined System Ss Group UTM Zones NAD83 System UTM83 11 Projection NAD83 UTM Zone 11 North Meter Datum North American Datum of 1983 Ellipsoid Geodetic Reference System of 1980 G B o Group and System Options Coordinate systems are grouped into countries or mapping systems Select the country or system that you are surveying in and then choose the coordinate system in the System drop down list Information Section This section below the System field displays the projection datum and ellipsoid information related to this coordinate system Ok Button This will add the selected coordinate system to the favourites list Cancel Button This will cancel without saving User returned back to the Select Coordinate System dialog New Edit user defined System From this dialog you will either create a brand new coordinate system or edit an existing one you pre viously saved 439 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 New User Defined System Es System Name Description Ellipsoid Parameters Equitorial Radius a Polar Radius b Inverse Flattening 1 f Invalid Datum Parameters Datum Type lt Select Type gt
501. w Line after the third shot and the arc is complete 4 We are going to connect a three point arc to the E ASPH 3 figure Since we are shooting the mid point of the arc you need to turn on the three point arc toggle 99 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 fe i AE EJASPH 3 m sE ID z ia EJASPH After you take the measurement you will see the mid point drawn on the screen Since compound curves are not allowed you will see that the three point arc toggle is disabled Once you take a shot to define the end of the arc it will become enabled again on EJASPH 3 mE pp M gt Ba EJASPH Once you finish measuring the third shot you will see the arc drawn in the map 100 Points Lines Descriptions Next ID an 07 a E ASPH Tip Multiple three point arcs can be connected in series if needed Splines Curvy Figures Figures can contain splines Splines are best fit arcs that are forced to go through the points that define the figure O Melol Splines can be attached to straight or three point arc segments Ky To draw a spline simply choose the spline toggle 199 me pT N T 6 e re r a 527 Pay Next ID mayo Else Changing Active Lines to Curvy Lines Gl 101 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Any Active Line series figure can be changed from a series of straight segments to a best fit curvy line Select the figure in the drawing to open the line
502. w Tool Convert Line to Spline This will turn an existing figure that is comprised of straight lines into a curvy line and vice versa Offset Tool Use this to open the offset tool Stake Figure Use this to open the stake line command and stake the current line you have selected Coordinate DXF Data You can add coordinates to the DXF entity by pressing the Coordinate DXF Data button Information This will display the inverse information of the segment you have selected as well as the perimeter and area if it is part of a closed figure Select Line Toolbar Various commands will use this toolbar to help you select a line 90 Points Lines Descriptions Selection Mode Segment Information Source User Figure Segment v Start Pnt 11 Switch Directi End Pnt 14 Length 50 303 Y OK 9 Cancel Whichever Selection Mode you use the selected line will be highlighted in red in the map screen along with a direction indicator If necessary you can press the Switch Direction button to reverse the start and end of the selected line Press OK to accept the selected line and proceed to the next step Selection Mode Figure DXF Pick this mode to select an existing figure or DXF entity by selecting the desired figure from the map screen You can select any of the following e Figures containing lines and or arcs but not curvey splines e DXF lines arcs and or polylines but not splines splined polylines or fitted polyl
503. will return you to the Layer Manager screen Image Settings File 82e 082 029 jpg Size 5992 x 4732 Opacity NW Corner Northing 5523082 875m Easting 310094 125m SE Corner Northing 5521899 875m Easting 311592 125m Xx Close Main Menu Data Manager Surfaces FieldGenius allows you to display a 3D surface representation of the points and lines in your project This is done by turning on the Point Database surface 304 Data Manager Menu HT 04 HT 00m lt DTM Files You can import surface information into FieldGenius Currently you can import a surface from an XML or QSB file LandXML Surface FieldGenius can import surface definitions from XML data sets These surfaces can be used to dis play a TIN shaded surface or contours on the screen The surface can also be used to perform real time DTM staking To import a LandXML file go to Map Data Layers and use the Add Filecommand Please see the LandXML Import topic for more information QSB Surface Surfaces created and saved in MicroSurvey CAD or inCAD desktop products will have a QSB exten sion These QSB files can be imported into FieldGenius and used to display a TIN shaded surface or contours on the screen The surface can also be used to perform real time DTM staking To import a QSB file use the Load button at the bottom of the Surface Manager screen Please see the DTM Surface File Import QSB topic for more information DTM Surface
504. will scan your raw file and find all EP records and export the cor responding GS or GK point that was stored in the database This option is only available for export 1D Northing Y or Easting X Easting X or Northing Y Elevation Latitude in Degrees Minutes Seconds Longitude in Degrees Minutes Seconds Idescription GD 1 with Header Same as the GD 1 format but the first row in the file is ignored More about the Extended Format If you import a FieldGenius extended file format ASCII file we will create EP and GS records in the raw file Also the coordinates will be imported and stored in the database Importing this type of file is 326 Import Export Menu useful for seeding points when using the OmniStar GPS system There is more detailed information about the extended format in the ASCII Coordinate File Import topic DXF File Import Main Menu Data Manager Map Data Layers Add File Use this function to import CAD DXF files into a FieldGenius project FieldGenius supports all Point nodes Lines Arcs Polylines Text and 3D Faces in the DXF file FieldGenius does not support Blocks or any other entities not mentioned above in the DXF file All items from the DXF file will be drawn in their respective layers as defined in the DXF file These layers may be toggled on and off using FieldGenius s layer manager Importing Steps From the main menu press the Data Manager button then the Map Da
505. will see the low point is at station 86 70 370 at an elevation of 747 536 rofile Profile 1 Extremum Station 80 00 000 757 240 86 70 370 747 536 100 00 000 764 040 Delete Sta Check Manual Entry Template Main Menu Roads Manager Edit Road Template You can define templates that will be used to create a cross section along your alignment You can create new templates and edit existing ones you ve created Each template can have unlimited zones right or left of the centerline Each template can contain zone modifiers that can help you define sections that need widening or superelevation When you create a new template you will be asked for a template name After you enter the name you will see the Template editor 488 Roads Template Template 2 130 Zone View 7 view Zone Modifiers e Left f A A C Right Add Zones Many software programs refer to templates as having segments in FieldGenius they are referred to as zones Zones contain horizontal and vertical components and these zones are located on the right or left of the template centerline You first need to define what side of the centerline your zone belongs to Left or Right Once you do that you can choose the Add Zone command from the Commands button When you select the add zone command you will see your first zone item appear in the grid area You need to enter a horizontal width distance and then specify how you will be
506. wse to and select the file you want to import Once selected FieldGenius will check to make sure a user defined system doesn t already exist and if one does you will be asked if you want to skip importing it or overwrite the existing coordinate system Backups FieldGenius automatically creates a backup when you add or edit user defined coordinate systems If you forgot to save your user defined coordinate systems you may be able to restore them using a backup Please see the Coordinate System topic for more details Geoid Models Geoid models are used by FieldGenius to convert ellipsoid heights to orthometric heights FieldGenius will by default use ellipsoid heights but you can define a geoid model to be used instead if orthometric heights are desired Geoid models are not installed by default and must be downloaded from the MicroSurvey website Geoid models are available for most regions around the world Download Geoid Files Canadian Geoid Models http www microsurvey com helpdesk2 index php Knowledgebase Article View 490 0 canadian geoid models download United States Geoid Models http www microsurvey com helpdesk2 index php Knowledgebase Article View 1040 0 usa geoid models World Geoid Models http www microsurvey com helpdesk2 index php Knowledgebase Article View 479 0 world geoid models download 448 Copy Geoid Files to Data Collector Once you download the required geoid file for your
507. yboard should leave this set to Single Click and users of devices without a keyboard should set this to Double Click Setting this to Off dis ables both the keypad and any other commands that may be started directly from the extended edit field such as the Point Chooser or Inverse Tool so that edit fields can only be used for typing values from your physical keypad Distance Entry amp Recall Distance Entry You can customize FieldGenius to work with the direction input of your choice See the Units amp Scale topic for details The number you enter is assumed to be in the same units as your project unless a unit modifier is spe cified see below So 5 25 would be interpreted as 5 25 feet or 5 25 meters depending on your pro ject s unit setting Distance Recall You can recall the distance between two points by inputting in the form lt firstID gt lt otherlID gt Example 26 84 will be recognized as the distance computed between points 26 and 84 The dis tance will be returned in whichever format your units settings is set to Unit Modifiers Recognition of the unit symbols m ft usft ftus are supported and can be used to override the pro ject s unit settings Meters You can specify that a distance is in meters by entering m after the value for example 100m means 100 Meters even if your project is in Feet Therefore if your project is in US Feet and you enter 100 00m in a distance field yo
508. ync is inactive but will change to green when your device is connected MicroSurvey Transfer We provide a free transfer tool with FieldGenius to help you copy projects to and from your data col lector The program is called MicroSurvey Transfer and it can be download from our website or installed directly off of the CD provided with FieldGenius Once installed all you need is to connect your handheld computer to your desktop computer via an ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center connection ActiveSync is a Microsoft Windows product which establishes a serial or USB connection between your data collector and your com puter Once connected you can start the MicroSurvey Transfer program 521 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 A MicroSurvey Transfer File View Options Help D Computer Data Collector E Default download Default upload Default AutoMAP E Projects folder C Program Files MicroSurvey MSCAD200555yncwizards El C_Drive MicroSurvey FieldGenius FG Projects lt gt Date Modified jfi 12 13 2005 4 1 FG Sample 12 8 2005 6 56 Ed EVR3 csv 7 19 2005 5 10 O Eh survey csv 6 30 2004 8 41 AutoMAP check lt gt lt Launch p OK Hel OK Hop Create file The program has been designed to streamline the transfer of projects and files back and forth between you data collector and computer For more details please refer to the Help file included with the MicroSu
509. you need to make sure you have the New Description Prompt toggle turned on in the Options menu 207 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 List Button Press this to open the AutoMap Library screen You will be able to choose the description that will be assigned to the point Northing Easting Elevation Input your coordinate values in these fields when manually creating a new point using the add point function If measuring a point you can not manually enter or edit coordinates Note Button Press this to enter a note or record an audio note for the point See the Notes topic for more inform ation Prism Hgt Height GPS Hgt Height When storing a point measured by a total station you can set the Prism Height When storing a point measured by a GPS receiver you can set the true or measured Antenna Height Review Measurement Button This button is available when you have taken a measurement and can be used to review the distance and angles measured GIS Attributes Button If you loaded a feature list then this button will be enabled It allows you to access the your feature list so you can edit feature attributes Store Pnt point Button Press this to store the measured point Store SS side shot Button Press this to store the point as a side shot You would typically use this when not measuring traverse points You will not see this button when measuring with GPS Store TR traverse Button Press this to store the
510. you re measuring to some materials require an offset be applied even though you re using a reflectorless EDM mode For example some reflective tapes used for these types of measurement require a small offset be applied In this case you can specify this offset and FieldGenius will automatically apply it during reflectorless measurements Note If you specify a prism offset here you need to make sure the prism offsets are set to zero on your instrument Otherwise a double offset could be applied to your measurement which will produce incorrect answers Set Instrument to zero If this is turned on a prism constant of zero will be uploaded to your instrument The offsets specified in the foresight backsight and RL fields will be applied to the measurements when received by FieldGenius Turn this off if you don t want FieldGenius to modify your instrument s prism offset Not all instruments support this feature When you connect your instrument to FieldGenius special notes are recorded in the raw file regarding prism offsets If you have the Set Instrument toggle turned on and your instrument supports this feature FieldGenius will set your instrument s prism offset to zero so no correction will be applied to the meas urement Then once FieldGenius receives this uncorrected measurement it will use the values you specified in the prism offset fields and adjust the distance accordingly For example if you specified an offset of 30mm FieldGen
511. you will see the Start Point field automatically advance for you 211 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 Direction Specify the direction Azimuth or Bearing of the tangent in to the arc segment you wish to draw This will default to either the direction of the previous line segment or the tangent out of the previous arc segment so as long as your arc is tangential to the previous segment you will not need to change this value Angle Chord Length Arc Length Specify one of the three available methods to define your arc e Angle Enter the interior delta angle of the arc e Chord Enter the chord length of the arc e Arc Enter the arc length of the arc Radius Specify the radius to define your arc Clockwise Counter Clockwise Arrows Use the Right Left arrow buttons to define whether the arc rotates clockwise or counter clockwise Store After you have defined the segment to add press this to store the new end and radial points and draw the arc segment into your project Store This does the same as the Store button but you will see the Store Edit Point screen Use this to con firm or view the coordinates or to specify a description Point by Arc Mode This is the same as the Arc mode except that when you press Store or Store it will only store the points without drawing the arc segment Connect Points Mode This mode lets you draw lines arcs by connecting points that already exist in your project 212 Surv
512. ystem So for a GeoMax round prism the true zero constant is 34 4mm 34 4 34 4 0 0 The GeoMax total station is expecting a GeoMax constant Please note on the GeoMax Zoom80 total station in the Manage Reflectors dialog the column says Add constant but in this case they are treating the additive constant as a GeoMax constant and actually want the GeoMax constant So for example Say you are using a non GeoMax prism with a published prism constant of 30mm that has been defined in the true zero system then you would enter that value into the GeoMax for mula as 30mm true zero constant 34 4mm 64 4mm GeoMax constant You would enter 64 4mm as the GeoMax constant It is strongly recommended that you test your use of prism constants on a known baseline to be sure your non GeoMax prism is in the true zero prism system Save Press this button to store your target edits Targets are stored to the Settings xml file and you are returned to the Target List screen Cancel Press this buton to cancel creating a new target You will be returned to the Target List screen Edit GeoMax Instrument Targets MapView Target Manager Target List Edit Use this option to edit an existing user defined target or edit a copy of a GeoMax instrument target You will also see this display after you copy an existing target GeoMax uses a different prism offset 357 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 method than other manufacturers and you
513. zimuth at Projection Center Mercator Cylindrical Projection with Standard Parallel Mercator Cylindrical Projection with Scale Reduction Lambert Azimuthal Equal Area Lambert Azimuthal Equidistant Miller Cylindrical Oblique Sterographic Polar Sterographic Sinusoidal Projection Optionally Interrupted Equidistant Cylindrical 441 MicroSurvey FieldGenius 7 o Cassini o Robinson Cylindrical o Bonne Pseidoconical o Krovac Oblique Conformal Conic Czechoslovokia Typical projection parameters for most cases are o Scale Factor o Central Meridian o Origin Latitude o Origin Longitude o False Northing o False Easting Ok Button This will save the user defined parameters to the CS MAP coordinate system database files coord sys datum and ellipsoid Cancel Button This will cancel the current operation and nothing will be saved Automatic Backup Whenever you add or edit a user defined coordinate system FieldGenius will automatically create and save your parameters to a file named user coordsys backup csmap to the mapping directory This backup file stores your user defined coordinate systems If you accidentally remove or overwrite your user defined coordinate systems you can re import them from this backup file using the Import user defined Coordinate System command Localization Site Calibration Further coordinate transformations can be accomplished with the use of the Local Transformation function of Fiel

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Contrat d`assurances 2011  ダウンロード  Bedienungsanleitung D & GB  Realtime PCR Master Mix  スライドヒンジ取扱注意書  Vigo VG01023CH Installation Guide    C® - XX.Y - Miejskie słuchawki generacji Y  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file